FIDIA C CLASS

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
V3.8 Version

MDO1680

Edition – 07/2007
The descriptions, examples and illustrations contained in this manual provide a general indication of the installation and use of
the FIDIA Numerical Controls.
For the information contained in this manual to be used correctly, a knowledge is required of both the basic operating modes of
the Fidia control and the specific characteristics of the machine tool on which the Fidia NC is installed.
Fidia reserves the right to modify its hardware and software products without prior notice and shall in no way be held
responsible for any direct or indirect damage caused by the use of its products or by any inaccuracy of the documentation
supplied.
No information shall be divulged to third parties, and this manual shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior
written permission of FIDIA S.p.A.

FIDIA S.p.A. San Mauro Torinese Italy

Copyright © Edition July 2007
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 BASIC STEPS FOR SW INSTALLATION.............................................. 1-1

1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 LOADING THE CNC SOFTWARE ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.4 SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 1-1
1.4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS PRIOR TO OPERATING THE MACHINE TOOL ....................................................1-1
1.4.2 SETTING PARAMETERS WITH THE MACHINE TOOL CONTROLLED BY THE CNC ..................................1-2
1.5 PROCEDURES FOR PARAMETER MODIFYING OR COMMAND ISSUING .............................. 1-2
1.6 "SERVICE" AREA AND "MAINT" PARAMETERS....................................................................... 1-2
1.6.1 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE AREA .................................................................................................................1-3
1.7 INIPAR.SET FILE .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.8 MEASURING UNITS...................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.9 SAVE AND RESTORE OF THE MACHINE PARAMETERS......................................................... 1-4
1.10 LOCATION AND BACKUP OF CONFIGURATION FILES ........................................................... 1-5
1.10.1 AUTOMATIC SAVE..........................................................................................................................................1-5
1.11 REEXECUTING THE INIPAR.SET FILE ....................................................................................... 1-5
1.12 DISPLAY I/O BOARDS ................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.13 TCP/IP DIAGNOSTIC .................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.14 SELECTING AUTOMATIC MODE................................................................................................. 1-6
1.15 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ...................................................................................................... 1-6
1.15.1 TESTING EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................1-6
1.15.2 ABSOLUTE ZERO SEARCH IN NON CODED TRANSDUCERS ...................................................................1-7
1.15.3 DEFINITION AND CHECKING OF SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCHES ...............................................................1-7

2 VARIOUS PARAMETERS...................................................................... 2-1

2.1 PARAMETERS FOR SELECTING USER FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 FIXED CYCLES .................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 LIMITING SPINDLE SPEED ..............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.3 VALUES WITHOUT A DECIMAL POINT...........................................................................................................2-1
2.1.4 DEACTIVATING ROTATION OF THE REFERENCE SYSTEM........................................................................2-2
2.1.5 AUTOMATIC MODE WITH PROFIBUS ............................................................................................................2-2
2.1.6 G02, G03, G22, G23 WITH THE Q FUNCTION AT –1 ....................................................................................2-2
2.1.7 G24 FUNCTION.................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.8 VIRCAN RESET DURING THE ZERO CYCLE .................................................................................................2-2
2.1.9 ZERO CYCLE WITH RTCP ON.........................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 INFORMATIVE PARAMETERS..................................................................................................... 2-3

3 AXIS INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 3-1

3.1 SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL AXES - POSITION LOOP......................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 FOLLOWING ERROR AND OFFSET................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 AXIS PARAMETERS..................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS ......................................................................................................................3-2

FIDIA MDO1680 I
3.2.2 SCREEN REFRESH FREQUENCY ..................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 DEFINITION OF AXIS NAMES...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 INTERACTIVE DEFINITION OF AXIS NAMES .................................................................................................3-3
3.4 END OF RUN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................... 3-3
3.5 SPEED PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.6 LOCKING LOGIC PARAMETERS ................................................................................................ 3-9
3.7 ZERO CYCLE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................... 3-12
3.8 CODED SCALES......................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.8.1 DESCRIPTION OF ZERO CYCLE WITH CODED SCALES ...........................................................................3-15
3.8.2 PARAMETERS FOR ZERO CYCLE WITH CODED INDEXED SCALES .......................................................3-15
3.9 AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS ................................................................................................ 3-16
3.10 ADDITIONAL AXIS PARAMETERS............................................................................................ 3-21
3.11 VIRTUAL AXIS INSTALLATION ................................................................................................. 3-22
3.12 HIRTH AXES INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12.1 PLC PROGRAMMING....................................................................................................................................3-23
3.12.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................................3-23
3.13 DISPLAY ONLY ADDITIONAL AXES (DA10) ............................................................................ 3-24
3.13.1 DEFINING AXIS NAMES ...............................................................................................................................3-24
3.13.2 MACHINE TOOL PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................3-24
3.13.3 READ ONLY PARAMETERS .........................................................................................................................3-25
3.14 AUXILIARY AXES PARAMETERS ............................................................................................. 3-25
3.15 SAMPLING PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................ 3-25
3.15.1 DISPLAYING LOOP FREQUENCIES AND BCT ...........................................................................................3-26
3.16 ACTIVE DAMPING PARAMETERS ............................................................................................ 3-26
3.17 VIDEO PAGES FOR LOOK-AHEAD........................................................................................... 3-27
3.18 LOOK AHEAD VERSION 1 PARAMETERS ............................................................................... 3-28
3.19 LOOK-AHEAD VERSION 2 PARAMETERS ............................................................................... 3-31
3.20 LOOK-AHEAD V3........................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.20.1 OPERATING DESCRIPTION.........................................................................................................................3-32
3.20.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM..........................................................................................................................................3-32
3.20.3 PARAMETERS...............................................................................................................................................3-33
3.20.4 FFWDJ ACCEL ..............................................................................................................................................3-33
3.21 LAHPAR_G3** TABULAR PARAMETERS FOR G301 - G310 FUNCTIONS ............................ 3-34
3.22 JM2T OPTION ............................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.23 ACTIVE TUNING ......................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.24 AUTOMATIC RELEASE ON STEPS........................................................................................... 3-35
3.24.1 AUTOMATIC RELEASE AT CRITICAL POINTS ...........................................................................................3-36
3.25 ROTATION AND/OR TRANSLATION PARAMETERS............................................................... 3-37
3.26 AXES ENABLING LOGIC ........................................................................................................... 3-37
3.26.1 SPINDLE ........................................................................................................................................................3-38
3.27 DYNAMIC AXIS MONITORING AND LOOK AHEAD ................................................................. 3-39

4 SPINDLE INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 4-1

4.1 CHECKING AND SETTING THE SPINDLE .................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 RANGE CHANGE (FOR SPINDLE IN DC ONLY) .............................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 SPINDLE START AND STOP (FOR SPINDLE IN AC OR DC) .........................................................................4-1
4.1.3 VERIFYING THE NUMBER OF SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS (FOR SPINDLE IN DC ONLY).............................4-1

II MDO1680 FIDIA
4.2 SPINDLE PARAMETERS.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 DIGITAL TRANSDUCER SPINDLE INSTALLATION ................................................................... 4-8
4.4 ZERO CYCLE FOR SPINDLES WITHOUT INDEXES ................................................................ 4-11
4.4.1 ZERO SEARCH IN ONE DIRECTION .............................................................................................................4-11
4.4.2 ZIG-ZAG ZERO SEARCH................................................................................................................................4-11
4.5 SPINDLE ENABLING LOGIC...................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 CUSTOMIZING A SECOND SPINDLE USING PLC ................................................................... 4-13

5 COPYING OPTION (PLP) ...................................................................... 5-1

5.1 PLP PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS AND DEFINITIONS .......................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 TESTING COPYING EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS............................................................................................5-1
5.2 COPYING PARAMETERS............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3 RENISHAW SP2 1 TRACER INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 5-11

6 SIEMENS DIGITAL DRIVES .................................................................. 6-1

6.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE GENERATION ................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 SETTING THE AXIS PARAMETERS IN THE INIPAR.SET FILE.................................................. 6-1
6.3 DOUBLE COUNT .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................6-2
6.3.2 COMPARING THE TWO COUNTS ...................................................................................................................6-3
6.4 ENDAT TRANSDUCERS .............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.4.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................6-3
6.4.2 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................6-4
6.4.3 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR PLC USE .............................................................................................................6-5
6.4.4 READ ONLY MAINT PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................6-5
6.4.5 ENDAT TRANSDUCERS WITH DOUBLE COUNT...........................................................................................6-5
6.4.6 PARAMETERS FOR AUXILIARY AXES AND SPINDLES................................................................................6-5
6.5 AXIS DIRECTION AND COUNT VERIFICATION.......................................................................... 6-6
6.6 PROCEDURE FOR FIRST INSTALLATION ................................................................................. 6-6
6.7 CALIBRATION PARAMETERS..................................................................................................... 6-6
6.7.1 VELOCITY LOOP PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................6-7
6.7.2 FILTER PARAMETERS .....................................................................................................................................6-7
6.7.3 CURRENT FILTERS..........................................................................................................................................6-7
6.7.4 VELOCITY FILTERS..........................................................................................................................................6-8
6.8 SET OF PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.8.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION .................................................................................................6-10
6.8.2 PARAMETERS FOR MULTIPLE SETS OF VALUES .....................................................................................6-10
6.9 DRIVE MEASUREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 6-12
6.10 MAINT PARAMETER BACK-UP................................................................................................. 6-14
6.10.1 MULTIPLE SIEMENS.PAR AND SIEMHSA.PAR FILES ...............................................................................6-15
6.11 EXAMPLE OF CALIBRATING SIEMENS DRIVES FOR AXES.................................................. 6-15
6.11.1 CALIBRATING DRIVE GAINS (Kp Ti)............................................................................................................6-15
6.11.2 SETTING THE FILTERS ................................................................................................................................6-17
6.12 AUXILIARY AXES MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES ............................................................... 6-18
6.13 SPINDLE MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES.............................................................................. 6-18
6.13.1 SPINDLE MANAGEMENT VIA PLC...............................................................................................................6-18
6.13.2 CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................................................6-18
6.14 STAR-TRIANGLE COMMUTATION............................................................................................ 6-18

FIDIA MDO1680 III

6.14.1 COMMUTATION FROM STAR TO TRIANGLE .............................................................................................6-19
6.14.2 COMMUTATION FROM TRIANGLE TO STAR .............................................................................................6-19
6.15 SPINDLE DOUBLE COUNT ........................................................................................................ 6-19
6.15.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................6-19
6.16 SECOND LIMIT OF TORQUE/POWER MOMENT ...................................................................... 6-20
6.16.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................6-20
6.16.2 ENABLING THE LOGIC .................................................................................................................................6-20
6.17 AXES MANAGED BY HSA DRIVES ........................................................................................... 6-20

7 INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES ............................................................... 7-1

7.1 INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 7-1
7.2 CNC PARAMETER SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 AUXILIARY AXES MANAGED BY INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES ...................................................................7-3
7.3 INDRAMAT AXIS DOUBLE COUNT ............................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................7-3
7.3.2 COMPARING THE TWO COUNTS ...................................................................................................................7-4
7.4 SETTING THE DRIVE PARAMETERS.......................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS AND VALUES...........................................................................................7-5
7.4.2 BASIC PARAMETERS.......................................................................................................................................7-5
7.4.3 AUTOSCALING OF COUNTINGS AND OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................7-5
7.5 ACTIVATING THE DRIVES ........................................................................................................... 7-6
7.6 DIAGNOSIS - MESSAGES AND DISPLAY .................................................................................. 7-6
7.7 DIAGNOSIS THROUGH THE SERCANS PROGRAM.................................................................. 7-6
7.8 MEASUREMENTS ON THE DRIVES ............................................................................................ 7-6
7.9 ZERO CYCLE ................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.9.1 DEBUGGING THE ZERO CYCLE .....................................................................................................................7-7
7.10 PLC PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.10.1 PLC REQUESTS FOR INDRAMAT DRIVES ...................................................................................................7-7
7.10.2 DISMOUNTING THE AXIS...............................................................................................................................7-7
7.10.3 MOUNTING THE AXIS.....................................................................................................................................7-8
7.10.4 AUTOMATIC PARKING ...................................................................................................................................7-8
7.11 REAL-TIME GENERAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS..................................................................... 7-8
7.11.1 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................7-8
7.11.2 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................................7-9
7.12 SPINDLE MANAGED BY INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES............................................................. 7-9
7.12.1 SPINDLE MANAGEMENT THROUGH PLC ....................................................................................................7-9
7.12.2 CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................................................7-10
7.12.3 ZERO WITH INDEX AND MICROSWITCH....................................................................................................7-10
7.12.4 SPINDLE WITH DOUBLE COUNT ................................................................................................................7-10

8 RTCP OPTION........................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 RTCP OPTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL INFORMATION..................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 RTCP FOR 4 AXES ...........................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 RTCP OPTION PARAMETERS (ES/TR)....................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 COMPENSATION IN RTCP OF MECHANICALLY OFFCENTERED AXES................................. 8-7
8.4 TCS - TOOL COORDINATE SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.1 TCSRTCP ENABLE IN OF PARAMETER .........................................................................................................8-9
8.4.2 TCSRTCP ENABLE IN ON PARAMETER ......................................................................................................8-10

IV MDO1680 FIDIA
8.5 USEFARANG LOGIC WITH RELEASE ...................................................................................... 8-10
8.5.1 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................................8-11

9 ROTO OPTION ....................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 PARAMETERS FOR RTCP ON TABLE........................................................................................ 9-1
9.3 WORKPIECE ALIGNMENT PARAMETERS................................................................................. 9-4
9.4 ROTARY TABLE MOUNTED ON A LINEAR AXIS....................................................................... 9-5
9.4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.2 PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.3 EXAMPLE ..........................................................................................................................................................9-6
9.5 G24 WITH ROTO PALLET ............................................................................................................ 9-7

10 BCD FUNCTION (ES/A-M-S-T) ............................................................ 10-1

10.1 BCD FUNCTIONS PARAMETERS.............................................................................................. 10-1

11 SCREW CORRECTION........................................................................ 11-1

11.1 SCREW CORRECTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL INFORMATION..................................... 11-1
11.1.1 STRUCTURE OF THE AXVCAL.SET FILE ...................................................................................................11-1
11.2 COMPENSATING THE SLIDE DROP ......................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 MIXED PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................. 11-2
11.4 CORRECTIONS ON SYNCHRONOUS AXES............................................................................. 11-3
11.5 COMPENSATING THE GANTRY AXES ..................................................................................... 11-3
11.6 COMPENSATING AUXILIARY AXES (GP10 OPTIONS) ........................................................... 11-3
11.7 ACTIVATING THE CORRECTIONS (EXECUTION OF THE AXVCAL.SET FILE) ..................... 11-3
11.8 INSTALLATION EXAMPLE......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.9 STORING DEFINITIVE DATA ..................................................................................................... 11-4
11.10 DISPLAYING CORRECTION VALUES....................................................................................... 11-5
11.11 COMPENSATION FOR NONLINEARITY DURING AXIS INVERSION....................................... 11-5
11.11.1 PROCEDURE FOR OPTIMIZING PARAMETERS ........................................................................................11-5
11.12 EXTENDED SCREW COMPENSATION ..................................................................................... 11-6
11.12.1 ERROR FILE FORMAT..................................................................................................................................11-6
11.12.2 ROTARY COMPONENTS OF THE ERROR..................................................................................................11-6
11.12.3 SQUARENESS ERROR COMPONENTS......................................................................................................11-7
11.12.4 EXAMPLE.......................................................................................................................................................11-7
11.12.5 BACKLASH ....................................................................................................................................................11-7
11.12.6 SUMMARY .....................................................................................................................................................11-8
11.12.7 USER INTERFACE ........................................................................................................................................11-8
11.12.8 MAIN PAGE....................................................................................................................................................11-8
11.12.9 PAGE FOR ROTARY COMPONENTS AND SQUARENESS ERRORS .......................................................11-8

12 HANDWHEEL AND PUSHBUTTON PANEL ....................................... 12-1

12.1 HANDWHEEL/PUSHBUTTON PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 12-1
12.2 POTENTIOMETRE PARAMETERS ............................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.1 OVERRIDE FEED POTENTIOMETRE ..........................................................................................................12-2
12.3 OVERRIDE SPDL POTENTIOMETRE ........................................................................................ 12-3
12.4 DOUBLE CONSOLE WITH I/O LUX ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5 TEST LAMPS .............................................................................................................................. 12-4
12.5.1 TESTING LAMPS MANAGED BY IO/LUX .....................................................................................................12-4

FIDIA MDO1680 V
13 GANTRY AXIS (GA/*) .......................................................................... 13-1
13.1 GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION (GA/*) - GENERAL INFORMATION........................................ 13-1
13.2 GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 GANTRY AXIS PARAMETERS................................................................................................... 13-1
13.3.1 GANTRY AXES WITH INDRAMAT DRIVES..................................................................................................13-3
13.3.2 CODED SCALES WITH GANTRY AXES.......................................................................................................13-3
13.3.3 DISPLAY ONLY PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................13-4
13.3.4 OTHER PARAMETERS .................................................................................................................................13-4
13.4 GANTRY AXES WITH TORQUE CONTROL .............................................................................. 13-4
13.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................................................13-5

14 TANDEM MOTOR (TA/*) ...................................................................... 14-1

14.1 TANDEM MOTOR INSTALLATION (TA/*) - GENERAL INFORMATION ................................... 14-1
14.2 TANDEM MOTOR PARAMETERS.............................................................................................. 14-1
14.2.1 PARAMETERS FOR DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................14-3

15 MULTIPLE AXES (MU/*) ...................................................................... 15-1

15.1 INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE AXES ....................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.1 MAINT PARAMETERS...................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.2 IDTM AND IDRBL BIT LOGICS .....................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.3 BALL SCREW CALIBRATION .......................................................................................................................15-2

16 THERMAL COMPENSATION (IA/CT).................................................. 16-1

16.1 THERMAL COMPENSATION INSTALLATION (IA/CT) - GENERAL INFORMATION............... 16-1
16.2 AXIS POSITION THERMAL COMPENSATION .......................................................................... 16-1
16.3 RTCP PIVOT THERMAL COMPENSATION ............................................................................... 16-2

17 ADAPTIVE CONTROL ......................................................................... 17-1

17.1 OMATIVE ACM ADAPTIVE CONTROL ...................................................................................... 17-2
17.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.2 PARAMETERS...............................................................................................................................................17-2

18 PLC OPTIONS...................................................................................... 18-1

18.1 ES10/AV* OPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.1.1 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................................18-1
18.2 CM10/026 OPTION ...................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.2.1 PLC PROGRAMMING....................................................................................................................................18-1
18.3 CM10/045 OPTION ...................................................................................................................... 18-1
18.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS...................................................................................................................................18-1

19 GENERAL PURPOSE COUNT ............................................................ 19-1

19.1 GENERAL PURPOSE COUNTS ................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1.1 PLC PROGRAMMING....................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................................19-1

20 MEASUREMENT CYCLES (MQR - TM10/MD) .................................... 20-1

20.1 MEASUREMENT CYCLES FOR TOUCH-TRIGGER PROBES .................................................. 20-1
20.2 TOOL DIAMETER MEASUREMENT WITH SPINDLE IN ROTATION........................................ 20-2
20.2.1 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................................20-2
20.3 PARAMETERS FOR G327 AND G357 CYCLES (TM10/MD)..................................................... 20-3

VI MDO1680 FIDIA
20.3.1 G328 CYCLE..................................................................................................................................................20-6

21 TOOL COMPENSATION (TMH)........................................................... 21-1

21.1 PARAMETERS FOR G160 CYCLES .......................................................................................... 21-1
21.2 INSTALLATION NOTES.............................................................................................................. 21-3
21.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE G160 CYCLES ..................................................................................... 21-3
21.3.1 G160H0 PRESET CYCLE FOR SENSOR .....................................................................................................21-3
21.3.2 G160H1 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE X AXIS................................................................21-4
21.3.3 G160H2 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE Y AXIS................................................................21-5
21.3.4 G160H3 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE Z AXIS ................................................................21-5

22 TOOL MEASURING SYSTEM (TMS)................................................... 22-7

22.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PARAMETERS ........................................................................... 22-7
22.2 ON/OFF FUNCTIONS.................................................................................................................. 22-9
22.3 TMS LASER FUNCTIONS......................................................................................................... 22-10
22.4 NOTES ON CYCLES 227 AND 228 .......................................................................................... 22-10
22.4.1 PRESET CYCLE 227 FOR TMS LASER .....................................................................................................22-11
22.4.2 PRESET CYCLE 227 FOR OTHER LASER DEVICES (TM10/MDL) ..........................................................22-12
22.4.3 228 PRESET CYCLE ...................................................................................................................................22-13
22.5 TMS LASER DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................................................... 22-13
22.6 236 CYCLE– MANAGEMENT BY PLC ..................................................................................... 22-14
22.7 INSTALLATION OF THE ROTO_TMS OPTION ....................................................................... 22-14
22.8 INSTALLING THE TMSR100 LASER DEVICE ......................................................................... 22-16
22.8.1 ON/OFF FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................22-16
22.8.2 MANUAL POSITIONING FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................22-16
22.8.3 MAINT PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................................22-17
22.8.4 TMSR INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................................22-17
22.8.5 SETTING PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................................22-17
22.8.6 SEARCH FOR FOCUS POINTS ..................................................................................................................22-18
22.8.7 INSTALLATION FOR TOOL MEASUREMENT CYCLES ............................................................................22-19

23 TEST PROGRAMS............................................................................... 23-1

23.1 ERCI............................................................................................................................................. 23-1
23.1.1 SOFT KEY: ERCI PARAM .............................................................................................................................23-1
23.1.2 SOFT KEY: READ..........................................................................................................................................23-2
23.1.3 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE...................................................................................................................23-2
23.1.4 SOFT KEY: EXECUTE...................................................................................................................................23-3
23.1.5 SOFT KEY: MAGNIFY ...................................................................................................................................23-4
23.1.6 SOFT KEY: REDUCE.....................................................................................................................................23-4
23.1.7 SOFT KEY: CUT ............................................................................................................................................23-4
23.1.8 SOFT KEY: CUT RESET ...............................................................................................................................23-4
23.2 ERDI............................................................................................................................................. 23-4
23.2.1 SOFT KEY: PARAMETER .............................................................................................................................23-4
23.2.2 SOFT KEY: READ..........................................................................................................................................23-5
23.2.3 SOFT KEYS: CURS1 and CURS2 => and <= ...............................................................................................23-5
23.2.4 SOFT KEY: ZOOM CURS..............................................................................................................................23-5
23.2.5 SOFT KEY: ZOOM RESET ............................................................................................................................23-5
23.2.6 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE...................................................................................................................23-5
23.2.7 SOFT KEYS: EXECUTE ERDI.......................................................................................................................23-5

FIDIA MDO1680 VII

23.3 ERRE ........................................................................................................................................... 23-6
23.3.1 SOFT KEY: ERRE PARAM ............................................................................................................................23-6
23.3.2 SOFT KEY: CURS => and <= ........................................................................................................................23-7
23.3.3 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE...................................................................................................................23-7
23.3.4 SOFT KEY: EXECUTE ERRE........................................................................................................................23-7
23.4 PART PROGRAM TEST.............................................................................................................. 23-7
23.4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS ..............................................................................................................................23-8
23.4.2 EXECUTION TEST ........................................................................................................................................23-8
23.4.3 DISPLAYING PREVIOUSLY EXECUTED TEST ...........................................................................................23-8
23.5 PRINTOUT................................................................................................................................... 23-8

24 OSCILLOSCOPE.................................................................................. 24-1
24.1 FEATURES .................................................................................................................................. 24-1
24.2 OSCILLOSCOPE BASIC CONCEPTS........................................................................................ 24-2
24.2.1 DATA TYPES .................................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.2 TRACKS AND SIGNALS................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.3 DATA FILES (.dat)..........................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.4 SESSION FILES (.ses)...................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.5 OVERLAP.......................................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.6 TRIGGER .......................................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2.7 SAMPLE TIME ...............................................................................................................................................24-3
24.2.8 TIME/DIVISION ..............................................................................................................................................24-3
24.2.9 VALUE/DIVISION ...........................................................................................................................................24-3
24.2.10 OFFSET .........................................................................................................................................................24-3
24.3 USER INTERFACE...................................................................................................................... 24-3
24.3.1 CURRENT STATUS WINDOW ......................................................................................................................24-3
24.4 MODE .......................................................................................................................................... 24-3
24.5 SESSION (EASY MODE = DEFAULT MODE) ............................................................................ 24-4
24.6 SESSION (ADVANCED MODE WITHOUT OPERATIONS)........................................................ 24-4
24.7 SESSION (ADVANCED MODE WITH OPERATIONS) ............................................................... 24-5
24.8 RECORD...................................................................................................................................... 24-6
24.9 PLAY BACK ................................................................................................................................ 24-6
24.10 WRITE FILE (ASCII OUTPUT) .................................................................................................... 24-7
24.10.1 RECORDING AN ISO FILE IN XYZH FORMAT ............................................................................................24-7
24.11 EXAMPLES ................................................................................................................................. 24-7
24.11.1 NOT ADVANCED MODE ...............................................................................................................................24-7
24.11.2 ADVANCED MODE (WITHOUT OPERATIONS) ...........................................................................................24-7
24.11.3 ADVANCED MODE (WITH OPERATIONS)...................................................................................................24-8
24.12 FLOW CHART ............................................................................................................................. 24-9
24.13 CUSTOMIZATION ....................................................................................................................... 24-9

25 EXTENDED TOOL TABLE................................................................... 25-1

25.1 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION – INTRODUCTION.................................................... 25-1
25.2 CNC PARAMETERS FOR THE EXTENDED TOOL TABLE ...................................................... 25-1
25.3 TOOL TABLE MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................... 25-2
25.3.1 COMMANDS ..................................................................................................................................................25-2
25.4 CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................... 25-3
25.5 PAGE CONFIGURATION FOR TOOL IN USE............................................................................ 25-5

VIII MDO1680 FIDIA

25.6 EXECUTING SCRIPT IN PYTHON.............................................................................................. 25-7
25.6.1 EXECUTING SCRIPT WHEN INSERTING A DATA ITEM ............................................................................25-7
25.6.2 PLC COMMAND FOR EXECUTING SCRIPT................................................................................................25-7
25.7 A CONCISE LIST OF FEATURES .............................................................................................. 25-8

26 UPS and FIDIASHUTDOWN ................................................................ 26-9

26.1 INSTALLING THE UPS SOFTWARE.......................................................................................... 26-9
26.2 FidiaShutDown APPLICATION ................................................................................................ 26-10

27 ACCELEROMETER – FidiaVM............................................................ 27-1

27.1 CONFIGURING THE ACCELEROMETER .................................................................................. 27-1
27.1.1 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................................27-2
27.2 SNAPSHOT FILE......................................................................................................................... 27-3

28 USER INTERFACE............................................................................... 28-1

28.1 CUSTOMIZED SOFT KEYS ........................................................................................................ 28-1
28.1.1 VERTICAL CUSTOMIZED SOFT KEY ..........................................................................................................28-2
28.2 CREATING CUSTOMIZED PAGES ............................................................................................ 28-2
28.3 VSKP FIDIA - KEYBOARD SOFTWARE .................................................................................... 28-2
28.3.1 USE ................................................................................................................................................................28-3
28.3.2 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................................28-3
28.3.3 CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................................................28-3
28.3.4 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................................28-5
28.4 CUSTOMIZED HELP MENU ....................................................................................................... 28-6

29 VARIOUS.............................................................................................. 29-1
29.1 CNC PAR BROADCASTER ........................................................................................................ 29-1
29.1.1 CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................................................29-1
29.1.2 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................................29-2

INDEX ................................................................................................................ I

FIDIA MDO1680 IX
Main functions introduced or modified with respect to the previous software release:

The following topics have been added:

• VIDEO PAGES FOR LOOK-AHEAD
• LOOK-AHEAD VERSION 3 PARAMETERS
• LAHPAR_G3** TABULAR PARAMETERS FOR G301 - G310 FUNCTIONS
• JM2T OPTION
• AXES ENABLING LOGIC
• SPINDLE ENABLING LOGIC
• DOUBLE CONSOLE WITH I/O LUX
• GANTRY AXES WITH DUAL CONTROL
• EXECUTING SCRIPT IN PYTHON
• TEST LAMPS
• CNC PAR BROADCASTER
• DYNAMIC MONITORING OF AXES AND LOOK-AHEAD

Various:
• The following parameters have been added: RELDECIMAL, INVROTWITHQ, ROTG24ONLYC, VIRCANRESZEROCYCLE,
TRANSFSWITCHALL, CNCVERSION, LUXREADE2PROM, LUXxxE2PROMMyy, LUXnnCMDFCNT, IOLUXREFRESH,
MQRPAR FEEDCOMP.
• The following spindle parameters have been added: SP1RANGE ACCEPERC_HG, SP2ACCE2, SACCETHRSH2,
SP1DECE, SP1DECE2, SDECETHRSH, SP1G84WAITM5, SP1G84WAITM5DEL, SP1OUTFILFACT, SP1SCANIDX,
SP1AUTOUDSMOA, SP1AUTOIDRTM, SP1OWNERIDRTM, AUTOIDRTMATRR.
• The following axis parameters have been added: AXSACTIVEIDTM, AXAUTOUDSAX, AXAUTOIDAXP, AXIDAXP,
GTANDKV, GTANDTYPE, GTANDVELCORR, GTANDCURDIFF, AXGZONLYM
• The following look-ahead parameters have been added: LAVACTIVE, LABUFFER DIFFACCE, LAHPAR_G301 ...
LAHPAR_G310, JM2T, JM2TA, JM2TC, FEEDMINDMAX, FEEDMINDELTAS, RETRACTINCRINT, look-ahead version 3
parameters.
• The following parameters have been modified: SP1DELENA.
• The following commands for the extended tool table have been added: $PATCHKEY, $SHOWWINDOW.

X MDO1680 FIDIA
1 BASIC STEPS FOR SW INSTALLATION

1.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

The purpose of this manual is to describe the software setup, i.e. the operations required to get the FIDIA CNC Machine Tool
System ready for use by an operator.
These operations include the setting and software optimization of parameters that define the physical characteristics of the
machine tool, as well as verification that the System is operating properly.
In order to proceed with this phase of the installation, the hardware installation must already have been completed (see relevant
manual).
This manual is intended for use by a technician who is thoroughly familiar with the specifications of the machine tool and who is
capable of using basic FIDIA CNC functions (see User Manual Basic Functions).

Related Documentation
The significance of the digital signals mentioned is explained in the INTERFACING MANUAL.
The Manual/automatic logic, which involves several messages, is described in the Interfacing Manual, in Chapter 4.
The technician should consult the Hardware Installation Manual, when checking the logics of the digital signals cited.

1.2 LOADING THE CNC SOFTWARE

The CNC software must be loaded at least the first time, after which it will remain in memory even when the system has been
turned off.
The loading procedure is described in the START UP MANUAL, Section 2.
Machine tool parameters can be accessed in on-line mode only after the CNC software has been loaded in the memory.

1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Using the C_GEN utility program the installer defines the number and type of machine tool axes, necessary options, etc. The
programs modifies the INIPAR.DEF file in which the configuration is stored. Refer to the respective help screen for how to use
them.
Having completed configuration of the system, the command INIT CONF must be executed. This command is on the INIT page
in the SERVICE area and updates the configuration file of the video pages (CONF32.VID file) based on the contents of the
INIPAR.DEF file in the C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory; after making the update, it then initializes the system like the INIT LOAD
command.

1.4 SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL PARAMETERS

Machine parameters are those parameters which, through their values or their status, define the technical characteristics of the
machine tool.
The technician must set the machine parameters BEFORE operating the machine tool through the CNC.
An editor can be used for writing the values of the parameters.
The values of certain parameters, however, must be set at a later time, when the machine tool is being controlled by the CNC.

1.4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS PRIOR TO OPERATING THE MACHINE TOOL

During this phase all machine tool parameters that can be defined based on the data available to the installation technician
should be set, i.e. the technical specifications of the machine tool, the system configuration (characteristics of the options
present), the performance to be obtained, etc.
The procedure to be followed is listed below:
• Identify the parameters that involve the system in question.
• Consult the explanation of each parameter to fully understand its importance. Change and save its value in the INIPAR.SET
FILE (described further on) if the default value is not suitable for the system.

Specifically, the AXHWEOR, AXSWEOR, AXSCODZER, AXVZFR, AXSZPR, AXVPER, AXVNER, AXVMUL, AXVDIV
parameters that concern the characteristics of the machine tool must be set before running any test.
The AXVIIN and AXVIMD parameters must also be set for measuring systems with coded reference notches.

FIDIA MDO1680 1-1

1.4.2 SETTING PARAMETERS WITH THE MACHINE TOOL CONTROLLED BY
THE CNC
Those machine tool parameters that cannot be defined directly from data available to the installation technician, but which must
be determined by carrying out tests on the machine tool are set during this phase. If the installation technician should obtain
unsatisfactory results or unexpected functioning while tests are being carried out on the machine tool, the values of the relevant
parameters must be changed. During this phase, the machine tool must be used very carefully since the system, until the
software installation has been completed, is not properly “set”. The values of the parameters are set by changing their values in
the SERVICE area (described further on). The definitive values obtained must then be entered in the INIPAR.SET file.

1.5 PROCEDURES FOR PARAMETER MODIFYING OR

COMMAND ISSUING
The Parameters and Commands can be accessed through the terminal monitor and the Workstation soft keys.
The Parameters are used for modifying the physical quantities or the conditions which define the system operating status.
The commands are used for executing system operations.
There are two types of parameters:
• Machining parameters
These parameters are used by the User for obtaining the desired machining features and are described in the FIDIA CNC
user's manuals. They can be accessed directly.

• Machine parameters
These parameters define the physical characteristics of the Machine Tool and are to be used by the installation technician
only. They can only be accessed through the SERVICE area.

ACCESS TO A PARAMETER OR COMMAND:

• Use the soft key menu or the “SEARCH” menu to display the page containing the desired parameter or command.

MODIFYING A PARAMETER OR EXECUTING A COMMAND:

• Access the page containing the desired parameter or command.
• Position the cursor on the parameter or command.
• Use the ⇑ and ⇓ keys.
• Enter the value.
• Use the keyboard to write in the value or select one of the predefined values (using the ⇐ and ⇒ keys). Certain commands
are to be given without a value being specified.
• Press the ENTER key to confirm the new value or execute the command.

Refer to the CNC Basic Functions manual for additional information regarding the use of the Workstation.

TABULAR AXIS PARAMETERS

Most tabular axis parameters are found in tables that can be accessed by pressing the AXIS TABLE horizontal soft key, present
in the SERVICE area.
When a table is displayed, various parameters are displayed on the screen simultaneously in as many columns.
To access parameters that are not shown on the screen scroll the table by the ARROW RIGHT/ARROW LEFT keys.
The first time that is pressed the ENTER or ARROW keys, the values introduced by the user in this table will be activated.
Siemens driver tabular axis parameters are found in similar tables, that can be accessed by pressing the AXIS PAR, AUX AXIS
PAR, SPINDLE PAR soft keys, present in MAINT SDD.

1.6 "SERVICE" AREA AND "MAINT" PARAMETERS

When the CNC software is loaded, the “SERVICE” area of the memory (called also “MAINT “ area) contains the machine tool
parameters, the dimensions which, through their value or state, define the technical characteristics of the machine tool.
During the execution of tests on the machine tool, the installation technician may have to modify some of the parameters in the
SERVICE area in order to determine their optimum values.
It is important to remember that when the CNC system is reloaded or an INIT LOAD command is executed, the values entered
in the SERVICE area will be lost since they will be replaced by the values entered in the INIPAR.SET file, while undefined
parameters in the INIPAR.SET file will be set at their default values.
As a consequence, the SERVICE area can only be used for temporary changes.
Definitive changes must be stored in the INIPAR.SET file by means of the SAVE PAR softkey.
It will be necessary to LOGON using the sum of the year + month + current date as a Password (or a password of the same
level, if one has been defined) to open the access to the “SERVICE” area.

1-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

To log on:
• select LOGON from the OPTIONS menu
• enter the password and OK

At this point, all existing parameters in the SERVICE area can be accessed by the installation technician. To enter SERVICE,
press the relevant soft key.
A parameter in the SERVICE area can be modified like any other parameter by following the procedure given in previous
paragraph.
To close access to the SERVICE area, the LOGON must be done without a password or by entering a password that does not
activate the SERVICE mode.
The machine tool parameters are split into groups according to their function and the options to which they refer.
The first characters of a parameter name identify the group to which it belongs.

1.6.1 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE AREA

When the SERVICE softkey is pressed, a page will appear with the following information displayed:
• System number
• CNC, SDD, WS, ISOGRAPH, HIMILL version (only data relevant to the modules loaded in the system will appear)
• List of the options defined in the INIPAR.DEF file

The following softkeys are on the first page of the SERVICE area. Their functions are described in detail further on in the
manual.

AXIS TABLE
This provides access to the context where the values of the tabular parameters relevant to the axes can be displayed and
modified.

MAINT PARAMETER
This provides access to the context in which the following can be done:
• Display and modify the values of the machine parameters
• Save the values of the machine parameters in the INIPAR.SET file (SAVE PAR softkey)
• Automatically save the customized files on a floppy disk (SAVE CUSTOM softkey)

I/O
This displays the hardware cards and I/O signals.

AUCOL DEBUG
This provides access to the program to debug the AUCOL.

TEST
This provides access to the context in which the test programs, ERCI, ERDI, ERRE, PART PROGRAM TEST can be used.

OSCILLOSCOPE
This provides access to the oscilloscope.

INIT
This provides access to initialization commands.
CONFIG
This provides access to the context to start up the C1GEN (Modify Conf), SDDGEN, HPXGEN programs (only those programs
installed on the system).

AXIS CALIBRAT
This provides access to the context relevant to SCREW CORRECTIONS.

1.7 INIPAR.SET FILE

INIPAR.SET is a file that contains all of the machine parameters, the same as found in the SERVICE area.
This file is to be found on the system directory C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM and transfers the values contained in it into the memory of
the CNC (in an area named SERVICE) each time the CNC software is loaded, or if an INIT LOAD command is executed.

FIDIA MDO1680 1-3

1.8 MEASURING UNITS
The values of the parameters are displayed and must be set in the measuring units indicated in the manual.
Values with a decimal point can be set for certain magnitudes. The measuring units of the main magnitudes are listed in this
section.

Coordinates (Ex.: positions of the linear or rotating axes):

• values with a decimal point:
millimeters for linear coordinates, degrees for angular coordinates
• values without decimal points:
microns for linear coordinates, thousandths of a degree for angular coordinates

EXAMPLES
103 = 103 mm
45. = 45 gradi
−1200 = −1200 microns

FEED SPEED OF THE AXES

Millimeters per minute for linear axes, degrees per minute for rotating axes. The decimal point is not used.

EXAMPLES
2000 = 2000 mm/min
26000 = 26000 degrees per minute

AXIS ACCELERATIONS
• values with a decimal point:
metres per second for linear axes, thousands of degrees per second for rotating axes
• values without decimal points:
millimeters per second for linear axes, degrees per second for rotating axes

EXAMPLES
750 = 750 mm/s²
2. = 2 m/s²

VOLTAGES
• values with a decimal point: Volt
• values without decimal points: millivolts

EXAMPLES
9. = 9 Volts
500 = 500 millivolts

TIME
Expressed in seconds or milliseconds, depending on the parameters (see explanation of each parameter).

ROTATION SPEED OF THE SPINDLE

Expressed in revolutions per minute (RPMs). The decimal point is not used.

EXAMPLES
300 = 300 RPMs
5000 = 5000 RPMs

1.9 SAVE AND RESTORE OF THE MACHINE PARAMETERS

The values of the machine parameters must be saved at the end of the installation or upon successful completion each phase of
the installation. The current values of all the parameters of the SERVICE area, can be saved at the same time so that they can
automatically be inserted into the INIPAR.SET file.

1-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

This function avoids the user having to manually edit the file, but must be used with caution. Make sure when saving that none
of the MAINT parameters have been entered incorrectly (otherwise each incorrect value will be recorded).
Procedure for saving:
• Select the SAVE PAR soft-key in the SERVICE area
• There will be a request to enter a comment which to be written at the beginning of the file

At the end of the procedure, the INIPAR.SET file will be created in the c:\fidia\custom directory. The file is in the usual
INIPAR.SET file format (e.g. G201 functions at the beginning and G203 at the end) and contains the current values of all the
SERVICE parameters. Parameters relating to the Siemens digital drives are not saved in the INIPAR.SET file since they are
already saved in the Siemens.par file.
When executing a new SAVE operation, the current INIPAR.SET file is renamed INIPAR1.SET and the new file will be named
INIPAR.SET. With each subsequent SAVE operation, the current INIPAR.SET file will be renamed INIPAR2.SET and so on,
until INIPAR15.SET. For additional SAVE operations, the oldest INIPARn.SET file (with n between 1 to 15) will be cancelled, the
current INIPAR.SET file will be renamed INIPARn.SET and the new file will be named INIPAR.SET.
Procedure for restoring:
• Give the INIT LOAD command in the SERVICE area

The INIPAR.SET file will be executed in order to restore the values of the SERVICE area parameters which were previously
saved through the SAVE function.

1.10 LOCATION AND BACKUP OF CONFIGURATION FILES

After the installer has generated and/or modified the configuration files, he must control that they are placed in the system
directory C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM and backed up on a different device.
The configuration files are as follows:
INIPAR.SET machine parameters
AXVCAL.SET linearity and backlash correction
IEC1131.SAV executable IEC1131
IECBLK.SET IEC1131 blocks and messages
PLC*.SAV AUCOL programs
PLCBL*.SET AUCOL blocks and messages
INIPAR.SDD digital drive parameters (default values)
INIPAR.HSA “
SIEMENS.PAR digital drive parameters (optimized values)
SIEMHSA.PAR “
CONF32.VID video configuration (do not modify)
VSA611D.OMF firmware for Siemens digital drives
HSA611D.OMF “

The INIPAR.SET file is always modified during installation.

The other files must be generated or modified only if the system has the relevant options.

1.10.1 AUTOMATIC SAVE

When the SAVE CUSTOM softkey is pressed, an automatic procedure is started to save the customized files on a floppy disk.
When the user confirms the operation, all the data on the floppy disk in drive “a” will be erased and the following files will be
copied from the C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory to the floppy disk:
*.set, *.def, *.auc, *.plc, *.gbl, *.msg, *.cnd, *.ndt, custom.vid, siem*.par, *.omf, ws32cust.ini

If a floppy disk is not sufficient for containing all the files, the user will be asked to insert another diskette.

1.11 REEXECUTING THE INIPAR.SET FILE

Once the INIPAR.SET file has been modified, it must be re executed.
This operation is carried out automatically the next time the CNC system is loaded. If the CNC system is already loaded in the
memory, INIPAR.SET must be re executed giving the INIT LOAD command (in the SERVICE area).
After this, the INIPAR.SET file and the other configuration files are automatically re executed, and as a consequence, the
parameters in the SERVICE area are updated with the new values.

1.12 DISPLAY I/O BOARDS

Signals and other data relating to the interface boards between the FIDIA CNC and the machine tool are displayed on special
pages in the SERVICE area.

FIDIA MDO1680 1-5

Procedure:
• Press the SERVICE soft key.
• Press the I/O soft key.
• Select the board required. The page relating to the selected board is opened.

The displays are similar to those on the corresponding pages of the test program (TSTC1), which are described in the Hardware
Installation Manual.
The main difference is that the test program pages (TST10 or TSTC1) display existing boards only, while the MAINT I/O pages
show all possible boards including those that are not physically present.
The user can easily identify displays relating to boards that are not present since their ADDRESS field (address of board in
octal) is zero. All the fields on the pages are read only, with the following exceptions:

SUM field for DCB boards

This is the integral of the corresponding VALUE field. VALUE expresses the number of impulses detected at each interrupt,
while SUM expresses the overall number of impulses detected.
This field can be set to any numerical value during a counting test to check that DCB board counting is correct. For example, in
order to test the handwheel, SUM can be set to zero and then a complete revolution of the handwheel made to check that the
number of impulses detected is correct.

TX field for SLU boards

The user can enter a character that will be sent by the CNC to the SLU board in order to check that the hardware is operating
correctly.

1.13 TCP/IP DIAGNOSTIC

The following MAINT parameters are useful for diagnostics relating to communication via TCP/IP between the CNC module
and the iPC module.

ERRORTCPTX
Displays the total number of errors that have occurred during transmission.

ERRORTCPRX
Displays the total number of errors that have occurred during reception.

Both parameters are set to zero at initialization; they can be manually set to zero by giving an INIT NOLOAD command.

1.14 SELECTING AUTOMATIC MODE

In order to switch to automatic mode, follow the procedure given below:
• press the horizontal RESET soft key
• position the cursor on the “CNC” line or on the “ALL” line
• press ENTER

On completion of the above operations, the machine tool will be controlled by the FIDIA CNC and the START button lamp will
flash while awaiting commands.

1.15 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS

The three sub paragraphs that follow describe the verification and definition operations that must be executed after loading the
CNC software. Only after these operations have been executed can the machine tool be used for continuing the installation of
the software.

1.15.1 TESTING EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS

Press the emergency button on the workstation and verify that the voltage has been removed from all machine tool driving
gears. Exit from the emergency.
Press the hardware limit s switches;hardwarewitches manually: axis movement should stop and the following message will be
displayed:

WNC045 **+ AXIS LIMIT MICRO SWITCH

when the positive limit switch is pressed

1-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

WNC045 ** AXIS LIMIT MICRO SWITCH
when the negative limit switch is pressed.

With the axis on the hardware limit switch, movement in the opposite direction to return within the limits is allowed and the
following message will be displayed:
ICN046 ** OUT OF LIMIT MICRO SWITCH

1.15.2 ABSOLUTE ZERO SEARCH IN NON CODED TRANSDUCERS

The absolute zero search command is necessary in order to set the software limit switches and consequently to be able to use
the CNC correctly. The command can be executed individually or automatically on all the machine tool axes.
During installation, the individual mode is recommended.
The following is valid for non coded transducers. See the relevant chapter for measuring systems with coded indexed scale
reference notches.
Before activating the ZERO command, make sure that the absolute zero microswitch cam is positioned so that it corresponds
with the absolute zero reference signal of the position transducer, i.e. in correspondence to the INDEX reference (for digital
transducers).
Also verify that the cam is positioned at the extreme positive or negative end of the machine tool axis and not at the centre.
(There are some axes which are exceptions, see the AXVZFR parameter).
ZERO CYCLE PARAMETERS
Having set the position, ensure that the search direction has been defined in the AXVZFR *M parameter.

The command is activated as follows:

1. Press the horizontal ZERO soft key.
2. Select an axis by moving the cursor to execute the zero cycle on one axis at a time and press the ENTER key.
3. The START button lamp will remain lit while awaiting execution of the command. Press the START button: the axis selected
will move at the feed set in the AXVZFR *M parameter in the direction defined to search for the absolute zero cam.
4. When the IDMZ* signal reaches 24 Vdc, the movement will be inverted and the axis moves at reduced feed until the IDMZ*
signal returns to 0 (only if the AXSZZZ parameter is ON).
5. The movement will again be inverted and the axis will move at a further reduced feed until the IDMZ* signal returns to 24
Vdc (only if the AXSZZZ parameter is ON).
6. The search for the INDEX reference signal is therefore carried out at a very low feed. Movement of the machine axis is
stopped as soon as the signal is found and the following message appears on the terminal monitor:
7. ICN035 ** ZERO EXECUTED
8. This procedure is to be repeated for all of the axes.

(* = the axis selected)

1.15.3 DEFINITION AND CHECKING OF SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCHES

Once the absolute zero search command has been executed, the software limit switches must be defined.
1. move the concerned JOG axis to the position in which the positive limit switch is to be set. Should any hardware
microswitches be present, be sure to check they are not in the pressed position. Should not the hardware limit switches be
available, it becomes necessary to choose a reasonably distant position from the mechanical stroke (in accordance to the
maxi speed allowed by the axis)
2. make a note of the axis value displayed
3. enter the value read in the AXVPER *M parameter in the SERVICE area.
4. repeat the procedure for the negative limit switch, entering the value in the AXVNER*M parameter
5. moving the axis at an increasing speed up to rapid, check that this axis never touches the hardware limit switch
6. repeat the procedure on all of the machine tool axes.

FIDIA MDO1680 1-7

1-8 MDO1680 FIDIA
2 VARIOUS PARAMETERS

2.1 PARAMETERS FOR SELECTING USER FUNCTIONS

This section describes the MAINT parameters used by the user or CNC programmer to select or activate functions.

2.1.1 FIXED CYCLES

G84DELTA
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;2.000]
Default value: 0
If the parameter is set to a value that is greater than zero, when the bottom of the hole (G84 and G184 cycles) is reached the
tool axis makes a release movement at the F work feed to the programmed Z value + G84DELTA. In this way, the spindle stops
and inverts its rotation away from the part. There is no release with the value zero.

G84WAITSP
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [0;500]
Default value: 0
Allows a pause to be inserted during execution of the G84 and G184 cycles. When the tool axis reaches the bottom of the hole
and the spindle inverts its direction, the tool axis waits for the G84WAITSP time before moving out of the hole.

G185FEED G185 retract FEED

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value : 0
Feed at which the tool retracts from the bottom of the hole at the end of the G185 fixed cycle.
If equal to zero, the tool retracts at the work feed F.
If the P function (optional) is programmed in the G185 cycle block, the value of P is assigned to this parameter.

2.1.2 LIMITING SPINDLE SPEED

ENAFULLSPMAX
Default value: ON
Selects the behaviour of the SPMAX (MAX.SP.) parameter that is present in the Tool Table and used to limit the spindle rotation
speed to a preset value.
Allowed values:
ON SPMAX always ON
OF SPMAX only limits the speed during tool measurement cycles performed with a laser measuring device (G230, G231,
G233, etc. functions).

2.1.3 VALUES WITHOUT A DECIMAL POINT

PRGNOPOINT
Default value: OF
Enables/disables the programming of values without a decimal point.
Allowed values:
ON the decimal point is optional
OF the decimal point is compulsory

NOPOINTMM
Default value: OF
Selects the unit of measurement for values programmed without a decimal point.
Used only when PRGNOPOINT is ON.
Allowed values:
ON millimetres for linear values, degrees for angular values
OF thousandths of a millimetre for linear values, thousandths of a degree for angular values

FIDIA MDO1680 2-1

RELDECIMAL R, E, L functions with DECIMAL point
Default value: ON
Enables/disables the programming of the R, E, and L function values without a decimal point when PRGNOPOINT is OF.
Allowed values:
ON the decimal point is compulsory
OF the decimal point is optional

2.1.4 DEACTIVATING ROTATION OF THE REFERENCE SYSTEM

AUTOROTSWOFF AUTOmatic ROTation SWitch OFF
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
When an axis is moved in jog to one of its software limit switches and rotation of the Reference System is active, the machine
tool stops in “Feed hold”. If this parameter is ON, rotation of the axis Reference System is also deactivated (ROTO, TCS or
ROTOALIGNE is set to OF) and the message ICN376 is displayed. The user can move the axis in order to bring it within the
software limit.

2.1.5 AUTOMATIC MODE WITH PROFIBUS

PROFICNALLAUTO
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If this parameter is ON, the system can switch to Automatic mode when the PROFIBUS bridge is installed but not started.

2.1.6 G02, G03, G22, G23 WITH THE Q FUNCTION AT –1

INVROTWITHQ INVert ROTation WITH Q negative
Default value: OF
Inverts the meaning of the G02, G03, G22, G23 functions when the direction of the tool axis (axis perpendicular to the
machining plane) is inverted, i.e. when the Q function is programmed at –1. Allowed values:
ON when Q is at –1, the G02 function is executed as G03; G03 is executed as G02; G22 is executed as G23; G23 is
executed as G22
OF the G02, G03, G22, G23 functions are not inverted

2.1.7 G24 FUNCTION

ROTG24ONLYC ROTation in G24 with ONLY C programmed
Default value: OF
If the G24 function is active and only the head Roll rotary axis is programmed (while the head Pitch rotary axis is at position 0),
the behaviour of the Roll axis is determined by the value of this parameter. Allowed values:
OF the Roll axis does not move.
ON the Roll axis moves to a new value, obtained by applying the corresponding ROTANG rotation value (e.g. a C Roll axis
will typically move according to the ROTANG RZ value).

2.1.8 VIRCAN RESET DURING THE ZERO CYCLE

VIRCANRESZEROCYCLE VIRCAN RESet during ZERO CYCLE
Default value: OF
Allowed values:
ON during the axis zero cycle, a VIRCAN RESET is automatically performed which sets the position of the virtual axis to zero.
OF if the virtual quill is active and is at a non-zero position, when the zero cycle is commanded the EUT032 error message is
displayed. The user must manually set the position of the virtual axis to zero (e.g. by pressing the RESET VIRCAN soft key).

2.1.9 ZERO CYCLE WITH RTCP ON

TRANSFSWITCHALL ALL TRANSFormations automatic SWITCH off/on
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF for V3.7 software, ON from V3.8 software version
Executes the zero cycle when axis value transformations (RTCP, ROTO, TCS, ROTOALIGNE, VIRCAN) are active; for
example, it is used when RTCP is ON at system start-up.
If TRANSFSWITCHALL is ON, when the zero cycle is commanded all the above transformations are automatically deactivated
(to allow for correct execution of the zero cycle); at the end of the cycle, the RTCP, ROTO, TCS, ROTOALIGNE and VIRCAN
logics are restored to their previous state.

2-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

2.2 INFORMATIVE PARAMETERS
CNCVERSION
This is a tabular read-only parameter that gives the main information about the CNC software installed:: version, release, sub-
release, AUCOL version, etc. The parameter variables are:
• V version number
• R release number
• DOT sub-release number
• DOTBETA any beta release character
• MORE any other information, e.g. POT or M (modifications) added to the official release
• AUCOLVERSION AUCOL version number

LUXREADE2PROM
LUXxxE2PROMMyy
These are useful for diagnostics. When the LUXREADE2PROM command is given, the errors and alarms for the I/O LUX
modules (stored on E2PROM) are displayed in the message area (Log File) and the following parameters are updated:
LUXxxE2PROMMyy
These are tabular read-only parameters that display information concerning errors and alarms.
xx = decimal address (00 - 31) of the controller module CC10
yy = position of the module in the I/O LUX chain (00 - 31)

LUXnnCMDFCNT
Counter containing the number of failed commands on the I/O LUX modules.
This read-only parameter is useful during diagnostics to see if there are problems with the I/O LUX system.
nn = decimal address (00 - 31) of the controller module CC10

FIDIA MDO1680 2-3

2-4 MDO1680 FIDIA
3 AXIS INSTALLATION
3.1 SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL AXES - POSITION LOOP
These calibrations are to be made only for axes driven by analog drives.
In the CNC, the position loop with the machine tool axes is as follows:

Position loop

The operations described below are used for optimizing the behaviour of the machine axes.
Before making the settings, ensure that the characteristics of the machine axes have been defined in the following parameters:
AXVMUL, AXVDIV, AXVVRT, AXVSRT, AXVACCE, AXVACCEM, AXVKVD, AXVKVS, AXVMINPE, AXVMAXPE, AXVPEACC.

3.1.1 FOLLOWING ERROR AND OFFSET

These settings are to be done with the FFWPERC parameter at zero.
When the FFWPERC is at the zero value and the machine axes are enabled, the CNC activates the position control to
FOLLOWING ERROR, i.e. the difference between the programmed value and the real position of the axis is constantly
controlled.
Frequently, with the axis at idle, there is a small disturbance voltage (OFFSET) caused by the thermal drift of the electronic
components that alters the value of the following error read.
An initial electronic adjustment of the offset has already been made to the drives. However, for safety reasons, this should be re
checked at this phase of installation.

3.1.2 SETTING PROCEDURE

Displaying the following error
• Press the horizontal FOLLOW ERROR soft−key in the SERVICE area.
• The following error page is displayed on the terminal monitor
• The value of the following error is shown after the axis name.

Setting the Offset

• Look for the AXSOFS *M parameter in the SERVICE area and set it to OF so that automatic compensation of the OFFSET
by the software is deactivated.
• Verify that the axes are enabled, check that the value in the EFERROR field is zero. If it is not, set it to zero by adjusting the
OFFSET potentiometres on the drives in the electrical cabinet.
• Once the calibration has been completed, reset the AXSOFS *M parameter to ON in order to activate automatic
compensation of the OFFSET.

Setting the Following Error

Checking the following error
• Position the potentiometre for adjusting the axis feed (OVF) so that the FEED rate reads 1000 mm/min.
• Check that the AXSOLJ parameter is OF
• Using the JOG mode to move the axis, read the value of the following error.
• If the value displayed in the EFERROR field is not zero, adjust the feed gain potentiometre on the drive.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-1

Checking the following error at maximum feed
• Wait for axis movement to stop.
• Set the maximum feed in mm/min using the SET FEED command.
• Move the axis again and verify that the value displayed in the EFERROR field is zero.

Repeat the entire procedure (first and second point) on all of the machine tool axes.

Checking the following error when interpolating the axes

• This test is performed by programming the same amount of movement on all the axes. The EFERROR value should be zero
on all axes.
• Following there is a procedure example for 3 axis interpolation:
$REP 5 * execute 5 times
>XYZ * positioning at the origin
> X-100. Y-100. Z-100. * positioning at the point (-100;-100;-100)
$END * end of program
• Execute the procedure.
• During the execution phase, adjust the following error as before.
• In the event the following errors are very different, the setting procedures must be repeated.

NOTE:
When the Active Tuning logic is active (see CCOMP parameter) and the axes are moved from a block, program or procedure,
the following error (FERROR parameter) has a value that is different from the traditional FEED * (100 - FFWPERC) / (AXVKVD
* 100). Instead, if the axes are moved in jog the value of the following error is always equal to FEED / AXVKVD. It follows that
the axis gain cannot be set when moving the axes from a block, program or procedure and watching the value of the following
error.
For this reason, the EFERROR parameter is also given on the FOLLOWING ERROR video page. This parameter is the
difference between the real and theoretical following error, the so-called error of error. In all cases, whether the Active Tuning
logic is active or not, when movement is by jog, from a block, program or procedure (except during the acceleration phase), the
value of EFERROR is roughly 0 with the axis gain set properly. It is therefore recommended that EFERROR and not FERROR
be used for setting the axis gain.

3.2 AXIS PARAMETERS

The Axis Parameters are subdivided into several groups, depending on the type of axis operations to be managed.
Many of these parameters have as many variables as there are axes managed by the system. In such cases, each axis has its
own value and is consequently dealt with independently by the software. This manual provides only the XM, YM, ZM, AM
variables which correspond with the most common machine tool axes, i.e.: X, Y, Z and an additional “A” axis.
The names of the axes are defined through the AXNAME parameter.
Obviously, the installer will only have to set the variables relevant to axes that are actually managed by the system.

3.2.1 VISUALIZATION PARAMETERS

DISPTEO DISPlay the THEOretical position
Default value: ON
This defines the type of axis coordinate to be displayed on the screen in the XM, YM, ZM fields, etc.
Valid values:
ON The theoretic position, i.e. the coordinate at which the CNC will attempt to position the axis, will be displayed. It is generally
preferable to display the theoretic position since it is not affected by axis oscillations.
OF The real position, i.e. the one furnished by the transducer, will be displayed.

3.2.2 SCREEN REFRESH FREQUENCY

REFREQ screen REFresh FREQuency
Measuring Unit: Hz
Valid values: [1;100]
Default value: 10
This parameter establishes the maximum frequency for refreshing the screen. Under normal circumstances, it should not be
changed. It may be useful to increase it in those cases where the screen coordinates are updated after a long delay (e.g. in
some retrofits). A high value may cause a slowing down in the operation of the CNC (BCT, etc.)
This parameter can only be accessed through the Search menu.

3-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

3.3 DEFINITION OF AXIS NAMES
AXNAME 1 AXis NAME
2
3
4

The AXNAME table defines the names of the axes, i.e. the names that appear inside the axes parameter tables and which must
be used by the user for programming the positionings. It consists of as many variables as there are axes managed by the
system. The three main axes of the machine are defined as 1, 2 and 3, which are almost always X, Y and Z.
The 4th, 5th and 6th axes are defined as 4, 5 and 6.
It is recommended that the names of the axes be selected using the following criteria:
X main longitudinal axis
Y main transversal axis
Z main vertical axis
A additional axis rotating around X
B additional axis rotating around Y
C additional axis rotating around Z
U additional axis parallel to X
V additional axis parallel to Y
W additional axis parallel to Z

The names of the axes must be followed by the letter M in the AXNAME table (e.g. XM, YM). The letter T is recommended for
the axes on the side of the tracer on machines with synchronous axes (e.g. XT, YT, AT, CT).
On machine tools with Gantry axes, use the letter M for the master axis and the letter G for the slave axis.

EXAMPLE
Machine with 6 axes: three main axes X, Y, Z and three additional rotating axes A, B, C.
C is the fourth axis, B the fifth and A the sixth.
AXNAME 1 = XM
AXNAME 2 = YM
AXNAME 3 = ZM
AXNAME 4 = CM
AXNAME 5 = BM
AXNAME 6 = AM

3.3.1 INTERACTIVE DEFINITION OF AXIS NAMES

A utility program is available that allows axis names to be set or changed using a quick, intuitive and safe method.
It is advisable to use this program rather than change the AXNAME parameter by hand, because the program is able to move
values inside the tabular parameters in such a way as to automatically place them in the box marked with the real name of the
axis.
Procedure:
• Start the program by clicking on the NAMESET icon on the FIDIA UTILITY page.
• Specify the name of the directory containing the INIPAR.SET file; normally the file is in the directory C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM.
• A list of the axes with their current names is displayed; check the list and change any incorrect names.

The NAMESET program enters new names into the INIPAR.SET file. If the CNC system is already loaded, it will be necessary
to give the INIT LOAD command to load the new names into the INIPAR.SET file.

3.4 END OF RUN PARAMETERS

AXHWEOR XM AXis HardWare End Of Run
YM
ZM
AM

Default value: ON
Enables/disables operation of the hardware limit switches for the axis, i.e. the logic that corresponds to the IDFP* and IDFN*
bits (the CNC stops the axis when it reaches a mechanical limit switch insert).

FIDIA MDO1680 3-3

Valid values:
ON Hardware limit switches enabled
OF Hardware limit switches disabled

AXSWEOR XM AXis SoftWare End Of Run

YM
ZM
AM

Default value: ON
Enables/disables operation of the software limit switches for the axis, i.e. it prevents the axis from going beyond the absolute
coordinates assigned to the AXVNER parameters (negative software limit switches) and AXVPER (positive software limit
switches). These limit switches are enabled only after a zero cycle has been executed on the corresponding axis.
The coordinates of the limit switches themselves must be defined for each axis that is to be equipped with software limit
switches (AXVNER and AXVPER parameters) and the zero condition (AXSZPR parameter =1).
Valid values:
ON Software limit switches enabled
OF Software limit switches disabled

Whenever possible, it is recommended that the operation of the hardware limit switches and the software limit switches be
enabled.
The software limit switches can be excluded for certain axes that have very short strokes, however leaving the hardware limit
switches enabled.
Rollover rotating axes do not require limit switches.
In the case of synchronous axes, the master axis and the corresponding slave axis must have the same types of limit switches
(i.e. the AXHWEOR and AXSWEOR parameter must be set with the same values).

AXVPER XM AXV absolute coordinate of Positive End−of−Run

YM
ZM
AM

AXVNER XM AXV absolute coordinate of Negative End−of−Run

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [−200000;+200000]
Default value: AXVPER: 1000
AXVNER: −1000
The AXVPER and AXVNER parameters respectively define the absolute coordinates of the positive and negative software limit
switches. The software limit switch values of an axis are active only if the relevant AXSWEOR parameter has an ON value, and
if the zero cycle has already been executed. The software limit switches must be defined the first time the machine tool is used,
immediately after executing the absolute zero search command.
The software limit switches must be defined through the following procedure:
• Move the axis to the positive hardware limit switch, either in JOG mode with a FEED of 200 mm/min or using the
handwheel.
• Make a note of the axis value displayed on the terminal monitor. Since the absolute coordinate must be determined, the
zero origin must be selected or else the axis value must not have been modified by a SET command since execution of the
zero cycle.
• Enter the value read in the AXVPER parameter and subtract 1 mm.
• Repeat the operation for the negative software limit, but add 1mm to the value read instead of subtracting it, and enter the
result in the AXVNER parameter.
• Moving in JOG mode, either with a FEED of 2000 mm/min or in rapid, test the correct functioning of the software limit
switches.
• Repeat the entire procedure on all other axes requiring software limits.

Since the software limit switch values are influenced by the values of the AXVZPR parameter, the above procedure must be
executed after the AXVZPR parameter has been set and activated.
Subsequently, each time the AXVZPR parameter is modified, the software limit switch values must also be corrected.

3-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

TOLLFCS TOLerance for the Software end of run
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;0.010]
Default value: 0
Tolerance for exceeding the software limit switches. When an axis goes beyond the software limit switch, the following will
occur:
• If the axis coordinate (in the 0 origin) returns within tolerance, i.e.:
(axis coordinate) < (AXVPER+TOLLFCS) or (axis coordinate) > (AXVNER-TOLLFCS)
an ICN310 or ICN311 information-only message will be displayed, but the machine will not interrupt the machining.
• If the axis coordinate (in the 0 origin) exceeds the tolerance, i.e.:
(axis coordinate) > (AXVPER+TOLLFCS) or (axis coordinate) < (AXVNER-TOLLFCS)
a WCN049 or WCN051 message will be displayed. If there is a file being executed, the machine will go into emergency.

Under normal conditions, the parameter should be left at the O value. If there is a need for having a tolerance other than zero, it
will be necessary to enter low values for obvious safety reasons.

FMAXPFC Pre−End−of−run Feed rate

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Valid values: 1 − the lowest of all AXVSRT parameter values
Default value: 500
Pre−end−of−run feed rate.
Exists only if the system manages the IDPFC bit (Digital Input indicating the axis in a Pre−End−of−Run condition).
When the IDPFC bit goes to 1, the axis feed is limited to the value of this parameter.

3.5 SPEED PARAMETERS

AXVVRT XM AXV maximum reference Voltage for Rapid Traverse
YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: V
Valid Values: [-10;+10]
Default value: 10
This is the maximum reference voltage specified for driving the axis in question.
It is the voltage that moves the axis at the Rapid feed set in the AXVSRT parameter.
A lower AXVVRT voltage would obviously set a correspondingly lower feed.
The AXVVRT parameter cannot be set at values greater than 9V since it is not possible to supply more than 9V on analog
output signals on Series C systems.
Negative values are also accepted. In this case the output voltage will be inverted.
The diagram below illustrates the relation between the voltage supplied at the output and the axis feed (in the example, the
assumption is that the AXVVRT is less than 10 Volts).

FIDIA MDO1680 3-5

AXVSRT XM AXV Speed for Rapid Traverse
YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: mm/min

Valid values: [1;2000000000]
Default value: 10000
This is the maximum feed at which the axis can be moved, i.e., Rapid Feed. The user can move an axis in Rapid using the G00
programming function or the pushbutton panel (with the feed potentiometre at 100% or higher). When more than one axis is
moved simultaneously, the resulting feed will not exceed the Rapid value of the slowest axis.

AXVACCE XM AXV ACCeleration factor

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: m/s²

Valid values: [.001;32]
Default value: 0.2
This is the acceleration and deceleration value used when the CNC changes the axis feed during programming movements. It is
the inclination of the acceleration/deceleration ramps applied to the axis. When more than one axis is moved simultaneously,
the resulting acceleration is the lowest of all the inserted values. The optimum acceleration is the highest supported by the
machine tool.
The relevant function (X, Y, Z) must be programmed to move the axis in order to verify the correctness of the value entered.

AXVACCEM XM AXV ACCEleration factor for Manual movement (JOG)

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: m/s²

Valid values: [.001;32]
Default value: .2
Acceleration and deceleration values are used when the CNC changes the speed of the axis during manual movements.
It is the slope of the acceleration/deceleration ramps applied to the axis. The optimum acceleration is the highest supported by
the machine tool. An acceleration/deceleration that is higher than that used when the axis is being moved by the program can
normally be used in the JOG mode. On certain machines, the AXVACCEM can even be double that of the AXVACCE.
To verify the correctness of the value entered, the axis must be moved in JOG mode.

AXVACCEG00 XM AXV ACCEleration factor for G00 movements

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: m/s²

Allowed values: [.001;32]
Default value: 0
Acceleration and deceleration value used during G00 movements. The default value (zero) means that in G00 acceleration is
the same as that for movements at the programmed feed (AXVACCE).
If a higher acceleration is required during G00 movements, the value desired must be entered in the AXVACCEG00 parameter.

AXVACCEEM *M AXV ACCEleration value for EMergency

Measuring Unit: m/s²
Valid values: [2;20]
Default value: 5
This is the highest acceleration value that the CNC can demand from the axis. If this value is exceeded, the system will go into
emergency to avoid applying a higher AXVACCEM acceleration which could damage the machine tool.

3-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

SRAMP
Default value: ON
Enables/disables the S−shaped speed ramp.
It prevents the acceleration/deceleration of the axis from going immediately from zero to the nominal AXVACCE value (and vice
versa). It renders the accelerations/deceleration vibrations less jerky.
The following are several practical advantages of the S−ramp:

In Acceleration
Errors during a cold start or restart after an edge are minimized on machines that have axes with very different dynamic
characteristics (they do not start off together because they have different degrees of readiness).

In Deceleration
Errors from braking due to the elasticity of the mechanics (oscillations around the stop point) are minimized.

An oscilloscope can be used to verify the speed range.

Valid values:
ON S−Ramp enabled
OF S−Ramp disabled

The figures below illustrate the speed variation of an axis that makes a cold start, travels a certain distance and stops:
AXVACCE is the slope of the acceleration and deceleration ramps.

Acceleration/deceleration with SRAMP OF

Acceleration/deceleratione with SRAMP ON

FIDIA MDO1680 3-7

SRAMPTIME
Measuring Unit: ms
Valid values: [0;30000]
Default value: 50
Time it takes for the acceleration/deceleration to go from zero to the nominal AXVACCE value (and vice versa).
This parameter characterizes the S−shaped speed ramp and is used only when it is enabled. The maximum value is equal to
the value of the SAMPLE RTC2 parameter multiplied by 59. If a greater value is set, it is automatically limited.
The parameter value is linked to the jerk value: a high SRAMPTIME corresponds to a low jerk, and vice versa.

SRAMPJOG SRAMP during JOG movements

Default value: OF
Enables the “S” shaped feed ramp (SRAMP parameter logic) during manual movements and during the zero cycle.
Allowed values:
OF the S ramp is active only when a part-program or individual block is being executed.
ON the S ramp is active also during manual movements (JOG, handwheel) and during the zero cycle.

FMAXMANSLOW MAXimum Feed during MANual SLOW movement

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [1000;10000]
Default value: 5000
Maximum feed at which the CNC will move the axes in JOG mode when Rapid movement is not selected.
The value entered will be used for all the axes. Used to limit the maximum feed during JOG movements.

FMAXMAN MAXimum Feed during MANual rapid movement

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Allowed values: 1 – the smallest AXVSRT parameter value.
Default value: 10000
Maximum feed at which the CNC will move the axes in JOG mode when Rapid movement is selected.
The value entered will be used for all the axes. Used to limit the maximum feed during rapid JOG movements.
Useful for machine tools with a very high Rapid feed that is potentially dangerous if reached during a movement in JOG.

AXVSRTG01 XM AXV maximum feed during G01 movement

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: mm/min

Typical values: [0 or 5000-20000]
Default value: 0
Used to limit the axis feed (feed) during movements in G01 mode. If set to a value other than zero, when a linear interpolation
block (G01) is programmed the feed of the relevant axis is limited to the AXVSRTG01 value.
If set to zero, the feed is limited to the Rapid value (AXVSRT).

RETRVELOV RETRact and release VELocity OVerrided

Default value: OF
This is used for selecting the speed at which RETRACT and RELEASE movements will be executed. Valid values:
OF The RETRACT and RELEASE phases will be executed at a constant speed of 300 mm/min (the FEED potentiometre has no
effect).
ON The RETRACT and RELEASE phases will be executed at the programmed speed, depending on the FEED potentiometre.

3-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

3.6 LOCKING LOGIC PARAMETERS
AXSLCKM10 XM AXiS LoCK M10
YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables the mechanical locking logic of the axis when the M10 function is active. Valid values:
ON Axis locked in M10
OF Axis not locked in M10
When the M10 function is programmed, the axes that have the AXSLCKM10 parameter at ON are locked, while that axes that
have the AXSLCKM10 parameter at OF are not. In other words, each axis that has the parameter at ON remains locked when
movement is not required.

AXSLCKM12 XM AXiS LoCK M12

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables the mechanical locking logic of the axis when the M12 function is active. Valid values:
ON Axis locked in M12
OF Axis not locked in M12
When the M12 function is programmed, the axes that have the AXSLCKM12 parameter at ON are locked, while that axes that
have the AXSLCKM12 parameter at OF are not. In other words, each axis that has the parameter at ON remains locked when
movement is not required. This is useful for 5−axis machining in which the rotating axes have to be positioned and then locked,
while the linear axes must follow the machining continuously, without ever being disabled.

EXAMPLE
AXSLCKM12 XM = OF ;linear axes unlocked in M12
AXSLCKM12 YM = OF
AXSLCKM12 ZM = OF

AXSLCKM12 AM = ON ;rotating axes locked in M12

AXSLCKM12 BM = ON

MLOCKDEF DEFault LOCK Mode

Default value: 11
This defines the braking mode (M function) that is automatically activated when the system is turned on.
Valid values:
10 M10 function
11 M11 function
12 M12 function

If the parameter is not set at a valid value, the M11 mode is the default.

AXSLCKMOV XM AXiS LoCK MOVe

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Selects the behaviour of the axis when it is locked externally through the IDRB* bit.
Valid values:
ON When the IDRB* bit is at zero, the CNC allows the axis to be moved.
OF When the IDRB* bit is at zero, the CNC does not allow the axis to be moved.
If a movement is detected that is greater than the allowed tolerance, the CNC displays an error message.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-9

AXSIDRBL XM AXiS Lock ReQuest
YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables management of the IDRBL* bit on the axis, i.e. the external axis locking logic of the Fidia CNC. It must be set
only for axes which use that bit.
Valid values:
ON Enables use of the IDRBL* bit. When the bit is at 1, the axis operates normally. When it is at 0, the axis is disabled by the
CNC and can be managed through an external logic (e.g. it can be manually moved through a special pushbutton panel).
When the IDRBL* bit is at 0, the NC continues to display the axis position.
OF Disables use of the IDRBL* bit and is therefore not read by the CNC.

The axis is managed by the CNC even if the IDRB* bit is at 0. Therefore, it cannot be unlocked through an external command.

AXSIDTM XM AXiS MouNTed

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables management of the IDTM* bit on the axis.
It must be set only for axes which use that bit.Valid values:
ON Enables use of the IDTM* bit. When the bit is at 1, the axis operates normally. When it is at 0, the CNC ignores the
position of the axis (it does not read the incoming values from the transducer).
OF Disables use of the IDTM* bit and is therefore not read by the CNC. The position of the axis is read by the CNC even if
the IDTM* bit is at 0.

An example of the use of the IDRB* and IDTM* bits would be certain birotary heads which can be removed and remounted
without disactivating the CNC.
In such cases, the IDRBLA, IDRBLB, IDTMA, IDTMB bits (A and B are the rotating axes) originate from a microswitch and the
logic must be at 1 when the head is mounted on the machine, and at 0 when the head has been removed.
In this way, the axes of the head function normally when the head is mounted. When the head has been removed, the CNC
ignores the position of the axes (IDTM* bits at 0) and does not enable them (IDRBL* bits at 0).

AXSACTIVEIDTM XM AXS ACTIVE IDTM mounting logic

YM
ZM
AM

Default value: OF
Selects management of the IDTM* bit when the system is re-started and AXSIDTM is ON. Allowed values:
ON At power-on, the state of the IDTM* bit is read and the axis is considered to be in the state (mounted or not mounted)
indicated by the bit.
OF At power-on, the axis is considered to be in the same state (mounted or not mounted) as it was at power-off; the IDTM* bit
is then read which indicates the actual axis state. If the system is powered off while an axis is mounted, the axis is
disconnected electrically with the CNC powered off; when the system is powered on again, error messages may be
displayed.

AXTIMEIP XM TIME for AXis In Position

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: ms
Standard values: [10;10000]
Default value: 50
Idle time in order for the axis to be considered to be in position at the end of a movement.
It defines the conditions for axis locking.

3-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

AXTOLLIP XM TOLerance for AXis In Position
YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: mm
Standard values: [.001;1]
Default value: .03
Tolerance within which the axis can be considered to be in position.
It defines the conditions for axis locking.
It must be greater than the resolution of the counts from the axis transducer.
The AXTIMEIP and AXTOLLIP parameters act together to define the conditions that must be encountered so that the axis can
be considered to be in position at the end of a movement. When the axis is able to remain for at least the AXTIMEIP time within
the AXTOLLIP tolerance (with respect to the theoretical stop position), the CNC considers the axis to be immobile and executes
the relevant operations.
When the locking logic of the axis is selected (AXSLCKM10, AXSLCKM12, M10 and M12 functions), the CNC controls the
insertion of the mechanical brake when the axis is considered to be in position.

AXTOLLOF XM TOLerance of position for AXis locked

YM
ZM

Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;1.0]
Default value: 0
Position tolerance for axis locked by M10, M12 or AXSIDRBL logic.
If the axis is moved in such a way that the position error exceeds this threshold, a feed-hold is generated and the CNC will
display a message and set the PLC MAXTOL memory bit at high level.

AXTOLLOFEME XM AXis locked - TOLerance of position for EMErgency

YM
ZM
Unit of measure: mm
Typical values: [0; 1.0]
Default value: 0
Position tolerance for blocked axis with M10, M12 or AXSIDRBL logic. If the axis is moved in such a way that the position error
exceeds the AXTOLLOFEME threshold, the CNC will display the ECN347 or ECN348 message and the machine will go into
emergency. A value of AXTOLLOFEME > AXTOLLOF is usually entered so that the AXTOLLOF threshold will intervene first,
and then AXTOLLOFEME. If the position error of a blocked axis exceeds the maximum allowed value (AXVMINPE parameter),
the machine will go into emergency and the FCN181 message will be displayed.

AXTOLLOFEMED XM AXTOLLOFEME emergency Delay time

YM
ZM
AM
Unit of measure: ms
Typical values: [0;50]
Default value: 0
Introduces a delay before the intervention of the AXTOLLOFEME emergency logic.
If an axis locked by the M10, M12 or AXSIDRBL logic moves in such a way that the position error exceeds the AXTOLLOFEME
threshold for the AXTOLLOFEMED time duration, the message ECN347 or ECN348 is shown and the machine switches to
emergency.

OLDLOCKING
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: ON
If the parameter is ON, the RTCP logic, Virtual Axis (VIRCAN) or RETRACT-RELEASE can be activated even if the linear axes
are braked; the linear axes can be braked even if the RTCP logic, VIRCAN or RETRACT-RELEASE is active.
If the parameter is OF, the above is not allowed. Normally, the parameter is left ON and should not be modified.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-11

3.7 ZERO CYCLE PARAMETERS
AXSZPR XM AXiS Zero PRiority
YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 1
Makes the zero cycle mandatory or not mandatory. With the mandatory zero cycle, execution priorities can be defined as
desired. Valid values:
0 Execution of the zero cycle on the axis is optional.
N (where n is a whole number > 0).
Makes execution of the zero cycle on the axis mandatory after situations such as powering up again, loading the CNC
system or a counting emergency. The n value establishes the execution priority of the zero cycle. Therefore, if the axes
have different n values, the axis with the highest priority must first be moved, then the axis with the next highest value and
so on, to the axis with the lowest priority. Axes having equal priority (same n value) may execute the zero cycle in the
desidered order.
−1 The zero cycle is not executed.
This value is used for axes that do not have a zero dog (e.g. axes with a very short stroke). If the user requests the zero
cycle on the axis by mistake, the CNC does not perform any movements but instead displays an error message.

If the user issues the ZERO RQ command, the CNC automatically executes all mandatory zero cycles by moving the axes and
respecting the priorities set. Axes with equal priority (same n value) are moved at the same time. If two or more axes managed
by INDRAMAT drives with coded scales have the same zero priority, they will start to move simultaneously :
the first axis to encounter a line index executes the complete zero cycle, while the other axes are kept waiting, and so on.

Example of the setting of the AXSZPR table:

AXSZPR XM = 1
AXSZPR YM = 1
AXSZPR ZM = 2
AXSZPR AM = 0
AXSZPR BM = 0

If the parameter has been set as shown above and the user issues the ZERO RQ command, the following operations are
executed:
• the zero cycle is first executed on the Z−axis because it has the greatest priority
• the zero cycle is then executed simultaneously on the X and Y axes.
• in many cases, it is recommended that the tool axis be moved first, so as to “lift” the machine to a safety value where the
other zero cycles can be executed safely.

A mandatory zero cycle is required at least on the axes involved in the following logics:
• software limit switches
• multiple origins
• positioning using the Fidia PLC logic
• linearity correction and backlash recovery (ES10/CV Option);
• bi−rotary head axes with RTCP programming

AXVZPR XM AXV Zero PReset value

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [−2000000;+2000000]
Default value: 0
Assigns an absolute “preset” value (i.e. an absolute non−zero value) at the position of the axis zero home switch.
The value set will be displayed as the axis position when the axis is at the zero home switch. Given that it is an absolute value,
this occurs if the zero origin is selected or if the axis value has not been modified by a SET command since execution of the
zero cycle. If this parameter is modified directly in the SERVICE area, the new values must be activated by positioning the
relevant axes on the zero home switch. This parameter is particularly useful for rotary axes when they terminate the zero cycle

3-12 MDO1680 FIDIA

in an inclined position, i.e. when the tool is not parallel to one of the three main axes (the absolute zero position does not
correspond to the “orthogonal zero” position of the axis). In such cases, the parameter can be assigned so as to have a “preset”
value on the zero home switch of each rotary axis that is equivalent to the distance of the zero dog from the “orthogonal zero”.
In this way, the tool will not be inclined at the “absolute zero value” of the rotary axes, but will be oriented orthogonally to the
XYZ coordinate axes. This is an essential condition for operation of the RTCP Option.
The preset values can be determined as follows:
• execute the zero cycle on the axis
• assign the zero value to the point at which the cycle terminates (execute the SET command on the axis in question, after
entering the number 0 in the TVbuffer)
• position the axis at the “orthogonal zero” (*), i.e. at the point where the tool is parallel to one of the three coordinate axes
(XYZ)
• read the position of the axis on the monitor (next to AM, BM, CM, etc.)
• negate the value read, note it and assign it to the relevant AXVZPR parameter
• re−execute the zero cycle on the axis; at the end of the cycle, the CNC activates the new “preset” value
• check that the value assigned to the relevant AXVZPR parameter is displayed on the monitor at the end of the cycle
• position the axis at the “orthogonal zero (*) by programming a CNC format block
• check the correct position of the “orthogonal zero” and, if necessary, optimize it by repeating the previous points

(*) − If the “orthogonal zero” is not accessible because it is located beyond the limit switches, the axis can be moved to another
easily identifiable point (e.g. to 90°).

AXSCODZER XM AXiS CODed ZERoes

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
This defines the type of transducer mounted on the axis and, consequently, the execution mode of the zero cycle.
Valid values:
ON Measuring system with coded distance reference notches.
The AXVIIN, AXVIMD, AXSIDIR parameters must also be set in this case.
OF Standard measuring system (digital or analog)

AXVZFR XM AXV Zero−search Feed Rate and direction

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Valid values: ± value of AXVSRT parameter
Default value: 2000
Feed rate and direction of search for the zero microswitch. The value of this parameter defines the speed at which the axis
starts moving when the relevant zero cycle is executed. For obvious safety reasons, very high feed rates are not recommended.
The sign of this parameter defines the direction of the axis when the relevant zero cycle is executed.
Positive value = Positive direction
Negative value = Negative direction

Note for transducers without coded distance reference notches:

• AXVZFR defines the feed rate and the direction of the first search for the zero microswitch.
• As soon as the axis encounters the zero cam, its speed is reduced automatically (based on the zero cycle logic).
• This parameter must be set correctly before executing a zero cycle, otherwise the axis could go in the wrong direction and,
not finding the zero cam, will not stop.
• If the axis has a zero microswitch positioned at the center of its stroke, the search can be set in either a positive or a
negative direction. However, the user will have to position the axis in the opposite direction before executing the zero cycle
(this positioning can be done in JOG mode).

AXSNOIDX XM AXiS NO InDeX

YM
ZM
AM

FIDIA MDO1680 3-13

Default value: OF
Valid values:
OF If the axis uses the Index signal
ON If the axis does not use the Index signal
This parameter is useful for retrofitting machine tools without the Index signal, since it enables/disables the logic that reads the
Index signal during execution of the zero cycle.

AXSZZZ XM AXS Zig Zag Zero

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
This defines the behaviour of the axis during the zero cycle, after having reached the absolute zero cam (IDMZ* = high).
ON Movement is inverted, the axis comes out of the cam, inverts the movement again, returns to the cam and lastly, searches
for the reference (index) signal. These movements are executed at the AXVZFRZZ speed, which usually must be very
slow. This logic is advised for axes whose index and cam are so close that the relevant signals are received at almost the
same time, with the risk of the index not being detected.
OF The axis searches for the reference signal (index) at the AXVZFR speed without inverting the movement. This is the
normal situation recommended in most cases.

AXVZFRZZ XM AXV Zero search Feed Rate in Zig Zag mode

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Valid values: [± value of AXVSRT parameter]
Default value: 500
Final speed of the zero cycle in which the index is searched for. This is used when the zero cycle is executed in zig-zag mode,
i.e. when the AXSZZZ parameter is at ON. The values of the AXVZFR and AXVZFRZZ parameters must have the same sign,
otherwise the sign of the AXVZFRZZ will be changed automatically when the zero cycle starts.

AXSZEPE XM AXS Zero End Positioning Enable

YM
ZM
AM
Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
This enables/disables movement of the axis to a safety coordinate after a zero cycle, before starting the homing of axes with a
lower priority (AXSZPR). The coordinate is defined by the AXVZEP *M parameter. The movement is executed at the speed
defined by the AXVZFR *M parameter.

AXVZEP XM AXV Zero End Position

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [ 200000;+200000]
Default value: 0
This is the safety coordinate where the axis will be moved to after a zero cycle if the AXSZEPE switch is at ON.

3.8 CODED SCALES

Measuring systems (linear or angular) with reference notches at coded distances have indexes placed at progressively
increasing distances so that the absolute position of the axis can be determined by measuring the distance between two
consecutive indexes. The rest of the hardware (counting card and connection to the transducer) does not change with respect to
normal digital transducers. Software installation and the zero cycle, however, change radically.

3-14 MDO1680 FIDIA

3.8.1 DESCRIPTION OF ZERO CYCLE WITH CODED SCALES
The user must enter the ZERO command, as for the other types of transducers. The axis will be moved in the direction
established by the sign of the AXVZFR parameter (for two indexes) and the zero cycle starts :
• The axis will move towards the direction established by the sign of the AXVZFR parameter. After saving the position of the
three indexes, the axis will reverse direction.
• Another five indexes will be considered before the axis reverses direction again.
• The cycle will end after another four indexes.
• The data from the twelve saved indexes will be analyzed. If their positions and the relevant distances are correct, the zero
will be calculated by using the last pair of indexes.
• If the position of at least one index or the reciprocal distance between indexes is not correct, the zero cycle will be repeated.
The maximum number of repetitions is given by the value of the ZERCODRET parameter (if this parameter is at the zero
value, the cycle will not be repeated).
• If the zero is still not valid after all attempts have terminated, the CNC will check the setting of the MICROZERO parameter.
If it is at ON (value indicating the presence of a zero microswitch), the axis will execute the zero cycle by using the
microswitch as if there were digital transducers without coded scales. If, however, the MICROZERO parameter is at OF, the
cycle will not be run and a zero error will be indicated.
• Based on data obtained, the CNC will calculate the absolute coordinate of the axis. This will then be added to the preset
value (AXVZPR parameter).

During the cycle, the axis is moved forwards and backwards by at two AXVIMD (converted to degrees or mm). If the cycle is
repeated, the axis starts from a new position, which with respect to the initial position has shifted by the AXVIMD value in the
zero search direction. If the cycle is repeated n times, the axis will shift by the (n+2)xAXVIMD value in the zero search direction.
If a hardware limit switch is encountered during the search, a “ZERO ERROR” message will appear. In this case, it will be
necessary to move the axis away from the limit switch and give the ZERO command again. To avoid having the axis reach the
hardware limit switch during a zero search, a zero microswitch (cam) can be placed before the hardware limit switch. The zero
microswitch corresponds to the IDMZ* hardware signal. When this bit goes to high level, the axis will be moved in the opposite
direction for five indexes, the zero cycle will then start again. SERVICE pages displaying data for each index encountered
during the zero cycle (position of the index with respect to a fixed point on the line and distance from the first index obtained
during the cycle) are available for each axis for diagnosing malfunctions.
If the CHECKINDEX parameter is set to ON and an axis is moved in JOG or a zero cycle executed, the index value is displayed
with the message ICN373; this is useful for finding index positions manually.
If a coded line is changed, it will be necessary to replace it with one of the same type and then repeat the installation procedure.
The same type of coded scales must be used on two sides of a Gantry axis.

3.8.2 PARAMETERS FOR ZERO CYCLE WITH CODED INDEXED SCALES

These parameters are used only when the axis is equipped with a measuring system with coded indexed scale reference
notches (AXSCODZER to ON).

AXSIDIR XM AXS Indexed scales zero search DiRection

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 1
Direction in which the coded indexed scale has been mounted. Set one of the following values:
1 The scale was mounted in the direction that is concordant with that of the axis.
The absolute zero of the scale is located at the negative end of the axis (before the out−of−limit switch) and the entire
stroke of the scale will be in the positive direction.
−1 The scale was mounted in the opposite direction from that of the axis.
The absolute zero of the scale is located at the positive end of the axis (before the out−of−limit switch) and the entire
stroke of the scale will be in the negative direction.

AXVIIN XM AXV Indexed scales INcrement resolution

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: Whole number

Valid values: [1;2000000000]
Default value: 20
This is the coded increment (indexing distance).

FIDIA MDO1680 3-15

It is the increment that is obtained by measuring the distance between one pair of notches and the distance between the next
indexed pair of notches. This is obtained from documentation on the specifications of the measuring system.

N.B. – If the indexed scale transducer is connected to a FIDIA counting board (e.g. DCB), the unit of measurement is the
number of counting impulses; if the transducer is connected to Siemens drives, the unit of measurement is the number of
sinusoidal waves; if it is connected to Indramat drives, the unit of measurement is a ten thousandth of a degree or of a mm.

Example: If using a FIDIA counting board (e.g. DCB) and if the increment is 0.02 mm with a resolution of 1 micron, the value to
be entered is 20.

AXVIMD XM AXV Indexed scales Increment MoDule

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: Whole number
Valid values: [1;2000000000]
Default value: 20000
This is the repetition module.
It is the uniform interspace between the notches, i.e. the space between two corresponding reference notches (excluding the
intermediate notch which is to be found at a coded distance and is therefore variable). This is obtained from documentation on
the specifications of the measuring system.

N.B. – If the indexed scale transducer is connected to a FIDIA counting board (e.g. DCB), the unit of measurement is the
number of counting impulses; if the transducer is connected to Siemens drives, the unit of measurement is the number of
sinusoidal waves; if it is connected to Indramat drives, the unit of measurement is a ten thousandth of a degree or of a mm.

Example: If using a FIDIA counting board (e.g. DCB) and if the module is equal to 20 mm with a resolution of 1 micron, the
value to be entered is 20000.

ZERCODRET
Measuring Unit: Whole number
Typical values: [0;10]
Default value: 4
This is the maximum number of times the zero cycle will be repeated if the first execution was not successful.

MICROZERO
Default value: OF
This indicates if there is an axis zero microswitch present.
Valid values:
ON zero microswitch present; it is used as a limit switch during the zero cycle with coded scales; if the zero cycle with coded
scales does not end correctly after n attempts, the microswitch will be used to execute the standard zero cycle
OF no zero microswitch present

3.9 AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS

AXVKVD XM AXV KV Dynamic factor
YM
ZM
AM

AXVKVS XM AXV KV Static factor

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: (m/min)/mm

Valid values: [.001;2000000]
Default value: 1

3-16 MDO1680 FIDIA

The AXVKVD is the dynamic gain of the position loop, i.e. the Kv used when the axis is in movement (moved through
programming or in JOG mode with the AXSOLJ parameter set to ON).
The AXVKVS is the static gain of the position loop, i.e. the Kv used when the axis is at rest.
The switch from the dynamic to the static KV, and vice versa, is via a ramp.
In theory, the optimum Kv for the best performance and accuracy is the highest value allowed by the machine tool.
It should, however, be kept in mind that a high gain can cause vibrations on the axis. Therefore, the value can be increased only
provided that there is no vibration. Each time a new value is set, the behaviour of the axis must be checked to ensure that the
axis does not vibrate. This check is carried out with the axis at rest for the static KV, and during movement for the dynamic KV.
Note that axis stability will vary as the weight varies. In order to test the dynamic KV, the axis can be moved at the maximum
feed allowed via programming or in JOG mode. In the latter case, the AXSOLJ parameter must be set to OF.
Normally, the stability or instability of an axis can already be detected from these simple tests. However, if more accurate
information is required, the reference signal can be displayed via an oscilloscope.
The easiest method for optimizing the dynamic Kv of an axis consists of progressively incrementing the AXVKVD parameter
until a critical value has been precisely determined, above which value the axis would begin to vibrate. 75% of the critical value
can be assumed as the optimum Kv to be set in the AXVKVD parameter. In the case of axes which move the workpiece (e.g.
movable tables), a greater margin of stability is recommended and therefore a limit of 50% of the critical value should be set. Kv
optimization is essential for improving the behaviour of machine tools.
When more than one axis is moved simultaneously by the program, the CNC must use the same Kv for all the axes involved in
the movement − otherwise the path travelled would be incorrect. If the various axes have different Kv values, the lowest Kv of
the axes involved in the movement is used.
Considerations on the unit of measurement in which the values are to be set:
• if a decimal point is used: (m/min)/mm
• if a decimal point is not used: (mm/min)/mm

EXAMPLES
AXVKVD XM = 1. ; dynamic Kv = 1 (m/min)/mm
AXVKVS YM = 1500 ; static Kv = 1.5 (m/min)/mm

AXVKVW AXis Value KV Waiting

Measuring Unit: (m/min)mm
Valid values: [0;100.]
Default value: 0
Defines a different gain that will be used during the time interval when the axis is about to be enabled, i.e. from when UDSA* is
emitted to when the response IDA*P is received. This is useful for tandem axes with pre−loading.

USEDIFFKV USE DIFFerent KV

Default value: OF
This allows several interpolating axes to be moved using different Kv.
Valid values:
OF if the axes to be moved together have different Kv, the same Kv value, equal to the lowest Kv of the axes involved in the
movement, will be used for all of them
ON each axis is moved at its own Kv

When several axes are moved at the same time by the programming, the CNC must use the same Kv for all the axes involved
in the movement, otherwise an incorrect trajectory will be traveled. Therefore, under normal situations, the parameter must be
set to OF and should not be modified.
The ON value can be used with extreme caution only in very special situations, e.g. when the axes moving the tool have the
same Kv and the machine is equipped with one or more additional axes (EA10) that do not take part in the milling, but perform
other operations (axis positioners, tool change axes, etc.) and which can therefore be moved at a different Kv without
compromising machining accuracy.

DELTAKV
Measuring Unit: 1/(RTC2 . min)
Valid values: [1;100]
Default value: 20
This is used for regulating the time required for changing the Kv in the event there are more than one (different value for each
axis and/or different static and dynamic values on the same axis).
This parameter is not necessary if all the Kv are the same.
If DELTAKV is increased, the Kv changes will become faster, while the Kv changes will become slower when reduced. The
optimum value, found by using an oscilloscope, is when the axes do not vibrate and the reference signal furnished by the CNC
to the analog drives has a correct form (without oscillations overlapping the signal).
The value is expressed in 1/(RTC2 . min), which means that for each time interval of SAMPLE RTC2, Kv changes by DELTAKV.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-17

KVCHANGEINMOV
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If ON, when more than one axis move together (e.g. when a rotary axis moves in JOG with RTCP active) the same dynamic Kv
is used for all the axes in movement which is the smallest AXVKVD value for the axes involved.

FFWPERC Feed−Forward PERCentage

Measuring Unit: %
Valid values: [0;100]
Default value: 0
The feed−forward percentage that defines the type of loop used to control each axis.
The Feed Forward Control is usually used for High Speed Milling Machines.
The value zero selects position control with following error.
(See SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL AXES POSITION LOOP Section)
The value 100 selects position control in feed−forward mode.
Intermediate values select intermediate operation between following error mode and feed−forward mode.
With low percentages, slightly smaller circles than those programmed and rounded edges are obtained (too much material is
removed from external edges and material is left on internal edges).
With percentages that are too high, there are overshoot problems on the edges (too much material is removed from internal
edges and material is left on external edges).

FFWD
Measuring Unit: ms
Valid values: [0;50]
Default value: 0
Allows a high feed−forward percentage to be used while avoiding typical overshoot problems.
A simple way of optimizing the value of this parameter is to set the FFWPERC parameter to 95 and then perform an ERCI test
at a feed of 1000. The actual path will be bigger than the theoretical path: increase the value of the FFWD parameter until the
actual path is smaller than the theoretical path. The minimum increment to be considered corresponds to the value entered in
the SAMPLE RTC2 parameter.
When the Active Tuning logic is active (see CCOMP parameter), the value of the FFWD parameter is ignored.

AXVMINPE XM AXV Maximum Position Error for axis steady

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [1;6]
Default value: 1

AXVMAXPE XM AXV MAXimum Position Error for rapid traverse

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [1;6]
Default value: 2

AXVPEACC XM AXV Maximum Position Error during ACCeleration

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: mm
Valid values: [1;6]
Default value: 3
These parameters define the maximum error of the following error (following error = position error).

3-18 MDO1680 FIDIA

AXVMINPE
This is the maximum error of the error allowed when the axis is immobile.

AXVMAXPE
This is the maximum error of the error allowed when the axis is moving at maximum speed (Rapid).
For each feed rate less than Rapid, the CNC uses an intermediate tolerance value that is directly proportional to the feed rate.
AXVMAXPE is greater than AXVMINPE, since an increase in the feed rate requires a greater tolerance on the error of the error.

AXVPEACC
This is the value at which the tolerance increases during the acceleration and deceleration phases (phases in which a greater
tolerance is necessary).

Tolerance on the value of the error of the error

The error of the position error is calculated in different ways, depending on the type of position loop used. Only the behaviour of
the CNC in two extreme cases are examined here (see the description of the FFWPERC parameter):
• following error mode (FFWPERC parameter at 0).
The CNC calculates the theoretical position error based on the speed and the Kv of the axis. The error of the error is the
difference between the real position error and the theoretical one.
• Feed Forward mode (FFWPERC parameter at 100).
The CNC considers the theoretical position error null (except in the case of movement in RTCP mode), so the error of the
error coincides with the real position error.

AXSOLJ XM AXiS Open Loop Jog switch

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
In JOG mode and during the zero cycle, establishes whether movements on the axis will be executed with the position loop
open or closed.
Valid values:
OF JOG and ZERO with position loop closed;
ON JOG and ZERO with position loop open.

The position of the axis is not controlled in movements with the position loop open, but the theoretic voltage in order to move at
the feed set is simply given at output.

AXSCEE XM AXiS Counting Error Enable

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: ON
Selects how the system will react in the event of a counting error on the axis.
Valid values:

FIDIA MDO1680 3-19

ON The system switches to Emergency and displays an error message.
To reset normal operation of the axis, issue a RESET CNC COMMAND, return to Automatic mode and re−execute the
zero cycle on the axis (if the zero cycle is mandatory).
OF This value excludes a switch to Emergency. The system displays the relevant error message, but does not switch to
Manual mode and does not request execution of the zero cycle on the axis.

AXSCFE XM AxiS Counting Fault Enable

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: ON
Like AXSCEE, except that it selects the behaviour in the event of a position transducer fault.

AXVMUL XM AXV counting MULtiplying resolution factor

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: Whole Number
Valid values: [−2000000000;2000000000]
Default value: 10

AXVDIV XM AXV counting DIViding resolution factor

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: Relative Number
Valid values: [1;30000]
Default value: 1
The AXVMUL and AXVDIV parameters define the multiplication and division factors, respectively, for the counting on each axis.
They should be set based on different criteria, depending on whether the axis transducer is digital or analog, or heading toward
a digital drive.

DIGITAL TRANSDUCER:
The number of incoming pulses from the digital transducer of an axis is multiplied by the relevant AXVMUL parameter and
divided by the AXVDIV value. The installation technician should therefore define these parameters in such a way that the result
of this operation produces values expressed in tenths of a micron (for linear axes), or in ten thousandths of a degree (for rotary
axes). The parameter values should be entered respecting the following rules:
• the AXVMUL/AXVDIV ratio must be equal to the transducer resolution, expressed in tenths of a micron or in ten
thousandths of a degree
• only whole numbers should be assigned to both parameters. If the transducer channels have been inverted during
installation, negative numbers can be used in order to obtain a negative ratio.

EXAMPLE 1
X axis digital transducer with a resolution of 2.5 microns
AXVMUL XM/AXVDIV XM = 25 = 25/1
Consequently, the AXVMUL XM 25 and AXVDIV XM 10 values may be set.

EXAMPLE 2
Z axis digital transducer with a resolution of 2 microns
AXVMUL zM/AXVDIV zM = 20 = 20/1
Consequently, the AXVMUL ZM 2 and AXVDIV ZM 1 values may be set.
EXAMPLE 3
A axis digital transducer with a resolution of 5 thousandths of a degree
AXVMUL AM/AXVDIV AM = 50 = 50/1
Consequently, the AXVMUL AM 50 and AXVDIV AM 1 values may be set.

ANALOG TRANSDUCER:
The ratio AXVMUL/AXVDIV defines the number of tenths of a micron (linear axes) or ten thousandths of a degree (rotary axes)
present in a transducer pitch.

3-20 MDO1680 FIDIA

EXAMPLE
If the X−axis analog transducer has a pitch of 4 mm, the AXVMUL XM 40000 and AXVDIV XM 1 values may be set.

TRANSDUCERS TO DIGITAL DRIVES

The considerations previously made for analog transducers are also valid if the transducer is not managed by a DCB or ACB
board, but is directed to the digital drive, where it is read indirectly by the FIDIA CNC.
With FIDIA digital drives, AXVMUL and AXVDIV parameters are not used and the counting data are set by means of the special
configuration program and drive settings.

AXRDTIME XM AXV Ready TiMer

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: s
Typical Range: [1;10]
Default value: 3
This parameter sets the value of the watchdog which checks that the power−on or power−off command for an axis has been
effectively executed.
The CNC commands the power−on or the power−off of an axis by setting the UDSA* output to the 1 or to the 0 value. Each
time the CNC commands the power−on or the power−off of an axis, the relevant bit (IDA*P) indicating the axis power−on status
(bit at 1) or the axis power−off status (bit at 0) must assume the configuration required within the time set by the value of the
AXRDTIME parameter (see the figure below).
The time set must be slightly longer than the maximum average delay with which the system executes the power−on or
power−off command and changes the status of the IDA*P bit.
The following diagram shows the time intervals checked by the watchdog. Both the d1< AXRDTIME and the d2 < AXRDTIME
conditions are required.

Behaviour of the UDSA* and IDA*P signals

TINTOFFS Time for OFFSet INTegration

Measuring Unit: ms
Allowed values: [1;65000]
Default value: 5
Allows for adjustment of the reaction time between an offset occurring on the axes and its compensation.
By reducing this time, compensation is faster; if the time is increased, compensation is slower.

3.10 ADDITIONAL AXIS PARAMETERS

AXSROT XM AXiS ROTating
YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Defines whether an axis is linear or rotary.
Valid values:
OF Linear axis. The coordinates (programmed, displayed, recorded and assigned to the parameters) are expressed in
millimeters or inches, depending on the system of measurement selected.
ON Rotary axis. All the coordinates (programmed, displayed, recorded and assigned to the parameters) are always expressed
in degrees, independently of the system of measurement selected.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-21

The main X, Y and Z axes are almost always linear. In general, the installer will only have to define the variables relevant to the
additional axes (AM, BM, CM, etc.).

AXSROLOV XM AXiS ROLLOver

YM
ZM
AM
Default: OF
Defines whether a rotary axis is a rollover or not.
This must be defined for all rotary axes.
Valid values:
ON Rollover rotary axis. This logic is used for axes that can rotate in the same direction indefinitely and which must repeat the
same positions at each rotation. All axis positions are expressed by coordinates between 0/ and 360°/ (all programmed,
displayed and recorded coordinates stay within this range), independently of the revolutions already completed.
OF Normal rotary axis.
The positions of the axis are not reported within a single revolution, therefore they can be expressed by coordinates which
are greater than 360°.

AXSROLOVZERO XM AXS ROLLOVer after ZERO coded cycle

YM
ZM
AM

Allowed values: [ON; OF]

Default value: OF
If a rollover rotary axis parameter is set to ON, the axis is considered to be a rollover axis only after it has performed the zero
cycle with coded scales. It is only at this point that the axis position value is calculated between 0 and 360 degrees.

AXSROL
Default value: none
Name of rollover axis affected by the G12/G13 logic which allows negative scale factors to be set on a rollover axis to obtain
mirror-image machining work.

ZERROL
Default value: none
Name of linear axis parallel to the rollover axis when the latter is at the zero position. This axis has a parallel travel to the
through line between the 0 and 180 positions of the rollover axis affected by the G12/G13 logic.

EXAMPLE
AXSROL = AM
ZERROL = XM

3.11 VIRTUAL AXIS INSTALLATION

The virtual axis shaft is not a physical axis, but one simulated by the software. It moves in the same direction in which the tool is
oriented. This direction depends on the inclination of the rotary head. It can be moved like the other axes, through the part-
program and manually (in JOG, STEP, through the handwheel). It exists only when the relevant option is present, which in turn
requires the presence of the RTCP option. Only one virtual axis is managed per machine. The name with which the position of
the virtual axis is to be displayed must have the V extension (usually WV or VV) and must be defined in INIPAR.SET through
the AXNAME parameter.

EXAMPLE
Assigning the name WV to the virtual axis shaft on a machine tool equipped with only three physical axes.
AXNAME 4 WV

All the parameters required for operating the physical axes must also be defined for the virtual axis. Remember that the
AXSLCKM10 and AXSLCKM12 parameters relevant to the virtual axis must be ON, while the AXSCFE, AXSCEE and
AXSIDRBL parameters must be OF.

Other parameters:

3-22 MDO1680 FIDIA

VIRCYRESTORE VIRCan axis RESTORE
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If this parameter is ON, when execution of the fixed cycles along the virtual axis terminates (i.e. when the G80 function is
executed) the initial value of the virtual axis is restored.

VIRCANNORESVALUE
Default value: OF
Selects behaviour during the disabling of the virtual axis.
Allowed values:
ON when the virtual axis is disabled, its position is not set to zero; when the axis is re-enabled, it maintains this position.
OF when the virtual axis is disabled, its position is set to zero.

SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCHES:

To have management of the software limit switches on the virtual axis, the AXSWEOR parameter must be ON both for the
virtual axis and for the linear axes making up the movements of the virtual axis. The AXVPER and AXVNER parameters can
also be set for the virtual axis. If they are not set, the travel of the virtual axis is restricted to the limit switches of the linear axes
making up the movements of the virtual axis. In order to have correct behaviour at the software limit switches, the zero cycle
must already have been executed correctly on the linear axes involved in the movements of the RTCP and of the virtual axis.

3.12 HIRTH AXES INSTALLATION

Hirth axes are indexed axes that can only be "closed", i.e. mechanically blocked, when they are in certain positions. Outside of
these positions, the axes are managed as normal additional axes (usually rotary) and consequently require the setting of the
same parameters described above.

3.12.1 PLC PROGRAMMING

The logic that is responsible for blocking the axes when they are in a valid position must be developed through the PLC
programming language (see relevant manual), using the M*IRON and MDBL* memory bits.

M*IRON
PLC must read this bit in order to manage the indexed axis named * (* = X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W). It is placed at a high logic
level by the FIDIA CNC when Hirth axis * is in a position in which it can be closed. It drops to a low level in other conditions. It is
present only when Hirth axes are present. PLC must close the Hirth axis only and if M*IRON goes up to high level and UDSA*
drops to zero.

MDBL*
This bit can be written by PLC to manage an axis. When the CNC receives a high level bit, movements of axis * (* = X, Y, Z, A,
B, C, U, V, W) in JOG mode and through the handwheel are inhibited. This bit is always present.

3.12.2 INSTALLATION
In order to install the Hirth axes on software, parameters common to all the axes must be set, as well as the following
parameters which are present only when Hirth axes are present. If the machine has Hirth axes as well as additional continuous
axes, the Hirth logic must be disabled on the latter.

EXAMPLE
If the CM axis is a continuous axis, the following values must be set:
AXVHIRDST CM = 0
AXSHIRCEK CM = OF
AXSHIRALN CM = OF

AXVHIRDST XM AXV HIRth - DiSTance between two points

YM
ZM
AM

Measuring Unit: mm (linear axes) or degrees (rotary axes)

Valid values: [0; 360]
Default value: 0
This is the Hirth axis pitch, i.e. the increment between two consecutive valid axis positions (i.e. two positions in which the axis
can be "closed" mechanically). The zero value disables this logic. In this case, all axis positions are considered valid. The preset
value on the zero microswitch (set through the AXVZPR parameter) must make the zero position of the axis coincide with a

FIDIA MDO1680 3-23

position in which it can be "closed". When an axis is "closed", the position displayed on the screen is a multiple of the
AXVHIRDST value, although the CNC can receive a slightly different position from the transducer. When setting the origin of a
Hirth axis, a value must be used that is a multiple of the pitch; otherwise the message WCN366 is displayed.

AXSHIRCEK XM AXiS HIRth - ChEcK of the programmed position

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables checking of the programmed position.
ON Check enabled. If the programmed position is not a multiple of the value assigned to the AXVHIRDST parameter, an error
message is displayed.
OF Check disabled.

AXSHIRALN XM AXiS HIRth programmed ALoNe

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Enables/disables separate programming of the axis.
ON Function enabled. If the axis is programmed with another axis, an error message is displayed.
OF Function disabled.
The AXSHIRALN parameter must have the OF value for Hirth axes involved in the logic of the inverse RTCP (G92 function).

3.13 DISPLAY ONLY ADDITIONAL AXES (DA10)

These options manage axes that are not controlled by the FIDIA CNC, but whose positions are nonetheless displayed.
The axis positions are displayed on the screen taking into account the unit of measurement selected (UNIT MM/INCH) and the
type of each axis (linear, rotary, rollover). For these axes, the SET position value command only is available.

3.13.1 DEFINING AXIS NAMES

To define the names of display only axes, enter the relevant variables of the AXNAME parameter in the INIPAR.SET file.
Syntax:
AXNAME VSn = *M

where:
n is the sequence number of the axis (1, 2, …9)
* is a character representing the axis name; names of standard axes and axes managed by other options are also allowed.
The letter M that generally follows the axis name may be replaced by another character.

The names defined will be shown in the tabular axis parameters. It is recommended that the NAMESET utility program be used
for entering or changing axis names, rather than editing the AXNAME parameter by hand.

3.13.2 MACHINE TOOL PARAMETERS

For display only axes, it is sufficient to enter the following machine tool parameters in the INIPAR.SET file.
These correspond to the parameters of the same name used for other axes.
The difference being that the name is in the form AXVIS* instead of AXV* or AXS*.

AXVISCEE *M
Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: ON
If set to ON, this parameter enables management of the counting error on the *M axis.

AXVISCFE *M
Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: ON
If set to ON, this parameter enables management of the transducer fault on the *M axis.

3-24 MDO1680 FIDIA

AXVISROT *M
Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
If set to ON, the axis is considered to be the rotary type. Position values are therefore expressed in degrees (there is no
conversion when a UNIT MM/INCH command is executed).

AXVISROLOV *M
Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
If set to ON, the axis is considered to be the rollover type. Its position is therefore expressed by position values between 0 and
360°.

AXVISMUL *M
Allowed values: [-2000000000;2000000000]
Default value: 10
Multiplication factor for *M axis counting.

AXVISDIV *M
Allowed values: [1;2000000000]
Default value: 1
Division factor for *M axis counting.

3.13.3 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

AXVISPOS *M
Displays the axis position referred to the active origin.

AXVISMXA *M
Displays the axis position referred to the absolute origin. At the first power on and when the INIT command is executed, the
absolute origin is automatically located at the position in which the axes are found.

3.14 AUXILIARY AXES PARAMETERS

MAINT parameters for installing auxiliary axes (GP10 options) and auxiliary axes relating to the spindle (ES/AS options) are
described in the PLC programming manual in the relevant sections. If the auxiliary axes are managed by SIEMENS or
INDRAMAT digital drives, it will be necessary to also set the parameters for the digital drives as described in this manual under
the following chapters: INSTALLING SIEMENS DRIVES: INIPAR.SDD FILE GENERATION
INSTALLING INDRAMAT DRIVES: INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES INSTALLATION

3.15 SAMPLING PARAMETERS

SAMPLE RTC0
RTC2
Measuring Unit: ms
Valid values: 10÷30 for RTC0; 1÷10 for RTC2
Default values: 20 for RTC0; 2 for RTC2
The SAMPLE parameters table defines the various sampling times. Normally, only the RTC2 parameter, which expresses the
sampling time of the CNC, has to be optimized. The SAMPLE parameter cannot be modified by the WS user interface. In order
to modify this parameter, you must edit the INIPAR.SET file and give an INIT LOAD command to activate the new value.
The modification must be made under the direct control of FIDIA Customer Service. RTC0 can be left at the default value.

Optimization of the SAMPLE RTC2 parameter:

• Set up the worst possible working conditions:
• Simultaneously execute the milling part program with RTCP active and the largest number of interpolating axes
• Angular copying
• Display the MAINT table named LOOPFRQ (described below). The loop frequency of the CNC module cannot go below 50
cycles per second.
• Try to change the value of the SAMPLE parameter. Check the loop frequency of the CNC module for each new SAMPLE
value.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-25

• Determine a SAMPLE value that corresponds with a frequency of the CNC that is greater than 50 cycles per second and
store it in INIPAR.SET.

If a higher SAMPLE value is used, the capacity of the CPU will not be taken full advantage of.

MINFRQWARN
Measuring Unit: loop/s
Valid values: [0; 50]
Default value: 1
Used to set the minimum value of the loop frequency. If one of the LOOPFRQ values (CNC, PLC, etc.) goes below the value set
through the MINFRQWARN parameter, a WARNING message is displayed. This WARNING indicates that the system is
overloaded and is not very reactive. Enter the zero value to disable this control.

IOLUXREFRESH
Default value: ON
Selects the IO/LUX sampling mode.
Allowed values:
ON the IO/LUX inputs/outputs are refreshed after every SAMPLE RTC0
OF the IO/LUX inputs/outputs are refreshed after every alternate SAMPLE RTC0

3.15.1 DISPLAYING LOOP FREQUENCIES AND BCT

The LOOPFRQ table in the SERVICE area is used for giving detailed information on the loop frequency values and on the BCT
value (Block Cycle Time). It includes the following parameters (read-only):

CNC displays the number of cycles executed in 1 second of the CNC module
PLC same as above, but for the PLC module
USINT same as above, but for the USINT module
CNB same as above, but for the CNB module
BLKCNB displays the number of program blocks executed in 1 second. Note that blocks in which interpolations or cycles (e.g.
G02, G22) have been programmed are counted as the number of elementary segments executed.

MINCNC displays the minimum value reached by LOOPFRQ CNC; it is initialized by the RESET CNC command
MINPLC same as above, but for the PLC module
MINUSINT same as above, but for the USINT module

MAXCNC displays the maximum value reached by LOOPFRQ CNC; it is initialized by the RESET CNC command
MAXPLC same as above, but for the PLC module
MAXUSINT same as above, but for the USINT module

BCT during execution of a part-program, the minimum value of BCT is displayed in milliseconds; it is initialized with each new
execution

3.16 ACTIVE DAMPING PARAMETERS

The damping factor is an important parameter in determining the dynamic behaviour of an axis. The closer it comes to the unit,
the more the axis spikes are "damped", i.e. characterized by low Overshoot values and rapid depletion of the oscillation.
The damping factor can be obtained by executing the ERDI test, i.e. by examining the response of the speed ring of the axis
(with the ring in the closed position) to a step speed signal. When the Active Tuning logic is active (see CCOMP parameter), the
Active Damping logic is not followed and so the values of the relevant parameters are ignored.
The Active Damping logic is also available for Gantry axes: in this case, the same parameters are active on the slave axes as
on the master axes.

The damping factor can be increased for axes that need it by setting the following parameters:

AXVKAD XM AXV KV factor for Active Damping logic

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: n

3-26 MDO1680 FIDIA

Valid values: [0; 0.6]
Default value: 0
Gain for the Active Damping logic. When AXVKAD is at zero, Active Damping is disabled.

Procedure for determining the optimum value of AXVKAD:

Set the initial value at 0.1, then progressively increase it, repeating the ERDI test each time so as to obtain an overshoot on the
speed signal between 10% and 15%. AXVKAD must always be less than 0.8 to avoid dangerous situations of instability. We
recommend not setting values of AXVKAD *M > 0.6 unless in situations that require high damping.

ACTDAMPT XM ACTive DAMPing logic - compensation Time

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit : ms
Valid values: [1; 20]
Default value: 0
Compensation time for the Active Damping logic. The following formula is recommended for calculating the value:
ACTDAMPT *M = 1000/ω
where ω is the frequency of the *M axis expressed in rad/s, measured with AXVKAD *M at zero. The frequency varies from one
axis to another, therefore a value for each axis must be determined.

3.17 VIDEO PAGES FOR LOOK-AHEAD

Various video pages are provided for activating and configuring the look-ahead logics. To access the home page, press the
following soft keys: SERVICE + MAINT PARAMETER + LOOK AHEAD.

3.17.1 PARAMETERS
On the basic page the following parameters are present:

LAVACTIVE
Allowed values: [1,2,3]
Default value: 2
Indicates the look-ahead version active (V1, V2 or V3). By modifying the parameter, the desired look-ahead version can be
selected. The LAVACTIVE parameter is repeated on the pages for look-ahead versions V1, V2 and V3.
The look-ahead version can also be selected by the following programming functions:
G115 activates version 2; G116 activates version 1; G117 activates version 3.

GACTIVELA
Format: STRING
Contains a string listing the active G look-ahead functions. The look-ahead functions are: G51, G52, G53, G115, G116, G117,
G301 - G310. Active functions are listed in sequence, separated by a comma.

LAHPARSET
Format: STRING
It displays a string identifying G301-G310 active function and gives the corresponding look-ahead mode: (ex: roughing, finishing
etc). During the configuration phase, for each G301-G310 function it will be possible to specify a specific identifying string in the
LAHPAR_Gnnn LAHPARSET parameter.

Example
when a G302 function is active, the LAHPAR_G302 LAHPARSET set writing will be displayed in the LAHPARSET field and by
means of the IEX492 message.

3.17.2 SOFTKEY
The page contains the following soft keys; the related topics are described in the sections below.

ROUGH FINISH
Opens the page containing the LAHPAR_*** and CNCWTIM_*** parameter tables for the functions G51, G52 and G53.
The page contains the G301 – G310 soft key that enables other pages to be opened containing the LAHPAR_G301 -
LAHPAR_G310 parameter tables for the corresponding G301 - G310 functions.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-27

LOOKAHEAD V1
Opens the page containing the main parameters for look-ahead version 1 (e.g. LAHPAR table).

LOOKAHEAD V2
Opens the page containing the main parameters for look-ahead version 2 (e.g. part of the LABUFFER and LAHPAR tables).

LOOKAHEAD V3
Opens the page containing the main parameters for look-ahead version 3 (e.g. LASPLINES table, part of the LABUFFER and
LAHPAR tables).
The page contains the FFWD ACCEL soft key that gives access to the tabular parameters for acceleration feed-forward and
friction compensation.

RETRACT COMP
Opens the page containing the parameters for the following logics:
• AUTOMATIC RELEASE AT STEPS
• AUTOMATIC RELEASE AT CRITICAL POINTS

3.17.3 ACCEPERCXYZ E ACCEPERCROT

On each V1, V2, V3 LOOKAHEAD page a box with the following parameters (which is only a reading operation) is provided:

ACCEPERCXYZ
Standard value: 100
Acceleration percentage used by the XYZ axes.

ACCEPERCROT
Standard value: 100
Acceleration percentage used by the rotary axes.

3.18 LOOK AHEAD VERSION 1 PARAMETERS

A description is given below of the parameters used when look-ahead version 1 is active. Some of these parameters are also
used when look-ahead version 2 or 3 is active, as indicated in the relevant paragraphs.

CURVFILTER
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: ON

The value ON enables a look-ahead logic based on the spline curves that calculates the curvature feed of the path with great
precision and is used to improve milling quality. The value OF disables this logic.

ELECURVF
Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [1;9]
Default value: 7
This is the number of points that are considered when calculating the rate of curvature.
The recommended value is 7; normally, this value should not be modified.

LAHPAR* and CNCWTIM* tabular parameters for G51, G52 and G53 functions
The installer must set three separate sets of look-ahead parameters. These are identical in function but are used in different
situations. The names of the parameters are:
LAHPAR_RGH and CNCWTIM_RGH values for roughing out
LAHPAR_FIN and CNCWTIM_FIN values for finishing
LAHPAR_MED and CNCWTIM_MED intermediate values

However, the look-ahead is defined by the LAHPAR (tabular) and CNCWTTIME parameters. Therefore the values entered in
the *_RGH, *_FIN and *_MED parameters are not automatically active, but are only activated once they have been copied into
the LAHPAR and CNCWTTIME parameters.
The copying of the values is done by the CNC when the user programs one of the following functions:

G51

3-28 MDO1680 FIDIA

Preparation for roughing out. Copies the values of the LAHPAR_RGH and CNCWTIM_RGH parameters in the LAHPAR and
CNCWTTIME parameters and then activates them.

G52
Preparation for finishing. Copies the values of the LAHPAR_FIN and CNCWTIM_FIN parameters in the LAHPAR and
CNCWTTIME parameters and then activates them.

G53
Preparation for an intermediate machining operation between roughing out and finishing. Copies the values of the
LAHPAR_MED and CNCWTIM_MED parameters in the LAHPAR and CNCWTTIME parameters and then activates them.

Description of the look-ahead parameters:

LAHPAR* VCURV
Measuring Unit: mm/min
This parameter influences machining feed and accuracy and should be set according to the results desired.
High values correspond to higher feeds, but lower accuracy. Recommended values:
250 − 500 Machining is very accurate, but rather slow
500 − 1000 Intermediate situation
1000 − 2000 Machining is very fast, but less accurate

LAHPAR* RCURVTHR
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 5
It limits the feed according to the curvature. This is used for increasing accuracy in path segments having a very low curve
radius, lower than the value of the parameter (e.g. very small circles). If imperfections are found in these areas, try reducing the
value of this parameter by entering a value that is slightly higher than the curve radius.

RCURVTHRAMP
Measuring Unitt: n
Typical values: [0;5]
Default value: 0
This parameter reinforces the effect of the RCURVTHR parameter. During execution of a part-program, when the curvature
radius is less than the value of the RCURVTHR parameter, the relation between the feed calculated and the radius depends on
RCURVTHRAMP (by increasing RCURVTHRAMP, the feed is reduced).
The values 0 and 1 select a linear trend for the feed/radius graph. Higher values select a curved trend (2 = quadratic curve, 3 =
cubic curve, etc.) and so increase the reduction in feed as a function of the curvature.

LAHPAR* VANGMIN
Measuring Unit.: mm/min
Typical values: [0;100]
Default value: 0
Minimum speed of the axes on edges. This is normally left at the zero value, which causes the axes to stop at edges. To avoid
stops at edges, proceed in one of the following ways:
• Increase the value of the VANGMIN parameter. Low values (50-100) are recommended.
• Leave the VANGMIN parameter at the zero value and when executing a part-program, use the G105 function to round off
edges with parabolic fillets (this is recommended in the majority of cases).

LAHPAR* LMIN
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;0.1]
Default value: 0.04
Under normal circumstances, it should not be modified. It may be helpful to change the value when small notches are detected
on the workpiece following execution of part-programs originating from CAM systems that generate points in irregularly along
edges. In cases like these, check the part-program with the advanced functions on the Graphic Page (see User's Manual) to
detect very short segments along the edges. These can be eliminated by measuring the segments on the Graphic Page and
entering a value that is slightly higher than the measured length in the LMIN parameter.

LAHPAR* VCURVMIN
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [0; 1000]

FIDIA MDO1680 3-29

Default value: 100
Minimum axis feed during curves. If the axes move too slowly in path sections with a very low bending radius (e.g. very small
circles), try increasing the parameter value.

LAHPAR* VANG
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [100 – the smallest AXVSRT parameter value]
Default value: 5000
Maximum axis feed along edges. Normally, this parameter should not be modified.

LAHPAR* ANGMIN
LAHPAR* ANGMAX
Measuring Unit: degrees
Typical values: [0; 90]
Default value: ANGMIN=5, ANGMAX=20
These parameters define the minimum and maximum angles at which movement slows down and stops at edges.
The maximum angle must be greater than or, at least, equal to the minimum angle. If both angles are zero, the machine tool
stops at each segment. If both angles have the value 90, the machine tool only stops at segments forming an angle greater than
90 degrees. Normally, these parameters should not be modified.

CNCWTTIM* CNC WaiT TIME

Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
When set to ON, the machine will pause a few milliseconds on the edges in order to discharge the following error and obtain
sharper edges.
The following parameters are used for improving calculation of the end-of-block speed. They are normally left at the default
values. Contact Fidia Customer Service if it becomes necessary to modify them.

Parameter: Unit of Default Typical values:

measure: value:
SRAMPCACT ON/OF ON
SRAMPCOMP n 1.0 0.2 - 2.0
ANGFILTER ON/OF OF
LANGFILTER mm 0.1 0 - 0.5
VANGNEW ON/OF OF

Other look-ahead logic parameters:

NBLKCNBMIN MINimum Number of CNB BLocKs

Measuring Unit: n
Valid values: [1;100]
Default value: 50
This is the minimum number of program blocks that must be in the software buffer in order for execution of the part-program in
Automatic Continuous mode (MDCNC AV) to start after pressing the START CNC button. Keep in mind that the buffer must
contain a certain number of blocks in Automatic Continuous mode in order for the LOOK-AHEAD logic to be applied.
If the number of blocks goes below the value of the parameter during execution of a part-program, the axis feed speed will be
reduced. Under normal circumstances, the parameter should not be changed. It may be necessary to lower it if execution starts
up with an excessive delay after pressing the START CNC button, or if there are undesired slowdowns during execution.

STOP_G0END STOP at the start and END of the G00 blocks

Default value: ON
This defines the behaviour with reference to G00 blocks when the STOP CNC button is pressed in Automatic Continuous mode
(MDCNC AV). Valid values:
ON Machining will be interrupted when execution of blocks that have already been read has terminated. If, however, there are
G00 blocks in the blocks that were already read, the stop will take place before the next G00 block. If the STOP CNC
button was pressed while a G00 block was in execution, the stop will take place at the end of the block.
OF Machining will be interrupted when execution of blocks that have already been read has terminated. If, however, there are
G00 blocks in the blocks that were already read, they will be executed.

This logic can be selected when no stops are desired before or after G00 blocks.

3-30 MDO1680 FIDIA

3.19 LOOK-AHEAD VERSION 2 PARAMETERS
A second look-ahead logic calculates the end feed for each block during execution of a part-program. Its purpose is to optimize
accuracy and the feed when executing corners.
The specific parameters for look-ahead V2 are contained in the LABUFFER table:

LABUFFER
Parameter name Unit of measurement Default value Typical values
LABUFFERON ON/OF ON
PUNTI n 100 10 ÷ 200
DBG ON/OF OF
WRITEFILE ON/OF OF
LMAX [mm] 0.500 0.4 ÷ 1.0
FEEDMAX ] [mm/min 20000
JERK [mm/s^3] 25000.
JERKMIN [mm/s^3] 0.01 -0.05 ÷ 0.05
PSPLINE n 80. 0 ÷ 99.9999
PFEED . n 50. 0 ÷ 99.9999
PFEED n 99.99 0 ÷ 99.9999
PFEED2 n 99.9999 0 ÷ 99.9999
DIFFACCE ON/OF OF

The parameters below are also used by this logic (see the description in the relevant paragraphs).

LAHPAR
ANGMAX
ANGMIN
VANG
VCURV
VCURVMIN
RCURVTHR
VANGMIN
TOLPATH
STEPRTR
DELTAMAX
DELTATOEND
VMAXSTEP
RCURVTHRAMP
SRAMP
SRAMPTIME
SRAMPCACT
LOOKAHEADINT
NBLKCNBMIN
STOP_G0END

The LOOKAHEAD V2 page contains the main parameters for the look-ahead version 2.
Some related parameters are displayed on other pages, for example:
• DELTAMAX and VMAXSTEP are shown on the RETRACT COMP page.
• SRAMP, SRAMPTIME, SRAMPCACT and SRAMPCOMP are shown on the MAINT MISC page.

Some related parameters are not shown on the pages that can be recalled by the soft keys; they can be displayed only with the
Search function.

Normally, the parameters can be left at their default values. A description is given below of only those parameters that
sometimes need to be modified.

LABUFFER LMAX
Maximum distance between two consecutive points in the file being executed. If a point is more than the LMAX distance from
the preceding point, intermediate points are added in such a way that the distance between the various points is approximately
the LMAX distance. This procedure is termed “thickening the points”; if the look-ahead buffer is filled, the IEX448 message is
displayed and the program is immediately stopped. To solve this problem, try increasing LMAX.
This parameter can be left at its default value; if you wish to optimize the parameter, the following should be remembered:

FIDIA MDO1680 3-31

• By increasing the value, execution becomes faster but the feed calculation at the end of the block is less accurate.
• By reducing the value, the feed calculation at the end of the block is more accurate but there is a risk of slowing down
execution.

LABUFFER FEEDMAX
Maximum axis feed during the execution of a part-program.
If equal to 0, a maximum feed of 99999 mm/min is considered.

The ANGMAX, ANGMIN, VANG, VANGMIN, FEEDMAX parameters (some in the LABUFFER table, others in the LAHPAR
table) are used to limit the feed at the end of the block according to the angles found in the tool path.

Recommended values:
LAHPAR VANG 5000
LAHPAR ANGMIN 5.
LAHPAR ANGMAX 20.
LAHPAR VANGMIN 0÷200
SRAMPCACT ON (it is essential that this parameter is ON)

Other parameters that can be optimized (see the description in the relevant paragraphs):
LAHPAR VCURV
LAHPAR RCURVTHR
RCURVTHRAMP

3.20 LOOK-AHEAD V3

3.20.1 OPERATING DESCRIPTION

Main features of look-ahead V3:
• Transformation of the programmed path (part-program) into spline curves.
• Considers the acceleration and jerk when calculating the feed (calculation performed directly on the spline curves).
• Feed control by feed feed-forward at 100%, therefore nil following error at a constant feed.
• Acceleration control by acceleration feed-forward, therefore nil following error in acceleration.
• Error compensation during jerk by acceleration feed-forward, therefore nil following error during jerk.

Consequently, the following functions are available:

• Control of path error in space (by generating spline curves).
• Differentiated Kv on the three axes (nil following error).
• Absence of “intersecting passes” effect at corners and at jerk points, caused by asymmetry of the following error when
passing over corners and jerk points (nil following error).
• Complete control over the dynamic behaviour of the jerk, corner, curve and step as regards space and feed.
• Improved surface quality (approximation of the part-program corrected by algorithms of the spline curves).
• Optimized execution times (absence of interruptions, i.e. steps and corners, resulting in a minimum feed other than zero).
• Control of dynamic oscillation and consequent “wave” effect on finished surfaces (jerk).

The algorithm makes use of the acceleration communication channel to the current loop (in FIDIA Xpower drives) for controlling
acceleration (jerk).

3.20.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

When look-ahead V3 is active, calculation of the feed and acceleration targets to be passed to the drive is represented as in the
diagram.
The parameters indicated are described below. Normally, the technician optimizes the FFWACCETIME and FFWACCEJERK
parameters; the other parameters are often left at their default values.

3-32 MDO1680 FIDIA

3.20.3 PARAMETERS
The specific parameters for look-ahead V3 are given in the LASPLINES table:

LASPLINES
Parameter name: Measuring Unit: Default value: Typical values:
FEEDMIN mm/min 20 20-400
CORNERTOL Mm 0.02 0.01-0.5
RADIUSTOL Mm 0.001 0.001-0.02
STEPTOL Mm 0.1 0.01-1.0
JERKTOL Mm 0.02 0.001-0.1
FFWVELPERC % 100 0-100
FFWACCEPERC % 100 0-100
FRCOMPACTIVE ON/OFF OFF

Parameter description:
FEEDMIN Minimum axis feed
CORNERTOL Maximum corner error
RADIUSTOL Maximum error in sections with constant curvature
STEPTOL Maximum error in step zones. If zero, no step is recognized. If negative, the maximum tolerance is
calculated automatically and is equal to half the step detected.
JERKTOL Maximum error in jerk sections (sudden change in acceleration, e.g. when passing between a straight
line and a circle).
FFWVELPERC Feed feed-forward percentage
FFWACCEPERC Acceleration feed-forward percentage
FRCOMPACTIVE Activates/deactivates friction compensation

The following parameters are also used by look-ahead V3; see the relevant paragraphs for a description.

LAHPAR
VCURV

LABUFFER
POINTS
JERK
JERKMIN
DIFFACCE

3.20.4 FFWD ACCEL

Pressing the FFWDJ ACCEL soft key gives access to the tabular parameters for acceleration feed-forward and compensation of
friction. Each parameter has as many variables as there are axes, so each axis can have its own values that are different from
those of the other axes.

Parameter name: Measuring Unit: Default value: Typical values:

FFWACCETIME Ms 1.0 0-20
FFWACCEJERK n 0.0 0.0-15.0
FRICTIONCOMP ON/OFF OFF

FIDIA MDO1680 3-33

 FRCOMPVALUE mm/s^2 500.0 0-2000.0
FRCOMPSMOOTH n 500.0 0-2000.0

Parameter description:

FFWACCETIME
Acceleration feed-forward contribution that is within the feed target passed to the drive.

FFWACCEJERK
Indicates the acceleration feed-forward contribution that is within the acceleration target passed to the drive.

FRICTIONCOMP
Activates/deactivates friction compensation for each axis. This parameter is considered only if the LASPLINES
FRCOMPACTIVE parameter is ON.

FRCOMPVALUE and FRCOMPSMOOTH act as follows:

Depending on the theoretical axis feed, a contribution is calculated that will be added to the acceleration value and the result is
then passed to the drive.
The value of this contribution is equal to:

FRCOMPVALUE * [feed/(feed + FRCOMPSMOOTH)] if the theoretical feed is positive

- FRCOMPVALUE * [feed/(feed - FRCOMPSMOOTH)] if the theoretical feed is negative

where "feed" is the theoretical axis feed.

From the formula, it can be seen that if FRCOMPSMOOTH=0, the acceleration contribution is equal to FRCOMPVALUE if the
feed is positive; while it is equal to -FRCOMPVALUE if the feed is negative. As the value of the FRCOMPSMOOTH parameter
increases, the acceleration contribution will vary more gradually at inversion of the feed, as can be seen in the diagram below.

3.21 LAHPAR_G3** TABULAR PARAMETERS FOR G301 - G310

FUNCTIONS
The installer can set different sets of values for the look-ahead parameters. Generally, each set of values is prepared so as to
optimize a specific machining case. The values in a set are ativated when the user programs the corresponding G301 – G310
function. The sets of values are entered in the following parameter tables:

LAHPAR_G301 table with the values activated by the G301 function

LAHPAR_G302 table with the values activated by the G302 function
...
LAHPAR_G310 table with the values activated by the G310 function

Remember that the values entered in the LAHPAR_G3** tables are not active immediately but only when they are copied into
the corresponding look-ahead parameters, i.e. into the LABUFFER, LAHPAR, etc. tables. The values are copied and activated
by the CNC when the user programs one of the G301 – G310 functions. These functions are modal (they cancel each other). At
power-on of the CNC, the look-ahead parameters that were active at the preceding power-off remain active.

3.22 JM2T OPTION

This option optimizes behaviour when edges are encountered (it can reduce execution time, etc.).

3-34 MDO1680 FIDIA

MAINT Look-Ahead parameters for the JM2T option:

JM2T
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: ON
Activates/deactivates the JM2T logic.

JM2TA
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [0; 500]
Default value: 250
Sets the feed filter used when edges are encountered.

JM2TC
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [0; 1000]
Default value: 500
Sets the feed filter used when the tool has to slow down owing to curvature problems.

3.23 ACTIVE TUNING

Active Tuning (ES10/AT Option) is a Fidia CNC algorithm that allows for:
• obtaining better surface quality;
• obtaining greater milling precision;
• minimizing installation times.

Installation times are kept to a minimum owing to the fact that the CNC calculates a series of parameters automatically in order
to optimize axis performance. The only parameter to be set in relation to Active Tuning is CCOMP; it is used to minimize path
error over curvilinear paths. This parameter should be set as follows: perform an ERCI test with a radius of 50 mm and Feed
equal to the normal machining feed on any pair of axes (use a high VCURV value so as not to lower the feed) and evaluate the
average error on the radius. If the actual radius is less than the theoretical radius, CCOMP must be increased; if the actual
radius is more than the theoretical radius, CCOMP must be decreased. The value of CCOMP may range between –200 and
+200. The optimum value is that where the actual radius is less than the theoretical radius by .005 mm, so as to be in a safety
condition. When Active Tuning is active, the feed-forward and Active Damping are automatically disabled since the Active
Tuning algorithm encompasses both functions. The setting procedure therefore consists in setting the Kv, acceleration and
Sramp only, in addition to the drive parameters. Setting the look-ahead parameters then allows for a choice to be made
between precision and speed of execution. Active Tuning is disabled by setting the XYZNU1 OF parameter. The only condition
for the operation of Active Tuning is that the sampling time (SAMPLE RTC2) is no greater than 4 msec., independently of the
type of CPU, the drives, etc. If the sampling is higher, the XYZNU1 parameter will automatically be set to OF. Since the
introduction of Active Tuning enables a better surface quality and greater milling precision to be obtained, it is possible to
choose by means of the look-ahead parameters whether to have these benefits and the same execution time, or whether (by
increasing VCURV, for example) to reduce the execution time and still have the same surface quality and precision. Active
Tuning has a “damping” effect on the axes. This means it is possible to obtain improved performance by increasing the drive
gain values (increasing the proportional gain and decreasing the time constant for the integral gain) and also, at times,
increasing the CNC gain (AXVKVD parameter). By taking advantage of these possibilities, performance can be significantly
improved. At a first approximation, it can be said that Active Tuning alone results in an improvement in machine performance by
10-15%, while if accompanied by optimization of the drive parameters the improvement may be as much as 30% (by
performance is meant, depending on specific cases, an improvement in precision and surface quality with the same execution
speed, or a faster execution speed with the same precision and surface quality).

3.24 AUTOMATIC RELEASE ON STEPS

If the STEPRTR is set to ON, the CNC will automatically detect the points where the increase (Step) between one pass
executed in one direction and the next pass executed in the opposite direction takes place during execution of a program. The
tool executes a brief release corresponding to the increase in order to avoid notches on the workpiece. For this same reason, if
a program containing one or more steps is in execution, execution will be stopped at the first step following the blocks that have
already been calculated when the STOP button is pressed. The above logic is disabled when the STEPRTR parameter is OF.
If the virtual quill axis is active the release movement takes place along the virtual axis, otherwise the release is along the tool
axis. The following parameters are set in MAINT during the installation phase:

STEPRTR ReTRact on STEP

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the logic for automatic release on steps

FIDIA MDO1680 3-35

Valid values:
ON logic enabled
OF logic disabled

The G250 programming function sets the value ON, while the G251 function sets the value OF.

DELTAMAX
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;2]
Default value: 0.2
Release entity. The step is executed with the tool raised at a height equal to or less than the DELTAMAX.

DELTATOEND
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;2]
Default value: 0.3
Distance from the step at which the tool release begins.

VMAXSTEP MAXimum speed on STEP

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [0;1000]
Default value: 0
Speed of the axes during a step.

RETRACTINCRINT
Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [20;300]
Default value: 150
The parameter value is directly proportional to the feed at which the tool axis rises during the automatic release (at steps and at
other critical points). Normally, the default value is left. If the value is increased, the tool axis release is faster; if the value is
reduced, the release is slower.

The figure illustrates the behavior in correspondence with a step:

• The continuous lines indicate the programmed path (path followed when STEPRTR is at OF).
• The hatched lines indicate the path followed at VMAXSTEP speed when STEPRTR is at ON.

The following parameters are used for improving dynamic behavior on steps, for example, to reduce the execution time of part-
programs. They are usually left at their default values. Contact Fidia Customer Service if it becomes necessary to modify them.

Measuring Default
Parameter: Typical values:
Unit: value:
SRAMPCOMP n 1.0 0.2 - 2.0
SRAMPAX n 1.0 0 - 1.0

3.24.1 AUTOMATIC RELEASE AT CRITICAL POINTS

FEEDMINRTRACTIVE
Default value: OF
Activates/deactivates the FEEDMINRETRACT parameter logic for automatic release at critical points executed at low feed
(edges or sections with high curvature).
Allowed values:
ON logic active
OF logic deactivated

3-36 MDO1680 FIDIA

The G252 programming function sets the value ON, while the G253 function sets the value OF.

FEEDMINRETRACT
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [0;300]
Default value: 0
At the end of the execution of a block, if the feed calculated is less than the value of this parameter, the tool automatically
performs a short release to avoid making any marks on the part. This parameter is similar to that for automatic release at
STEPS. This logic is active if the FEEDMINRTRACTIVE parameter is ON.

FEEDMINDMAX
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;2]
Default value: 0.2
Quantity of the release. Each critical zone (made up of one or more consecutive points, characterized by low feed) is executed
with the tool raised by a value that is less than or equal to FEEDMINDMAX.

FEEDMINDELTAS
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [0;50]
Default value: 0
Distance from the critical zone at which tool release occurs. This parameter is managed in look-ahead versions V2 and V3 only.
It enables the area executed with the tool raised to be extended.
• FEEDMINDELTAS millimetres before the critical zone, the release ramp starts
• FEEDMINDELTAS millimetres after the critical zone, the return ramp starts.

RETRACTINCRINT
Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [20;300]
Default value: 150
The parameter value is directly proportional to the feed at which the tool axis rises during the automatic release (at steps and at
other critical points). Normally, the default value is left. If the value is increased, the tool axis release is faster; if the value is
reduced, the release is slower.

3.25 ROTATION AND/OR TRANSLATION PARAMETERS

ROTSEQ ROTation SEQuence
Defines the sequence in which rotations around the axes (RX, RY, RZ functions) are executed when the G21 function is active.
The value entered is activated when a G21 function is programmed. The table below lists the values allowed and, for each
value, gives the corresponding sequence in which the rotations are executed.
Values: Sequence of rotations:
RXRYRZ X Y Z
RXRZRY X Z Y
RYRXRZ Y X Z
RYRZRX Y Z X
RZRXRY Z X Y
RZRYRX Z Y X

3.26 AXES ENABLING LOGIC

When an axis is managed by FIDIA digital drives, the axis enabling logic is selected by the following parameters:

AXAUTOUDSAX XM
YM
ZM
AM

Allowed values: [ON; OF]

FIDIA MDO1680 3-37

Default value: ON

AXAUTOIDAXP XM
YM
ZM
AM

Allowed values: [ON; OF]

Default value: OF

For auxiliary axes, the similar AUXAUTOUDSAX and AUXAUTOIDAXP parameters are used.

The axis enabling logic uses the following CNC I/O signals (bits):
• UDSAX and IDAXP are standard CNC bits.
• IDENX is a CNC input and is the axis enabling command from the PLC.
• UDXOK is a CNC output and is the axis enabled confirmation to the PLC.

The AXIDAXP (AUXIDAXP for auxiliary axes) read-only parameter contains the UDXOK bit status and is used by the PLC to
determine whether the machine tool axis is powered and ready for use. A value of zero means UDXOK is at 0; a value other
than zero means UDXOK is at 1.

The names of the bits for the various axes are IDEN* and UD*OK
where * = X, Y, Z, ... (main machine tool axes)
X1, Y1, Z1, ... (X, Y, Z, ... gantry axes)
1, 2, 3, ... (auxiliary axes)
To use the IDENX and UDXOK bits in the IEC1131 program, you must define them as "MEMORY" in the INIPAR.DEF file, run
the PROFIBUSGEN.EXE utility and then use the IEC1131GEN function in the utility.

When the AXAUTOUDSAX XM and AXAUTOIDAXP XM parameters are both OF, the correct procedure for enabling the X axis
is as follows:
• the CNC wants to enable the axis and sets the UDSAX enabling request bit to 1;
• after performing its operations, the PLC orders the CNC to enable the axis drive by setting the IDENX bit to 1; at this point,
the axis is fully enabled;
• once the axis drive is enabled (axis powered and ready for use), the CNC sets the UDXOK bit to 1;
• the PLC sets the IDAXP bit to 1 so that the CNC keeps the axis enabled and can start the movement.

The disabling sequence is the same, except that the bits are set to 0.

If the AXAUTOUDSAX parameter is ON, the UDSAX value is automatically copied into IDENX; the copy is made internally and
so IDENX is not available as a physical bit and is not managed by the PLC.
If the AXAUTOIDAXP parameter is ON, the UDXOK value is automatically copied into IDAXP; the copy is made internally and
so IDAXP is not available as a physical bit and is not managed by the PLC.

Further examples of axis enabling are given below:

AXAUTOUDSAX XM ON and AXAUTOIDAXP XM OF:

• the CNC wants to enable the X axis: it sets the UDSAX bit to 1 and enables the drive;
• the PLC must set the IDAXP bit to 1 so that the CNC keeps the axis fully enabled and can start the movement.

AXAUTOUDSAX XM ON and AXAUTOIDAXP XM ON:

• the CNC wants to enable the X axis: it sets the UDSAX bit to 1 and enables the drive;
• the IDAXP bit is managed automatically, so it is not necessary to implement a PLC logic to manage it.

3.26.1 SPINDLE
The above parameters and bits for the axes are also used for the spindle; the names of the bits and parameters change, but
their operation is the same.

Axis version: Spindle version:

AXAUTOIDAXP (XM YM ..) SP1AUTOIDRTM (SP2AUTOIDRTM)
AXAUTOUDSAX (XM YM ..) SP1AUTOUDSMOA (SP2AUTOUDSMOA)

3-38 MDO1680 FIDIA

 UDSAX (UDSAY ..) UDSMO / UDSMA (UDSMO2 / UDSMA2)
IDENX (IDENY ..) MS1ENCMD (MS2ENCMD)
UDXOK (UDYOK ..) MS1SRD (MS2SRD)
IDAXP (IDAYP ..) IDRTM (IDRTM2)
AXIDAXP (XM YM ..) SP1OWNERIDRTM (SP2OWNERIDRTM)

3.27 DYNAMIC AXIS MONITORING AND LOOK AHEAD

A description is given below of parameters that are useful for a dynamic analysis of CNC systems and machine tools.
These are read-only parameters that are managed by the oscilloscope integrated in the CNC and therefore suitable for
measurement purposes.
Unless otherwise specified, the parameter is managed for all look-ahead versions (V1, V2 and V3).

ACCEOUTVEL
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Vectorial acceleration modulus calculated considering the target feed passed to the drives.

ACCEREALINT
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Vectorial acceleration modulus calculated considering the transduced axis positions.

ACCESPLINE
Format: DOUBLE
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Curvature acceleration modulus calculated for each block to which the limit set in LAHPAR VCURV applies.
This parameter is managed for the following look-ahead versions only: V2 and V3

ACCETEOINT
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Vectorial acceleration modulus calculated considering the theoretical axis positions as calculated by the CNC.

AXSCNTDIF XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Difference between the values transduced by two different counting devices (motor and transducer).

AXSOUT XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: (mm/min) * 100
Target feed passed to the drive.

AXSOUTACCE XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Acceleration per axis calculated on the target feed passed to the drive.

AXSOUTJERK XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^3
Jerk per axis calculated on the target feed passed to the drive.

EFERROR XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Error in the following error, calculated with respect to the theoretical following error value.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-39

ERRVEL XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Difference between the theoretical feed and the transduced feed.

ERRSPLINEINT
Format: LONG
Measuring Unit: 0.0001 mm
Path error (obtained with look-ahead V3) with respect to the theoretical path. The value is updated in real time. This parameter
is managed in look-ahead V3 only.

F
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Programmed axis feed.

FEED
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Programmed axis feed, downstream from the potentiometer and any other limitations.

FEEDENDOFBLOCK
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
End of block feed calculated by the Look-Ahead.
FERROR
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Following error.

FREAL
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Tool tip feed, calculated in loops starting from the transduced values.

FREALINT
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Tool centre head feed, calculated in interrupts starting from the transduced values.

FTEOINT
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Tool centre head feed, calculated in interrupts starting from the theoretical values.

INSTACCE XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Acceleration per axis calculated starting from the transduced values.

INSTSPA XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Distance delta travelled during the last sampling, calculated by the main counting device.

INSTSPA2 XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Distance delta travelled during the last sampling, calculated by the second counting device.

3-40 MDO1680 FIDIA

INSTVEL XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Feed per axis calculated starting from the values transduced by the main counting device.

INSTVEL2 XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Feed per axis calculated starting from the values transduced by the second counting device.

JERKSPLINE
Format: DOUBLE
Unit of Measurement: m/s^3
Jerk module calculated for each block to which the limit set in LABUFFER JERK applies.
This parameter is managed for the following look-ahead versions only: V2 and V3

M.XA XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Transduced position of the XM axis, referred to the absolute zero.
M.XT XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Theoretical position of the XM axis, referred to the absolute zero.

N
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: whole number
Number of the block being executed.

NBLK
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: whole number
Number of blocks contained in the CNC execution buffer.

POSITION XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: 0.0001 mm
Axis position value according to the origin in use, referred to the tool tip (position value displayed on the video).

TEOACCE XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: m/s^2
Theoretical axis acceleration calculated starting from the theoretical position values.

TEOVEL XM
Format: LONG
Unit of Measurement: mm/min
Theoretical axis feed calculated starting from the theoretical position values.

FIDIA MDO1680 3-41

3-42 MDO1680 FIDIA
4 SPINDLE INSTALLATION

4.1 CHECKING AND SETTING THE SPINDLE

These operations are used for checking and optimizing the behaviour of the spindle.
Before making the settings, ensure that the characteristics of the spindle have been defined

4.1.1 RANGE CHANGE (FOR SPINDLE IN DC ONLY)

Before starting the check, ensure that the spindle parameters have been correctly defined (SP1 group). Verify that the range
change is functioning properly by programming the following functions:
M41= low range
M42= medium range 1
M43= medium range 2
M44= medium range 3
M45= high range

By programming the M40 function, the choice of the range is done automatically, depending on the S programmed.

4.1.2 SPINDLE START AND STOP (FOR SPINDLE IN AC OR DC)

Verify that the spindle starts in a clockwise direction when the M03 function is programmed and that the spindle in rotation
response when the number of revolutions is reached arrives through the IDRTM digital signal. Repeat the procedure by
programming the M04 function, rotation should now be counter clockwise. When switching from one rotation function to another,
always program the M05 stop function and the IDRTM digital signal, once the function has been executed, must go to zero.
If the spindle rotation direction does not correspond to the function programmed, the following operations must be executed on
the spindle drive:
• spindle in AC: exchange the wires between the UDSMO and UDSMA signals
• spindle in DC: invert the UAVM analog reference

If it is not used, also check that the IDIRM digital signal status is at zero. In all cases with a spindle in DC, a negative UAVM
reference corresponds to the M03 function and a positive reference to the M04 function.

4.1.3 VERIFYING THE NUMBER OF SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS (FOR SPINDLE

IN DC ONLY)
After the range change and spindle start and stop checks, it is necessary to compare using a revolution counter the spindle
speed read on the terminal monitor with the effective number of spindle revolutions. If there are differences, adjust the gain
potentiometre on the spindle drive. If necessary, also modify spindle range parameters SP1RANGE.

4.2 SPINDLE PARAMETERS

These parameters define the technical characteristics of the first D.C. or A.C. spindle. These stand out since their names start
with the characters SP1. The parameters for a second spindle are identical, however, their names would start with the
characters SP2.

SP1ENABLE SPindle 1 ENABLEd

Default value: ON
This enables/disables management of the spindle. With double spindle it allows to manage one spindle at a time.
Valid values:
ON spindle enabled
OF spindle disabled

SP1DC SP1 DC spindle

Default value: ON
Defines whether the spindle operates under direct current or alternating current
Valid values:
ON direct current spindle (DC)
OF alternating current spindle (AC)

FIDIA MDO1680 4-1

SP1GEAR SP1 spindle with GEAR
Default value: OF
Defines whether the spindle has speed range change logic.
Valid values:
ON spindle with range gear
OF spindle without range gear

SP1RANGE MIN_LG SP1 Low RANGE values

MAX_LG
V_LG
ACCEPERC_LG
MIN_G1 SP1 RANGE 1 values
MAX_G1
V_G1
ACCEPERC_G1
MIN_G2 SP1 RANGE 2 values
MAX_G2
V_G2
ACCEPERC_G2
MIN_G3 SP1 RANGE 3 values
MAX_G3
V_G3
ACCEPERC_G3
MIN_G4 SP1 RANGE 4 values
MAX_G4
V_G4
ACCEPERC_G4
MIN_HG SP1 High RANGE values
MAX_HG
V_HG
ACCEPERC_HG

The SP1RANGE table defines the values of the spindle speed range. It is used only when the spindle is operating in DC.
The following are the speed ranges, in descending order:
High range
Intermediate range 4
Intermediate range 3
Intermediate range 2
Intermediate range 1
Low range

Obviously only those ranges that are actually managed by the software need to be defined.

EXAMPLE
If the software is predisposed for managing four ranges (this is a common case), only the values for the following ranges need
to be defined:
High range
Intermediate range 2
Intermediate range 1
Low range
The SP1RANGE table contains the following parameters:

SP1RANGE MIN_HG
Measuring unit: rpm
Valid values: [0;2000000000]
Default value: 0
Minimum number of revolutions in the high range.

4-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

SP1RANGE MAX_HG
Measuring unit: rpm
Valid values: [0;2000000000]
Default value: 0
Maximum number of revolutions in the high range.
SP1RANGE V_HG
Measuring unit: V
Valid values: [-10;+10]
Default value: 0
Reference voltage that must be given on the analog output to the spindle to make it rotate at the maximum speed of the high
range, i.e. MAX_HG.

SP1RANGE ACCEPERC_HG
Unit of measurement: %
Allowed values: [0;100]
Default value: 0
Percentage of spindle acceleration (% of SP1ACCE) used when the high range is inserted.
The ACCEPERC_** parameters reduce the acceleration for some ranges.
The values 0 and 100 disable the reduction; in these cases, the acceleration = SP1ACCE

f the spindle only has one range, the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters define the values for only
that speed range. Instead, if the spindle has more than one speed range, the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG
parameters only define the values for the high range, which is selected through the M42, M43, M44, M45 or M46 programming
function (depending on the number of ranges managed by the software).
SP1RANGE V_HG parameters cannot be set at values greater than 9V since it is not possible to supply more than 9V on
analog output signals on Series C systems.
Negative values are also accepted. In this case the output voltage will be inverted.

SP1RANGE MIN_LG SP1 low RANGE values

MAX_LG
V_LG
ACCEPERC_LG

These are similar to the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters, but define the values for the low range,
which is selected through the M41 programming function.
These exist only if the spindle has more than one speed range.

SP1RANGE MIN_G1 SP1 RANGE 1 values

MAX_G1
V_G1
ACCEPERC_G1

These are similar to the MIN_HG, MAX_HG V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters, but define the values for the first
intermediate range, which is selected through the M42 programming function. These exist only if the spindle has more than two
speed ranges.

SP1RANGE MIN_G2 SP1 RANGE 2 values

MAX_G2
V_G2
ACCEPERC_G2

These are similar to the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters, but define the values for the second
intermediate range, which is selected through the M43 programming function. These exist only if the spindle has more than
three speed ranges.

SP1RANGE MIN_G3 SP1 RANGE 3 values

MAX_G3
V_G3
ACCEPERC_G3

These are similar to the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters, but define the values for the third
intermediate range, which is selected through the M44 programming function. These exist only if the spindle has more than four
speed ranges.

FIDIA MDO1680 4-3

SP1RANGE MIN_G4 SP1 RANGE 4 values
MAX_G4
V_G4
ACCEPERC_G4

These are similar to the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG parameters, but define the values for the fourth
intermediate range, which is selected through the M45 programming function. These exist only if the spindle has more than five
speed ranges.

The following figure illustrates the relationship between the range and the MIN_HG, MAX_HG, V_HG and ACCEPERC_HG
parameters (the assumption in this example is MAX_HG speed with a voltage of 9V):

The different ranges of a spindle can also be overlapped.

The table and the figure below illustrate an example of a spindle having three partially overlapping ranges.

minimum value maximum value

high range 2000 3500
intermediate range 1000 2500
low range 10 1500

The parameters for all ranges managed by the software must be defined, even if some of them are not used. The unused
ranges must have the MIN_G*, MAX_G* and V_G* parameters at the 1 value (or at zero).
If, for example, the software is predisposed for managing four ranges, but the spindle only has two physical ranges (low and
high), proceed in one of the following modes:
a) Use the bits of the low range and those of the high range to assign the 1 value to the parameters of the two intermediate
ranges, which are not used. In this case, the low range is selected through the M41 function and the high range through
the M44 function.
b) Use the bits of the low range and those of intermediate range 1 to assign the 1 value to the parameters of range 2 and the
high range, which are not used. In this case, the low range is selected through the M41 function and the high range using
the M42 function.

A part program running on a system configured mode 'a' cannot run on a system configured in mode 'b' and vice versa,
otherwise emergency messages will appear for ranges that were not entered.
This limitation occurs only if there are range change functions (M41, M42, M43, M44, M45, M46) in the part program. If only the
M40 and S functions are present in the part program, it runs on both systems since the existing ranges are selected
automatically.

4-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

SP1RESCGA SP1 Automatic Range Change rpm value
Measuring unit: rpm
Valid values: [0;2000000000]
Default value: 0

Speed at which the spindle rotates during the automatic range change procedure.
A low or null speed value is normally used.
The zero value ensures that there is no residual rotation during the range change (spindle stopped).
This is used only when the first spindle runs in DC and has an automatic range change.

SP1ACCE SP1 ACCEleration

Measuring unit: rpm/s

Valid values: [0;2000000000]
Default value: 1500
This parameter is used only when the spindle runs in DC.
It is the acceleration and deceleration value used when the CNC changes the spindle speed.
It establishes the slope of the acceleration/deceleration ramp of the spindle.

An acceleration ramp that is too steep could cause heavy motor absorption, with the consequence that the drive is blocked, the
IDRTM signal goes to a low level and the system goes into an Emergency condition. This can occur because the spindle drives
running in DC are not always able to cut the sudden voltage peaks with a ramp.
If the drive does not support a voltage step, even a too steep deceleration could send the system into an Emergency condition
when the spindle is stopped by an M05 function, the HOLD button, a Range Change, etc.
The value of the parameter must be decreased when problems of this type are encountered.
However, the duration of the ramp should not exceed the SP1RTM time, otherwise the spindle will not reach full rating within
that period, with the risk that the CNC will not receive the IDRTM signal (at 1 or 0) in time and therefore pass into an Emergency
condition.

SP1ACCE2 SP1 ACCEleration n.2

Measuring Unit: rpm/s
Typical values: [100;5000]
Default value: 2000

SACCETHRSH Spindle ACCEleration THReSHold

Measuring Unit: rpm
Typical values: [0;10000]
Default value: 0
When the spindle speed is less than the value of the SACCETHRSH parameter, the acceleration and deceleration values are
given by the SP1ACCE2 parameter.
Instead, SP1ACCE is used when the speed > SACCETHRSH.

For a second spindle, the following parameters are used: SP2ACCE, SP2ACCE2 and SACCETHRSH2.

FIDIA MDO1680 4-5

EXAMPLE
When the first spindle starts from rest, in the first section of the ramp the acceleration value is SP1ACCE2.
If the speed to be reached is lower than SACCETHRSH, the entire ramp is executed with the acceleration SP1ACCE2.
On the other hand, if the speed to be reached is high, when the SACCETHRSH speed is exceeded, the ramp changes its
inclination. The second section of the ramp is executed with the acceleration SP1ACCE.
If SACCETHRSH = 0 the entire ramp is executed with the acceleration SP1ACCE.

SP1DECE SP1 DECEleration

Measuring Unit: rpm/s
Typical values: [0;10000]
Default value: 0

SP1DECE2 SP1 DECEleration n.2

Measuring Unit: rpm/s
Typical values: [100;5000]
Default value: 0

SDECETHRSH Spindle DECEleration THReSHold

Measuring Unit: rpm
Typical values: [0;10000]
Default value: 0

These have the same meaning as the SACCETHRSH, SP*ACCE, SP*ACCE2 parameters, but define the behaviour of the
deceleration ramp. They allow for a different deceleration ramp to the acceleration ramp when the spindle rotates in M03
(clockwise direction) or M04 (anti-clockwise direction).
Each SDECETHRSH, SP*DECE, SP*DECE2 parameter only acts when set with a value other than zero. If one of these
parameters has the value zero, it does not act and the deceleration ramp is defined by the corresponding SACCETHRSH,
SP*ACCE, SP*ACCE2 parameter.

SP1DELDIS SP1 DELay time for spindle DISable

Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [0;1000]
Default value: 0
1000 for a spindle managed by FIDIA digital drives
This parameter introduces a delay in the spindle stopping phase. At the end of the function in question (e.g. M05), the spindle is
deactivated after the time specified in this parameter. Normally, the value 0 is used to give immediate deactivation.

SP1DELENA SP1 DELay time for spindle ENAble

Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [-1000;1000]
Default value: 0
-1 for a spindle managed by FIDIA digital drives
Introduces a delay in the spindle starting phase when the relevant function (e.g. M03 or M04) is executed.
• The value 0 gives an immediate start; however, if the spindle is not yet enabled, the rotation command is not executed.
• If a positive value is entered, the spindle acceleration ramp starts after the time specified in this parameter; if, once this
time has elapsed, the spindle is still not enabled, the rotation command is not executed.
• If a negative value is entered, first there is a wait for the spindle to be fully enabled (MS1SRD bit to 1, i.e. spindle drive
enabled), then there is a wait for the time specified in the SP1DELENA parameter and then the spindle acceleration ramp
starts.
• If the value –1 is used, the acceleration ramp starts as soon as the spindle is fully enabled (MS1SRD bit to 1).

Negative values are meaningful only for a spindle managed by FIDIA digital drives.

SP1OUTFILFACT SP1 OUTput FILter FACTor

Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [50;300]
Default value: 0

Defines a simple 1st order low-pass filter that acts on the spindle speed output when the spindle rotates in M03 or M04 mode.
This parameter is typically used for synchronous spindles that are sensitive to brusque variations in the speed command.
The filter time constant is proportional to: SP1OUTFILFACT * SAMPLE RTC2
The value 0 disables the filter.

4-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

The theoretical spindle rotation speed, expressed in rpm and calculated by the CNC, can be monitored using the following read-
only parameters:
• STEOVEL speed value before the filter
• STEOVELFILT filtered speed value (downstream from the filter)

For example, the two speed values can be compared using the oscilloscope integrated in the CNC.

SP1RTM
Measuring unit: s
Typical Range: [3;15]
Default value: 3
This parameter sets the value of the watchdog that verifies whether the power on or power off command for the spindle has
been effectively carried out.
The CNC commands the power on or the power off of the spindle by setting the UDSMO (clockwise rotation) or UDSMA
(counter clockwise rotation) output to the 1 or to the 0 value.
Each time the CNC commands the power on or the power off of the spindle, the relevant bit (IDRTM) indicating the spindle in
rotation status (bit at 1) or the spindle at rest status (bit at 0) must assume the configuration required within the time set by the
value of the SP1RTM parameter.
The time set must be slightly longer than the maximum average delay with which the system executes the power on or power
off command and changes the status of the IDRTM bit.
The following diagram shows the time intervals checked by the watchdog: delays d1 and d2 must not exceed SP1RTM.

Behaviour of the UDSMO/UDSMA and IDRTM signals

SP1CGTM
Measuring unit: s
Typical Range: [10;50]
Default value: 20
This parameter sets the value of the watchdog that verifies whether the command for inserting a spindle speed range has been
effectively carried out.
This is used only if the spindle is run in DC and has the Automatic Range Change logic.
The CNC commands insertion of a range by setting the UDIG* output to the 1 value. Each time the CNC commands insertion of
a range, the relevant bit (IDG*I), indicating the range inserted status (bit at 1) or the range not inserted status (bit at 0), must
assume the configuration required within the time set by the value of the SP1CGTM parameter.
The time set must be slightly longer than the maximum average delay with which the system executes the range insertion
command and changes the status of the IDG*I bit, as shown on the following diagram. These average times should be
evaluated on the range that is inserted having the longest delay.

Behaviour of the UDIG* and IDG*I signals

* = B, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (depending on the range to be inserted)

FIDIA MDO1680 4-7

4.3 DIGITAL TRANSDUCER SPINDLE INSTALLATION
This software (Tapping) allows for the positioning of the spindle at the value programmed by the SP function and M19, and the
execution of the G33 and G84 threading fixed cycles by mounting the tool directly on the spindle.
The spindle must be equipped with a position transducer, while the reference zero signal (IDMZM) is optional. It must also be
equipped with all the signals used by a spindle operating in d.c. (UDSMO IDIRM etc.).
Position control is in pure feed forward, and so the following error with Measuring unit in degree (displayed in the SPFE
parameter) should be zero.
Parameters:

SP1TAPPING SPindle 1 TAPPING enabled

Default value: ON
This enables/disables management of the spindle through the digital transducer.
Valid values:
ON spindle managed through the digital transducer
OF spindle managed without taking the digital transducer into consideration

SP1CEE SPindle 1 Counting Error Enable

Default value: ON
Selects the way in which the system will react if a counting error is detected on the controlled spindle.
Valid values:
ON The system switches to Emergency and displays the relevant error message. To return to normal operation of the
controlled spindle, issue a RESET CNC COMMAND, return to Automatic mode and repeat the zero cycle on the spindle (if
the zero cycle is obligatory).
OF This value excludes the Emergency condition. The system displays the relevant error message, but does not switch to
Manual mode and does not require the zero cycle to be executed on the spindle.

SP1CFE SPindle 1 Counting Fault Enable

Default value: ON
As for SP1CEE, with the difference that it selects behaviour in the event of a position transducer fault instead of a counting
error.

SP1MAXPE Spindle 1 MAXimum Position Error for rapid traverse

Measuring unit: degrees
Default value: 0
This is the position error maximum error allowed when the controlled spindle is in movement. If defined as zero, the error of the
following error is not controlled.

SP1IDMZM Spindle 1 Input Digital Micro Zero Mounted

Default value: OF
ON indicates that the micro zero is mounted on the controlled spindle, while OF indicates that the micro zero is not present.

SP1OFS SPindle 1 OFfset Switch

Default value: ON
ON activates automatic software compensation of the controlled spindle offset; while with OF compensation is deactivated.

SP1VELIST SPindle 1 VELocity ISTant

Read only parameter: displays the instantaneous speed of the controlled spindle.

SP1VELCP SPindle 1 VELocity Controlled Position

Measuring unit: rpm
Typical values: [0;10]
Default value: 5
Defines the maximum speed (rpm) of the controlled spindle in order to activate position control. If the spindle rotates at a higher
speed, the position control is not activated. When the value is too low, the spindle may not be able to pass into position control.
There may be malfunctions during activation of the position control when the value is too high.

IDMZMWASON IDMZM WAS ON during index search

Default value: OF
This is used for selecting the behavior of the CNC when the spindle is doing an index search during a zero cycle.
Valid values:

4-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

ON If the IDMZM (spindle zero microswitch) drops to zero during this phase, the spindle will continue the index search and
when it is found, the zero cycle will end successfully.
OF IDMZM must be at 1 during the entire index search phase or the zero will not be validated (this is the usual behavior).

SPDPEEME SPindle Position Error EMErgency

Default value: ON
This is used for selecting the behavior of the CNC when the FCN313 message is displayed (spindle not in position). This
message appears during an M19 function if the spindle cannot be positioned because the following error is not within the
SP*PAR TOLLIP_*G tolerance for a period greater than SP*PAR TIMEIP_*G.
Valid values:
ON the FCN313 message is a fatal error; the system goes into emergency
OF the FCN313 message is not fatal; execution continues

SPDACCEININT SPinDle ACCEleration calculated IN INTerrupt

Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
This parameter should normally be left at the default value. If set to ON, the acceleration of the transducer controlled spindle is
calculated in interrupt also when the M03/M04 functions are executed. The feed ramp therefore has a more regular shape.

SP1PAR SPindle 1 PARameters

For each spindle range defined, the following parameters must also be set up (by way of example, the names given below refer
to the high range):

ACCE_HG
Measuring unit: (degrees x 1000) / s²
Typical values: [1;6]
Default value: 1
Acceleration and deceleration value used when the CNC changes the controlled spindle speed during programmed movements.
It is the slope of the acceleration/deceleration ramps applied to the controlled spindle.
When the spindle and an axis are moved simultaneously, the resulting acceleration will correspond to the lowest of the two.

KV_HG
Measuring unit: (m/min) / mm
Valid values: [.001;2000000]
Default values: 1
This is the (static and dynamic) gain of the controlled spindle position loop.

M19RPM_HG
Measuring unit: rpm
Default value: 100
Defines the speed (or rather the rotations per minute) at which M19 is to be executed.
The zero search is also carried out at this feed. For the zero cycle without indexes, see the relevant paragraph.

NPULSE_HG
Measuring unit: pure number
Typical values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 4096
Defines the number of pulses multiplied by four for each revolution of the controlled spindle.

ZPR_HG
Measuring unit: degrees
Typical values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 0
Preset value for the controlled spindle expressed in degrees.

TIMEIP_HG
Measuring unit: ms
Typical values: [10;10000]
Default value: 50
Waiting time in order for the controlled spindle to be considered to be in position at the end of a rotation.

FIDIA MDO1680 4-9

TOLLIP_HG
Measuring unit: degrees
Typical values: [.001;1]
Default value: 1.0
Tolerance within which the controlled spindle is considered to be in position.
It must be greater than the resolution of the transducer counting.

The TIMEIP and TOLLIP parameters act jointly to define the conditions that must be met in order for the controlled spindle to be
considered to be in position at the end of a rotation. When the controlled spindle is able to remain for at least the TIMEIP time
within the TOLLIP tolerance (with respect to the theoretical stop position), the CNC considers the spindle to be stopped and
executes the appropriate operations.

TN_HG
Measuring Unit: ms
Default value: 0

Time constant linked to integral gain of the controlled spindle. The lower the value of the time constant, the higher the value of
the integral gain. The 0 value disables the integral gain logic. Under normal conditions, this logic would not be necessary, so it
should be left disabled. The integral gain may be used when it is necessary to improve spindle behaviour. The integral gain is
active only when the spindle is kept in position control, i.e. after an M19, G33 or G84 function has been programmed.
The minimum acceptable value is equal to SAMPLE RTC2. The optimum value is usually much higher. If the value of the time
constant is very low, the spindle may become unstable, while very high values have a negligible effect. During installation, the
recommendation is to start with a very high value (several hundreds or thousands) and progressively reduce the value until the
spindle has the desired behaviour.

OFFSVEL OFFSet VELocity compensation

Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [1;30]
Default value: 20
Offset velocity compensation during the M19 cycle. If the value of the parameter is reduced, the offset compensation will be
faster; if the value is increased, the compensation will be slower

RESETSPDAFTERM03
Default value: OF
Selects whether or not to initialize the spindle zero position following non-controlled spindle rotation (e.g. M03, M04 function)
and after an emergency stop.
Allowed values:
ON the spindle must repeat the zero cycle before moving with controlled rotation
OF if the spindle zero cycle has already been executed, it is not repeated

SP1M19WAITM5
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF

SP1M19WAITM5DEL
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [500;3000]
Default value: 2000

Parameters for a spindle managed by FIDIA digital drives.

If the SP1M19WAITM5 parameter is ON, when the parameter subset for the spindle has to be changed (in order to execute an
M03, M04 or M19 function) the spindle stops and there is a pause for the time set in the SP1M19WAITM5DEL parameter. The
time must be sufficient to allow for the parameter change; if it is not sufficient, it is advisable to increase it.

SP1G84WAITM5
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF

SP1G84WAITM5DEL
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [500;3000]
Default value: 2000

4-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

Parameters for a spindle managed by FIDIA digital drives.
If the SP1G84WAITM5 parameter is ON, when the parameter subset for the spindle has to be changed (before executing a G84
function), the spindle stops and there is a pause for the time set in the SP1G84WAITM5DEL parameter. The time must be
sufficient to allow for the parameter change; if it is not sufficient, it is advisable to increase it.

SP1SCANIDX
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
This parameter is useful during installation and diagnostics to detect the position of the spindle zero index.
If the parameter is set to ON and the spindle rotated (even manually), for each index found the ICN373 message is shown (this
displays the index value). The parameter is automatically returned to OF.

4.4 ZERO CYCLE FOR SPINDLES WITHOUT INDEXES

It is possible to perform the spindle zero cycle taking into consideration only the IDMZM signal (zero microswitch). This is useful,
for example, in the following cases:
• transducers without an index signal are used;
• the spindle is managed by INDRAMAT digital drives with direct counting at the drives (without a Fidia encoder interface
board).

Either of two types of cycle can be selected:

• zero search with movement in one direction only
• zero search with zig-zag movement

4.4.1 ZERO SEARCH IN ONE DIRECTION

Cycle description:
• The spindle searches for the cam rotating at the SP1PAR MZMRPM_** low speed.
• The zero is set at the position in which the IDMZM signal goes to 1 (leading edge of the signal).

To obtain this cycle, set the following parameters:

SP1NOIDX ON
SP1IDMZM ON
SP1ZZIDZM OF

The default value for the SP1NOIDX, SP1IDMZM and SP1ZZIDZM parameters is OF.

SP1PAR MZMRPM_** (where ** is the rotation range: LG, HG, G1, G2)
Measuring Unit: rpm
Typical values: [5;50]
Default value: 5
Zero search speed. A low value is used in order to have an accurate zero search.

The above parameters are also used for a second spindle; in this case, the characters SP2 are included in the parameter name
instead of SP1.

4.4.2 ZIG-ZAG ZERO SEARCH

Execution of the cycle in one direction only can take a long time if the zero cam is a long way from the starting point. The zig-
zag cycle saves time without reducing accuracy because it has two separate speeds: one (relatively high) speed for the initial
search for the cam and one (low) speed for finding the exact zero position.

Cycle description:
• The spindle searches for the cam rotating at the SP1PAR MZMRPM_** speed.
• When the cam is found (i.e. when IDMZM goes to 1), the spindle inverts its rotation and continues at the same SP1PAR
MZMRPM_** speed.
• When moving away from the cam (i.e. when IDMZM goes to 0), the spindle again inverts its rotation and searches for the
cam at the SP1PAR MZMRPMZZ_** low speed.
• The zero is set at the position in which the IDMZM signal goes to 1 (leading edge of the signal).

To obtain this cycle, set the following parameters:

FIDIA MDO1680 4-11

SP1NOIDX ON
SP1ZZIDZM ON

The default value for the SP1NOIDX and SP1ZZIDZM parameters is OF.

SP1PAR MZMRPM_** (where ** is the rotation range: LG, HG, G1, G2)
Measuring Unit: rpm
Typical values: [5;50]
Default value: 5
Initial search speed for the zero microswitch. The value can be increased to speed up the first part of the cycle (this does not
affect accuracy).

SP1PAR MZMRPMZZ_** (where ** is the rotation range: LG, HG, G1, G2)
Measuring Unit: rpm
Typical values: [1;10]
Default value: 2
Final approach speed towards the zero microswitch. A low value should be used in order to have an accurate zero search.

Diagnostic parameters:

SP1ZERODONE
This read only parameter (accessed using the Search menu) displays the following information:
ON the zero position is known (the spindle has already performed the zero cycle)
OF the zero position is not known (the spindle has yet to perform the zero cycle)

The above parameters are also used for a second spindle; in this case, the characters SP2 are included in the parameter name
instead of SP1.

4.5 SPINDLE ENABLING LOGIC

When the spindle is managed by FIDIA digital drives, the spindle enabling logic is selected by the following parameters:

SP1AUTOUDSMOA
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: ON

SP1AUTOIDRTM
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF

The spindle enabling logic uses the following signals:

• UDSMO, UDSMA and IDRTM are standard CNC I/O bits.
• MS1ENCMD and MS1SRD are standard memory bits for PLC use:
• MS1ENCMD is an input and is the spindle enabling command from the PLC.
• MS1SRD is an output and is the spindle enabled confirmation to the PLC.

The SP1OWNERIDRTM read-only parameter contains the MS1SRD bit status and is used by the PLC to determine whether the
spindle is enabled. The value OF means MS1SRD is at 0; the value ON means MS1SRD is at 1.

If there is a second spindle, the names of the parameters and bits include the number 2 instead of 1 (e.g. SP2xxxx, MS2xxxx).

When the SP1AUTOUDSMOA and SP1AUTOIDRTM parameters are both OF, the correct procedure for enabling the spindle is
as follows:
• the CNC wants to enable the spindle and sets the UDSMO or UDSMA enabling request bit to 1;
• after performing its operations, the PLC orders the CNC to enable the spindle drive by setting the MS1ENCMD bit to 1; at
this point, the spindle is fully enabled;
• once the spindle drive is enabled, the CNC sets the MS1SRD bit to 1;
• when the spindle is rotating, the PLC sets the IDRTM bit to 1.

4-12 MDO1680 FIDIA

The disabling sequence is the same, except that the bits are set to 0.

If the SP1AUTOUDSMOA parameter is ON, the UDSMO or UDSMA value is automatically copied into MS1ENCMD; the copy is
made internally and so MS1ENCMD is not available and is not managed by the PLC.

If the SP1AUTOIDRTM parameter is ON, the IDRTM bit is managed automatically; it is not available as a physical bit and is not
managed by the PLC. In this case, the AUTOIDRTMATRR parameter decides when the CNC should set the internal IDRTM bit
to 1.

AUTOIDRTMATRR
Default value: ON
Allowed values:
ON the IDRTM bit is set to 1 when the spindle acceleration ramp is completed
OF the IDRTM bit is set to 1 immediately after the spindle is enabled

Further examples of spindle enabling:

SP1AUTOUDSMOA ON and SP1AUTOIDRTM OF:

• the CNC wants to enable the spindle: it sets the UDSMO or UDSMA bit to 1 and enables the drive;
• when the spindle is rotating, the PLC must set the IDRTM bit to 1.

SP1AUTOUDSMOA ON and SP1AUTOIDRTM ON:

• the CNC wants to enable the spindle: it sets the UDSMO or UDSMA bit to 1 and enables the drive;
• the IDRTM bit is managed automatically, so it is not necessary to implement a PLC logic to manage it.

4.6 CUSTOMIZING A SECOND SPINDLE USING PLC

The second spindle is programmed using the same M functions as for the first (M03, M04, M05, M40, etc.). If the user has a
need to use different M functions for the two spindles, these functions must be managed by the PLC programmer.

EXAMPLE
The second spindle must start up in M03 mode (rotation in clockwise direction) when the user programs an M23 function. The
following instructions, for example, can be inserted into the PLC program to make this possible:

M23: WRITEP ROF,"SP1ENABLE" ; disable spindle1

WRITEP RON,"SP2ENABLE" ; enable spindle2
NCM 03 ; start spindle2
JUMP P1.EX

FIDIA MDO1680 4-13

4-14 MDO1680 FIDIA
5 COPYING OPTION (PLP)

5.1 PLP PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS AND DEFINITIONS

In the example given, a FIDIA analog tracer is used for the copying option, so please refer to the appropriate manual.
Verify that the tracer has been connected correctly: each axis, when given a deflection, must move in the direction which
corresponds to the set deflection. If this does not occur, invert the two + and deflection signal wires.
FIDIA K5 and K10 tracers have a gain of 2 Vdc per millimeter of deflection, so the gain parameter ( TRACER DEFGAIN) must
be defined at 5 mm.
The FIDIA K2 tracer has a gain of 4 Vdc per millimeter, so consequently the TRACER DEFGAIN parameter must be at 2.5 mm.

5.1.1 TESTING COPYING EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS

With the parameters properly defined, verify that the emergency functions are in operation.
With the axes blocked (X, Y and Z button illuminated), deflect the tracer until the deflection defined through the TRACER
MAXVOLT parameter has been reached.
The CNC will set the machine tool to manual and display the following message:
* Tracer input (nnn milliVolts) too high

The CNC displays the following message when it returns to below the intervention threshold:
* Tracer input OK

It will then be possible to return to automatic mode.

A threshold of 4.5 mm is sufficient for tracers with a maximum deflection of 5 mm.

5.2 COPYING PARAMETERS

These parameters define the technical characteristics of the copying operation. They are linked to the presence of the copying
options.

TRACER table
The TRACER table defines a series of values used for defining the behaviour of the tracer. The pages that follow describe the
individual parameters in the table.

TRACER IDTAME IDTAM signal management Enable

Default value: ON
Enables/disables management of the IDTAM bit (Digital Input that indicates the Tracer Mounted condition).
Valid values:
ON Management of the IDTAM bit is enabled. If start up of scanning or a DEFSET cycle is attempted while the bit is at zero,
the operation will be refused and the following message will appear:
WNC087 TRACER NOT CONNECTED
This logic can be utilized only when the CNC receives the IDTAM signal at 1 when the tracer is mounted and connected or
when the IDTAM signal is at 0 when the tracer is not mounted and connected.
OF Management of the IDTAM is disabled. The system behaves as if the tracer was enabled. It does not verify whether the
tracer is physically present and connected through the cable.

This behaviour can be selected only for those tracers that do not give the IDTAM signal.

TRACER IDASDE IDASD signal management Enable

Default value: OF
Enables/disables management of the IDASD bit (digital input that signals the overdeflection alarm).
ON Management of the IDASD bit is enabled.
If the bit goes to zero, the following message will appear:
WPL002 Tracer overdeflection alarm
This logic can only be used if the CNC receives the IDASD signal at 1 during normal operations, or at zero in the event of
an overdeflection alarm.
OF Management of the IDASD bit is disabled.

This behaviour must be selected for those tracers that do not furnish an IDASD signal.

FIDIA MDO1680 5-1

TRACER DEFGAIN DEFault GAIN of the tracer
Measuring unit: mm
Typical values: [2.5;5]
Default value: 5
This parameter defines the theoretical value of the maximum deflection that can be managed linearly by the CNC for each
direction (DX, DY and DZ) and for each verso (+/ ), i.e. the deflection value that corresponds to a voltage of 10V on the relevant
analog input.

Relationship between the input voltage to the CNC and the positive DX deflection

If the system uses FIDIA K5 or K10 tracers, the parameter must be defined at a value of 5.
If the system uses FIDIA K2 tracers, the parameter must be defined at a value of 2.5.
The theoretical value of the maximum deflection (DEFGAIN) differs slightly from the real values, which are calculated for each
direction and verso during the DEFSET cycle and can only be read through the TRACER GAIN** (read only) parameters.

TRACER MAXVOLT MAX allowed input voltage before emergency

Measuring unit: n
Valid values: [1;32767]
Default value: 29491
This is the value of the deflection input that, when exceeded, causes an Emergency situation. This intervention threshold of the
CNC is necessary for safety reasons. The 32767 value corresponds to an input voltage of 10 volts.
The 29491 value defines an emergency threshold of 9 volts (when a deflection of >9 volts is received, the CNC sends the
system into an emergency condition).

TRACER *KTM K TiMe

Measuring unit: ms
Sampling period of the scanning system. Increase the value if there are vibrations that cannot be damped by lowering the
SCAN* PK parameter on low resonance frequency systems.

TRACER *KSA K friction

Measuring unit: mm/min
Friction compensation speed. Low values could create instability when starting up from stop or after an overshoot. If these
problems should occur, increase the value. The KTM and KSA parameters are used in direct copying, i.e. when the spindle is in
rotation. The DGTKTM and DGTKSA parameters are used during copying with digitizing, i.e. when the spindle is stopped.
The ROUGHKTM and ROUGHKSA are used when the ROUGH parameter in ON, i.e. when the user has selected Rough
Machining Mode. The table that follows lists the minimum, maximum and typical values of the *KTM and *KSA parameters.

measur.
min scan DGT ROUGH max
unit
KTM 20 60 60 60 180 ms
KSA 175 250 250 250 2000 mm/min

5-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

PLPROT PLP ROTated
Activates/deactivates the automatic compensation logic for deflections as a function of the angles by which the polar axes are
rotated. Exists only if the RTCP option is present.
Valid values:
ON The automatic compensation logic for deflections as a function of the angles by which the polar axes are rotated is active.
Associations between the machine tool axes and tracer deflections, as well as any inversion, should be entered in the
_INDEX and _DIR parameters on the TRCRTCP page. The similar parameters on the TRCG17, TRCG18 and TRCG19
pages are not considered. This operating mode should be adopted when the tracer is mounted on the head and its
direction is therefore influenced by the position of the polar axes. The parameters ROTDEFL ALFA BETA and GAMMA
need not be set up since any angles by which the tracer is rotated are detected automatically by the position of the polar
axes.
OF No automatic compensation logic is active. Therefore any angles by which the tracer is rotated should be entered in the
ROTDEFL ALFA BETA and GAMMA parameters. Associations between the machine tool axes and tracer deflections, as
well as any inversion, should be entered in the _INDEX and _DIR parameters on the TRCG17, TRCG18 and TRCG19
pages. This operating mode should be adopted when the tracer cannot be mounted on the head, or when notwithstanding
the presence of the RTCP option it is preferred that the tracer rotation be entered manually.

TRC### XINDEXN head direction ### = G17, G18, G19

XDIRN
YINDEXN
YDIRN
ZINDEXN
ZDIRN
XINDEXP
XDIRP
YINDEXP
YDIRP
ZINDEXP
ZDIRP

The mode in which the three deflections of the tracer (DX, DY and DZ) are associated to the three copying axes of the machine
tool (X, Y and Z) are defined by the following tables:
TRCG17 values used in G17, i.e. with the tracer parallel to the Z axis
TRCG18 values used in G18, i.e. with the tracer parallel to the Y axis
TRCG19 values used in G19, i.e. with the tracer parallel to the X axis

Tables TRCG17, TRCG18 and TRCG19 are used when the CNC is not equipped with the RTCP option, and when
notwithstanding the presence of the RTCP option the PLPROT parameter is in OF. In other cases instead of these the
TRCRTCP table, which has a similar function, should be used. Each table consists of the following parameters:
XINDEX*
XDIR*
YINDEX*
YDIR*
ZINDEX*
ZDIR*

Where * = N and P
N identifies the values used when the tracer is oriented in the negative direction of the axis perpendicular to the work plane
(Z , Y , X orientations)
P identifies the values used when the tracer is oriented in the positive direction of the axis perpendicular to the work plane
(Z+, Y+, Z+ orientations)

The figure that follows illustrates the modes in which the tracer can be oriented.

FIDIA MDO1680 5-3

 Tracer orientation

EXAMPLE
The parameters that follow define the values used when the tracer is parallel with the Z axis, oriented toward the negative
direction of the axis (case G17 Q1):
TRCG17 XINDEXN
TRCG17 XDIRN
TRCG17 YINDEXN
TRCG17 YDIRN
TRCG17 ZINDEXN
TRCG17 ZDIRN

TRCG1# XINDEX*
Machine axis that will be moved according to the DX tracer deflection.
Valid values:
0 X axis
1 Y axis
2 Z axis

TRCG1# XDIR*
Direction in which the DX tracer deflection will move the axis specified by XINDEX*. Valid values:
1 Direct action: a positive DX deflection moves the axis in the positive direction, while a negative DX deflection moves the
axis in the negative direction.
1 Inverse action: a positive DX deflection moves the axis in the negative direction, while a negative DX deflection moves the
axis in the positive direction.

TRCG1# YINDEX*
Machine axis that will be moved according to the DY tracer deflection. Valid values:
0 X axis
1 Y axis
2 Z axis

TRCG1# YDIR*
Direction in which the DY tracer deflection will move the axis specified by YINDEX*. Valid values:
1 Direct action: a positive DY deflection moves the axis in the positive direction, while a negative DY deflection moves the
axis in the negative direction.
1 Inverse action: a positive DY deflection moves the axis in the negative direction, while a negative DY deflection moves the
axis in the positive direction.

TRCG1# ZINDEX*
Machine axis that will be moved according to the DZ tracer deflection. Valid values:
0 X axis
1 Y axis
2 Z axis

5-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

TRCG1# ZDIR*
Direction in which the DZ deflection of the tracer will move the axis specified through |INDEX*. Valid values:
1 Direct action: a positive DZ deflection moves the axis in the positive direction, while a negative DZ deflection moves the
axis in the negative direction.
-1 Inverse action: a positive DZ deflection moves the axis in the negative direction, while a negative DZ deflection moves the
axis in the positive direction.

The TRCG1# tables must be modified when the machine tool is to operate with the tracer mounted in positions other than the
standard positions. The tracer must first be mounted in the relevant position (e.g. Z ) before the optimal values of the
parameters can be obtained. The programming block corresponding to that position (e.g. G17 Q1) must then be executed.
Then proceed with the following procedure:
• unclamp the X axis and manually deflect the tracer by first pressing in the X+ direction and then in the X direction
• verify that the axis always moves in the same direction in which the deflection is applied. If it does not, the value of the
TRCG1# XINDEX* parameter must be changed and/or the value of the TRCG1# XDIR* parameter must be negated (work
on XINDEX* if the deflection moves another axis and on XDIR* if the right axis moves in the wrong direction)
• execute the same operations for the Y axis and then for the Z axis
• repeat the procedure from the beginning until the operation is correct

For safety reasons, the above procedure is recommended even when the TRCG1# tables are thought to have been set
correctly. The procedure should be repeated (adapted as necessary) for each position in which the tracer is to be used. For
example, if the machine tool is to operate with the tracer mounted in the Z and Y positions, the setting of the TRCG17 and
TRCG18 tables must be checked.

TRCRTCP XINDEX TRaCer with RTCP

XDIR
YINDEX
YDIR
ZINDEX
ZDIR

This has a function and meaning similar to those of the TRCG17, TRCG18 and TRCG19 tables and is used instead of them
only when the PLPROT parameter is ON. Before determining the optimum values of the TRCRTCP parameters, the tracer must
be oriented by moving the head axes (RTCPA and RTCPB) to the zero position as described in the section on the RTCP.

SCAN PK SCANsion parameters

IK
DK
ACCE
DECE
FMI
EFD
ERR
FILTER
F3D
S3D
K3D
SLOW3D

SCANDGT PK SCAN DiGiTizing parameters

IK
DK
ACCE
DECE
FMI
EFD
ERR
F3D

FIDIA MDO1680 5-5

SCANROUGH PK SCAN ROUGHing parameters
IK
DK
ACCE
DECE
FMI
EFD
ERR
F3D

The SCAN, SCANDGT and SCANROUGH tables define a series of values used in copying. These tables contain the same
parameters and differ only by the fact that the CNC uses them in different circumstances:

SCAN This table is used during direct copying, i.e. when the spindle is rotating. The values in this table allow the
copied surface to be faithfully followed. The pace, however, is not constant since the need to eliminate over
deflections forces slow downs in correspondence to the edges.

SCANDGT This table is used during digitizing, i.e. when the spindle is still. It is also used when copying with all three
synchronous XYZ axes linked (in this case, it would be used regardless of whether the spindle is still or in
rotation).The values of the table allow high speed copying with a relatively constant pace, without abrupt slow
downs in correspondence to the edges.
The over deflections which are generated are not a problem since they can be compensated by the Digitizing
logic (or by the synchronous axis logic).

SCANROUGH This table is used when the ROUGH parameter is ON, i.e. when the user has selected Rough Machining Mode.
The values are similar to those in the SCANDGT table and consequently produce similar results. Overshoots
are not a problem since swarf is left on the workpiece during rough machining.

The parameters in the SCAN, SCANDGT AND SCANROUGH tables are described below, followed by a table with the
minimum, maximum and typical values.

N.B.: The installation technician is limited to changing the values of the PK, ACCE and DECE parameters. The other
parameters are to be modified only for resolving specific problems.

SCAN* PK Proportional KV
Measuring unit: (m/min)/mm
Proportional gain of the deflection control loop.
This gain corresponds to the proportional Kv on each axis in CNC mode and therefore produces similar effects.
The optimum value of the proportional Kv is the highest allowed by the machine, tool holder arm, tracer, stylus system.
By increasing this parameter, copying accuracy is improved and loss of contact is avoided.
Too high values can cause instability (oscillations) in correspondence to edges, especially at high speeds.
Since this is a single parameter for all the axes, the new value should be tested after each modification by trying to copy in
various modes so as to involve all the axes used in copying.

SCAN* IK Integrative KV factor

Measuring unit: min¯²
Integrative gain
This is a gain term that operates on the deflection error integral and assists in following curvilinear paths such as circles. Overly
high values can cause undulations to appear on the rectilinear trajectories.

SCAN* KV Derivative KV factor

Measuring unit: %
Derivative gain
Operates on sudden deflection variations by braking the machine. It improves the behaviour on edges (overshoot). Overly high
values prevent regular machine movements.

5-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

 Deflection loop block diagram

The gains shown in the figure have the following meanings:

Kp = Kv proportional PK parameter
Ki = Kv integral IK parameter
Kd = Kv derivative DKparameter

SCAN* FMI MInimum Feed rate

Measuring unit: mm/min
Feed rate at which copying restarts after the tracer has been stopped on an edge.

SCAN* ERR ERRor allowed

SCAN* EFD Error on FeeD rate
These two parameters work together to regulate the feed on very sharp curvatures.

SCAN* ACCE scanning ACCeleration

SCAN* DECE scanning DECeleration
Measuring unit: m/s²
ACCE and DECE are, respectively, the acceleration and deceleration used in copying.

SCAN FILTER
Measuring unit: ms
Valid values: [SAMPLE RTC2; 40]
Default value: 15
Time constant of the integrator which filters (levels) the signal given in output by the software copying module.
The filter prevents instability conditions by drives characterized by a very high degree of promptness.
The default value can be increased to eliminate high frequency vibrations that cannot be eliminated by means of the other
parameters (gains, etc.).
Too high a value generates overshoot.
A value cannot be entered in the parameter that is less than the value assigned to the SAMPLE RTC2 parameter (value which
deactivates the filter).
The maximum value is 40.

SCAN* F3D Feed 3rd Deflection

Measuring unit: mm/min
Feed used when copying takes place in third deflection conditions, i.e. when the greater part of the deflection is applied on the
step axis.

SCAN S3D ThreShold to enter in 3rd Deflection logic

Measuring unit: n
Allowed values: [0.0;1.0]
Default value: 0.5
Threshold determining the passage of copying to “third deflection” mode.
With the value 0.0, the third deflection logic is always active.
With the value 1.0, the logic is activated when the third deflection reaches the nominal deflection value.

FIDIA MDO1680 5-7

SCAN K3D Proportional KV factor for the 3rd Deflection logic
Measuring unit: n
Allowed values: [0.0;1.0]
Default value: 0.5
Proportional gain for copying in third deflection.

SCAN SLOW3D SLOW feed in full 3rd Deflection

Default value: OF
Establishes the criterion by which the feed is regulated when scanning takes place in full third deflection, i.e. when almost all the
deflection is applied on the step axis. Enables the operator to choose whether to apply a feed reduction logic so as to obtain a
better surface, or whether to have faster but less accurate scanning.
Allowed values:
ON A feed reduction logic is enabled to control deflection on the step axis.
OF The feed entered in the F3D parameter is used and the feed reduction logic is disabled.
Scanning is faster, but the surface may be of inferior quality.

Minimum, maximum and typical values of the parameters contained in the SCAN, SCANDGT and SCANROUGH tables:

SCAN SCAN
Min SCAN max Measuring unit
DGT ROUGH
PK 500 1000 1000 1000 3000 (m/min)/mm
IK 0 90000 36000 36000 90000 min¯²
DK 0 40 25 25 75 %
FMI 50 150 200 200 500 mm/min
ERR .100 .25 .25 .25 .500 mm
EFD 200 400 1000 1000 1000 mm/min
ACCE .02 .04 .07 .04 .15 m/s²
DECE .04 .07 .10 .07 .25 m/s²
F3D 50 100 100 100 300 mm/min
S3D 0.0 .5 - - 1.0 n
K3D 0.0 .5 - - 1.0 n
FILTER SAMPLE 15 - - 40 ms
RTC2

TNC PK TNC parameters

IK
DK
ACCE
FMI
EFD
ERR

TNCDGT PK TNC DiGiTizing parameters

IK
DK
ACCE
FMI
EFD
ERR

TNCROUGH PK TNC ROUGHing parameters

IK
DK
ACCE
FMI
EFD
ERR

The TNC, TNCDGT and TNCROUGH tables correspond, respectively, to the SCAN, SCANDGT and SCANROUGH tables, but
define the values used during scanning in TNC and do not have the DECE, FILTER, F3D, S3D, K3D, SLOW3D parameters.

5-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

Minimum, maximum and typical values of the parameters in the TNC, TNCDGT and TNCROUGH tables:

min TNC TNC DGT TNC ROUGH max measur. unit

PK 500 1000 1000 1000 3000 (m/min)/mm
IK 0 90000 36000 36000 90000 min¯²
DK 0 40 25 25 75 %
ACCE .02 0.04 0.07 0.04 .15 m/s²
FMI 50 150 200 200 500 mm/min
EFD 200 400 1000 1000 1000 mm/min
ERR 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 mm

DEFSET DEFL
DEFLEX

The DEFSET table defines the values required for execution of the automatic tracer setting cycle (cycle activated by the user via
the G138 function). It consists of the following parameters:

DEFSET DEFL higher DEFLection

Measuring unit: mm
Typical Range: .3 ÷ Value of the TRACER DEFGAIN parameter
Default value: 1
Input deflection value used during execution of the DEFSET cycle.
A deflection of 2 mm is suitable for the FIDIA K5 tracer.
A deflection of 1 mm is suitable for the FIDIA K2 tracer.

DEFSET DEFLEX lower DEFLection

Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [.001;200000]
Default value: .1
Value of the output deflection used during execution of the DEFSET cycle.
Normally, the default value can be left.
During each cycle contact, the tracer is deflected to the two values defined through the DEFSET table: first the highest value
(DEFL and then the lowest value (DEFLEX). Based on the difference of the coordinates obtained, the CNC adjusts the tracer
gain.

PENCIL RATE PENCIL parameters

LINEAR
ACC
MINDEFL
OVERDEFL
LIMIT
CPIUNL

The PENCIL table defines the values used during copying in Pencil mode.

PENCIL RATE
Measuring unit: mm/min
Valid values: 1 the lowest of all AXVSRT parameter values
Default value: 1000
This is the speed at which the manually deflected tracer moves 1 mm.
It establishes the “sensitivity” value of the tracer to the deflection applied in Pencil mode.

The following is the relationship between speed and deflection:

linear for <1 mm deflections
quadratic for >1mm deflections

FIDIA MDO1680 5-9

Sensitivity is increased/decreased by increasing/decreasing the value of the parameter.
Low values can be used for high deflection tracers.
Independently on the sensitivity, the feed cannot exceed the value programmed and adjusted using the feed potentiometre.

PENCIL LINEAR
Measuring unit : mm
Default value: 1
Deflection threshold for switching from a linear to a quadratic speed/deflection relationship.

PENCIL ACC pencil ACCeleration

Measuring unit: m/s
Valid values: [3;20]
Default value: 10
Acceleration used in Pencil mode.
Too high a value causes axis instability.

PENCIL MINDEFL pencil MINimum DEFLection

Measuring unit: mm
Typical values: [0.01;0.1]
Default value: 0.05
Minimum deflection value required to move the axes in pencil mode. This allows for adjusting the threshold sensitivity in pencil
mode.

PENCIL OVERDEFL pencil OVERDEFLection alarm

Valid values: [OF;ON]
Default value: OF
The ON value enables management of the alarm for overdeflection in pencil mode. If the voltage from the tracer is greater than
TRACER MAXVOLT, the CNC will go into emergency and display the relevant message.

PENCIL LIMIT
Valid values: [OF;ON]
Default value: OF
The ON value enables the tracer to stop at the limits (PLPMIN/PLPMAX and limit line parameters) while in pencil mode.

PENCIL CPIUNL pencil CoPyIng UNLock

Measuring unit: mm
Typical values: [0.75;3]
Default value: 1.5
When deflection exceeds the threshold, the deflected axis (or deflected axes) will automatically be unlocked and pass into
pencil mode.
The logic acts when the axis to be unlocked is in position control (not braked or disabled).

5-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

5.3 RENISHAW SP2 1 TRACER INSTALLATION
This is a tracer whose deflections are transduced through digital counting systems (rather then analog voltage signals).
The TRACER DEFGAIN parameter must be set to the 5mm value and the parameters must be used only when this tracer is
present. In the installation phase it must be set as follows:

TRACER MAXRANGE MAX allowed deflection before emergency

Measuring unit: mm
Typical value: 3.2
Default value: 3.2
This is the maximum deflection value allowed. Exceeding this value will cause an emergency situation. The TRACER
MAXVOLT parameter is not used. It has no significance since the tracer is not an analog tracer.

TRACER TRCCEE TRACER Counting Error Enable

Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: ON
If set to ON, it enables management of the counting error on the relevant interfacing board (see also AXSCEE parameter AXIS
CONTROL PARAMETERS ).

TRACER TRCCFE TRACER Counting Fault Enable

Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
If at ON, it enables management of the tracer fault on the counting interfacing board (only if the fault signal is hard-wired).
(See also AXSCFE parameter)

FIDIA MDO1680 5-11

5-12 MDO1680 FIDIA
6 SIEMENS DIGITAL DRIVES

6.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE GENERATION

The INIPAR.SDD file, structured like the INIPAR.SET file, contains the default values of the SERVICE parameters for digital
drives. The installer must create it using the SDDGEN.EXE utility program that can be run on the PC. Use of the program is
described in the related online HELP. It is located in the SDDGEN program, or can be activated following the Windows standard
by the related menu or the F1 key, The program asks for the axes managed by digital drives to be specified. It asks for the type
of drive and motor for each axis. This data can be obtained through the relevant specifications. The SDDGEN program also
generates a file called INIPAR.SD1 which will contain parameters that should be copied into the INIPAR.SET file.
Furthermore it is possible to manage files relating not only to drives for digital axes, but also for spindles.
The user is asked if there are also digital spindles and in this case an INIPAR.HSA file is generated in which the names of the
parameters are SDxxxx SPn, where n is the spindle number. The triangle or star connection is also managed: parameters 1102,
1103, etc. up to 1602 (taken from HSA_MOT.108) are for the star connection, while parameters 2102, 2103, etc. up to 2602 (the
same with an offset of 1000) are for the triangle connection. For motors whose code is in the range 200 to 299, the even code is
used for the star connection and the odd code for the triangle connection (e.g. if the code is 200 parameters 1102, 1103, etc.
are those used, while parameters 2102, etc. are those for code 201); if the motor code is not in the range 200 to 299,
parameters with the same value are duplicated (the values of parameters 1102 and 2102 are the same and so on).

6.2 SETTING THE AXIS PARAMETERS IN THE INIPAR.SET FILE

The following axis parameters must be set in the INIPAR.SET file where digital drives are used:

SDDPITCH XM SDD PITCH of the screw

YM
ZM
AM
Pitch of the screw. This is expressed in millimetres or degree per revolution, i.e. the number of millimetres or degree the axis
moves for each revolution of the motor. This can be either a positive or a negative value.
For a linear motor, the number 1000 should be set.

SDDPWR XM SDD PoWeR code of the drive

YM
ZM
AM
Drive code. This is the number that identifies the type of drive.
It is furnished by the INIPAR.SD1 program.

EXAMPLE
SDDPITCH XM = 10. ;X axis pitch 10 mm
SDDPITCH YM = 10. ;Y axis pitch 10 mm
SDDPITCH ZM = 10. ;Z axis pitch 10 mm
SDDPWR XM = 22 ;X axis drive code 22
SDDPWR YM = 22 ;Y axis drive code 22
SDDPWR ZM = 20 ;Z axis drive code 20

N.B.: Do not confuse the above MAINT parameters with the Mxxxx and MDxxxx parameters which are in the INIPAR.SDD file
and which can be optimized in a later phase of installation.

SDDTIMLCK XM SDD TIMe LoCK

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 0
Establishes the condition that must be met in order for a digital drive to be disabled.
Valid values:
0 The drive is disabled when the UDSA* bit goes to zero.
n Where n > 0: the drive is disabled n milliseconds after the UDSA* bit has gone to zero.
1 The drive is disabled when the UDSA* and IDA*P bits are both at zero.

FIDIA MDO1680 6-1

In this way, once the UDSA* bit has gone to zero, there is a wait for IDA*P also to go to zero.
The manufacturer therefore has the option of choosing when to disable the motor.

SDDTIMENA XM SDD TIMe ENAble

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 0
Establishes the condition that must be met in order for a digital drive to be enabled.
Valid values:
0 The drive is enabled when the UDSA* bit goes to one.
n Where n > 0 the drive is enabled n milliseconds after the UDSA* or IDA*P bit has gone to one.
1 The drive is enabled when the UDSA* and IDA*P bits are both at one.
In this way, once the UDSA* bit has gone to one there is a wait for IDA*P also to go to one.

SDDMOTCNT XM SDD MOTor CouNTing

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
For axes equipped with Siemens drives, it is possible to read the motor transducer counting system or an external position
transducer. Using this parameter the counting system desired can be selected. Allowed values:
ON the motor counting system is used
OF an external counting system is used

The parameters that define the characteristics of the axes (AXS, AXV parameters, etc.) are to be set as described in the
relevant chapter. These are not dependent on the type of drive. The following parameters do not have any significance when
digital drives are involved, therefore they do not have to be set in either SERVICE area or in the INIPAR.SET file:
AXVVRT Voltage corresponding to the Rapid speed of the axis
AXSOFS Enabling of offset compensation of the axis
The AXSCFE parameter (Enabling of the FAULT management signal of the counts) is of significance only if the counts are
directed towards the FIDIA CNC. If the counts are directed towards the drives, the FIDIA CNC does not read the FAULT signal,
so therefore the AXSCFE parameter loses significance.

6.3 DOUBLE COUNT

Position values (counts) originating from the external transducer (transducer scale of the axis) and from the digital Siemens
motor encoder can be read at the same time. This would be useful in the following cases:
when the motor encoder has to be compared with the external transducer to detect possible errors
when passing from using the external transducer to using the motor encoder (or vice versa), without executing the RESET
SDD command.

The values for these functions can be read in the following read-only parameters in the SERVICE area:
POSITION2 Position of the axis furnished by the second count (motor encoder)
AXSCNTDIF Difference in count between the two transduction systems

6.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION

AXSCNT2 XM
YM
ZM
AM
These enable/disable double count management independently for each axis. Valid values:
ON double count management enabled
OF double count management disabled

AXVMUL2 XM
YM
ZM
AM

6-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

AXVDIV2 XM
YM
ZM
AM
Default values (typical values):
AXVMUL2 xM 3125
AXVDIV2 xM 64

These respectively define the multiplication factor and the division factor for the second count. They are set the same way as
the AXVMUL and AXVDIV parameters.

SDDMOTCNT XM
YM
ZM
AM
This is used for selecting the transducer to be used for calculating the axis position when the AXSCNT2 parameter is ON.
Valid values:
OF the external transducer is used - this is the usual operating mode
ON the motor encoder is used - the motor encoder should only be used in situations where the external transducer is not
available

The zero cycle of the axis should be executed whenever the SDDMOTCNT parameter has been modified.

6.3.2 COMPARING THE TWO COUNTS

When the AXSCNT2 parameter is ON, the CNC will calculate the difference between the value read on the motor encoder and
the value read on the external transducer and compare the result to the threshold defined by the following parameters:

AXVMAXCE XM MAXimum Count difference Error for rapid traverse

YM
ZM
AM

This is the maximum difference allowed between the two counts during movements executed in Rapid or at the programmed
speed.

AXVCEACC XM maximum Count difference Error during ACCeleration

YM
ZM
AM

This is the maximum difference allowed between the two counts in either the acceleration or the deceleration phase.
If the threshold is exceeded, it will be managed like an emergency situation. This comparison is disabled when the AXVMAXCE
and AXVCEACC parameters have a zero value.

6.4 ENDAT TRANSDUCERS

En Dat is a type of absolute transducer. The CNC can read the En Dat position by means of the drives; the absolute position of
an axis is read in the following circumstances:
• when the drives are enabled;
• when requested by PLC.

6.4.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE PARAMETERS

En Dat reading should be enabled by means of the parameters below that must be set in the INIPAR.SDD file before giving the
SDDMIF command.
MD1011
Normally has the value 0. If the En Dat is on the motor measuring system, one of the following values must be entered:
8 if the measurement system is rotary
24 if the measurement system is linear

FIDIA MDO1680 6-3

MD1030
Normally has the value 0. If the En Dat is on the axis measuring system, one of the following values must be entered:
8 if the measurement system is rotary
24 if the measurement system is linear

6.4.2 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION

With En Dat transducers, the parameters below must be set in the INIPAR.SET file:

SDDENDAT XM
YM
ZM
AM
Defines the type of transducer. Allowed values:
ON En Dat type transducer.
OF normal type transducer.

SDMOTENDAT XM
YM
ZM
AM
Defines the position of the En Dat transducer when the SDDMOTCNT parameter is set to ON.
ON En Dat transducer mounted on motor
OF En Dat transducer not mounted on motor

SDENDATZPR XM
YM
ZM
AM
Preset value on the zero. This value is added to the absolute position value read by the En-Dat transducer. Similar to the
AXVZPR parameter, which is only used during the zero cycle. If the axis provides for both an En-Dat transducer and the zero
cycle and different preset values are required for each, both parameters (SDENDATZPR and AXVZPR) must be set.

SDENDATMUL XM
YM
ZM
AM

SDENDATDIV XM
YM
ZM
AM
Counting system multiplication and division factors for an En Dat transducer. They may or may not coincide with the values of
the AXVMUL and AXVDIV parameters. If they coincide, SDENDATMUL and SDENDATDIV can be set to the value zero. In this
way, the AXVMUL and AXVDIV values will also be used for En Dat.

SDENDATOFS XM
YM
ZM
AM
An offset value that is added to the position value read by the En Dat. When the axis is linear, this parameter is used to move
the overflow position beyond the axis travel in such a way that it is never reached. This is possible if the axis is not very long.
To find the optimum value to be assigned to this parameter, the SDENDATINT parameter can be used.

SDENDATZEP XM SDD ENDAT axis Zero End Positioning enable

YM
ZM
AM
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
Reading of the En-Dat position replaces the zero cycle. Therefore with En-Dat transducers, the AXSZPR parameter is generally
set to –1 and SDENDATZEP to OF (the axis does not move during the zero cycle).

6-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

If, during the zero cycle, you wish to move the En-Dat axis to the AXVZEP safety position, you must set a zero priority (AXSZPR
> 0) and the SDENDATZEP parameter to ON. If AXSZPR > 0, the En-Dat transducer is read during each zero cycle on the axis.

Example:
If the Z axis is equipped with En-Dat, you can set a maximum priority of zero for the Z axis, put SDENDATZEP ZM to ON, set a
safety value on AXVZEP ZM and put AXSZEPE ZM to ON. When the zero cycle is started (ZERO RQ command), the Z axis
moves to the safety value, then the other axes execute the zero cycle according to their respective priorities.

READENDATDELAY
Measuring Unit: s
Typical values: [0;10]
Default value: 0
After a RESET SDD, there is a pause for the time specified by this parameter and then the first En-Dat reading is made. This
parameter enables a delay to be inserted before making the En-Dat reading at RESET SDD.

6.4.3 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR PLC USE

SDDRDENDAT XM
YM
ZM
AM
This parameter can be used by PLC to produce an En Dat reading (for example, after mounting a head).
When the parameter is set to OF, the En Dat transducer is read. The CNC then automatically resets the parameter to ON.

6.4.4 READ ONLY MAINT PARAMETERS

SDENDATOVF XM
YM
ZM
AM
Counter for the number of overflows detected by the En Dat transducer.
The parameter value is automatically saved in the INIPAR.NDT file and is reset following an INIT command or after loading the
CNC system disk.

SDENDATINT XM
YM
ZM
AM
The CNC writes the value read by En-Dat in this parameter. The value is then updated with each reading of the incremental
transducer. Consequently, the parameter contains the value that would be obtained if En-Dat were to be read at that instant.
This parameter may be used to find the optimum value to be assigned to the SDENDATOFS parameter.

6.4.5 ENDAT TRANSDUCERS WITH DOUBLE COUNT

The selected EnDat will be read through the SDMOTENDAT parameter, even when the EnDat and the double count
parameters have been defined (SDDENDAT xM ON and AXSCNT2 xM ON). The SDENDATINT and SDENDATOVF
parameters described above refer to the external EnDat transducer, while data for the motor EnDat is displayed by similar
parameters: SDENDATIN2 and SDENDATOV2.

6.4.6 PARAMETERS FOR AUXILIARY AXES AND SPINDLES

The parameters for Auxiliary Axes and spindles with an En-Dat transducer are the same as those described above, although the
name changes slightly.

Normal axes Auxiliary axes Spindles

SDDENDAT ASDDENDAT SSDDENDAT
SDDMOTCNT ASDDMOTCNT SSDDMOTCNT
SDMOTENDAT ASMOTENDAT SSMOTENDAT
SDENDATZPR ASENDATZPR SSENDATZPR
SDENDATMUL ASENDATMUL SSENDATMUL
SDENDATDIV ASENDATDIV SSENDATDIV
SDENDATOFS ASENDATOFS SSENDATOFS
SDDRDENDAT ASDRDENDAT SSDRDENDAT
SDENDATOVF ASENDATOVF Not included
SDENDATINT ASENDATINT Not included

FIDIA MDO1680 6-5

 AXVMUL AXVMUL SP*PAR NPULSE_**
AXVDIV AXVDIV SP*PAR NPULSE_**
AXVZPR AUXZPRS SP*PAR ZPR_**

MD1011 AD1011 SD1011

MD1030 AD1030 SD1030

6.5 AXIS DIRECTION AND COUNT VERIFICATION

This procedure is to be repeated for each axis:
• Move the axis in JOG mode and verify that the axis does not escape.
If the axis escapes, it means that movement and counting are discordant.
• Verify the direction of the movement. When the JOG + button is pressed, the axis must move in the positive direction. When
the JOG button is pressed, the axis must move in the negative direction.
• Verify the count. A positive (negative) movement must correspond to a positive (negative) count on the screen.
If the axis moves in the wrong direction, change the sign of the SDDPITCH parameter value.
If the count is discordant, change the value of the AXVMUL parameter.
• Repeat the tests.

6.6 PROCEDURE FOR FIRST INSTALLATION

The following operations must be executed for the first installation:
• Check that the VSA611D.OMF and HSA611D.OMF files are present on the hard disk, in the directory c:\fidia\custom. If not,
they must be copied.
• Issue the SDDMIF command.

This command activates an automatic procedure that may last several minutes and executes the following operations:
• The software for managing the digital drives (VSA611D.OMF and HSA611D.OMF files) is loaded in the memory of the
drives themselves.
• The INIPAR.SDD and INIPAR.HSA files are loaded. These files, previously generated by the SDDGEN.EXE program, are
structured like the INIPAR.SET file and set default values for the MAINT parameters for digital drives.
• The files SIEMENS.PAR and SIEMHSA.PAR are created. These are binary files in which the values of the parameters for
digital drives (Mdxxxx parameters) are recorded. On completion of the procedure, the files will contain the default values of
the parameters. These files must be present at each machine tool power up since they will be loaded in the volatile RAM
memory of the digital drives.

The files VSA611D.OMF, INIPAR.SDD, SIEMENS.PAR concern the axis drives; they are used when one or more axes are
managed by digital drives.
The files HSA611D.OMF, INIPAR.HSA, SIEMHSA.PAR concern the spindle drive; they are used when the spindle is managed
by a digital drive.

6.7 CALIBRATION PARAMETERS

The FIDIA CNC makes many MAINT parameters available to the installer so that the drives can be calibrated without manual
interventions on the potentiometres and without having to insert impedances.
The parameters most frequently used during installation can be divided into two groups:
• main velocity loop parameters, adjusting the gains of the drives when the dynamic performance of the axes or of the spindle
must be improved or when stability must be increased
• parameters concerning the low pass or band elimination filters, to stabilize the axes or the spindle at determinate
frequencies in which their behaviour becomes critical

These parameters are named Mxxxx and MDxxxx and can be modified in MAINT to obtain their optimal values.
If the Search menu is used for accessing parameters that are not on the AXIS PAR (MAINT SDD) video pages, there will
usually be a message indicating that the value of the parameter is not valid. This occurs because the values of these
parameters are not read continuously on the drives and therefore not updated.
In order to obtain the reading of all drive parameters, it will be necessary to set the SDDREADPAR parameter to ON and
execute a RESET SDD command. At the end of the command, all parameter values will be valid.

6-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

The reading requires about 5 seconds per drive and is done only once, therefore the procedure must be repeated if access is
made through the Search menu for other parameters of drives having values that have not been updated.

6.7.1 VELOCITY LOOP PARAMETERS

MD1407:0
Measuring unit = N . m / s¯¹
Corresponds to the proportional velocity gain (KP) of the axis or spindle.

MD1409:0
Measuring unit = ms
Corresponds to the integral time constant (Ti) of the axis or spindle.

6.7.2 FILTER PARAMETERS

The following are provided for:
n° 4 current filters
n° 2 velocity filters

Each filter can be configured as a low pass filter or as a band elimination filter (NOTCH). In addition velocity low pass filters can
be configured as first or second order filters, while current low pass filters are always second order filters.

6.7.3 CURRENT FILTERS

The MD1200:0 parameter selects the number of current filters to be used.

Valid values:
0 No filter
1 One filter (MD1201.0:0)
2 Two filters (MD1201.0:0, MD1201.1:0)
3 Three filters (MD1201.0:0, MD1201.1:0, MD1201.2:0)
4 Four filters (MD1201.0:0, MD1201.1:0, MD1201.2:0, MD1201.3:0)

The MD1201:0 parameters select each filter type:

MD1201.0:0 type of first filter (if MD1200:0 0)
MD1201.1:0 type of second filter (if MD1200:0 1)
MD1201.2:0 type of third filter (if MD1200:0 2)
MD1201.3:0 type of fourth filter (if MD1200:0 3)

Valid values:
OF Low pass filter
ON Band elimination filter (NOTCH)

The LOW PASS filter is used to cut out those signals with a frequency higher than a given value (f1).
The BAND ELIMINATION filter is used to cut out those particular frequencies of signals which, if sent to the motor, would cause
axis vibration (f3).

a) Low pass filter b) Band elimination filter (NOTCH)

FIDIA MDO1680 6-7

The parameters below are used to specify the characteristics of each filter:
FILTER N. 1
If MD1201.0:0 is OF, the following parameters are used:
MD1202:0 Low pass filter frequency (f1)
MD1203:0 Low pass filter attenuation coefficient (damping gradient)

If MD1201.0:0 is ON, the following parameters are used:

MD1210:0 Frequency eliminated by the band elimination filter (f3)
MD1211:0 Band width of the band elimination filter (f2 ÷ f4)
MD1212:0 Attenuation coefficient (A.C.) of the band elimination filter.
If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in
MD1211) there will be no damping.
FILTER N. 2
If MD1201.1:0 is OF, the following parameters are used:
MD1204:0 Low pass filter frequency (f1)
MD1205:0 Low pass filter attenuation coefficient (damping gradient)

If MD1201.1:0 is ON, the following parameters are used:

MD1213:0 Frequency eliminated by the band elimination filter (f3)
MD1214:0 Band width of the band elimination filter (f2 ÷ f4)
MD1215:0 Attenuation coefficient (A.C.) of the band elimination filter.
If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in
MD1214) there will be no damping.
FILTER N. 3
If MD1201.2:0 is OF, the following parameters are used:
MD1206:0 Low pass filter frequency (f1)
MD1207:0 Low pass filter attenuation coefficient (damping gradient)

If MD1201.2:0 is ON, the following parameters are used:

MD1216:0 Frequency eliminated by the band elimination filter (f3)
MD1217:0 Band width of the band elimination filter (f2 ÷ f4)
MD1218:0 Attenuation coefficient (A.C.) of the band elimination filter.
If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in
MD1217) there will be no damping.
FILTER N. 4
If MD1201.3:0 is OF, the following parameters are used:
MD1208:0 Low pass filter frequency (f1)
MD1209:0 Low pass filter attenuation coefficient (damping gradient)

If MD1201.3:0 is ON, the following parameters are used:

MD1219:0 Frequency eliminated by the band elimination filter (f3)
MD1220:0 Band width of the band elimination filter (f2 ÷ f4)
MD1221:0 Attenuation coefficient (A.C.) of the band elimination filter.
If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in
MD1220) there will be no damping.

6.7.4 VELOCITY FILTERS

MD1500:0 0 No filter
1 One filter
2 Two filters.
Defines the number of velocity filters to be activated on the axis.

1st Filter MD1501.0:0 OF = low pass (L.P.)

ON = band elimination (NOTCH )

2nd Filter MD1501.1:0 OF = low pass (L.P.)

ON = band elimination (NOTCH)

The above two parameters define the type of filter to be activated.

6-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

1st L.P. Filter MD1501.8:0 ON = 1st order
OF = 2nd order

2nd L.P. Filter MD1501.9:0 ON = 1st order

OF = 2nd order
If a low pass type filter has been activated, the above two parameters define the order of the filter.

The parameters below define the characteristics of the low pass type filter activated.
1st L.P. Filter 1st order MD1502:0 time constant (ms)
2nd L.P. Filter 1st order MD1503:0 time constant (ms)

1st L.P. Filter 2nd order MD1506:0 frequency (Hz)

1st L.P. Filter 2nd order MD1507:0 damping

2nd L.P. Filter 2nd order MD1508:0 frequency (Hz)

2nd L.P. Filter 2nd order MD1509:0 damping

If a NOTCH type filter is activated, the following parameters define its characteristics:

1st NOTCH Filter MD1514:0 frequency (Hz)

” MD1515:0 band width (Hz)
“ MD1516:0 attenuation coefficient (Hz)
If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in MD1515) there
will be no damping.

2nd NOTCH Filter MD1517:0 frequency (Hz)

” MD1518:0 band width (Hz)
” MD1519:0 attenuation coefficient (Hz)

If set to the value 0 damping will be total, while if set to the maximum value (equal to twice the value defined in MD1518) there
will be no damping.
For a description of all remaining parameters for Siemens drives, please refer to the relevant installation manual.

6.8 SET OF PARAMETERS

Different sets of values for certain calibration parameters can be defined.
8 sets for C-class CNCs

For example, the set of parameters can be changed according to the type of machining (roughing out, finishing) or the load
mounted on the table.
Parameters that can have different sets of values have the following format:
MDxxxx:n

where:
xxxx code of the parameter
n order number of the set of values

EXAMPLE
The MD1407 is not unique, but is present in different copies:
MD1407:0 first set of parameters (default set)
MD1407:1 second set of parameters
MD1407:2 third set
MD1407:3 fourth set

The following parameters are also present: MD1407:4, MD1407:5, MD1407:6, MD1407:7.

FIDIA MDO1680 6-9

6.8.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION
Switching from one set to another is very fast and simply requires entering the value that will recall the desired set in the
SDDPRS parameter.

SDDPRS XM SDD PaRameter Set

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 0
Since the SDDPRS parameter is a table with as many variables as there are axes, the desired set can be selected for each
drive, independently of the sets enabled for the other drives.
Valid values:
0 enables the first set of parameters (MDxxxx:0)
1 enables the second set (MDxxxx:1)
2 enables the third set (MDxxxx:2), etc.

The maximum value for C-class CNCs is 7. If an invalid value is entered, the 0 value will be automatically entered.
Use the ASDDPRS parameter for auxiliary axes and the SSDDPRS parameter for spindle drives..

6.8.2 PARAMETERS FOR MULTIPLE SETS OF VALUES

Below is a list of parameters for which the Siemens drive manages different sets of values:
Axis parameters:
MD1200
MD1201
MD1202
MD1203
MD1204
MD1205
MD1206
MD1207
MD1208
MD1209
MD1210
MD1211
MD1212
MD1213
MD1214
MD1215
MD1216
MD1217
MD1218
MD1219
MD1220
MD1221
MD1230
MD1233
MD1235
MD1321
MD1322
MD1331
MD1332
MD1334
MD1335
MD1336
MD1337
MD1363
MD1401
MD1405
MD1407
MD1408
MD1409

6-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

MD1410
MD1414
MD1415
MD1417
MD1418
MD1421
MD1426
MD1428
MD1500
MD1501
MD1502
MD1503
MD1506
MD1507
MD1508
MD1509
MD1514
MD1515
MD1516
MD1517
MD1518
MD1519
MD1520
MD1521
Spindle parameters:
SD1200
SD1201
SD1202
SD1203
SD1204
SD1205
SD1206
SD1207
SD1208
SD1209
SD1210
SD1211
SD1212
SD1213
SD1214
SD1215
SD1216
SD1217
SD1218
SD1219
SD1220
SD1221
SD1230
SD1233
SD1235
SD1321
SD1322
SD1331
SD1332
SD1334
SD1335
SD1336
SD1337
SD1363
SD1401
SD1405
SD1407

FIDIA MDO1680 6-11

SD1408
SD1409
SD1410
SD1414
SD1415
SD1417
SD1418
SD1421
SD1426
SD1428
SD1451
SD1453
SD1500
SD1501
SD1502
SD1503
SD1506
SD1507
SD1508
SD1509
SD1514
SD1515
SD1516
SD1517
SD1518
SD1519
SD1520
SD1521
SD2230
SD2233
SD2235
SD2401
SD2405
SD2407
SD2408
SD2409
SD2410
SD2417
SD2418
SD2426
SD2451
SD2453

6.9 DRIVE MEASUREMENTS

There are four test points (DAU1, DAU2, DAU3, GROUND) near the red led on each digital drive as illustrated in the figure
below:

Test points
Signals originating from a digital analog converter (DAU) are placed on the test points. These signals can be displayed through
an oscilloscope and their configuration will depend on the MAINT parameters described below.

DADRIV DAU1 DAu DRIVe number

DAU2
DAU3

6-12 MDO1680 FIDIA

Number of the drive on which the measurement is to be made. Defines the drive on which the relevant test point is to be used.
The coupling between the drives and the axes is dependent on the machine. Normally, drive n.1 commands the X axis, n.2 the
Y axis, n.3 the Z axis, and so on.

DASIGN DAU1 DAu SIGNal number

DAU2
DAU3
Depending on the number entered, the type of quantity at output from the relevant test point is defined. To see which number
corresponds to which signal name, refer to the relevant table in the Siemens installation manual.
The signals more commonly used, and utilized by us during calibration, are:
6 current nominal value
8 reale number of revolutions of the motor
9 nominal number of revolutions of the motor (output value given from the CNC)

DASHFT DAU1 DAu SHiFT value

DAU2
DAU3
Shift value desired on the relevant test point. Valid values are between 7 and 23.
It defines the position of the 8 bit signal that is given in output to be displayed on the oscilloscope. Since each signal inside the
drive partially occupies a 24 bit area and the converter only considers 8, a shift value must be set so as to take into account the
8 bit area in which the significant part of the data element is contained. With a shift value of zero, bits 16 23 are converted and
made available at the test point.
In order to understand the effect of a shift value other than zero, visualize an 8 bit window placed on a 24 bit signal. The window
is moved by as many bits as specified by the shift value, to the right or to the left depending on the sign. The shift value must be
carefully selected because if it is too low, nothing will be displayed and if it is too high, there will be an overflow of the data
displayed and the measurement would therefore lose significance. If two signals are to be displayed simultaneously in order to
compare them, it is advisable to use the same DASHFT value for both signals so that the measuring unit is the same.

EXAMPLES
If the number of revolutions is to be displayed, the shift values to be used for axes are the following:
velocity max 4000 mm/min shift 9
velocity max 1000 mm/min shift 11
velocity max 100 mm/min shift 14
velocity max 20 mm/min shift 16

Shift 20 also allows a following error of 1 micron to be displayed.

If the current is to be displayed with a max. feed of 4000 mm/min, a shift of 6 is sufficient.

DACONV DAU1 DAu CONVerter enable

DAU2
DAU3
Enables/disables the generation of the signal at the relevant test point. It should be set to OF before any variation in the
preceding parameters, and then reset to ON in order to have the signal available at the desired test point.
This parameter is automatically set to OF each time the machine tool is powered off. Valid values:
ON converter enabled
OF converter disabled

Displays in MAINT SDD:

The following parameter displays the Exploitation (i.e. torque-power) of the M* motor:

POWER M1
M2
M3
..
M16
The value of the parameter assumes the following meanings:
For speeds below the "knee" of the diagram, the torque is expressed as a percentage (%) of the nominal torque.
For speeds above the "knee2 of the diagram, the power is expressed as a percentage (%) of the nominal power (32767 =
100%).

FIDIA MDO1680 6-13

POWER2 M1
M2
M3
..
M16
Active power expressed in kW. Value is 2 * PIGREC * N * Mnom.

SDDRPM M1
M2
M3
..
M16
Actual axis speed expressed in rpms

CURRENT M1
M2
M3
..
M16
Actual current expressed in amperes.

UDSAXSDD UDSAX1
UDSAX2
..
UDSAX16

IDAXPSDD IDAXP1
IDAXP2
..
IDAXP16
These parameters display, respectively, the enabling command (UDSAXnn – given by the CNC to drive nn) and the drive ready
response (IDAXPnn – given by drive nn to the CNC).
They are similar to the UDSA* and IDA*P bits (where * = X, Y, Z, etc.) which, however, refer to the axis name and not to the
drive number.

6.10 MAINT PARAMETER BACK-UP

Saving will make the optimum values of parameters for drives in the SERVICE (MAINT) area permanent. The save procedure
may require some tens of seconds, depending on the number of drives, in order to be completed.
This operation is allowed only when the CNC is operating in Manual mode.

The following soft-keys are available:

SAVE SDD
Saves the current values of SDD parameters for axes in the following files:
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM\INIPAR.SDD
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM\SIEMENS.PAR

SAVE HSA
Saves the current values of SDD parameters for spindles in the following files:
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM\INIPAR.HSA
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM\SIEMHSA.PAR

Description of the files generated:

SIEMENS.PAR and SIEMHSA.PAR

These contain the current values for all the drive parameters. When these files are reloaded (when turned on with the RESET
SDD command), the values of all the parameters are restored. These files are not in text format, so the installer can not read the
values contained in them.

6-14 MDO1680 FIDIA

INIPAR.SDD and INIPAR.HSA
These contain the list of current values for all the drive parameters. They are in text format and are therefore easy to read, edit
and print. These files are generated primarily for purposes of documentation, but can also be used for creating new
SIEMENS.PAR and SIEMHSA.PAR files using the SDDMIF command executed, for example, on another machine tool to enter
parameters for several machines at the same values. Keep in mind, however, that the drives will recalculate the values of some
parameters (e.g. MD1407, MD1409) when the SDDMIF command is given, so the installer would need to manually enter these
parameters after the SDDMIF procedure.

6.10.1 MULTIPLE SIEMENS.PAR AND SIEMHSA.PAR FILES

There can be several SIEMENS.PAR and SIEMHSA.PAR files, e.g. SIEMENS1.PAR, SIEMENS2.PAR, etc. The drives use only
one pair of SIEMENSn.PAR - SIEMHSAn.PAR files at a time. Use the following parameters to select the files to be used:

SDDFILEPAR
Measuring Unit: n
Valid values: [0;32767]
Default value: 0
If a value other than 0 is entered, the SIEMENSn.PAR file (where n is the SDDFILEPAR) will be loaded when the RESET SDD
command is given and saved when an SDDMIF or SAVE SDD command is given. If the parameter has a 0 value, the above
operations will be done on the SIEMENS.PAR file.

SSDDFILPAR
Measuring Unit: n
Valid values: [0;32767]
Default value: 0
This parameter is used with HAS drives (generally used for spindles). If a value other than 0 is entered, the SIEMHSAn.PAR file
(where n is the SSDDFILPAR) will be loaded when the RESET SDD command is given and saved when an SDDMIF or SAVE
HSA command is given. If the parameter has a 0 value, the above operations will be done on the SIEMHSA.PAR file.

6.11 EXAMPLE OF CALIBRATING SIEMENS DRIVES FOR AXES

This paragraph gives an example of a procedure for calibrating Siemens digital drives.

This procedure has been performed successfully on different machine tools but should be considered as a guideline only
and not as a standard procedure, since it is impossible to describe a procedure that is valid for all cases.

WARNING!!
1 THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS GIVEN AS AN EXAMPLE ONLY.
THE VALUES TO BE USED MUST BE CUSTOMIZED ACCORDING TO
THE MACHINE TOOL TO BE INSTALLED.

6.11.1 CALIBRATING DRIVE GAINS (Kp Ti)

Instructions on how to calibrate the following parameters will be described in this section:

MD1407:0 Proportional gain of the velocity loop (Kp).

MD1409:0 Reset time of the velocity loop (Ti).

The calibration is done by analyzing the response of the axis subjected to a step in velocity with the position ring open.
The first operation to be done is that of selecting a feed that does not saturate the drive current.
In order to do this, proceed as follows:
Assign the value 8 to the DASIGN DAU1 parameter and the value 6 to the DASIGN DAU2 parameter. In this way, when a
storage oscilloscope is connected to test points DAU1 and DAU2, the real value of the rpms and the nominal value of the motor
current will be respectively displayed.
Briefly move the axis in JOG in the positive direction to take up any play.
Program a feed of 600 mm/min and set this value with the potentiometre (this speed value is only indicative since it is suitable
for certain machine tools, but could be excessive and cause damage if used on others).
• Open access to the SERVICE area. Enter the MAINT DGT environment.
Assign the name of the axis on which the calibrations are to be made to the AXISERDI parameter.

FIDIA MDO1680 6-15

 Press the POINT button in the DIGITIZING section. In this way, a step will be automatically generated in the positive
direction with an amplitude equal to the feed set through the potentiometre.
• Observe the shape of the waves in the oscilloscope (of particular interest at this point is the nominal value of the output
current from DAU2). There will be current peaks corresponding to the leading edge of the step. If the peaks are cut in
amplitude, it means that there is saturation and it will therefore be necessary to appropriately lower the feed value until the
signal drops below the saturation limit. In most cases, values between 500 1000 mm/min are appropriate.

Saturation of the drive

Calibrating the gains

• Assign the value 9 to the DASIGN DAU1 parameter and the value 8 to the DASIGN DAU2 parameter. In this way, when a
storage oscilloscope is connected to test points DAU1 and DAU2, the nominal value and the real value of the motor rpms
will be respectively displayed.
• Briefly move the axis in JOG in the positive direction to take up any play.
• Open access to the SERVICE area. Enter the MAINT DGT environment.
• Assign the name of the axis on which the calibrations are to be made to the AXISERDI parameter.
• Program a feed that does not saturate the drive defined in the previous phase.
• Assign a very high value to the MD1409:0 parameter (ex. 500). Press the POINT button in the DIGITIZING section.
• A step will be generated in the positive direction with an amplitude equal to the feed set through the potentiometre.
• Observe the shape of the waves in the oscilloscope.

Response to the step

• Progressively increase the value of the MD1407:0 parameter (e.g. a step of 0.2) until the axis responds to the step with an
overshoot.
• Reduce the value of the MD1407:0 parameter so that there is no longer an overshoot.
• Use the oscilloscope to measure the transient adjustment time in milliseconds (Ti). This is the time within which the axis
reaches regime from idle. Assign this value to the MD1409:0 parameter.

6-16 MDO1680 FIDIA

 Transient adjustment

6.11.2 SETTING THE FILTERS

VELOCITY FILTERS
Always set a low pass filter to attenuate the steps due to the sampling time of the FIDIA control (set it at the same value as
defined in the RTC2 parameter). The addition of this filter can reduce the roughness of the surface machined in the finishing
phase.
This can be done by setting the following MAINT parameters:
MD1500:0 1 (no. of active velocity filters)
MD1501.0:0 OF (first filter: low pass)
MD1501.8:0 ON (first order defined first filter)
MD1502:0 4 (time constant of first filter assuming RTC2=4 ms)
CURRENT FILTERS
By default the first current filter is always set as a low pass filter with a cutting frequency of 2 KHz and a damping line slope of
0.7. This filter is necessary since the drive requires the input command signal (from the CNC) to have a frequency not greater
than 2 KHz. The parameters below will therefore have the following default settings:
MD1200:0 1 (enables the first current filter)
MD1201.0:0 OF (low pass filter)
MD1202:0 2000 (cutting frequency)
MD1203:0 0.7 (attenuation coefficient)

The NOTCH current filters (exclude band) are to be used if the axis is noisy and squeaks. The frequencies to be suppressed
can be identified by observing the current signal (DASIGN 6) during axis movement (with the position ring closed) in the
segment that results as being noisy.
The calibration procedure for these filters can be as follows:
• Accurately measure the frequency of the axis oscillations.
• Set an exclude band filter. It should eliminate the measured frequency and initially act on a wide band (ex. 100 Hz). If, for
example, the measured oscillation frequency was 800 Hz, the following MAINT parameters would have to be set:

MD1200:0 2 (enables the second current filter since the first is already in use)
MD1201.1:0 ON (notch filter)
MD1213:0 800 (suppressed frequency)
MD1214:0 100 (width of band)
MD1215:0 0 (attenuation coefficient)

• Progressively narrow the width of the filter band (e.g. reduce it by 10 Hz at a time).
• Determine the critical band width value at which the axis starts to squeak again.
• Set a band width value that is higher that the critical value (e.g. 10 Hz higher).

If while moving along the axis, it should continue to squeak in other segments, it means that other frequencies must be
eliminated. In this case, repeat the operations described above, adding other eliminate band filters (increase the value defined
in MD1200:0 and set the values relevant to the characteristics of the new filter) until the squeaks have been eliminated.

FIDIA MDO1680 6-17

6.12 AUXILIARY AXES MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES
The MAINT parameters are similar to those for conventional axes, but their name is preceded by the letter A (e.g. ASDDPITCH
instead of SDDPITCH).
The machine parameters are similar to those for conventional axes, but their name is in the form ADxxxx instead of MDxxxx
(e.g. AD1407:0 instead of MD1407:0).

6.13 SPINDLE MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES

The MAINT parameters are similar to those for conventional axes, but there name is preceded by the letter S (e.g. SSDDPWR
SP1 instead of SDDPWR XM). The machine parameters are similar to those for conventional axes, but their name is in the form
SDxxxx SP1 instead of Mdxxxx XM (e.g. SD1407:0 SP1 instead of MD1407:0 XM). The SP1RANGE V_LG parameter which
defines the voltage for reaching the maximum low range velocity is not present if there is a digital spindle. Instead, the
SP1RANGE MOTMAX_LG parameter, which defines the number of revolutions required before the spindle rotates at the
maximum low range velocity, is present. Other parameters relevant to other ranges are also available; their names end with
_HG or _G1 as for the traditional spindle. The SP1PAR NPULSE_LG parameter defines the number of impulses or periods for
each spindle revolution. If the count arrives at a DCB, this value must be multiplied by four, but not if the count comes from the
digital drive. A spindle enable/disable logic similar to that for the axes is also available. The SSDDTIMLCK SP1 parameter
defines how much time the drive remains enabled after an M05 function. If this parameter does not have a sufficiently high
value, the spindle could stop by inertia (only after an M05). It is recommended that this value be set at -1 in order to correlate
the enabling of the spindle drive to the IDRTM signal. This signal must be managed by PLC or by an external logic.

6.13.1 SPINDLE MANAGEMENT VIA PLC

The PLC programmer has the memory bits listed below available for his use. These are specifically for spindles managed
through Siemens drives.

MSP1EN
This memory bit enables the spindle drive. If the bit is set at the zero logic level, the drive is not enabled.

MSP1RR
This is set at a high logic level if the spindle is rotating and its speed is within the ±5% tolerance with respect to the rotation
speed requested. This bit can be used for setting the IDRTM bit or for keeping the axes on “hold” if the rotation speed is not
correct (during transients).

MSP1V0
This is set at a high logic level if the spindle is not rotating, i.e. if RPN<1.
The correct rotation speed (rpm) is set in the SP1VELIST parameter, which can be set on the monitor or read by PLC.

N.B. – The names of the parameters and bits for a second spindle are identical to those show above, but contain the string SP2
instead of SP1.

6.13.2 CONFIGURATION
The spindle must be configured using the C_GEN utility program. Proceed as follows on the spindle page:
• Select the Controlled box (spindle with transducer)
• Select Siemens in the Drive field
• Select the type of transducer connection in the Transducer field:
o Digital = transducer direct to Fidia CNC
o Siemens = transducer direct to drive

6.14 STAR-TRIANGLE COMMUTATION

The commutation logic between the star and triangle configuration must be commanded by PLC for spindles managed by
SIEMENS drives using the following memory bits:
• MSICST start commutation from star to triangle
• MSICTS start commutation from triangle to star

The SDDST parameter indicates the configuration that is active: ON = star, OF = triangle. It is a read-only parameter present in
MAINT.

6-18 MDO1680 FIDIA

INIPAR.SDD FILE PARAMETERS
It will be necessary to enable commutation from star to triangle and vice versa in the installation phase by setting the following
parameter in the INIPAR.SDD file, before giving the SDDMIF command:

SD1013
Valid values:
0 star-triangle commutation disabled
1 star-triangle commutation enabled

6.14.1 COMMUTATION FROM STAR TO TRIANGLE

• PLC must set the MSICST bit to high level to start commutation from star (default configuration) to triangle.
• When the CNC reads the high level bit, it raises bit 19 in the command register of the drive (SSDCOMMRG parameter) and
waits for bits 7 and 19 of the status register (SSDSTATRG parameter) to go to high level.
• The CNC will then raise bit 21 in the command register and wait for bit 7 to go to low level and bit 23 to high level.
• When this happens, the CNC will zero out the MSICST bit and the commutation will be completed.

6.14.2 COMMUTATION FROM TRIANGLE TO STAR

• PLC must set the MSICTS bit to high level to start commutation from triangle to star.
• When the CNC reads the high level bit, it will zero out bit 19 in the command register of the drive (SSDCOMMRG
parameter) and then waits for bit 7 to go to high level and bit 19 to low level in the status register (SSDSTATRG parameter).
• The CNC will then raise bit 21 in the command register and wait for bit 7 to go to low level and bit 23 to high level.
• When this happens, the CNC will zero out the MSICTS bit and the commutation will be completed.

6.15 SPINDLE DOUBLE COUNT

Position (count) values originating from the external transducer and from the motor encoder can be read at the same time.
This is useful when passing from using the external transducer to using the motor encoder (or vice versa) without executing the
RESET SDD command SDD command

6.15.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION

SPDCNT2 SPn
Double count management can be enabled or disabled independently for each spindle through the SPDCNT2 Spn parameter (n
= 1 for first spindle, 2 for second). Valid values:
ON double count management enabled
OF double count management disabled

SPnPAR NPULSE2_**
Measuring Unit: whole number
Valid values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 4096
Number of motor encoder impulses for each spindle rotation. The value cannot be multiplied by four. This is similar to the
SPnPAR NPULSE_**, but refers to the second count.

SPnPAR ZPR2_**
Measuring Unit: degree
Valid values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 0
Preset coordinate at spindle ZERO.
This is similar to the SPnPAR ZPR_**, but refers to the second count (motor encoder).

Note:
There are separate NPULSE2_** and ZPR2_** parameters for each speed range so that the various ranges can be set at
different values. ** indicates the initials that identify each range: HG, LG, G1, G2, etc.

SSDDMOTCNT SPn
This is used for selecting the transducer to be used for calculating the position of the spindle when the SPDCNT2 parameter is
ON. Valid values:

FIDIA MDO1680 6-19

OF the external transducer is used: this is the normal operating situation
ON the motor encoder is used: use of the motor encoder is recommended only in those situations where the external transducer
is not available

Note:
The spindle must execute the ZERO cycle with SSDDMOTCNT at ON and then at OF. After this operation, the spindle position
value will be correct, even when switched from one transducer to another by modifying the SSDDMOTCNT parameter.
It is our recommendation (at least before executing the ZERO cycle in the above two situations) that switching from one
transducer to the other be executed while the spindle is not held in position control because there could be an emergency
should the position value of the controlled spindle be changed abruptly.

6.16 SECOND LIMIT OF TORQUE/POWER MOMENT

The drive can distinguish between the limits of two different torque/power moments. The first limit is active independently of the
SSDPWLIMC parameter and can be defined through the following parameters:
SD1230 first value of torque moment limit in % of nominal moment
SD1235 first value of power moment limit, in % of nominal power

The reduction values for the first limit are entered through the second limit. This function must be enabled by setting the CNC
SSDPWLIMC parameter to ON.

6.16.1 INIPAR.SDD FILE PARAMETERS

To use the second limit, enter the SD1232 parameter and the following parameters for determining the measure of the reduction
in the INIPAR.SDD file. Then give the SDDMIF command.
SD1231 second value of torque moment limit, in % of first value of torque moment limit
SD1236 second value of power moment limit, in % of first value of power moment limit

6.16.2 ENABLING THE LOGIC

When the SSDPWLIMC parameter is set to ON, the CNC will raise bit 10 in the command register of the drive (SSDCOMMRG
parameter).
When the drive enables the limit, it raises bit 10 in the status register (SSDSTATRG parameter). This bit can be read on the
CNC through the SSDPWLIMS parameter, which is an ON/OFF parameter.

6.17 AXES MANAGED BY HSA DRIVES

HSA drives are particularly suitable for spindles but they can also be used to manage continuous axes and auxiliary axes.
For each axis managed in this way, one of the following parameters in the INIPAR.SET file must be set to ON:
SDDHSA *M if the axis managed by HSA drives is a continuous axis
ASDDHSA *M if the axis managed by HSA drives is an auxiliary axis

6-20 MDO1680 FIDIA

7 INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES

7.1 INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES INSTALLATION

The FIDIA CNC can control up to eight INDRAMAT digital drives plugged into a ring structure where the drives are connected to
each other and to the CNC through a fibre optic cable.
Communications between the CNC and the drives take place in conformance with the SERCOS communications interface
standard. The following are the phases involved in installing the software for the drives:
• setting the CNC parameters
• setting and optimizing the drive parameters
• activation of the drives and execution of the ZERO axis cycles
• diagnosis of any malfunctions

INDRAMAT documentation required for the installation:

• INDRAMAT DDS 2.1/3.1 Applications Manual
• SERCANS Applications Manual

Note:
This chapter was written expressly for DIAX01 and DIAX02 drives. DIAX03, DIAX04 drives, etc. are not described in separate
chapters because the basic concepts for installing the software are the same; the following are the main differences with respect
to these drives and what was written in this manual:
• The program for managing the drives (supplied by INDRAMAT) operates in the Windows environment. It includes many
helpful functions for diagnostics and is easy to use. Installation is easy and automatic.
• INDRAMAT provides hypertext documentation of the "INDRAMAT DDS 2.1/3.1 Applications Manual" in HELP form that can
be consulted in the Windows environment instead of in paper format; files are available in compressed form on the hard disk
in the \SERVICE\INDRAMAT directory.

7.2 CNC PARAMETER SETTINGS

The following parameters must be entered in the INIPAR.SET file when there are INDRAMAT digital drives present:

IDDTIMLCK XM IDD TIMer for axis LoCK

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring unit: ms
Default value: 200
This parameter establishes the condition which must take place in order for the digital drive to be disabled. The manufacturer, in
this way, has the option of choosing when to disable the motor. Valid values:
0 The drive is disabled when the UDSA* bit goes to zero.
n Where n > 0: the drive is disabled n milliseconds after the UDSA* bit has gone to zero. This allows a delay between the
instant that the axis was stopped and the instant in which the drive is to be disabled. The CNC zeroes out the UDSA* bit,
but keeps the drive enabled for the time set in the parameter.
-1 The drive is disabled when the UDSA* and IDA*P bits are both at zero. In this way, after the UDSA* bit has gone to zero,
the IDA*P bit can also be expected to go to zero.

IDDTIMENA XM IDD TIMer for axis ENAble

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring unit : ms
Default value: 0
This parameter establishes the condition which must take place in order for the digital drive to be enabled. The manufacturer, in
this way, has the option of choosing when to enable the motor.
Valid values:
0 The drive is enabled when the UDSA* bit goes to a high level.
n Where n > 0: the drive is enabled n milliseconds after the UDSA* bit has gone to a high level.

FIDIA MDO1680 7-1

-1 The drive is enabled when the UDSA* and IDA*P bits are both at a high level. In this way, after the UDSA* bit has gone to a
high level, the IDA*P bit can also be expected to go to a high level.

IDDPAR LFIBER
Measuring unit : m
Default value: 5
Overall length of the fibre optic cable

IDDPAR LIFEDIFF
Measuring unit : n
Default value: 3
This is the maximum difference between the values of the life counters, which are continuously increased and compared to
make sure that the CNC and the drives are both functioning and are synchronized. If the CNC life counter differs from the life
counters of the drives and the difference exceeds the value assigned to the parameter, there will be an emergency situation.
The zero value disables this control.

IDDPAR DWTIME
Duration of a dwell.
In normal circumstances this parameter should not be modified.

IDDPAR ATTIME
Time taken for a drive to send an “AT telegram”.
In normal circumstances this parameter should not be modified.

IDDPAR MDTIME
Time taken for the Sercans protocol to send an “MDT telegram”.
In normal circumstances this parameter should not be modified.

IDDMOTCNT IDD MOTor CouNTing

Default value: OF
The counting system relevant to the motor transducer or to an external transducer can be read for axes equipped with Indramat
drives. This parameter is used to select the counting system desired.
Valid values:
ON The motor counting system is used
OF The external counting system is used

IDDENDATSCALE XM IDD EN-DAT - SCALE transducer type

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Defines the type of external position transducer.
Allowed values:
ON En-Dat type transducer.
OF normal type transducer.

IDDENDATMOTOR XM IDD EN-DAT - MOTOR transducer type

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: OF
Defines the type of motor transducer.
Allowed values:
ON En-Dat type transducer.
OF normal type transducer.

7-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

IDDENDATOFSCALE XM IDD EN-DAT OFfset for SCALE
YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: .0001 mm
Default value: 0
This is an offset value that is added to the absolute value read by the En-Dat, when using the external position transducer
(IDDMOTCNT parameter set to OF). The offset is used to move the transducer zero position. In such cases, the AXVZPR
parameter (preset value on the zero microswitch) is not used.

IDDENDATOFMOTOR XM IDD EN-DAT OFfset for MOTOR

YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: .0001 mm
Default value: 0
This is an offset value that is added to the absolute value read by the En-Dat, when using the motor transducer (IDDMOTCNT
parameter set to ON). The offset is used to move the transducer zero position. In such cases, the AXVZPR parameter (preset
value on the zero microswitch) is not used.

AXAUTOIDAXP XM
YM
ZM
AM
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If set to ON, it is not necessary to provide a PLC logic for managing the IDA*P signal during the enabling/disabling of the axis
digital drive.

Parameters that define the characteristics of the axes (AXS, AXV, etc.) are to be set as described in the INSTALLING AXES
chapter. They do not depend on the type of drive.

The following parameters do not have any significance with digital drives, therefore they do not need to be entered in the
SERVICE area or in the INIPAR.SET file:
AXVVRT Voltage corresponding to the rapid speed of the axis
AXSOFS Enables axis offset compensation

The AXSCFE parameter (enables counting FAULT signal management) is significant only if the counts are directed to the FIDIA
CNC. If the counts are directed to the drives, i.e. they are indirectly read by the CNC through the IDD board, the FIDIA CNC
does not read the FAULT signal and consequently, the AXSCFE parameter loses significance.

It should also be borne in mind that when indexed scale transducers are connected to drives, the zero cycle cannot be
performed on more than one axis at a time; the AXSZPR table must therefore be set so that the axes have different zero
priorities.

7.2.1 AUXILIARY AXES MANAGED BY INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES

The MAINT parameters are the same as those for conventional axes, except that their names are preceded by the letter A (for
example, AIDDTIMLCK instead of IDDTIMLCK).

7.3 INDRAMAT AXIS DOUBLE COUNT

Position (count) values originating from the external transducer (optical scale of the axis) and from the motor encoder can be
read at the same time. This is useful in the following cases:
• when the motor encoder must be compared to the external transducer to detect possible errors
• when passing from using the external transducer to using the motor encoder (or vice versa) without passing into manual
mode

7.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS FOR INSTALLATION

AXSCNT2 XM
YM
ZM
AM

FIDIA MDO1680 7-3

Enables/disables double count management independently for each spindle axis. Valid values:
ON double count management enabled
OF double count management disabled

IDDMOTCNT XM
YM
ZM
AM
This is used for selecting the transducer to be used for calculating the position of the axis when the AXSCNT2 parameter is ON.
Valid values:
OF the external transducer is used: this is the normal operating situation
ON the motor encoder is used: use of the motor encoder is recommended only in those situations where the external
transducer is not available

A ZERO cycle of the axis is recommended whenever the IDDMOTCNT parameter is modified.

7.3.2 COMPARING THE TWO COUNTS

When the AXSCNT2 parameter is ON, the CNC will calculate the difference between the value read on the motor encoder and
the value read on the external transducer and compare the results with the threshold defined by the following parameters:

AXVMAXCE XM MAXimum Count difference Error for rapid traverse

YM
ZM
AM
This is the maximum allowable difference between the two counts during rapid traverse or at the programmed speed.

AXVCEACC XM maximum Count difference Error during ACCeleration

YM
ZM
AM
This is the maximum allowable difference between the two counts during the acceleration or deceleration phase. If a threshold
is exceeded, it will be managed as an emergency situation. This comparison is disabled when the AXVMAXCE and
AXVCEACC parameters have a zero value.

7.4 SETTING THE DRIVE PARAMETERS

SERCANS software, supplied by INDRAMAT and which runs on a PC (e.g. FIDIA iPC) is used to give commands to the drives
and to change/save/load/display the values of the parameters. Starting the program:
• On the PC selected for the installation (usually a FIDIA iPC), open the directory containing the software (usually
C:\SERVICE\INDRAMAT_DRIVES\nn, where nn = code of drive).
• Run the @isys.exe program to install the software in the PC. Obviously, this operation is to be done only the first time that
the software is to be used.
• Run the SERCANS.BAT file; the software is started.

Using the program is easy and is described in the on-line HELP. The program communicates with the drives through the COM1
port.
To use the program through the COM2 port (the easiest solution when using the iPC), it will be necessary to replace the
GLOBAL.DAT file with the GLOBAL2.DAT file (in the directory containing the SERCANS software, the GLOBAL2.DAT file is
renamed GLOBAL.DAT).
In order for the program to run, the port selected (COM1 or COM2) must be connected to the VS4 connector located at the top
of the front panel of the IDD board.
This is a male 9-pin connector with the following pin-out:

PIN SIGNAL DIRECTION FUNCTION

1 N.C. — No connection
2 RXD INPUT RXD Input
3 TXD OUTPUT TXD Output
4 N.C. — No connection
5 GND POWER Ground Reference
6 N.C. — No connection

7-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

 7 N.C. — No connection
8 N.C. — No connection
9 N.C. — No connection

7.4.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS AND VALUES

The parameters and commands for the drives are explained in Chapter 10 of the INDRAMAT DDS 2.1/2.1 Applications Manual.
The values of the parameters for a standard installation, where the transducers are connected to the drives and indirectly read
by the CNC through the IDD card, are carried in the IDDPAR.STD file in the iPC (usually in the
C:\SERVICE\INDRAMAT_DRIVES\nn directory, where nn = code of the drive).
This text file can be read with any editor program. It has no effect on the operation of the drives and is used only for
consultation. Key information is reported for each drive in the same format as the following example:

S 0 0045 IDN
Scaling Factor for Velocity Data description
00000000000100010000000000000001 code
measuring unit
1 minimum value
65535 maximum value
1 typical value

7.4.2 BASIC PARAMETERS

The most important parameters, i.e. those which must be set during any installation, are listed below. When possible, the value
obtained during a standard installation is also listed. Parameters without a typical value must be customized for each axis.

IDN Description: Typical value:

S- 0- 0044 Scaling of Velocity Data 01001001
S- 0- 0045 Scaling Factor for Velocity Data 1
S- 0- 0046 Scaling Exponent for Velocity Data -3
S- 0- 0076 Position Data Scaling Method 01001001
S- 0- 0077 Translational Position Data Scaling Factor 1
S- 0- 0078 Translational Position Data Scaling Exponent -7
S- 0- 0079 Angular resolution not used
S- 0- 0121 Input Revolutions of Load Gear 1
S- 0- 0122 Output Revolutions of Load Gear 1
S- 0- 0123 Feed constant (screw pitch) 10,000
S- 0- 0100 Velocity Loop Proportional Gain
S- 0- 0101 Velocity Loop Integral Action Time
S- 0- 0004 Smoothing time constant
S- 0- 0043 Velocity polarity parameters
S- 0- 0053 Position polarity parameters

7.4.3 AUTOSCALING OF COUNTINGS AND OUTPUTS

If the following parameters:
S-0-0044
S-0-0045
S-0-0046
S-0-0076
S-0-0077
S-0-0078
S-0-0079
are set to different values from the typical values indicated above, incompatibility can arise between the units of measurement of
the FIDIA inputs (position signals) and the FIDIA outputs (feed command). To avoid such problems, FIDIA has made available
an autoscaling of Inputs/Outputs procedure that makes the numerical control compatible with possible INDRAMAT
parameterization.
In the absence of autoscaling, parameterization from the linear axis is required also for physical rotary axes. However, with
autoscaling this limitation does not exist and so the drive can be parameterized according to requirements (e.g. INDRAMAT
management of rotary axes can be set).
The autoscaling procedure is enabled/disabled for each axis and spindle by setting the following tabular parameters in the
INIPAR.SET file:
IDDASCLIO for normal axes
AUXASCL for auxiliary axes

FIDIA MDO1680 7-5

SIDDASCLIO for spindles

The value ON enables the autoscaling procedure, and the value OF disables the procedure (this is equivalent to adopting the
original scaling of the system).

EXAMPLE:
The autoscaling procedure is to be executed on the B additional axis, on the J auxiliary axis and on spindle 1 only. In the
INIPAR.SET file, set the following parameters to ON and the others to OF:
IDDASCLIO BM = ON
AUXASCL J = ON
SIDDASCLIO SP1 = ON

Further details:
The autoscaling procedure is executed only at initialization of the system. Therefore, if the parameterization of the
INDRAMAT drives is changed while the machine tool is powered on, a system “INIT” must be commanded.
During the autoscaling procedure, if the system reads a type of parameterization that is not allowed, a message informs the
user that autoscaling is not guaranteed for that parameterization and autoscaling is automatically disabled. It is still possible
to switch to Automatic and move the machine, but there is a risk of incoherent units of measurement that may cause high
following error with subsequent emergencies.
The autoscaling procedure checks whether there is a risk of overflow at high speed. The check is made considering a
maximum hypothetical feed of 15000 mm/min if the axis is linear, or 15000 deg/min if the axis is rotary. The overflow may
be caused by a bad parameterization of the drive (e.g. parameters S-0-0045 and S-0-0046 set with incorrect values). If a
risk of overflow is detected, a message is displayed but the autoscaling procedure is performed all the same.

7.5 ACTIVATING THE DRIVES

Load the CNC software into the memory. If it was already loaded, give an INIT command (NOLOAD or LOAD), or turn the
machine tool off and on again. The following message will appear if everything is functioning correctly:
IID012 PHASE 4: DRIVES READY

A "b" is displayed on the seven-segment display on the IDD board. The drives are operating in "phase 4", and not operating in
"phase 2" (however, the parameters can be changed). If this situation does not take place, it means that there are problems.
Many problems are due to incorrectly setting the drive parameters.

7.6 DIAGNOSIS - MESSAGES AND DISPLAY

The following are the tools for a visual diagnosis:
• Messages displayed by the CNC. The text of the messages are the same as those in the SERCANS Applications Manual,
therefore please refer to the manual for explanations.
• Seven-segment display on the IDD board.
• An explanation of the codes displayed is given in the SERCANS Applications Manual.
• H1 display (status, alarms and fault messages) and H2 display (SERCOS module) on each drive.

Explanations of the codes displayed and the actions to be taken in the event of problems are given in Chapter 9 of the
INDRAMAT DDS 2.1/3.1 Applications Manual.

7.7 DIAGNOSIS THROUGH THE SERCANS PROGRAM

The SERCANS software instead of the CNC can be used to go into "phase 4". In fact, when the program is running, commands
can be given to make the switch between phases 2 and 4. This operation can also be done when the CNC is in an emergency
condition. All that is required is that axis sampling (SAMPLE RTC2) be active on the CNC, i.e. that the INIPAR.SET file has
been loaded and the system initialized. The SERCANS software also displays diagnostic messages and this can help the
installer to understand the problems.

7.8 MEASUREMENTS ON THE DRIVES

The INDRAMAT drive provides two channels for analog output signals, from which the values of determinate magnitudes of the
drive can be displayed (e.g. the current). Use of the channels is regulated by the P-0-0038, P-0-0039, P-0-0040 and P-0-0041
parameters which are explained in Chapter 9.5 of the INDRAMAT DDS 2.1/3.1 Applications Manual.

7-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

Measurements made through the CNC screen:
The following parameter is displayed in the MAINT area of the CNC:

CURRENT M1
M2
M3
M4

This is a read-only parameter that displays the torque of motor M1, M2, etc. as a percentage with respect to the maximum
torque.

7.9 ZERO CYCLE

When the transducer is an external one (connected to the DCB or ACB board), the cycle is the same as for axes equipped with
analog drives. However, when the transducer is connected to the drive, the CNC must read the zero position through the drive.
The zero procedure is as follows:
• The user gives the ZERO command.
• The CNC gives the P-0-0014 command to the drive.
• The axis is moved to the reference and the drive writes the exact position on which the index was obtained in the S-0-0173
parameter.
Note that the index is often called Marker in the INDRAMAT documentation.
• The CNC reads the "zero" position in the S-0-0173 parameter.

The CNC does all the processing required for the cycle (microswitch check, calculations for coded line transducers).

7.9.1 DEBUGGING THE ZERO CYCLE

The P-0-0014 command can be give through the SERCANS software. In this case, the axis must be moved manually in JOG
mode. If everything functions correctly after passing on the index, the command ends and the position is stored in the S-0-0173
parameter.

7.10 PLC PROGRAMMING

Before dismounting/mounting an axis while the machine tool is on, a sequence of operations must be executed. These must be
programmed using the PLC language furnished by FIDIA. The information in this section are for the PLC programmer, but they
can also be of use to the Technical Installer for diagnosing logic malfunctions programmed in PLC.

7.10.1 PLC REQUESTS FOR INDRAMAT DRIVES

The following PLC "requests", available only for INDRAMAT drives, are used for dismounting/mounting operations of the axis
heads:
CNCREQ PHASE2
Place the drives in phase 2.
CNCREQ PHASE 4
Place the drives in phase 4.
CNCREQ PARK*
Execute the S-0-0139 command to park axis *.
CNCREQ UNPARK*
Execute the S-0-0129 command to restore axis * from park.
* = X, Y, Z, A4, A5, A6, SPD1, SPD2

7.10.2 DISMOUNTING THE AXIS

PLC must command and control the performance of the following operations:
• Blocking of all axes using the M10 function or, preferably, using the IDRBL* signal
• Passage to phase 2 with the CNCREQ PHASE2 request
• Placing the head axes in park with the CNCREQ PARKA4, PARKA5, PARKA6 requests (only those relevant to axes that
are actually present)
• Disconnecting the motor (or motors)

FIDIA MDO1680 7-7

• Passage to phase 4 with the CNCREQ PHASE4 request

7.10.3 MOUNTING THE AXIS

PLC must command and control the performance of the following operations:
• Blocking of all axes using the M10 function or, preferably, using the IDRBL* signal
• Passage to phase 2 with the CNCREQ PHASE2 request
• Connecting the motor (or motors)
• Restore the head axes from park with the CNCREQ UNPARKA4, UNPARKA5, UNPARKA6 requests
• Passage to phase 4 with the CNCREQ PHASE4 request

N.B. In phase 2, all the drives are disabled, therefore the CNC cannot control the axes. The PLC logic must prevent any axis
movements during this phase.

7.10.4 AUTOMATIC PARKING

This logic operates for main axes, additional axes, tandem axes, auxiliary axes and spindles.
The parameter below is used to activate/deactivate the automatic parking logic:

IDDPARKACT {n. Ch}Park

Default value: ON
{n.Ch} is the number of the drive channel and can assume values from 01 to 08.
Allowed values:

ON
Each time the System is powered on, if an axis is not mounted (IDTM* bit at the low level and AXSIDT *M parameter ON) it is
automatically parked.

OF
It is possible to remove an axis so that the drive, when the System is powered on again, does not automatically execute the
park command. This can be useful in instances in which parking is not indispensable (e.g. removal without disconnecting the
electrical connections and counting systems).

7.11 REAL-TIME GENERAL PURPOSE PARAMETERS

For each drive, the value of a parameter belonging to the S-0-0187 list (list of parameters that can be transmitted cyclically in
an AT) can be displayed in real time.
The parameter is updated with each axis sampling; the PLC programmer can read its value in the following CNC parameter:

IDDGPVAL {n.Ch}Gp
Note: in the parameters described in this paragraph, {n.Ch} is the number of the drive channel (01, 02, etc.).

PLC programming example:

READP “IDDGPVAL 02GP”,TMP.1
The value of the parameter selected for drive 2 is copied into the TMP.1 area

This parameter can also be displayed using the Search function or with the oscilloscope.
There are other parameters that make available additional information about the parameter displayed in IDDGPVAL:

IDDGPUNIT {n.Ch}Unit
Contains the unit of measurement, if available.
IDDGPDESCR {n.Ch}Descr
Contains a string that gives a brief description of the parameter.

A video page exists that displays all the General Purpose parameters that have been activated, their description and unit of
measurement. The page can be accessed using the following soft keys:
CNC + SERVICE + I/O + IDD + GP PARAMETERS

7.11.1 INSTALLATION
For each drive, the MAINT parameters below must be set and saved in the INIPAR.SET file. If these parameters are modified,
an INIT LOAD command must be given to activate the new values.

7-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

IDDGPON {n.Ch}On
The value ON activates the logic on the relevant channel, the value OF deactivates it.
It is not possible to enable the logic on a Tandem axis drive.

IDDGPON {n.Ch}On
Must contain the string corresponding to the name of the parameter to be displayed, in the format:
S-X-XXXX o P-X-XXXX o Y-X-XXXX

Example
IDDGPON 02On = ON
IDDGPNAME 02Name = S-0-0080
The IDDGPVAL 02GP parameter will give a real-time display of the value of parameter S-0-0080 of drive 2.

7.11.2 OPERATION
If the logic is activated, some tests are carried out during initialization:
• First, a grammar check is made on the string entered in IDDGPNAME; the check can return a string empty or syntax error
message.
• A transmission check is then carried out: the CNC analyses the S-0-0187 parameter and if the parameter entered is not
shown in the list, it is refused.
• If the tests are completed successfully, the parameter selected is made available in the IDDGPVAL parameter. Messages
containing the parameter attributes are displayed in the log file: unit of measurement, description, length, number of valid
positions after the point.

If only one test fails, the logic is disabled, messages are displayed and the value of the IDDIOTOR (copy) parameter is copied
into the IDDGPVAL parameter. This is the parameter that is transmitted cyclically by default when the logic is disabled.

7.12 SPINDLE MANAGED BY INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES

The MAINT parameters are similar to those for conventional axes, but their names have the letter S prefix (e.g. SIDDTIMENA
SP1 instead of IDDTIMENA XM). The CNC commands the drive by sending a speed value expressed in 1/10000 rpm (1 rpm =
10000), so consequently, the drive must be configured in the corresponding mode as described in the INDRAMAT
documentation. The SP1RANGE V_LG parameter that defines the voltage for reaching the maximum speed in low range is not
available for digital spindle. In its place the SP1RANGE MOTMAX_LG parameter defines the number of revolutions required for
the spindle to rotate at maximum speed in low range. Other parameters relating to the other ranges are also available and have
the _HG or _G1, etc. suffix in their name as for traditional spindles. The SP1PAR NPULSE_LG parameter defines the number
of impulses or periods for each spindle rotation. If the count reaches a DCB interfacing board, this value must be multiplied by
four, but not if the count comes from a digital drive. An enable/disable spindle logic similar to the one for the axes is also
available. The SIDDTIMLCK SP1 parameter defines how long the drive will remain enabled after an M05 function. If this
parameter does not have a high enough value, the spindle could stop due to inertia (after an M05). It is recommended that this
value be set at –1 in order to correlate enabling the spindle drive to the IDRTM signal. This signal must be managed by PLC or
by an external logic.

Other parameters:

SP1AUTOIDRTM
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If set to ON, it is not necessary to provide a PLC logic for managing the IDRTM signal during the enabling/disabling of the
spindle digital drive.

7.12.1 SPINDLE MANAGEMENT THROUGH PLC

The following memory bits, specifically for spindles managed by digital drives, are available to the PLC programmer:
MSP1EN
This memory bit enables the spindle drive.
If the bit is set “low”, the drive will not be enabled.

MSP1RR
This is set “high” if the spindle is rotating and its speed is within the ±5% tolerance with respect to the required rotation speed.
This bit can be used for setting the IDRTM bit or for keeping the axes on “hold” if the rotation speed is incorrect (during waiting
times).

FIDIA MDO1680 7-9

MSP1V0
This is set “high“ if the spindle is not rotating, i.e. if RPM<1.
The correct rotation speed (rpm) is entered in the SP1VELIST parameter, which can be entered onscreen or read by PLC.

N.B. – The names of the parameters and bits for a second spindle are identical to those show above, but contain the string SP2
instead of SP1.

7.12.2 CONFIGURATION
The spindle must be configured using the C_GEN utility program. Proceed as follows on the spindle page:
• Select the Controlled box (spindle with transducer)
• Select Indramat in the Drive field
• Select the type of transducer connection in the Transducer field:
o Digital = transducer direct to Fidia CNC
o Indramat = transducer direct to drive

If management of motor counts or direct counts to the drives is desired, it will be necessary to have a firmware version
containing the P-0-0014 drive parameter.

7.12.3 ZERO WITH INDEX AND MICROSWITCH

In certain cases, it will be necessary to do an index search during the zero cycle using the zero microswitch also. Use the
following parameter to select the zero cycle logic:

SIDDZERIC SPn (n = 1 for the first spindle, 2 for the second)

Valid values:
ON the CNC will ask the INDRAMAT drives to read the index only after the digital IDMZM signal (spindle zero microswitch)
has changed status
OF the zero microswitch is not managed; only the index is searched

7.12.4 SPINDLE WITH DOUBLE COUNT

Position values (counts) from the external transducer and the motor encoder can be read simultaneously. If the spindle drive
only manages one count, it will be necessary to install an additional count card on the drive.
MAINT parameters for installation:

SPDCNT2 SP1
SP2
Default value: OF
Enables/disables double count management independently for each spindle. After modifying the parameter, it will be necessary
to give the INIT LOAD command.
Valid values:
ON double count management enabled
OF double count management disabled

SIDDMOTCNT SP1
SP2

Default value: OF
When the SPDCNT2 is ON, SIDDMOTCNT selects the transducer to be used for position control during execution of the M19
and G84 functions. This parameter can be modified when the system is in Manual mode.
Valid values:
OF the external transducer is used; this is the normal operating situation
ON the motor encoder is used

N.B. - If the SP1NOIDX parameter is OF, it will be necessary to declare the index to be considered during the zero search
(index of the motor or of the external transducer). It will be necessary to set the S-0-0147 (BIT3) parameter following the
INDRAMAT documentation in order to do this.

7-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

8 RTCP OPTION

8.1 RTCP OPTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL INFORMATION

The following procedure is recommended for installing the RTCP.
• Make the zero cycle mandatory for at least the rotary axes of the head. This is obtained by setting a value greater than zero
in the relevant parameters in the AXSZPR table.
• Identify the role performed by the two rotary axes of the head (load bearing axis and balancing axis) and assign the names
of these axes to the RTCPA and RTCPB parameters of the RTCPAXS table.
• Define the position of the absolute origin of the rotary axes, using the parameters in the AXVZPR table.
• Identify the three linear axes involved in the RTCP operation and assign the names of these axes to the RTCPX, RTCPY
and RTCPZ parameters of the RTCPAXS table.
• Enter the value of the pivot constant in the RTCPLKS parameter.
• Insert a tool and assign the value of the tool length to the TLENGTH parameter (T0 box).
• Activate the RTCP (issue the RTCP ON command).
• Verify that the RTCP is functioning correctly.
• Try to rotate only the two rotary axes of the head (one at a time, e.g. using the handwheel) and verify that the associated
linear axes are properly compensated, i.e. so that the point of the tool remains steady. If this is not the case, proceed as
follows:
• If the motion of a rotary axis is compensated on the wrong linear axes, the axes have been improperly coupled and the
correction must be made in the RTCPAXS table.
• If the compensation involves the correct axes but the linear axis is compensated in the opposite direction, the relevant
parameter in the RTCPINV table must be modified.
• If the linear axes are compensated in the correct direction, but with the wrong quantity, it could mean that the wrong pivot is
being used. Double check the values of the RTCPLKS and TLENGTH parameters.

After the installation technician has corrected the parameters, the tests must be repeated to ensure that the axis movements are
the correct ones.
• Should the acceleration required of the linear axes in reference to the trajectories to the tool center be higher than what they
can physically support, reduce the RTCPACCE parameter value.
• Record the definitive values of the parameters in the INIPAR.SET file.

8.1.1 RTCP FOR 4 AXES

If the machine only has one rotating axis available for the RTCP, the CNC must then simulate a 5 axis machine, where the fifth
axis will be a dummy axis.
The following is necessary when the RTCPA axis is the dummy axis:
• set the RTCPAXS SIMRTCPA parameter to ON
• set the fixed position at which the CNC must see this dummy axis in the RTCPAXS POSRTCPA parameter

When the RTCPB axis is the dummy axis, proceed in the same manner. However, use the SIMRTCPB and POSRTCPB
parameters.
All the other parameters are to be set as for a conventional RTCP.
The following are examples of two of the most common cases:

EXAMPLES

4 axis machine. The fourth axis is a rotating balancing axis (usually the A or B axis). Set the following values:
RTCPAXS SIMRTCPB = ON
RTCPAXS POSRTCPB = 0. (or 90. or 180. or 270. depending on the case)

4 axis machine. The fourth axis is a type C rotating axis and has a fixed 90 head. Set the following values:
RTCPAXS SIMRTCPA = ON
RTCPAXS POSRTCPA = 90.

FIDIA MDO1680 8-1

8.2 RTCP OPTION PARAMETERS (ES/TR)
RTCPAXS RTCPX RTCP AXeS names
RTCPY
RTCPZ
RTCPA
RTCPB

The RTCPAXS table defines the axes (linear and rotary) which are involved in the functioning of the RTCP.
The table consists of the following parameters:

RTCPAXS RTCPA
Default value: AM
Name of the rotary axis holding the tool (balancing axis).

RTCPAXS RTCPB
Default value: BM
Name of the rotary axis holding the RTCPAXS RTCPA axis (load bearing axis).

Significance of RTCPAXS parameters

The two rotary axes must have their relevant absolute origins in well defined positions which can be obtained using the following
criteria:
• The RTCPB axis must have its absolute origin (0 coordinate) in the position in which the RTCPA axis rotates around the
relevant coordinated axis (which will be set in RTCPX).
• The RTCPA axis must have its absolute origin (0 coordinate) in the position in which the tool is parallel to the linear RTCPY
axis and consequently is not influenced by the movements of the RTCPB axis, i.e. by rotating the RTCPB axis when the
RTCPA axis is positioned at the zero coordinate, the tool does not have to change its orientation in space.

RTCPA and RTCPB axes in zero position

In order to bring the absolute origins of the rotary axes into the desired position, the AXVZPR parameter must be used (see
relevant description).

8-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

RTCPAXS RTCPX
Default value: XM
Name of the linear axis around which the rotary axis defined through the RTCPAXS RTCPA parameter rotates when the
RTCPB axis is positioned at its zero coordinate. The RTCPB axis must be positioned at the zero coordinate and then the
RTCPA axis must be observed: in this position, the name of the linear axis which is parallel to the RTCPA rotary axis is obtained
and assigned to the RTCPAXS RTCPX parameter.

RTCPAXS RTCPY
Default value: YM
Name of the linear axis around which the rotary axis defined through the RTCPAXS RTCPB parameter rotates.

RTCPAXS RTCPZ
Default value: ZM
Name of the remaining linear axis involved in the functioning of the RTCP. It is the coordinated axis perpendicular to both the
RTCPX and the RTCPY. Valid names for the RTCPX, RTCPY and RTCPZ parameters are:
XM X axis
YM Y axis
ZM Z axis
XT X axis tracer
YT Y axis tracer
ZT Z axis tracer
UM parallel axis to X (U mirror)
VM parallel axis to Y (V mirror)
WM parallel axis to Z (W mirror)

In order to assign the RTCPA and RTCPB parameters, the installation technician must know the names the CNC uses to
identify the rotary axes of the head. These names are determined when the software is generated, so will vary from one
machine to another. The most commonly used names are:
AM axis that rotates around X
BM axis that rotates around Y
CM axis that rotates around Z

RTCPINV RTCPX RTCP INVersion

RTCPY
RTCPZ
The RTCPINV table defines the direction in which the linear axes are to be compensated when the rotary axes (RTCPA,
RTCPB) are moved in the RTCP active condition.
The table consists of the following parameters:

RTCPINV RTCPX
Default value: OF
Direction of compensation for the RTCPAXS RTCPX axis. Valid values:
OF Direct action. This is the normal condition.
ON Reverse action. To be used only when the RTCPAXS RTCPX axis is moved in the opposite direction.

RTCPINV RTCPY
Similar to the above parameter, but for the RTCPY axis.

RTCPINV RTCPZ
Similar to the above parameter, but for the RTCPZ axis.

RTCPACCE RTCP ACCeleration

Measuring unit: m/s²
Valid values: [.001;32]
Default value: .1
Acceleration used for the rotary axes (RTCPA and RTCPB) when the RTCP operation is active. In RTCP, ON reduces the
acceleration of the rotary axes so that their movements are compensated without errors on the linear axes. In such
circumstances, it is essential that the linear axes faithfully follow the rotary axes, especially when the latter are moved in JOG
mode or through the handwheel. The accelerations defined in the AXVACCE and AXVACCEM table are used for the linear
axes. However, when several axes are moved at the same time, the lowest acceleration value will be used for all the axes.
When the RTCP is disabled, the accelerations in the AXVACCE and AXVACCEM table are used for all the axes and the
RTCPACCE parameter is ignored. The parameter was created for machines requiring low accelerations with the RTCP ON

FIDIA MDO1680 8-3

while tolerating higher accelerations with the RTCP OFF. In these cases, the value of the RTCPACCE parameter should be
reduced and the AXVACCE and AXVACCEM parameter should be left unchanged so as to not overly penalize movement under
normal working conditions (RTCP OF). The optimum acceleration values are the maximum values tolerated by the machine.
The value of the RTCPACCE parameter must be lowered should too much acceleration of the linear axes not be faithfully
compensated during rotary axis movements. The following procedure is used for detecting errors in the acceleration phase:
• Replace the tool with a balled stylus;
• Position two comparators at 90° on the rotating plane of one of the rotating axis (see figure);
• Reset the comparators to zero;
• Set the pivot and activate the RTCP;
• Move the rotating axis so that the center of the ball is in theory immobile;
• If the maximum errors signaled by the comparators at the start up exceed the threshold of the required accuracy, lower the
acceleration value of the rotating axis in RTCP (RTCPACCE parameter).
• Repeat the procedure for the other rotating axis.

Given that there is only one RTCPACCE parameter, set the lowest acceleration obtained from the two rotating axes.

Method for detecting errors during the acceleration phase

RTCPLKS RTCP Length (pivot) KonStant

Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [0;200000]
Default value: 0
Distance measured between the centre of rotation of the RTCPA axis and the spindle nose.

Significance of the pivot

The CNC uses this distance to determine the value of the total pivot, i.e. the distance between the centre of rotation of the head
and the tool centre. The formula used is as follows:
PIVOT = RTCPLKS + TLENGTH
(TLENGTH is the parameter used by the user to specify the length of the tool).

8-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

In order for the pivot to be calculated correctly, the distance between the nose of the spindle and the tool centre (must be a
positive distance) must be entered in TLENGTH.

RTCPAXS SIMRTCPA
Default value: OF
This defines whether the RTCPA axis is physically present or if it must be simulated by the CNC. Valid values:
ON The axis is not present on the machine, therefore it must be simulated
OF The axis is physically present

RTCPAXS POSRTCPA
Measuring unit: deg
Typical values: [0. 90. 180. 270.]
Default value: 0
Fixed position at which the “dummy” rotary axis is located, i.e. the RTCPA axis that will be simulated by the CNC since it is not
present on the machine. This parameter is used only when the RTCPAXS SIMRTCPA parameter is in ON.

RTCPAXS SIMRTCPB
Default value: OF
This defines whether the RTCPB axis is physically present or if it must be simulated by the CNC. Valid values:
ON The axis is not present on the machine, therefore it must be simulated
OF The axis is physically present

RTCPAXS POSRTCPB
Measuring unit: deg
Typical values: [0. 90. 180. 270.]
Default value: 0
Fixed position at which the "dummy” rotary axis is located, i.e. the RTCPB axis that will be simulated by the CNC since it is not
present on the machine. This parameter is used only when the RTCPAXS SIMRTCPB parameter is in ON.

RTCPCOMP RTCP COMPensation of mechanical misalignment

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the compensation logic of mechanical misalignments when the RTCP is in OF. This is only present if the
RTCP option is present.
When the RTCP is in ON, misalignments relevant to the axes of the head are compensated independently of the value of the
RTCPCOMP parameter. This parameter is useful when it is necessary to compensate mechanical misalignments, even when
the RTCP is disabled. Valid values:
ON compensation enabled
OF compensation disabled

Procedure:
• set the compensation values in the RTCPDIS DXBT, DZAT, DZBA parameters; these values are used with RTCP ON and
with RTCP OF
• set the RTCPCOMP parameter to ON
• verify the accuracy of the head using a suitable indicator

RTCPCOMPTERMIC RTCP TERMIC COMPensation

Default value: OF
Activates/deactivates the thermal compensation logic for the pivot when RTCP is OF.
• If RTCPCOMPTERMIC and RTCPCOMP are both ON, thermal compensation for RTCP is activated even when RTCP is
OF.
• If RTCPCOMPTERMIC or RTCPCOMP is OF, thermal compensation for RTCP is activated only when RTCP is ON.

RTCPTETA
Measuring unit: deg
Typical values: [2;20]
Default value: 5
This is the size of the segments in which the path is divided for calculating the speed with the look-ahead logic. It is expressed
in angular measuring units.

FIDIA MDO1680 8-5

It is only used for calculating the look-ahead, therefore it does not define the size of the executed segments nor the value of the
chordal error with respect to the theoretic path.

RTCPANG
Measuring unit: deg
Typical values: [-45;0;45]
Default value: 0
The rotation axes of the RTCPA and RTCPB rotary axes are usually perpendicular to each other to form a 90° angle. The
RTCPANG parameter must be at the zero value in these cases.
However, there are heads where the rotation axes are inclined in a different way. In these cases, the angle that the RTCPA
rotation axis forms with the perpendicular to the RTCPB rotation axes must be entered in the RTCPANG parameter. This value
is equal to the angle that the RTCPA rotation axis forms with the RTCPX axis when the rotary axes are at the zero position. The
sign of the angle can be obtained through trial and error.

The figures below illustrate the concepts described. In the first figure, the RTCPA and RTCPB rotation axes are perpendicular,
so RTCPANG equals zero. In the second figure, the RTCPA and RTCPB axes are not perpendicular, so the RTCPANG must be
determined and entered

DELTARTCPA
Measuring unit: deg
Valid values: [0;200000]
Default value: 0
This is the angular distance (offset) between the absolute origin of the RTCPA axis and the origin of the spherical polar
coordinate system of the RTCP.
In normal conditions, the parameter is left at the value zero. A different value is used if the tool is not orthogonal with respect to
the XYZ axes when the rotary axes are in the absolute zero position. In this case, the angular distance between the absolute
zero of the RTCPA axis and the usual position of the orthogonal tool, required for operation of the RTCP option, must be
entered.

8-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

DELTARTCPB
Same as DELTARTCPA, but with reference to the RTCPB axis.

RTCPNOSPIKE
Default value: ON
Normally, this parameter can be left at the default value. This activates a logic for reducing feed peaks when RTCP is ON and
when execution of the part-program involves noticeable feed variations between one block and the next.
The value OF can be used if this logic is found to slow down execution excessively.

SWOFRTCP XP SWitch OF RTCP

YP
ZP
AP
Default value: OF
Normally, this parameter should be left at the default value.
In certain cases, the value ON can be set to obtain the following behaviour: when the axis is programmed, RTCP is deactivated
before the axis is moved (in this way, the axis moves with RTCP off). When the axis stops, RTCP is re-activated.

RTCPONMXA RTCP based ON the MXA real values

Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
When RTCP is active and the rotary axes are locked, the movement of the linear axes can be calculated in either of two ways,
depending on the value of RTCPONMXA:
ON the real absolute values of the rotary axes are considered; this enables any small movements of the rotary axes when
they are locked to be compensated.
OF the theoretical values of the rotary axes are considered.

MXAFILTER
Measuring Unit: n
Typical values: [10 - 50]
Default value: 0
Defines the behaviour of a filter acting on the real values of the RTCP rotary axes.
When the filter is enabled, the CNC does not consider the MXA value (absolute real value) but uses a filtered value.
This is useful when the real values of the RTCP rotary axes are not constant, for example when the values change slightly
owing to spindle rotation.
The MXAFILTER parameter specifies how many samples, i.e. how many MXA values, are to be considered in order to calculate
the filtered MXA value.
If MXAFILTER≤0 or MXAFILTER>200, the filter is disabled and the MXA value is used.
It is recommended that you do not use values greater than 50, otherwise there is a risk of deteriorating system performance
(BCT, sampling time).

Read-only MAINT parameters for diagnostics:

M.XAF displays the filtered MXA value.
COUNTMXAF displays the number of MXA values loaded in the buffer (the filtered value is calculated when the buffer is full).

8.3 COMPENSATION IN RTCP OF MECHANICALLY

OFFCENTERED AXES
The following parameters can be used in RTCP for compensating rotary axes and tool which are mechanically off center.

RTCPDIS DXBT
Any off centering according to the RTCPX axis between the real tool axis and the RTCPB axis.
This is the distance component (along the RTCPX axis) between the center of rotation of the rotary axis and the center of the
tool.

RTCPDIS DZAT
Any off centering according to the RTCPZ axis between the real tool axis and the RTCPA axis.
This is the distance component (along the RTCPZ axis) between the center of rotation of the rotary axis and the center of the
tool.

FIDIA MDO1680 8-7

RTCPDIS DZBA
Any off centering according to the RTCPZ axis between the RTCPA axis and the RTCPB axis.
This is the distance component (along the RTCPZ axis) between the centers of rotation of the RTCPA axis and the RTCPB axis.

These values are to be set with either a positive sign or a negative one, depending on whether the off centering is concordant or
discordant with the direction of the axis. In addition, they must be defined while the rotary axes are in the zero position.

EXAMPLES 1:
Head with orthogonal RTCPB and RTCPA axis

Front view

Side view

8-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

EXAMPLES 2:
Head with non orthogonal RTCPA axis

Projection on vertical plane; RTCPA axis at 180º

Projection on vertical plane; RTCPA axis at 0º

Projection on horizontal plane; RTCPA axis at 0º

8.4 TCS - TOOL COORDINATE SYSTEM

There are various operating modes, depending on the values of certain parameters (TCSRTCP ENABLE, CPVALUES, etc.).

8.4.1 TCSRTCP ENABLE IN OF PARAMETER

This is the normal operating mode in which rotations of the reference system are calculated taking into consideration the RTCP
parameters.
Rotations are around two axes only: first around the Z axis, then around the X or Y axis (X or Y is selected automatically in
order to minimize rotation around Z).

Alternatively, the rotations desired can be set by changing one of the following parameters to ON:

FIDIA MDO1680 8-9

• TCSAXS ROTOONLYX = ON the reference system always rotates around Z and X
• TCSAXS ROTOONLYY = ON the reference system always rotates around Z and Y

With a Nutator head (RTCPANG other than 0), there is a choice of the following modes:
• TCSAXS TCSNUTATORXY = ON calculates two rotations only: around Z and around X or Y (as explained above).
• TCSAXS TCSNUTATORXY = OF enables a traditional operating logic that calculates three rotations, around the X, Y and
Z axes.

The values for the rotations calculated are shown on the video and in the log file by the message ICN365.

8.4.2 TCSRTCP ENABLE IN ON PARAMETER

In this situation, the TCS can be managed by the PLC which will set the relevant parameters.

If the TCSRTCP CPVALUES parameter is OF:

Instead of the rotary axis values, the values of the following parameters are considered:
TCSRTCP
POSRTCPA
POSRTCPB

When calculating rotations of the reference system, the following parameter is considered instead of RTCPANG in Maint RTCP:
TCSRTCP
RTCPANG

The rotations of the reference system calculated are applied around the axes specified by the following parameters:
TCSRTCP
RTCPX
RTCPY
RTCPZ

If the TCSRTCP CPVALUES parameter is ON:

The values specified in the parameters below:

TCSRTCP
POSRTCPA
POSRTCPB

are used directly as values for the rotation of the reference system around the axes specified by the following parameters:
TCSRTCP
RTCPX
RTCPY

8.5 USEFARANG LOGIC WITH RELEASE

If the G24 function, tool alignment or inverse RTCP is active, when the head rotary axes are programmed the CNC calculates
two pairs of angles and selects the pair closest to the start point (primary pair). However, if a value in the primary pair exceeds
the software limits and the USEFARANG parameter is ON, the head axes are positioned according to the second pair of angles,
executing an anomalous and potentially dangerous movement. A safety logic can be enabled that breaks down the above
movement into a series of presumably less dangerous movements that are executed after releasing the virtual quill axis.

Set the following MAINT parameters:

USEFARANGSVIN RETON
Default value: OF
Allowed values:
ON safety logic enabled
OF safety logic not enabled

8-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

USEFARANGSVIN AUTORETON
Default value: OF
Allowed values:
ON automatic safety procedure, i.e. performed without asking the user’s consent
OF the user must press START at the beginning and end of the safety procedure

USEFARANGSVIN DELTARETRACT
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: [10. ; 100.]
Default value: 0
Amount of the release along the virtual quill axis.

USEFARANGSVIN DEBUG
Default value: OF
Can be set to ON during diagnostics in order to have more detailed messages.

8.5.1 OPERATION
If the RETON and USEFARANG parameters are both ON, when the CNC selects the pair of angles furthest from the start point
the following safety procedure is carried out:
• The start of procedure message (IEX446) is displayed.
• If AUTORETON is OF, the system waits for the user to press START.
• The virtual quill axis is released and positioned at the current value + DELTARETRACT.
• If RTCP is enabled, it is disabled.
• The virtual axis is disabled, without setting the value to zero.
• The tilting axis (pitch) is positioned at 0.
• The rotary axis (roll) is positioned at the end value.
• The tilting axis (pitch) is positioned at the end value.
• If, at the start of the procedure, RTCP was enabled, it is now re-enabled.
• The virtual axis is re-enabled.
• The linear axes are positioned at their respective end values.
• The end of procedure message (IEX447) is displayed.
• If AUTORETON is OF, the system waits for the user to press START.
• The virtual axis returns to the start value.
• File execution is resumed.

FIDIA MDO1680 8-11

8-12 MDO1680 FIDIA
9 ROTO OPTION

9.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

A series of parameters must be set In order to install RTCP options for the rotating table and workpiece alignment. These
parameters can be accessed through the SERVICE area of the CNC (MAINT ROTO softkey).
These parameters are to be used exclusively by the installation technician and must not be modified by the End user.

9.2 PARAMETERS FOR RTCP ON TABLE

ROTOAXS ROTOX ROTO option AXeS
ROTOY
ROTOZ
ROTO*
SIMROTO*
POSROTO*

The * (asterisk) character represents the characters A, B, C in this section.

The ROTOAXS table is used for defining the axes (linear, rotating, simulated) that are involved in running of the RTCP option
(ROTO) on the table. It consists of the following parameters:

ROTOAXS ROTOX
ROTOY
ROTOZ

These parameters define the names of the linear axes around which the first, second and third rotations will be respectively
executed.
Practically speaking, when the local reference system is rotated (to compensate for physical or simulated movement of the
pallets), rotation is first executed around the ROTOX, then followed by rotation around the ROTOY axis and lastly around the
ROTOZ axis.
If the situation calls for less than three rotations, set only the relevant parameters.
Only the first three linear axes of the machine can be set, so therefore this option is not compatible with machines with
synchronous axes.

N.B. – It is essential for the axes to be defined respecting the order of the rotations or else there will be an incorrect operation.
Obviously, there is no problem when only one rotation is involved.

ROTOAXS ROTO*
These parameters define the names of the rotating axes that perform the roles of pallets.
ROTOA, ROTOB, ROTOC are, respectively, the pallets which, when positioned at their absolute zero, rotate around the axes
defined in ROTOX, ROTOY, ROTOZ.
The following must be taken into consideration for a correct definition
• ROTOC is the independent pallet (or only one when there is only one pallet). Its position in space is not influenced by the
ROTOB and ROTOA pallets.
• ROTOB is the pallet mounted on ROTOC. Its position in space changes whenever ROTOC is moved.
• ROTOA is the pallet mounted on ROTOB. Its position in space changes whenever ROTOC or ROTOB is moved.

FIDIA MDO1680 9-1

Diagram of machine with two pallets: ROTOC and ROTOB

Only pallets that are physically present must be defined. The remaining ROTOAXS ROTO* (* = A, B, C) parameters must be set
to OF.

EXAMPLE 1
Setting parameters for machines with only one pallet (C-axis rotating around Z)
ROTOAXS ROTOZ ZM SIMROTOA OF POSROTOA 0.0
ROTOAXS ROTOC CM SIMROTOB OF POSROTOB 0.0
ROTOAXS ROTOA OF SIMROTOC OF POSROTOC …
ROTOAXS ROTOB OF
ROTOAXS ROTOX OF
ROTOAXS ROTOY OF

Significance of ROTOZ ROTOC parameters

ROTOAXS SIMROTO*
ROTOAXS POSROTO*
These parameters are used for simulating the ROTO option. In this case, the local reference system is rotated in place of the
pallet.
It is possible to have physical rotations (pallets) and simulated rotations simultaneously on the same machine tool.

Procedure for simulating the ROTO* (* = A, B or C) axis:

• Set the ROTOAXS ROTO* parameter to OF
• Set the ROTOAXS SIMROTO* parameter to ON
• Assign the simulated position of the rotating axis to the ROTOAXS POSROTO* parameter

9-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

When there is a ROTO* (* = A, B or C) pallet present, simulation must be disabled, with the parameters set as follows:
• The ROTOAXS ROTO* parameter cannot be at OF
• The ROTOAXS SIMROTO* parameter must be at OF

ROTOINV ROTO* ROTO option INVersion

This parameter is used when the rotation of the pallet is incorrectly compensated with a rotation of the reference system in the
opposite direction.

In these cases, the ON value must be set. Leave the value at OF for any other situation.

ROTODIS CENAY ROTO option DISalignment

CENAZ
CENBZ
CENBX
CENCX
CENCY

The parameters in the ROTODIS table define the position (abscissa and ordinate) of the centre of rotation of the ROTO* pallets.
The coordinates must be absolute and measured on a pair of axes that are subject to the values set in ROTOX, ROTOY,
ROTOZ as shown in the table below:

ROTOX CENAY CENAZ

X Y Z
Y Z X
Z X Y
ROTOY CENBZ CENBX
Y Z X
Z X Y
X Y Z
ROTOZ CENCX CENCY
Z X Y
Y Z X
X Y Z

EXAMPLE
If ROTOAXS ROTOZ is equal to Z, enter the position of the pallet centre along the X-axis in ROTODIS CENCX and the position
along the Y-axis in ROTODIS CENCY.

Significance of the CENCX and CENCY parameters

ROTOABS ROTO ABSolute origin

This is used for selecting whether the rototranslation of the reference system (made to compensate for pallet movement) must
be based on absolute rotating positions or on positions relevant to the active origin.
Valid values:
OF compensation based on rotating positions making reference to the active workpiece origin
ON compensation based on absolute rotating positions, i.e. with reference to the zero origin
If more than one rotation is executed, it will be necessary use absolute positions so that compensation will be done correctly.

FIDIA MDO1680 9-3

ROTOACCE ROTO option ACCEleration
Measuring unit: kdeg/s²
Valid values: [.001; 32]
Default value: 0.1
This is the acceleration to be used on the rotating table when the “RTCP on table” function is active.
It is used during manual movements (jog and handwheel) and during the execution of part-programs and individual blocks.
This is measured in thousands of degrees per square second. The parameter is used for setting a low acceleration value for
machines that have this need. When the “RTCP on table” option is disabled, the accelerations in the AXVACCE and
AXVACCEM table will be used for all the axes, so the ROTOACCE parameter will be ignored.

ROTOTETA
Measuring unit: degrees
Typical values: [2; 20]
Default value: 2
This is the size of the segments in which the path is divided for calculating speed with the look-ahead logic. This is expressed in
angular units of measure. It is used only for look-ahead calculations and therefore does not define the size of the segments
executed or the value of the chordal error with respect to the theoretic path. Normally, it will be necessary to leave the default
value.

ROTOONMXA ROTO based ON the MXA real values

Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
When the ROTO logic is active and the rotary axes are locked, movement of the linear axes can be calculated in either of two
ways, depending on the value of ROTOONMXA:
ON the real absolute rotary axis values are considered; this allows for compensation of any small movement when the rotary
axes are locked.
OF the theoretical rotary axis values are considered.

9.3 WORKPIECE ALIGNMENT PARAMETERS

This section describes alignment cycle parameters.
The ROTOALIGNET parameter selects the alignment mode: it can be set during installation and can be modified by the user
before a specific machining operation.
The other parameters are set automatically by the alignment cycles and generally do not have to be modified manually.

ROTOALIGNEA
This must be set to ON to align the part-program with the workpiece through a rotation around the ROTOX axis. Otherwise, set
at OF.

ROTOALIGNEB
This must be set to ON to align the part-program with the workpiece through a rotation around the ROTOY axis. Otherwise, set
at OF.

ROTOALIGNEC
This must be set to ON to align the part-program with the workpiece through a rotation around the ROTOZ axis. Otherwise, set
at OF.

ROTOALIGNET ROTO Tool ALIGNEment

This is used for selecting the alignment mode when both the RTCP and ROTO logics are active and the Workpiece Alignment
logic has been installed (ROTOALIGNEA and/or ROTOALIGNEB and/or ROTOALIGNEC is ON). Valid values:
OF Alignment of axis movements only
ON Alignment of axis and tool movements (only if a head or table with RTCP is present)

On the video pages accessed by pressing the ROTO ORIGIN soft keys, the following parameters must be set depending on the
origins to be used. Each origin has its own parameters that are independent of those of other origins.

CENX
CENY
CENZ
XYZ co-ordinates of the centre of rotation of the Reference System.
If the alignment involves just one rotation, set the pair of co-ordinates that correspond to the plane on which rotation occurs (e.g.
for ROTOALIGNEC, set CENX and CENY).

9-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

If the alignment requires more than one rotation, all three parameters must be set in order to define the position in space of the
point around which rotation occurs.

POSROTOA
Angle of rotation of the Reference System around the X axis.

POSROTOB
Angle of rotation of the Reference System around the Y axis.

POSROTOC
Angle of rotation of the Reference System around the Z axis.

9.4 ROTARY TABLE MOUNTED ON A LINEAR AXIS

9.4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

If the rotary table is mounted on a linear axis, the head movements and the co-ordinates of the centre of rotation of the table can
be linked to the position of the linear axis on which the table is mounted.

When the ROTO logic is ON, the linear axes of the head remain referred to the table during translation: if the linear axis that
translates the table is moved, the head follows the table but its values are unchanged on the video. In this way, the origin in use
remains referred to the centre of rotation of the table.
The axis that translates the table must move in parallel to one of the XYZ axes.

9.4.2 PARAMETERS
On the MAINT ROTO page, press the ROTO SHIFT soft key. A page containing the following tabular parameters is displayed.

ROTOSHIFT
Allowed values: [names of axes]
Default value: OF
Selects the axis that translates the table, i.e. the axis on which the table is mounted.
Enter the name of the axis whose value is used to translate the corresponding CEN** centre of rotation co-ordinate.
Parameters in the table:

CAYSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENAY co-ordinate

CAZSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENAZ co-ordinate
CBZSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENBZ co-ordinate
CBXSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENBX co-ordinate
CCXSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENCX co-ordinate
CCYSHIFT Axis whose value is used to translate the CENCY co-ordinate

If the table is moved by a single linear axis, one parameter should be set in the ROTOSHIFT and ROTOSINV tables; if the table
is moved by two linear axes, two parameters should be set, and so on.
The other parameters should be set to OF, so that they do not contribute to the calculation of the new centre of rotation.

ROTOSINV
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
Defines the sign to be used during the calculation of the new centre of rotation.
If OF, the absolute value of the axis that translates the table (C**SHIFT axis) is added to the initial value of the corresponding
centre (CEN** parameter).
Instead, if ON, the value is subtracted, i.e.: CEN** - C**SHIFT value
Parameters in the table:

AYSINV CAYSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENAY

AZSINV CAZSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENAZ
BZSINV CBZSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENBZ
BXSINV CBXSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENBX
CXSINV CCXSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENCX

FIDIA MDO1680 9-5

 CYSINV CCYSHIFT value added to or subtracted from CENCY

ROTONEWC
This is a table containing read-only parameters that display the updated centre of rotation co-ordinates.

CAYNEW New centre of rotation value = CENAY +/- CAYSHIFT value

CAZNEW New centre of rotation value = CENAZ +/- CAZSHIFT value
CBZNEW New centre of rotation value = CENBZ +/- CBZSHIFT value
CBXNEW New centre of rotation value = CENBX +/- CBXSHIFT value
CCXNEW New centre of rotation value = CENCX +/- CCXSHIFT value
CCYNEW New centre of rotation value = CENCY +/- CCYSHIFT value

9.4.3 EXAMPLE

Let us consider a table that rotates around the ZM axis and which is mounted on the VM axis; this moves parallel to YM, but in
the opposite direction. The parameters should be set as follows:

ROTOSHIFT
CAYSHIFT OF
CAZSHIFT OF
CBZSHIFT OF
CBXSHIFT OF
CCXSHIFT OF
CCYSHIFT VM

ROTOSINV
AYSINV OF
AZSINV OF
BZSINV OF
BXSINV OF
CXSINV OF
CYSINV ON

NOTE: the centre of rotation value to be entered in the following parameters:

ROTO AXES
CENCX
CENCY
must take into account the position of VM.

For example, if the centre of the table is at values XM 300. YM 500. and the VM axis is at the value 100. (absolute origin),

9-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

the correct values to be entered are:

ROTO AXES
CENCX 300.
CENCY 600. (i.e. the value YM would have, if VM were 0)

9.5 G24 WITH ROTO PALLET

The G24 function is now available for systems without a bi-rotary head, but with a bi-rotary table. In this case, the rotation of the
program involves the positioning of the table.
Installation procedure:
• Enter the names of the two bi-rotary table axes in the RTCPAXS RTCPA and RTCPB parameters:
• RTCPA = name of tilting rotary axis (Pitch)
• RTCPB = name of Roll rotary axis
• Enter the names of the three linear axes in the RTCPAXS RTCPX, RTCPY and RTCPZ parameters:
• RTCPX = name of the linear axis around which the RTCPA rotary axis rotates
• RTCPY = name of the linear axis around which the RTCPB rotary axis rotates
• RTCPZ = name of the remaining linear axis
• Set the RTCPAXS SIMRTCPA and SIMRTCPB parameters to ON.
• Set the ROTG24ORARIA parameter to ON.
• Set the AXSROLOV *M parameter to OF for the Roll axis (e.g. CM), since in this case the Roll axis should not be managed
as a rollover axis.

FIDIA MDO1680 9-7

9-8 MDO1680 FIDIA
10 BCD FUNCTION (ES/A-M-S-T)

10.1 BCD FUNCTIONS PARAMETERS

BCDPAR AENABLE BCD functions PARameters
ABCDNAME
ABCDRES
ANDIGIT
MENABLE
MNDIGIT
SENABLE
SBINARY
SNDIGIT
TENABLE
TNDIGIT

The BCDPAR table defines the behaviour of the CNC when the user programs the BCD functions.
It consists of the following parameters:

BCDPAR AENABLE A BCD function ENABLE

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the coding of the Axis Positioner function in BCD.
Valid values:
ON Enables the output of the function in the form of BCD codes.
OF Disables the output of the function in the form of BCD codes.

BCDPAR ABCDNAME A BCD function NAME

Default value: A
Defines the name of the Axis Positioner function coded in BCD.
The most commonly used names are:
A, B, C for rotary axes, revolving respectively around X, Y, Z
U, V, W for linear axes, parallel respectively to X, Y, Z

EXAMPLE
The user would like to program the axis positioner using the A function
BCDPAR ABCDNAME = A

BCDPAR ABCDRES A BCD function RESolution

Measuring unit: deg
Valid values: [.001;200000]
Default value: .1
Programming resolution. This is the distance between two valid positions of the Axis Positioner.
When the user programs the Axis Positioner, the value is divided by the BCDPAR ABCDRES parameter. The result of the
division is given in output coded in BCD. The division does not give a remainder.
If the division is not exact, the following error message appears:
EEXE165 * BCD Conversion error

EXAMPLES
Management of a 120 position rotary positioner in which there is a pitch of 3 between one position and another:
BCDPAR ABCDRES = 3.

Management of a 360 position rotary positioner in which there is a pitch of 1 between one position and another:
BCDPAR ABCDRES = 1.

In both examples, the user can program the axis in degrees according to the FIDIA standard (degrees if a decimal point is used,
thousandths of a degree if a decimal is not used).

FIDIA MDO1680 10-1

Examples of programming
A45. BCD code output for positioning A axis at 45°
B180. BCD code output for positioning B axis at 180°

BCDPAR ANDIGIT A BCD function Number of DIGIT

Valid values: [2;4]
Default value: 1
Selects the number of digits used for coding A functions.

BCDPAR MENABLE M BCD function ENABLE

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the coding of the M function in BCD.
Valid values:
ON Enables output of M functions in BCD codes.
OF Disables output of M functions in BCD codes.

BCDPAR MNDIGIT M BCD function Number of DIGIT

Valid values:[2]
Default value: 2
Selects the number of digits used for coding M functions

BCDPAR SENABLE S BCD function ENABLE

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the coding of the S function (in BCD or in Binary).
Valid values:
ON Enables output of coded S functions
OF Disables output of coded S functions
The type of coding depends on the BCDPAR SBINARY parameter.

BCDPAR SBINARY S BINARY function enable

Default value: OF
This is used for selecting the code for the output of S functions.
Valid values:
ON Binary code
OF BCD code

BCDPAR SNDIGIT S BCD function Number of DIGIT

Valid values: [2;4]
Default value: 2
Selects the number of digits used for coding S functions.

BCDPAR TENABLE T BCD function ENABLE

Default value: OF
Enables/disables the coding of the T function in BCE.
Valid values:
ON Enables output of T functions in BCD codes.
OF Disables output of T functions in BCD codes.

BCDPAR TNDIGIT T BCD function Number of DIGIT

Valid values: [2;4;6]
Default value: 2
Selects the number of digits used for coding T functions.

10-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

11 SCREW CORRECTION

11.1 SCREW CORRECTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL

INFORMATION
The basic software that is furnished with FIDIA CNCs can be used to:
• Correct errors in axis linearity. These errors cause a difference between the real positions of the axis (obtained using
precision instruments such as lasers or gauges) and the positions read by the CNC.
• Recovery of backlash on the axes, which shows up as position errors each time an axis reverses its movement. The
compensation is effective only when there are minor errors in linearity and backlash.

The correction is made on a certain number of points selected by the technician based on the requirements. These points can
be distributed in various areas along each axis stroke. 500 correction points are available, to be allocated on the various axes to
be compensated.
The coordinates of the points and the correction values must be recorded in the AXVCAL.SET program.
These correction values are loaded and activated when the system executes the AXVCAL.SET program and are maintained
until the next execution of the AXVCAL.SET program.
When an axis is on one of its correction points, the software compensates the value by adding the value of the linearity
correction to the value originating from the transducer.
If the axis reverses its movement direction, the software further compensates the axis value by also applying the backlash
recovery value.
When the axis is between two correction points, the software executes a linear interpolation and assigns intermediate linearity
correction and backlash recovery values.
There are two types of error compensations:
• compensation of an axis in function of its position to correct axis linearity errors
• compensation of an axis in function of the position of another axis, usually to compensate the slide drop

N.B. The compensations described in this section are static.

Dynamic compensation for axis inversion is described in Section COMPENSATION FOR NONLINEARITY DURING AXIS
INVERSION

11.1.1 STRUCTURE OF THE AXVCAL.SET FILE

Press the EDIT softkey on the AXIS CALIBRAT page (SERVICE area) to open the AXVCAL.SET file.
The file must contain the following:
• a block with the G102 function at the beginning
• a block with the G100 function at the end

The blocks with the corrections are programmed between the G102 and G100 functions.
The blocks in the AXVCAL.SET file are to be composed as follows:
N.. X.. R.. E..

N block number
X axis name (X, Y, Z, A, etc.), followed by the coordinates of the point in which the correction values must applied; the
coordinates must make reference to the absolute zero of the axis
E linearity correction value
R backlash recovery value

EXAMPLE
N20 X 120. R.15 E.25

The coordinates are to be programmed in mm, inches or degrees with the same criteria as those used for programming the
FIDIA CNC (see PROGRAMMING Manual). To select programming in millimetres or inches, respectively program the G71 or
the G70 function at the beginning of the AXVCAL.SET file. Two or more correction points cannot be programmed together. They
must be placed on separate lines. At least two points must be programmed for each axis to be corrected.
The following example (valid for a system with X, Y, Z, C and B axes) helps to make the concepts described up to this point
clearer:

FIDIA MDO1680 11-1

G102
X-400.Q0R0E.5 ;applies a linearity correction of 0.5 mm to the absolute X 400 coord.
;The correction is zero at the zero coordinate.
;The correction value is interpolated for all intermediate coordinates
X E0
Y-350.E-2
Y0 E0
C-360.R.1 ;there is no linearity correction for the C axis but only backlash recovery correction
C360. R.1
B-40.E.01 R.007
B0 E0 R.007
B40. E-.2 R.012
G100

11.2 COMPENSATING THE SLIDE DROP

The compensation of an axis in function of the position of another axis is generally used for compensating the slide drop, where
the Z coordinate is corrected in function of the position of the Y axis.
Programming:
• program the name of the axis to be corrected in the block with the G102 function
• program the various corrections in the subsequent blocks using the name of the axis in function of whose position the
corrections must be made

EXAMPLE
Typical case of slide drop compensation: the Z axis is corrected by the E quantities according to the position of the Y axis.
G102 Z
Y E.01
Y10. E.02
Y20. E.03
Y30 E.04
Y40. E.05
Y50. E.06
G100

11.3 MIXED PROGRAMMING

Both types of corrections can be programmed in the same file:
• compensation of an axis in function of its position
• compensation of an axis in function of the position of another axis

This can be done by programming different G102 functions without inserting a G100 between them.

EXAMPLE
The file is divided into two sections. Both are preceded by the G102 function. In the first section, linearity errors of the XYZ axes
are corrected and the backlash is recovered. In the second, the slide drop is compensated.
G102
Z E.01 R.01
Z10. E.02 R.02
Z20. E.03 R.03
Z30. E.04 R.04
Z40. E.05 R.05
Z50. E.06 R.06
Y E.01 R.01
Y10. E.02 R.02
Y20. E.03 R.03
Y30. E.04 R.04
Y40. E.05 R.05
Y50. E.06 R.06
X E.01 R.01

11-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

X10. E.02 R.02
X20. E.03 R.03
X30. E.04 R.04
X40. E.05 R.05
X50. E.06 R.06
G102 Z
Y E.01
Y10. E.02
Y20. E.03
Y30. E.04
Y40. E.05
Y50. E.06
G100

11.4 CORRECTIONS ON SYNCHRONOUS AXES

The names of the axes are programmed by the letters X, Y, Z, etc. and the same syntax is followed as for normal axes.
However, in the AXVCAL.SET file corrections are entered in separate sections:
• The copying side axes (XT, YT, ZT) are corrected in a section preceded by a block containing the M83 function.
• The milling side axes (XM, YM, ZM) are corrected in a section preceded by a block containing the M82 function.

11.5 COMPENSATING THE GANTRY AXES

A block with the G103 function must be inserted ahead of the blocks in which corrections relative to the slave axes are
programmed. It is recommended that the slave axis be corrected last since corrections to lines following the G103 will be
applied to the slave axes.

11.6 COMPENSATING AUXILIARY AXES (GP10 OPTIONS)

These are programmed the same way as standard axes, with the only difference being that it will be necessary to place the
letter H before the name of the axis (similar to programming auxiliary axis positioning). The examples below show various types
of compensations for an auxiliary axis named J:

EXAMPLE 1
J-axis compensation in function of its position
G102
HJ... E... R...
...

EXAMPLE 2
J-axis compensation in function of the X-axis
G102 HJ
X... E... R...
...

EXAMPLE 3
X-axis compensation in function of J-axis
G102 X
HJ... E... R...
...

11.7 ACTIVATING THE CORRECTIONS (EXECUTION OF THE

AXVCAL.SET FILE)
The AXVCAL.SET file is automatically executed when the CNC software is loaded. In order to execute the AXVCAL.SET file
immediately (for example after having modified it in edit mode) press the ACTIVATE softkey on the AXIS CALIBRAT page
(SERVICE area). Afterwards, it is recommended that the axes be zeroed out again since the axes may have been shifted
slightly by the application of correction values.

FIDIA MDO1680 11-3

11.8 INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
The following is an example of a procedure for detecting and compensating errors in linearity and backlash at each correction
point (in the procedure, the linearity was corrected first and then the backlash). The procedure is to be repeated for each axis to
be corrected.
Linearity correction
• Execute the ZERO cycle on the axis to be corrected.
• Select the absolute origin (origin 0) so that the coordinates displayed on the screen refer to the absolute zero of the axis.
• Go to the most positive point of the axis.
• Set the gauge or the laser at the same position where the axis is located.
• Programming individual blocks, move the axis in the negative direction on each of the correction points.
• Do not reset the laser to zero between one point and the next.
• Each time the axis is found on a point to be corrected, make a note of the coordinates displayed on the screen and the
linearity error. The error is the position indicated by the laser less the position displayed on the screen.
Backlash recovery:
• While programming the individual blocks, move the axis in the positive direction on each of the correction points (in practice,
the previous phase is executed backwards). Do not reset the laser to zero between one point and the next.
• Each time the axis is on the point to be corrected, note the linearity error, which is the position indicated by the laser less the
position displayed on the screen. The value of the backlash recovery is calculated by the following formula:
backlash recovery = error in linearity at return error in linearity at start
In effect, the linearity error obtained in the outward traverse (first cycle) is subtracted from the linearity error obtained in the
return traverse (second cycle).

Program the coordinates and the correction values for each point in the AXVCAL.SET file; execute the program; repeat the
measurements and verify that the coordinates displayed on the screen and the real coordinates are the same at each correction
point.
Procedure for obtaining the correction values:
$REP 40 ;line 1
> X-10. ;2
+CQA XP -5. ;3
$END ;4
$REP 40 ;5
+CQA XP 5. ;6
> X-10. ;7
$END ;8

The procedure allows for the correction of 40 points along the negative stroke of the X axis. If it is suitably adapted, it can also
be used in other situations. The first $REP $END cycle (lines 1 to 4) is used for obtaining the errors in linearity. The value that
follows $REP is the number of points to be corrected along the axis stroke; these points are equidistant. Line 2 programs the
coordinates of the first point to be corrected. Line 3 defines the increment in value between one point and the next.
The procedure must be executed with the workstation EXECUTE PRC function by selecting the SEMI AUTOMATIC execution
mode (this permits the axis to be halted on each point). In order to avoid errors caused by the backlash, it is necessary that the
axis not reverse its movement during the cycle. It is therefore be good practice to position the axis at a slightly positive
coordinate before starting the procedure. In this way, the axis arrives at the first correction point already moving in a negative
direction. The gauge or laser is to be reset to zero at the first point only. Each time the START button on the pushbutton panel is
pressed, the axis go to the next point. The technician must note the error in linearity at each point.
The second $REP $END cycle (lines 5 to 8) are used for obtaining the values of the backlash recovery. It is actually the first
cycle executed in reverse. Each time the START button is pressed, the axis goes to the previous point. The technician must
again measure the error in linearity at each point and calculate the value of the backlash recovery using the following formula:
backlash recovery = error in linearity at return error in linearity at start

11.9 STORING DEFINITIVE DATA

After the technician has entered the definitive correction values in the AXVCAL.SET file, the file must be stored in the
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory of the hard disk and a backup copy must be made.

N.B.: The zero cycle must be made mandatory on all axes to be compensated. This can be accomplished by assigning a value
greater than zero to the relative parameters in the AXSZPR table in INIPAR.SET.

11-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

11.10 DISPLAYING CORRECTION VALUES
Press the DISPLAY softkey on the AXIS CALIBRAT page (SERVICE area) to access a table displaying the correction values
and positions for each axis.
Correction values:
SCREW_E value E entered in AXVCAL.SET file
SCREW_R value R entered in AXVCAL.SET file
Axis positions:
M.XA1 absolute position of the axis without corrections
M.XA absolute position of the axis with corrections applied
(M.XA = M.XA1 + screw correction)

Use the ACTIVE AUXCOMP softkey to access a similar page for the auxiliary axes.

11.11 COMPENSATION FOR NONLINEARITY DURING AXIS

INVERSION
This option is used for reducing the small risers that are left on the workpiece when the axis is inverted. The correction is done
through a peak in the reference signal given in output for a short time so as to allow for recovery of the mechanical backlash of
the axis.
MAINT parameters

AXVELPLUS, AXVELMINUS
Measuring unit: mm/min
Default value: 0
Speed corresponding to the reference signal peak to recover mechanical backlash of the axis. AXVELPLUS is the value given
when the axis has a positive inversion and AXVELMINUS is the value given when the axis has a negative inversion
Both speeds must be set with positive values the software will apply them in the correct direction.

AXVSCRINV
Measuring unit: ms
Default value: 10
This must be set based on the elasticity of the machine. The optimum value for “rigid” machines is (in theory) equal to the
inverse of Kv. With an increase in elasticity, the optimum value will be lower than the inverse of Kv. The optimum value for your
machine can be obtained through the procedure described below.

AXVKTINV
Measuring unit: ms
Default value: 50
Time constant applied to the peak of the signal.

11.11.1 PROCEDURE FOR OPTIMIZING PARAMETERS

• Do an ERCI on the axis to be corrected at a high speed so that the error can be displayed.
Recommended speed: 3000 mm/min
• Set the following parameters using the soft keys in the MAINT AXIS area:
AXVELPLUS XM = 1000
AXVELMINUS XM = 1000
AXVSCRINV XM = 10
AXVKTINV XM = 50
• Record another ERCI.
It will display a peak in the opposite direction (inside the circle). The peak must be in phase with the inversion. If it is not,
work on the AXVSCRINV time so as to advance or delay the moment in which the correction is to be applied.
• Reduce the AXVELPLUS and AXVELMINUS speeds until a satisfactory ERCI has been obtained.
• Do an ERCI where the axis involved starts its inversion in order to see its behaviour at the starting point.
• Make the necessary adjustments to the AXVELPLUS and AXVELMINUS values.
• Do an ERCI at the speed of 600 mm/min to check the behaviour at a low speed.

Once the procedure has been completed, save the modifications made by inserting them into the INIPAR.SET file.

FIDIA MDO1680 11-5

11.12 EXTENDED SCREW COMPENSATION
The dominant errors of a Cartesian machine tool are listed in the table and shown in graphic form in the diagram.

Geometry errors of a machine tool with three Cartesian axes:

xtx(x) position error in X ytx(y) straightness error in Y ztx(z) straightness error in Z
xty(x) straightness error in X yty(y) position error in Y zty(z) straightness error in Z
xtz(x) straightness error in X ytz(y) straightness error in Y ztz(z) position error in Z
xrx(x) roll error in X yrx(y) pitch error in Y zrx(z) pitch error in Z
xry(x) pitch error in X yry(y) roll error in Y zry(z) yaw error in Z
xrz(x) yaw error in X yrz(y) yaw error in Y zrz(z) roll error in Z

xwy squareness error in XY

zwx squareness error in ZX
zwy squareness error in ZY

Definition of kinematic errors in Cartesian machine tools

11.12.1 ERROR FILE FORMAT

All the corrections should be programmed in the same AXVCAL.SET file. The use of this file and of the G102 function have
already been described in the preceding paragraphs. An extension of the format enables the rotary components of the error
(roll, pitch, yaw) to be programmed using the G113 function, and the components of squareness errors to be programmed via
the G114 function. Correction values should be programmed with the decimal point (from zero up to three decimal digits are
allowed). The unit of measurement is one ten thousandth of a radian. Example: E1.000 sets a rotary error of one ten thousandth
of a radian.

11.12.2 ROTARY COMPONENTS OF THE ERROR

The syntax is similar to that for the G102 function. If the name of an axis is not programmed in the block containing the G113
function, the subsequent terms are roll errors. In this instance, the term expressing rotation around an axis depends on the
position of that particular axis. Instead, if the name of an axis is programmed in the block containing the G113 function, the
subsequent terms are pitch or yaw errors:
• the name of the axis around which rotation occurs is programmed in the block containing the G113 function,
• the correction values are programmed in the subsequent blocks, using the name of the axis whose position depends on the
correction values.

Example:
G113
X0 E.001 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XRX)
X10. E.002
X20. E.003
G113 Y
X0 E.001 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XRY)
X10. E.002
X20. E.003

11-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

11.12.3 SQUARENESS ERROR COMPONENTS
The components of squareness errors are constant (they are not a function of the axis position). The G114 function must
therefore be followed by the name of the axis around which the squareness error causes a rotation (the co-ordinate following
the axis name has no meaning, so the value zero is normally entered). The value after the E function expresses the error.

Example:
G114
X.000 E.001 (this line corresponds to the term YWZ)
Y.000 E.002 (this line corresponds to the term XWZ)
Z.000 E.003 (this line corresponds to the term XWY)

11.12.4 EXAMPLE
The example below (for a system with X, Y and Z axes) helps to clarify the concepts described above:
G102
X0. E.01 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XTX)
X10. E.02
X20. E.03
G102 Z
Y0. E.01 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms YTZ)
Y10. E.02
Y20. E.03
G113
X0. E.001 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XRX)
X10. E.002
X20. E.003
Y0. E.002 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms YRY)
Y10. E.004
Y20. E.006
Z0. E.003 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms ZRZ)
Z10. E.006
Z20. E.009
G113 Y
X0. E.001 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XRY)
X10. E.002
X20. E.003
G113 Z
X0. E.001 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms XRZ)
X10. E.002
X20. E.003
G113 Y
Z0. E.002 (this and subsequent lines correspond to the terms ZRY)
Z10. E.004
Z20. E.006
G114
X.000 E.012 (this line corresponds to the term YWZ)
Y.000 E.023 (this line corresponds to the term XWZ)
Z.000 E.034 (this line corresponds to the term XWY)
G100

11.12.5 BACKLASH
Compensation values for backlash can be programmed in each block, preceded by the R function.

Example:
G113
X0. E.001 R.001
X10. E.002 R.002
X20. E.003 R.003
G113 Y
X0. E.001 R.001
X10. E.002 R.002
X20. E.003 R.003

FIDIA MDO1680 11-7

11.12.6 SUMMARY
A useful table is included at this point for a quick identification of each term:

Function programmed
Term G function
in subsequent blocks
XTX G102 X
XTY G102 Y X
XTZ G102 Z X
YTX G102 X Y
YTY G102 Y
YTZ G102 Z Y
ZTX G102 X Z
ZTY G102 Y Z
ZTZ G102 X
XRX G113 X
XRY G113 Y X
XRZ G113 Z X
YRX G113 X Y
YRY G113 Y
YRZ G113 Z Y
ZRX G113 X Z
ZRY G113 Y Z
ZRZ G113 Z
XWY G114 Z
XWZ G114 Y
YWZ G114 X

11.12.7 USER INTERFACE

A User interface is provided for debugging and for monitoring compensation values.
This interface is organized into two video pages:
• the main page
• a page showing the rotary components of the error and squareness errors.

11.12.8 MAIN PAGE

Press the SERVICE + AXIS CALIBRAT + DISPLAY soft keys.
The main page contains:
• M.XA1: axis position read by the position transducers.
• SCREW_T: total compensation value.
• SCREW_E: total compensation value of the translatory components of the error.
• A*X: total compensation value of the rotary components of the error and of squareness errors.

11.12.9 PAGE FOR ROTARY COMPONENTS AND SQUARENESS ERRORS

Press the SERVICE + AXIS CALIBRAT + MT CHECK soft keys.
The page for the rotary components of the error and squareness errors contains:
• POSITION: axis position read by the position transducers.
• ROTARY ERRORS: terms of the rotary components of the error: XRX, XRY, XRZ, YRX, etc.
• SQUARENESS ERROR: terms of the squareness errors (multiplied by 1000, since they are generally very small).
• A MATRIX: terms of the A matrix, also multiplied by 1000 (for the exclusive use of FIDIA technicians).
• A*X: terms resulting from the multiplication of the A matrix by the X vector (these are the values that will be applied to the
axes).

11-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

12 HANDWHEEL AND PUSHBUTTON PANEL

12.1 HANDWHEEL/PUSHBUTTON PARAMETERS

FMAXHDW Feed MAX HanDWheels
Measuring unit: mm/min
Valid values: [1 the lowest of all the values of the AXVSRT parameter]
Default value: 5000
Maximum speed at which an axis can be moved using the handwheel.
The value of this parameter is used for all handwheels on the machine.

HDW1TMR HanDWheel 1 TiMeR

Measuring unit: secretary
Valid values: [1;30000]
Default value: 20
Time for disabling the first handwheel.
When the handwheel is left inactive for the time defined by the parameter, the CNC will automatically disable it.

HDW1TYPE HanDWheel 1 TYPE

Selects the type of the first handwheel.
Valid values:
R Handwheel equipped with a selector for selecting the axis to be moved.
C Handwheel equipped with buttons for selecting the axis to be moved.
P Handwheel mounted on a FIDIA pushbutton panel (fixed or portable).
F Handwheel mounted on a FIDIA PB17 pushbutton panel.

If the system provides for more than one handwheel, there will be as many HDW*TMR and HDW*TYPE parameters as there
are handwheels.

HPX01 HPX number 1 model

Default value: 0
Defines the model of the portable pushbutton panel.
Valid values:
20 HPX20 or HPJ20 pushbutton panel
1 HPX10/01 /03 portable pushbutton panel with handwheel
2 HPX10/02 /04 portable pushbutton panel without handwheel

If the system provides for more than one portable pushbutton panel, there will be as many HPX0* parameters as there are
HPX/HPJ pushbutton panels. The progressive identification number of each pushbutton panel through the hardware of the
pushbutton panel itself, through the jumpers.

CUSTOMHPX CUSTOM pushbutton and HPX

Default value: OF
This selects the method followed by the PLC to command movements in jog mode. It is only used when the system is equipped
with a non-FIDIA pushbutton panel and a portable HPX/HPJ pushbutton panel.
Valid values:
ON in order to move the * axis in jog (where * = X, Y, Z, 4, 5, 6, etc.), the PLC must set the digital ID*A input (movement in the
positive direction) or ID*I (movement in the negative direction)
OF the PLC must set the digital IDPASP input (movement in the positive direction) or IDPASN (movement in the negative
direction) even if the HPX/HPJ pushbutton panel is enabled. The CNC automatically sets the D*A and ID*I bits based on
the status of the IDPASP, IDPASN and IDPA* bits (digital * axis selection input).

FILTERHDW
Measuring unit: n
Typical values: [0;100]
Default value: 20
This is a filter based on the handwheel counting. It can be modified when it proves difficult to move the handwheel in a uniform
manner. To prevent the axis moving in jerks like the handwheel, try to increase the parameter value.

FIDIA MDO1680 12-1

If the FILTERHDW value is high, there may be a slight delay between rotation of the handwheel by the user and axis
movement.

12.2 POTENTIOMETRE PARAMETERS

Management of potentiometres goes through the following phases, executed in sequence:
1. Elimination of disturbances through a low-pass filter.
2. Adjustment of minimum and maximum
3. Subdivision of the travel into pitches based on the resolution requested.
4. Introduction of a hysteresis
5. Limitation of percentage variations in the time unit

The figure below illustrates the management logic of the FEED potentiometre. The parameter used for executing the operation
is shown under each block. The hysteresis, useful for avoiding oscillations between two potentiometre passes, is automatically
introduced, therefore it is not associated with any parameter.

12.2.1 OVERRIDE FEED POTENTIOMETRE

Management of the axis feed potentiometre is established by the following parameters:

KTOVG Time constant for OVerride Feed

Measuring unit: s
Valid values: [0;0.3]
Default value: 0.040
Time constant of the low-pass filter, used for eliminating disturbances of the signal. By increasing the value, the filter acts more
intensely, but the potentiometre responds with a greater delay.

TRESHOVF ThRESHold for OVerride Feed

Measuring unit: integer
Valid values: [0;40]
Default value: 20
This is the threshold value to which a jump is made to the zero value or to the maximum percentage of the potentiometre. It
allows the zero value to be reached when there are small offsets and the maximum value in the event of low power voltage.
When the value of the input signals from the potentiometre (expressed as a bit number) goes below the TRESHOVF value, the
potentiometre is considered as if it were positioned at zero. Likewise, when the signal exceeds the 2048-TRESHOVF value, the
potentiometre is considered as if it were positioned at the maximum percentage. In the interval between TRESHOVF and 2048-
TRESHOVF, the enabled feed percentage and the value of the input signal are tied by a linear relationship of direct
proportionality.

NSTEPOVF Number of STEPs for OVerride Feed

Measuring unit: integer
Valid values: [30;1000]
Default value: 100
This is the number of parts in which the travel of the potentiometre is divided. Each part corresponds to a fixed feed percentage;
this means that there is no percentage variation as long as the potentiometre remains inside a pitch.

TIMEFOVF TIME for Full OVerride Feed

Measuring unit: s
Valid values: [0;2.0]
Default value: 0.5

12-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

This is the minimum time required for applying the percentage variation corresponding to the entire travel of the potentiometre. It
is used for limiting the feed variation during regulation. Given a t time expressed in seconds, the percentage variation during
interval t is limited to the value L, per the following formula:
L = (200%/TIMEFOVF) * t

When the value of the parameter is increased, the feed will change more slowly.

OVKG00 OVerride feed in G00 - threshold for rapid

Measuring unit: integer
Valid values: [0;256]
Default values: 256
During movement in G00, it defines the percentage of the "Override Feed" potentiometre, beyond which the feed passes
abruptly to 100% of the Rapid value.
Execution of a block containing the G00 function takes place in one of the following ways:
• with the override feed between 0% and OVKG00, the potentiometre is active and influences the feed speed
• with the override feed between OVKG00 and 200%, the feed speed is equal to the rapid value, independently of the position
of the potentiometre

N.B. The value of the parameter is expressed in 1024ths. This means, for example, that 256 defines the percentage of 25% and
1024 corresponds to 100%.

OVKDELTA
Measuring unit: n
Valid values: [0;2048]
Default value: 1024
This is used to limit FEED potentiometre signal slew rate
If the position of the potentiometre has changed by a value greater than the one entered for the parameter between two
Input/Output samplings, a message will be displayed and the axes will stop.
This logic intervenes in the following circumstances:
• The user has turned the potentiometre too fast
• The potentiometre broke while the user was bringing it to the zero position, passing immediately to the opposite end (from
the 0 position to 200%)

The following is a description of the values:

2048 = maximum variation equal to 200% (full travel of the potentiometre)
1024 = 100% (half travel)
0 = 0%

12.3 OVERRIDE SPDL POTENTIOMETRE

Management of the potentiometre for regulating the spindle rotation speed is established by the following parameters:

Name: Unit: Range: Default:

KTOVS s 0 ÷ 0.3 0.040
TRESHOVS n 0 ÷ 40 20
NSTEPOVS n 30 ÷ 1000 100
TIMEFOVS s 0 ÷ 10 2.0

The description is the same as for the corresponding parameters relevant to the FEED potentiometre, therefore please see
above for descriptions.

12.4 DOUBLE CONSOLE WITH I/O LUX

If there are two consoles (with two PCX boards, one per console) and the system is based on I/O LUX modules, you must
proceed as follows during installation.
The definition PCXDOUBLEIOLUX must be included in the SYSTEM.CND file.
Set the following MAINT parameters:

LUXPCXMAIN
Address of the SLU module managing the PCX board in the main console (main). The following two numbers must be entered
and must not be separated by spaces:

FIDIA MDO1680 12-3

• Decimal address of the corresponding controller module CC10
• Position of the SLU module in the I/O LUX chain (01 = first module, etc.)

EXAMPLE
The “main” PCX is managed by the SLU module occupying position no. 04 in the chain and is commanded by module CC10
whose address is 02; set LUXPCXMAIN = 0204

LUXPCXMIRROR
Address of the SLU module managing the PCX board in the secondary console (mirror).
The syntax is the same as for LUXPCXMAIN.

All the pushbutton panel bits need only be defined on the “main” PCX (e.g. IDPST = LUX02.04.16 in the INIPAR.DEF file).

12.5 TEST LAMPS

If the pushbutton panel has a Test Lamps pushbutton, the user can use it to test the correct functioning of the luminous
pushbuttons comprising the pushbutton panel or various pushbutton panels. The pushbutton lamps are assigned to groups
(banks) that are established during installation. When the Test Lamps pushbutton is pressed (IDPTL bit to 1), the lamps in the
first group light up for 3 seconds, then those in the second group light up for 3 seconds and so on, so that only one group is
illuminated at a time.

12.5.1 TESTING LAMPS MANAGED BY IO/LUX

The following parameters are used to define and enable the test lamps logic for the first bank. These are contained in the
IOLUXPAR.INI file that is generally located in the C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory.

LUX00TLMODULE1
Number of the SLU module that manages the pushbutton panel containing the lamps in the first bank. This shows the position of
the module in the I/O LUX chain: 0 = CC10 module; 1 = first module, etc.
The value 0 disables the lamp test for the first bank.

LUX00TLMASKH1 = Bit32 - Bit63

LUX00TLMASKL1 = Bit0 - Bit31
64 bit mask defining which output bits (lamps) make up the first bank. Up to 64 bits can be defined because each SLU module
can manage 64 output bits for each pushbutton panel. The bits defined will be set to 1 when the test lights up the first bank of
lamps. These bits cannot be reset to 0 during the lamp test.

EXAMPLE
All 64 output bits of module no. 4 (SLU) are assigned to the first bank
LUX00TLMASKH1=FFFFFFFF
LUX00TLMASKL1=FFFFFFFF
LUX00TLMODULE1=4

Similar parameters to define and enable the test lamps logic for the second bank:
LUX00TLMODULE2
LUX00TLMASKH2
LUX00TLMASKL2

Similar parameters to define and enable the test lamps logic for the third bank:
LUX00TLMODULE3
LUX00TLMASKH3
LUX00TLMASKL3

Each bank of lamps may be included on the standard or optional CNC pushbutton panel, or on an HPX, HPJ, etc. handheld
pushbutton panel. More than one bank can be defined on the same pushbutton panel so that the different groups of lamps
comprising the panel can be illuminated in sequence.

Note – The LUX00 parameters (given in the example above) are used in the specific case in which the SLU module is
controlled by the CC10 with the address 0. More generally, the parameter name has the prefix LUX** where ** is the decimal
address (00 - 31) given to the CC10 module controlling the SLU for the lamps required.

12-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

13 GANTRY AXIS (GA/*)

13.1 GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION (GA/*) - GENERAL

INFORMATION
The gantry is a particular axis that is formed by a single constituent block that is moved by 2 independent drives which must be
synchronized via software so that the structure is moved correctly.
The physical appearance of a gantry axis is usually that of an arc, which is why machines that use one are called “portal
machines”. The purpose for this software is to enable the control to read the counts and command the drives of the two dummy
axes (both separately, e.g. X and X1 or W and W1), making sure that their positions do not differ beyond certain set values,
otherwise there could be a risk of damage to the structure. By definition, the main axis is called the master axis, while the slave
axis is that axis whose theoretic position is coupled to that of the master axis.
The common parameters for all axes and which must also be defined for the gantry axis are as follows: counts, analog output,
drive data, zero search speed, zero preset, MUL and DIV count factors, management of the hardware and software limit
switches, fault signal and DCB error check, the time and tolerance for keeping the axis in position, holding time for the drive
ready bit.
The control parameters to be defined only for the master axis and used on both gantry axes are as follows: static and dynamic
Kv, accelerations, enable axis blocking, enable offset compensation, rotary linear and roll over selection, value of limit switch,
tolerances and position control ramps.

Other parameters are specific and defined only for the gantry axis. These can be called using the “Maint Gantry” soft key:
• name of the master axis AXVMASTER *G = *M,
• gain and tolerances of the position control ring relevant to AXVKVG *G AXVTOLL1 *G and AXVTOLL2 *G
• slave axis parameter (flag) that only uses the correction term AXVONLYC *G
• installation in course parameter (flag) AXVINST *G.

13.2 GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

After having made all the preliminary calibrations and controls and after having verified the conditions for the proper handling of
the gantry axis, the distance between the index positions of the master and the slave axes when the two axes are mechanically
aligned must be found.
The usual zero search routine with the digital scales first makes the search for the cam for the master axis and then for the
index signal, setting both the master and slave at the AXVZPR value relevant to the master axis. It then searches for the zero of
the slave axis and sets it to its AXVZPR value.
In the installation phase, it is necessary to ensure that the difference in position displayed on the monitor in the ERRGANTRY
parameter is equal to zero with the master and the slave mechanically aligned, before passing into automatic. After passing into
automatic mode, make sure that the AXVZPR *G parameter is at the “0” and set the MAINT parameter AXVINST *G to ON,
which by default is set at OF. In this way, when the zero cycle is executed, the routine will not set any preset value to the axes.
The following message will appear in the log file at the end of the cycle:
"ICN155 DISTANCE BETWEEN INDEX IS (value)”

This message contains the existing distance between the index of the master axis and that of the slave axis. This value must be
set as the slave axis preset, i.e. in the relevant AXVZPR parameter. Set the AXVINST *G parameter back to OF and then
execute the zero procedure again to verify that the two axis are correctly aligned at the end of the procedure.
It is good practice at this point to verify that the absorption of the two motors as well as the tachometric signal and the analog
references are the same for both axes.
With regard to all the control parameters of the axis such as, for example, the static and dynamic Kv, accelerations, tolerances
and limit switch values (available only for the master axis and will be used for both axes), see the description for the relevant
parameters for normal axes.

13.3 GANTRY AXIS PARAMETERS

AXVMASTER *G = *M
Defines the name of the master axis (*M) in relation to the slave axis (*G)

AXVKVG *G
Measuring unit: 1000 (m/min)/mm
Valid values: [.001;2000000]
Default value: 2
Defines the gain of the position control ring (Kg) of the slave axis in relation to the master axis.

FIDIA MDO1680 13-1

Gantry axis control diagram

AXVTOLL1
Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 0.5
Tolerance value of the difference in position between the master axis and the slave axis. If exceeded, the machine will fall into
an emergency situation and display the following message:
“FCN032 *G GANTRY LOOP ERROR (nn ) >1st TOLERANCE (nn)”
In this case, it will be necessary to execute a RESET operation on the control before returning to automatic mode. At this point,
the control will try to bring the error between the axes back within the tolerance before accepting other commands.

AXVTOLL2
Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 1.000
Second tolerance value greater than AXVTOLL1. If exceeded, the machine will fall into an emergency situation and display the
following message:
"FCN173 *G GANTRY LOOP ERROR (nn ) > 2nd TOLERANCE (nn)"
A manual intervention on the axis will be necessary in this case to bring the error below the tolerance threshold, after which it
will be possible to return to automatic mode by executing a RESET operation.

AXSINST *G
Valid values: ON / OF
Default value: OF
When this parameter is set to ON, the gantry axis zero search logic will be switched for the installation phase.

AXVONLYC XG
Valid values: ON / OF
Default value: OF
When this parameter is set to ON, the special gantry correction only logic will be enabled. This logic allows the two axes to be
moved by a single motor, while a second motor will be used to make corrections.
Some gantry axes may be equipped with a supplemental measuring system (rough control count) which must be of the absolute
type, i.e. analog. In this case, in addition to the above parameters, the following parameters must also be defined:

AXV2MUL *M
AXV2MUL *G

AXV2DIV *M
AXV2DIV *G
The above parameters respectively define the multiplication factor and the division factor of the supplemental count of the
master and slave gantry axes (these correspond to the AXVMUL and AXVDIV parameters previously described for normal
axes).

AXS2CEE *M
AXS2CEE *G

AXS2CFE *M
AXS2CFE *G

13-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

The above parameters define the mode in which the system reacts should there be an error in the supplemental count on the
master and slave gantry axes (these correspond to the AXSCEE and AXSCFE parameters previously described for normal
axes).

AXSCOARSE *G
Valid values: ON / OF
Default value: ON
Enables control of the difference between the two totals of the second counts whose value is defined in the next parameter.

AXVTOLLC *G
Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [0;2000000]
Default value: 1.000
Tolerance value on supplemental counts. If exceeded, the machine will fall into an emergency situation and display the following
message:
"FCN172 *G GANTRY COARSE COUNTING ERROR (nn ) >COARSE TOLERANCE (nn)"
It will not be possible to return to automatic mode without zeroing out the difference between the supplemental counts of the
master and the slave.

AXS2ANCNT *M
AXS2ANCNT *G
Valid values: ON/ OF
Default value: OF
These parameters define the type of system used for the supplemental measurement. Set the parameters to ON since the
system used in this case is analog.

13.3.1 GANTRY AXES WITH INDRAMAT DRIVES

If the master and slave axes of the Gantry axis system are managed by INDRAMAT drives, the counting systems of the two
motors can be used as additional counters for a "rough" checking the position of the Gantry axis.
The following parameters must be set:

AXSMCOARSE *M
AXSMCOARSE *G
Default value: OF
Enables/disables use of the motor count for "rough" checking the difference between the coordinates of the master and the
slave axes. Valid values:
ON The check is made using the counting system of the motor. In this case, it is not necessary to set the AXV2MUL,
AXV2DIV, AXS2CEE, AXS2CFE, AXSCOARSE, AXS2ANCNT parameters. The AXVTOLLC parameter which defines the
tolerance value must be set.
OF The check is made using a supplemental external counting system whose characteristics must be defined through the
parameters described above.

AXVCOARSPR *G
Measuring unit: mm
Valid values: [-200000;+200000]
Default value: 0
This is any difference between the values of the two "rough" counts of the motors when the master and the slave axes are
completely aligned. Any offset between the counts of the two motors is taken into account.
If the motor transducers give the same count value in the same position, enter the zero value. If there is a difference, enter the
value.

13.3.2 CODED SCALES WITH GANTRY AXES

The zero cycle with coded scales is described in the CODED SCALES section. The text below describes the differences when
Gantry axes are present.
The zero cycle will first be executed on the master axis and then on the slave axis. In both phases, obviously, the axes will
move at the same time since they are part of a single physical structure.
The MICROZERO parameter is not present for Gantry axes.
The axes in the pair must execute the same zero cycle, therefore:
• If the master axis terminates the zero cycle with coded scales successfully, the slave axis will also execute the zero cycle
with coded scales.

FIDIA MDO1680 13-3

13.3.3 DISPLAY ONLY PARAMETERS
ERRGANTRY
Displays the difference in position detected between the master axis and the slave axis.

POSGANTRY
Displays the position of the slave axis.

ERRINSG
Displays the following error of the master axis.

13.3.4 OTHER PARAMETERS

AXGOPEN *G
Opens the Gantry axis position loop for maintenance operations.
The parameter must be set to OF during normal operation.
This parameter is for the exclusive use of FIDIA Field Service technicians and must not be modified.

N.B. – It is very dangerous to set the parameter to ON. In such a situation, the Gantry axis remains still while the Master axis
can move freely with the risk of damaging the gantry structure in the event of rapid movement.

When the parameter is returned to OF, the Gantry axis moves to the position of the Master axis (this does not happen if an INIT
LOAD command is given).

13.4 GANTRY AXES WITH TORQUE CONTROL

This logic manages a gantry axis by controlling the torque rather than the position.
The axis is driven by 4 motors: two motors in a Tandem configuration move one screw, while the other two motors in Tandem
move the other screw.

MAINT parameters:

GTANDKV XG
YG
ZG
AG
Measuring Unit: m/min
Typical values: [0;1.000]
Default value: 0
If the parameter value is other than 0, the torque control is enabled and the relevant calculations are made.
The value 1.0 means that a 10% difference between the current of the master and slave gantry axes (e.g. XM and XG) gives a
feed correction of 0.1 m/min (i.e. 100 mm/min). The feed correction is applied according to the value of the GTANDTYPE
parameter.

GTANDTYPE XG
YG
ZG
AG
Default value: 1
This parameter specifies how the corrections are to be applied. For further details, see the block diagrams below. Allowed
values:
1 feed correction applied to the slave gantry
2 feed correction applied to the master gantry
3 feed correction applied half to the slave gantry and half to the master gantry (symmetrical configuration)

The value 0 is used only during installation or diagnostics. All the calculations are made, the GTANDCURDIFF and
GTANDVELCORR parameters are calculated, but no feed correction is applied in output for the torque control.

13-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

GTANDVELCORR XG
YG
ZG
AG

Measuring Unit: 0.01 mm/min

This is a read-only parameter that shows the feed correction applied, calculated according to the following formula:
Δv = Kv * ΔI

GTANDCURDIFF XG
YG
ZG
AG

Measuring Unit: % * 100

This is a read-only parameter that shows the difference in current between the master and slave gantry axes (e.g. XM and XG),
expressed as a percentage (value 10000 = 100%).

AXGZONLYM XM
YM
ZM
AM

Allowed values: [ON; OF]

Default value: OF
This is a parameter for the zero cycle. If ON, the zero cycle is performed only on the master gantry, and the absolute position
(M.XA) of the master gantry axis is automatically copied to the slave gantry. This parameter is useful when there is only one
position transducer mounted on the master gantry.

EXAMPLE
Some installation notes for a system with a single transducer connected to the XM motor drive are given as an example:

XM (X master gantry and master tandem) address 0

TX (X master gantry and slave tandem ) address 1
XG ( X slave gantry and master tandem) address 2
TX1 (X slave gantry and slave tandem) address 3

The following must be defined in the INIPAR.DEF file:

AXOUT XM = FDD01.00
AXOUT TX = FDD01.01
AXOUT X1 = FDD01.02
AXOUT TX1 = FDD01.03
AXCNT XM = FDD01.00
AXCNT X1 = FDD01.00

13.4.1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

The block diagrams for a gantry axis X are given as an example. In this specific case, all the tandem motors operate in
TANDTYPE=3 mode. It should, however, be remembered that other modes can be set (TANDTYPE=1 and 2).

FIDIA MDO1680 13-5

13-6 MDO1680 FIDIA
FIDIA MDO1680 13-7
13-8 MDO1680 FIDIA
14 TANDEM MOTOR (TA/*)

14.1 TANDEM MOTOR INSTALLATION (TA/*) - GENERAL

INFORMATION
This option is used to manage axes moved by two or three motors mounted on the same screw and managed by SIEMENS or
INDRAMAT digital drives (not to be confused with the Gantry option where the motors are mounted on two separate screws,
one for each side of the axis). Gantry axes can also be moved by Tandem motors; in this case, each side of the axis is moved
by two or three motors. Since the motors are mechanically linked to each other, the motor speed will be the same in each case.
If the motors, drives and parameters are identical, when the difference in electrical current (torque) of the motors is equal to zero
they operate at the same power. Thus the power of each motor is P = T x V, where V is the speed and T the torque.
To maintain the difference in current (torque) of the two motors at the value zero or at a constant value, the NC reads the
current absorbed and generates a feedback via a feed loop. This feedback may be applied to both motors or to one motor only.
In the first case, the configuration will be completely symmetrical (the CNC commands a reduction in the speed of the motor that
is consuming more current, and an increase in the speed of the motor that is consuming less current). In the second case, one
motor will become the master and the other the slave. In some cases it is useful to have a constant small difference in the
absorption of current between the two motors. In such cases, one of the two motors will be more prompt during positive
movements and the other more prompt during negative movements. This will result in improved axis performance and a
reduction of mechanical play.

14.2 TANDEM MOTOR PARAMETERS

These tabular parameters have as many variables as there are machine tool axes, but the variables are meaningful only for
those axes that are in effect moved by Tandem motors.

TANDSEL1 XM TANDem SELection – motor 1

YM
ZM
AM
Allowed values: 0 motor 1 disabled
1 motor 1 enabled

TANDSEL2 XM TANDem SELection – motor 2

YM
ZM
AM
Allowed values: 0 motor 2 disabled
1 motor 2 enabled to move in the same direction as motor 1
-1 motor 2 enabled to move in the opposite direction with respect to motor 1

TANDSEL3 XM TANDem SELection – motor 3

YM
ZM
AM
Allowed values: 0 motor 3 disabled
1 motor 3 enabled to move in the same direction as motor 1
-1 motor 3 enabled to move in the opposite direction with respect to motor 1

TANDTYPE XM TANDem TYPE

YM
ZM
AM
It defines the configuration type of the tandem motors.

The feed loop feed-back and any pre-loading are applied to motors 1, 2 or both, depending on the parameter value.
Allowed values:
1 motor 2
2 motor 1
3 feed-back and pre-loading on both motors (symmetrical configuration)

FIDIA MDO1680 14-1

If there are three motors, symmetrical configuration only can be set.

TANDKV XM TANDem KV
YM
ZM
AM
Measuring Unit: m/min
Typical values: [0;1.000]
Default value: 0
This defines the gain for the speed loop.
A value of 1.0 would mean that a difference of 10% between the currents of the motors (master - slave) would produce a
difference of 0.1m/min in the speed command.

TANDPLOAD XM TANDem Pre-LOAD

YM
ZM
AM
Default value: 0
Difference between motor currents. It is entered to generate a speed command to preload motor 1, 2 or both (depends on the
TANDTYPE parameter).
In the Tandem 3-motor configuration, the parameter is usually left at zero (no preload).

The TANDPLOAD unit of measure depends on the type of drive:

• INDRAMAT: the parameter expresses a percentage. 1 corresponds to 1/100 (1%) of the maximum current (see S-0-0084
parameter)
• SIEMENS: 1 corresponds to 1/16384 of the maximum current delivered by the drive (MD1107 parameter)
• FIDIA: the unit of measurement depends on the TANDKV parameter. If TANDKV=1.0, the value 1 of TANDPLOAD
corresponds to a preloading set at a feed of 0.1 mm/min. For different values of TANDKV, the preloading can be calculated
using the following formula:
PreLoad [mm/min] = (TANDPLOAD * TANDKV [m/min] ) / 10

The following are block diagrams of the main configurations for Tandem axes.

Tandem 2-motor and TANDTYPE=1

Tandem 2-motor and TANDTYPE=2

14-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

 Tandem 2-motor and TANDTYPE=3

Tandem 3-motor, TANDTYPE=3 and TANDPLOAD =0

Legend:
Vc speed command from the CNC
I1, I2, I3 current of motor 1, 2, 3 respectively
ΔIc difference in current between two motors as a percentage
Vr feed-back of speed loop

14.2.1 PARAMETERS FOR DIAGNOSTICS

IDDIODELTA {n. Ch}
{n.Ch} is the number of the drive channel (01, 02, etc.).
This is a read-only tabular parameter for INDRAMAT drives.
It displays the difference between the currents of motors expressed as a percentage (ΔIc values shown in the drawings). The
value 1 corresponds to 1/100 (1%) of the maximum current (see parameter S-0-0084).
• Configuration with 2 motors: the ΔIc value is present in the IDDIODELTA variables for motors 1 and 2
• Configuration with 3 motors: the ΔIc12 value is present in the variable for motor 2, the ΔIc13 value is present in the variable
for motor 3

FIDIA MDO1680 14-3

14-4 MDO1680 FIDIA
15 MULTIPLE AXES (MU/*)

15.1 INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE AXES

For basic information, as well as the use and programming of the Multiple Axes Option, see the relevant Section in the
PROGRAMMING Manual.

15.1.1 MAINT PARAMETERS

MAINT parameters having a tabular format, with as many variables as there are axes, have variables both for the master axes
and for the respective physical multiple axes.

However, some parameters are meaningless for the master axes, while others are meaningless for the multiple axes.
If an attempt is made to change the value of a variable that is meaningless, an error is displayed.

EXAMPLE
The AXVKVD parameter must have the same value for all the multiple axes connected to a given master axis, as it is not
possible to work with different Kv values. It follows that only the AXVKVD *M parameter is meaningful, while any attempt to
change the AXVKVD value for a multiple axis (e.g. AXVKVD XA) is refused.

Many parameters have the following characteristic: when a value is set on the master axis, this value is automatically copied for
all the variables of the respective multiple axes.
The table below lists the MAINT axis parameters, indicating the category to which they belong:
• parameters exclusively for multiple axes
• parameters exclusively for master axes
• parameters for master axes that are copied for multiple axes (the value set on a master axis is automatically copied for the
variables of the respective multiple axes)

NAME MULTIPLE MASTER COPYED ON

ONLY ONLY MULTIPLE
AXVSRT X X
AXVVRT X X
AXVKVD X X
AXVKVS X X
AXVKAD X
ACTDAMPT X
AXVKVW X X
AXVACCE X X
AXVACCEG00 X X
AXVACCEM X X
AXVACCEEM X X
AXVZFR X X
AXVZFRZZ X X
AXVMUL X
AXVDIV X
AXSLCKM10 X
AXSLCKM12 X
AXTOLLOF X X
AXSZPR X X
AXSCODZER X X
AXSZZZ X
AXSNOIDX X
AXSIDIR X
AXSROT X X
AXSROLOV X X
AXTIMEIP X X
AXTOLLIP X X
AXRDTIME X X

FIDIA MDO1680 15-1

AXVPER X
AXVNER X
AXVZEP X
AXSZEPE X

15.1.2 IDTM AND IDRBL BIT LOGICS

There are IDTM* and IDRBL* digital signals for each physical multiple axis so that each multiple axis can be removed or locked
separately.
The MAINT parameters that enable the logics (AXSIDTM and AXSIDRBL) have separate values for the multiple axes and for
the respective master axis. Therefore, if the value ON is set for the multiple axes, the variable for the respective master axis
must also be set to ON.
The master axis is considered to be fully removed or locked when all its multiple axes are removed or locked, respectively.
A connected multiple axis cannot be removed or locked, unless the machine tool is powered off (ID24C bit at low level).

15.1.3 BALL SCREW CALIBRATION

The values for ball screw calibration and compensation of backlash can be set separately for each physical multiple axis.
For information on ball screw calibration, see the relevant Section.
The syntax for compensating a multiple axis is similar to that for normal axes, but with the following differences: before the
section in which calibration values are programmed, all the multiple axes must be disabled (e.g. by a G191 function) and then
only the multiple axis to which the calibration values refer is enabled by a G190 block.

EXAMPLE
G102
G191 ; disables all multiple axes
st
G190 >ZA ; enables the ZA axis (1 multiple axis of the Z series)
Z0 E.01 R.01 ; compensation values for ZA
Z10. E.02 R.02
Z20. E.03 R.03
Z30. E.04 R.04
Z40. E.05 R.05
Z50. E.06 R.06

G191 ; disables all multiple axes

nd
G190 >ZB ; enables the ZB axis (2 multiple axis of the Z series)
Z0 E.01 R.01 ; compensation values for ZB
Z10. E.02 R.02
Z20. E.03 R.03
Z30. E.04 R.04
Z40. E.05 R.05
Z50. E.06 R.06

15-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

16 THERMAL COMPENSATION (IA/CT)

16.1 THERMAL COMPENSATION INSTALLATION (IA/CT) -

GENERAL INFORMATION
This option enables an axis position or the pivot value to be corrected as a function of the value read on an analog input of the
ART board. More than one thermal compensation can be applied to the machine tool simultaneously.
Each compensation is assigned to an axis or to the pivot by defining the TERMAXS parameter in the INIPAR.SET file.

EXAMPLE
TERMAXS CT XM ;first compensation on X axis
TERMAXS CT1 YM ;second compensation on Y axis
TERMAXS CT2 OF ;third compensation not active
TERMAXS CT3 TL ;fourth compensation on tool axis (pivot)

The values of the analog inputs relevant to the thermal compensations can be read by the PLC program in the following
parameters:
IACT1: first thermal compensation
IACT2: second thermal compensation

The parameters can assume values between 0 and 2048 (corresponding to 0 and 10V).

16.2 AXIS POSITION THERMAL COMPENSATION

There are two methods of correction. The method is determined by the PLC MOTPC* memory bit (* = X, Y, Z, A, B, C, P, Q).
If the bit is at 1, Method A is selected; if at 0, Method B is selected.
METHOD A
The CNC applies a correction equal to the value of the Maint AXTPLC *M parameter (* = X, Y, Z, etc.), which is expressed in
millimetres. This parameter must be written by PLC which, in this way, can process any analog input and pass the correction
value calculated to the CNC.
METHOD B
The CNC applies a correction proportional to an analog input from 0 to 10 Volts, which is connected to an ART board.
The INPUT CT* ARTxx parameter (in INIPAR.DEF) defines the channel on which the analog signal arrives.
The correction is calculated by the following expression:
ΔX = analog input . [(AXTRATE . 10) / 2048] .[(axis position – AXTP0) / ( AXTP1 – AXTP0)]

The parameters are in MAINT (INIPAR.SET) and have the following meaning:
AXTRATE *M defines the correction value in millimetres corresponding to a 1 Volt signal.

The AXTP0 and AXTP1 parameters define the points of reference for correction that is proportional to the axis position:
AXTP0 *M defines the point with nil correction.
AXTP1 *M defines the point with 100% correction.

If constant compensation is desired at all positions of the axis, simply define AXTP1 = AXTP0.

Thermal compensation on an axis meaning of AXTRATE

FIDIA MDO1680 16-1

 Thermal compensation on an axis meaning of AXTP1 and AXTP0

16.3 RTCP PIVOT THERMAL COMPENSATION

There are two methods of correction. The method is determined by the PLC MOTPCR memory bit.
If the bit is at 1, Method A is selected; if at 0, Method B is selected.

METHOD A
The CNC applies a correction equal to the value of the Maint RTCPTPLC parameter, which is expressed in millimetres. This
parameter must be written by PLC which, in this way, can process any analog input and pass the correction value calculated to
the CNC.

METHOD B
The CNC applies a correction proportional to an analog input from 0 to 10 Volts, which is connected to an ART board.
The INPUT CT* ARTxx parameter (in INIPAR.DEF) defines the channel on which the analog signal arrives.
The correction is calculated by the following expression:
ΔX = analog input . [(RTCPTRATE . 10) / 2048]

The RTCPTRATE parameter is in MAINT (INIPAR.SET) and determines the correction value in millimetres corresponding to a 1
Volt signal.
The read only parameter RTCPTERM (accessed using the Search menu) displays the value in mm of RTCP thermal
compensation.

Thermal compensation of pivot

16-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

17 ADAPTIVE CONTROL
Using this Option, the axis feed can automatically be reduced for machining that requires high current absorption by the spindle.
With this Option, the CNC is equipped with:

• An adaptive analog input;

• A digital input (IDACON bit) to activate / deactivate the feed restriction.

If the IDACON bit is at the value 1, the CNC gives in output a feed that is directly or inversely proportional to the adaptive analog
input. The mode is selected by the following parameter:

ACVELW
Default value: 0
Selects the type of adaptive control.
The values 0 and 1 are allowed and assume the following meaning.

With a traditional adaptive control (MDACON bit at 0 and IDACON bit at 1):

0 The feed is directly proportional to the analog input voltage: at 10 V, the feed will be the programmed feed; at 0 V, the axis
movement will stop.
Freal = Fprog • (analog_input / 10V)

1 The feed is reduced as the analog input voltage increases: at 0 V, the feed will be the programmed feed; at 10 V, the axis
movement will stop.
Freal = Fprog • ((10V – analog_input) / 10V)

With an adaptive control managed by PLC (MDACON bit at 1):

0 The feed is directly proportional to the value of the PLC.AC parameter set by PLC: with the value 2048, the feed will be the
programmed feed; with the value 0, the axis movement will stop.
Freal = Fprog • (PLC.AC / 2048)

1 The feed is reduced as the value of the PLC.AC parameter increases: with the value 0, the feed will be the programmed
feed; with the value 2048, the axis movement will stop.
Freal = Fprog • ((2048 - PLC.AC) / 2048)

For a detailed description of the adaptive control managed by PLC, see the relevant section in the PLC Manual.

FIDIA MDO1680 17-1

17.1 OMATIVE ACM ADAPTIVE CONTROL

17.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

There are two possible situations concerning the ACM adaptive control:

Case 1: spindle managed by a FIDIA drive

In this case, additional electronic devices are unnecessary.
When the ACM adaptive control is active: the CNC reads, via the drive, the power absorbed by the spindle motor, calculates the
optimum feed and, depending on this value, regulates the axis feed that can vary from 0 to 200% of the programmed value (the
feed potentiometer is disabled).

Case 2: spindle not managed by a FIDIA drive

ACM side operation:
The ACM device detects the power absorbed by the spindle motor (by means of a power transducer), it calculates the optimum
feed and supplies this data to the CNC via an analog input signal.
The ACM also communicates with the CNC via an RS232 serial line.

CNC side operation:

When the ACM adaptive control is active, the feed potentiometer is disabled and the axis feed is regulated by the above-
mentioned analog input; depending on the signal value, the feed can range from 0 to 200% of the programmed value.

Use:
The user can activate and deactivate the ACM adaptive control by pressing the appropriate soft key, which is linked to memory
bits MDSK99 and MDLK99.
When the ACM is active and the feed potentiometer is positioned below the value of the ADPOTSTOP parameter, the adaptive
control is temporarily deactivated; to reactivate it, position the feed potentiometer above the ADPOTSTART parameter value.

For a detailed description of the use and installation of the adaptive control, see the ACM Manual.

17.1.2 PARAMETERS
OMATSOFT
Default value: OF
Selects the type of ACM adaptive control.
Allowed values:
ON spindle managed by FIDIA drive, without additional electronic devices.
OF spindle not managed by FIDIA drive; in this case, the definition INPUT OMAT (defines the analog input signal) should be
included in the INIPAR.DEF file).

ADMFUN ADaptive control M FUNction

Measuring unit: n
Allowed values: [0;200]
Default value: 90
Numerical value of the M synchronization function that is inserted in part-programs, together with the H function, to set the
adaptive control according to the particular machining. Generally, the M90 function is used. If this has already been used for
other purposes, another function must be selected and its number entered in this parameter.

ADPOTSTOP ADaptive control POTentiometer STOP

Measuring unit: %
Allowed values: [0;200]
Default value: 10
Feed potentiometer percentage below which the adaptive control is temporarily deactivated .

ADPOTSTART ADaptive control POTentiometer reSTART

Measuring unit: %
Allowed values: [0;200]
Default value: 50
Feed potentiometer percentage above which the adaptive control is reactivated.

17-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

18 PLC OPTIONS

18.1 ES10/AV* OPTIONS

These allow several values set by PLC to be displayed on the screen. If the system has these options, the values of the
following parameters are displayed on the base page of the user interface:
MEMVIS1 first value (ES10/AV1)
MEMVIS2 second value (ES10/AV2)
MEMVIS3 third value (ES10/AV3)

PLC must write the values to be displayed in the above parameters.

18.1.1 INSTALLATION
Enter the values of the following parameters in the INIPAR.SET file during the installation phase:

MEMV*TYP
Type of data present in the MEMVIS* parameter.
Valid values: SHORT, LONG, FLOAT

MEMV*NAM
Name to be displayed next to the value of the MEMVIS* parameter. The maximum length of the name is 4 characters.

* = 1 first value
2 second value
3 third value

18.2 CM10/026 OPTION

This option enables the power absorbed by the spindle, or any other data, to be displayed on the screen at the
discretion of PLC. The data is displayed in the area referring to the spindle (under the letter S) on the main video
pages.

18.2.1 PLC PROGRAMMING

PLC must write in the following parameters that are in the LONG format:

SPDISP
This is the value displayed in numerical and graphic form (by means of a thermometer).

SPMAX
This is the nominal power value, corresponding to the value 100% shown on the thermometer.
The thermometer end of scale value corresponds to 150% of this value.
For detailed information on the thermometers, see the ANALOG DISPLAY Section in the VIDEO CONFIGURATION Manual.

18.3 CM10/045 OPTION

An analog display in the form of a bar (thermometer) can be shown on the CNC video main page. This bar is used to give a
graphic display of the value of a measurement. The different zones in the scale are indicated by specific colours (green, yellow,
red). The display is managed by the PLC which must write the value to be represented in a special parameter.

18.3.1 MAINT PARAMETERS

ADSTMEMVIS LABEL
Name that will be shown on the video next to the bar (max. 4 characters).
The LABEL parameter has a string format, the other parameters accept numerical values in LONG format.

FIDIA MDO1680 18-1

ADSTMEMVIS VAL
Value of the measurement to be displayed; the value must be set by the PLC. The following situations are possible:
• VAL < MIN no indicator
• VAL < THRESHOLD0 green indicator (value within normal range)
• THRESHOLD0 < VAL < THRESHOLD1 yellows indicator (the warning threshold has been exceeded)
• VAL > THRESHOLD1 red indicator (the alarm threshold has been exceeded)
• VAL ≥ MAX the red indicator has reached the end of the scale

ADSTMEMVIS MIN
Value corresponding to the start of the scale, i.e. the extreme left of the bar.

ADSTMEMVIS MAX
Value corresponding to the end of the scale, i.e. the extreme right of the bar.

ADSTMEMVIS THRESHOLD0
Value of the first threshold (warning threshold).
The threshold is shown as a vertical yellow line.

ADSTMEMVIS THRESHOLD1
Value of the second threshold (alarm threshold). THRESHOLD1 ≥ THRESHOLD0
The threshold is shown as a vertical red line.

Example:
ADSTMEMVIS LABEL = ADST
ADSTMEMVIS VAL = 0 - 100 (set by the PLC)
ADSTMEMVIS MIN = 0
ADSTMEMVIS MAX = 100
ADSTMEMVIS THRESHOLD0 = 60
ADSTMEMVIS THRESHOLD1 = 90

18-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

19 GENERAL PURPOSE COUNT

19.1 GENERAL PURPOSE COUNTS

These options allow managing up to three general purpose counts. The counting systems are digital and managed by a DCB
board. The CNC reads the counts and automatically places them in the following parameters for PLC use:
CNTMXAGP1
CNTMXAGP2
CNTMXAGP3

The parameters are of the "long" type, therefore they contain the values of the counts expressed in tenths of a micron without
the decimal point. The counts are made available to PLC in this way and can be displayed on the screen using the ES10/AV*
options.

19.1.1 PLC PROGRAMMING

PLC can read and write in the CNTMXAGP* parameters using the READP and WRITEP instructions. If a counting error takes
place (ERROR or FAULT) and the CNTCEEGP* and CNTCFEGP* parameters are ON, the FLGERRGP* and FLGFLTGP* flags
are placed at the 1 value. These flags are "short" parameters for PLC use. PLC must check the flags to manage the error, after
which the FLGERRGP* and FLGFLTGP* flags must be zeroed out.

EXAMPLE
....
READP "FLGFLTGP1",SX
TST SX
IFNE JUMP EMERG
....

EMERG: ....
WRITEP 0,"FLGFLTGP1"
....

19.1.2 INSTALLATION
In the installation phase, enter the values of the following parameters in the INIPAR.SET file:

CNTMULGP*
Count multiplication factor (same as AXVMUL)
Default value: 10

CNTDIVGP*
Count division factor (same as AXVDIV)
Default value: 1

CNTCEEGP*
Enables reading of the counting system ERROR signal. Any passage into Emergency must be PLC-commanded.
Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: ON

CNTCFEGP*
Enables reading of the counting system FAULT signal. Any passage into Emergency must be PLC-commanded.
Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: ON
* = 1 first count
2 second count
3 third count

FIDIA MDO1680 19-1

19-2 MDO1680 FIDIA
20 MEASUREMENT CYCLES (MQR - TM10/MD)

20.1 MEASUREMENT CYCLES FOR TOUCH-TRIGGER PROBES

The following is a list of parameters for installing the options. Some parameters have the same name and description for both
options, but with the following differences:
• Parameters for the MQR option are found in the MQRPAR table
• Parameters for the TM10/MD option are found in the TMMPAR table

In general, the parameters described below can be left at their default values. The remaining parameters for the installation of
the TM10/MD Option (Tool length measurement) are described in the section PARAMETERS FOR G327 AND G357 CYCLES
and in the relevant section of the PLC Programming Manual.

MQRPAR FILTERTIME (for MQR option)

TMMPAR FILTERTIME (for TM10/MD option)
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [0;100]
Default value: 40
This is a filter for disturbances present on the deflected tracer signal. The CNC does not consider events generating the
deflected tracer signal for a very brief time, less than the value of the parameter, to be real contacts.
• If the value of the parameter is too low, the CNC may react to simple disturbances as if they were real contacts.
• If the value is too high, the CNC may not immediately recognize a contact, so there could be a risk of the axis not stopping
in time, with a consequent overdeflection of the tracer.

MQRPAR AXISTIME (for MQR option)

TMMPAR AXISTIME (for TM10/MD option)
Measuring Unit: s
Typical values: [2;10]
Default value: 5
This prevents the axis from moving back and forth several times and the probe from executing repeated contacts following a
manually-executed measurement (in JOG mode or using the handwheel). If the axis continues to be moved manually following
contact, movement will be reversed to allow the tracer to move away from the workpiece. When the tracer ceases to be
deflected, the axis will stop and cannot be moved in the direction in which the last contact took place for the amount of time
defined in this parameter.

MQRPAR TIMETOMOVE (for MQR Option only)

Measuring Unit : ms
Typical values: [0;50]
Default value: 0
This can be used to prevent the axis stopping too close to the contact point after a manual measurement (in JOG or using the
handwheel). After contact, if the axis continues to be moved manually, movement is inverted to allow for the moving away of the
probe from the part. When the probe ceases to be deflected, the time period defined via the TIMETOMOVE parameter begins.
During this time, if an attempt is made to move the axis in the contact direction, the axis moves in the opposite direction, moving
further away from the part.

MQRPAR DELAYDIR (only for MQR option)

Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [0;200]
Default value: 100
During the manual search for contact (e.g. using the handwheel), the speed could undergo oscillations and even a change in
direction for several moments on certain machines. Under these circumstances, the CNC may have difficulty detecting the
direction of contact. The problem is that following contact, the axis could move in the wrong direction and cause tracer
overdeflection instead of withdrawing from the workpiece.
If problems of this type are found, try increasing the values of the DELAYDIR and FILTERHDW parameters.

MQRPAR FEEDFAST (for MQR Option)

Measuring Unit: mm/min
Typical values: [1000;10000]
Default value: 5000

FIDIA MDO1680 20-1

Maximum axis feed when the measurement probe is switched on (SWPROBE ON).
This parameter limits the feed when executing movements in these circumstances.

MQRPAR DELTA (for MQR option)

TMMPAR DELTA (for TM10/MD option)
Measuring Unit: mm
Typical values: depending on the tracer
Default value: 1
This is the maximum deflection of the tracer during contact. It is used for safety reasons. An error message will be displayed if
the value entered has been exceeded.
• If the value of the parameter is too low, the CNC may indicate an error even when the contacts are valid ones.
• If the value of the parameter is too high, there could be an overdeflection of the tracer.

Select a value that is lower than the maximum deflection tolerated by the instrument. If the instrument can tolerate different
maximum deflections on the various axes, use the lowest value.

MQRPAR FEEDCOMP (for MQR Option only)

Measuring Unit: 0.0001 min
Typical values: [0;3]
Default value: 0

Compensates the axis values at which contact is made (beep) in proportion to the axis feed (Feed).
• If FEEDCOMP = 0 there is no compensation
• If FEEDCOMP > 0 the axis values at which the “beep” sounds are modified according to the approach direction and Feed.
Displacement along the approach direction is equal to:
correction [mm] = FEED * FEEDCOMP / 10000

EXAMPLE
If FEEDCOMP = 1.0 and FEED = 100 mm/min, there is a correction of 0.01 mm along the approach direction.

20.2 TOOL DIAMETER MEASUREMENT WITH SPINDLE IN

ROTATION
The FIDIA CNC offers the possibility of using a touch-trigger probe (e.g. Renishaw TS27) for measuring the tool diameter while
the spindle is in rotation. An MQR or TM10/MD option is required. The measurement cycles are managed through the PLC
programming language supplied by FIDIA.
To obtain good repeatability, execute measurements at a fixed speed. The following are the typical values:
Axis feed (Feed) = 4 mm/min
Spindle rotation (Spindle) = 2400 rpm

20.2.1 INSTALLATION
The following operations must be performed during the installation phase:
• Reduce the FILTERTIME (anti-disturbance filter) as much as possible. Keep in mind, however, that a very low value may
not filter certain disturbances caused by, for example, the tracer connection cable. When possible, set the parameter at
zero, which will detect the passage of the cutting edge even at a high rotation speed.
• Enter a low sampling time
• Set the OUTFILTERTM parameter as described below:

The above-mentioned parameters can be found in the MQRPAR table if the system is equipped with the MQR option or in the
TMMPAR table if the system is equipped with the TM10/MD option.

OUTFILTERTM OUTput FILTER TiMe

Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [25;200]
Default value: 40
This filter allows the tool to move away from the tracer. The minimum value that can be assigned to the parameter is calculated
based on the number of spindle rotations and the number of cutting edges per the following formula:
OUTFILTERTM = 120000/S*CUT

20-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

where:
S = rotation speed of the spindle [RPM]
CUT = number of tool cutting edges

After a coordinate is saved, the system will be ready for a new measurement only when no other contacts have been detected
for the amount of time equal to the value assigned to the parameter. If no contacts are detected during a rotation equal to an arc
of a circle defined by two cutting edges, it means that the tool is no longer in contact with the tracer and therefore a new
measurement can be executed.

20.3 PARAMETERS FOR G327 AND G357 CYCLES (TM10/MD)

The Tool Length Measurement Logic can be implemented in various ways, depending on the Machine Tool:

By means of CNC functions

In this case, the user programs the measurement cycles using the G327 and G357 functions or PLC M functions that, in turn,
recall the G327 and G357 functions. Follow the installation procedure described in this paragraph.
By means of the PLC programming language
In this case, the user programs the measurement cycles using PLC M functions (e.g. M27 and M57) which, in turn, recall G159
type functions. Its implementation and installation are described in the relevant section of the PLC Manual.

The following MAINT parameters define the characteristics of the G327 and G357 cycles and must be set in order for the user
to use these functions. To access these parameters, press the MAINT TMMG3X7 soft key: the TAB key can be used to go
quickly from one table to the next.
For a detailed description of the G327 and G357 cycles, see the USE AND PROGRAMMING Manual.

TMMPOSITION XM
YM
ZM
AM
BM
….
WV
Measuring Unit: mm (linear axes); deg (rotary axes)
Default value: 10000. for the XYZ axes, 0 for the other axes
The TMMPOSITION table defines the values for the contact position between the tool and the measurement probe.
There are as many parameters as there are axes:
• XM, YM, ZM are the XYZ co-ordinates of the centre of the measurement probe.
• Any AM, BM, etc. parameters are the co-ordinates of any additional axes (rotary, tilting, etc.) during the measurement.
• The WV parameter, if present, is the co-ordinate for the virtual quill during the measurement.

The values entered must refer to origin 0 (they are absolute values).
The TMMPOSITION table can be “compiled” automatically and accurately by executing a G328 cycle, as explained below.

TMMAXISITEM XM
YM
ZM
AM
BM
….
WV
Default values: 0
The TMMAXISITEM table defines the order in which the axes are positioned before the measurement takes place. There are as
many parameters as there are axes. The axes with a lower sequence number move first. The value zero disables movement of
the axis. More than one axis can be moved at the same time by assigning the same sequence number to them.

EXAMPLE
TMMAXISITEM XM = 1
TMMAXISITEM YM = 1
TMMAXISITEM ZM = 2
TMMAXISITEM AM = 0
TMMAXISITEM BM = 0

FIDIA MDO1680 20-3

Description of a G327 or G357 cycle with the above parameters:
• After the preliminary releases, the X and Y axes are positioned together because they have the same sequence number.
• The Z axis is positioned later because it has a higher sequence number.
• The additional A and B rotary axes do not move because they have the value 0.

TMMG3X7
The TMMG3X7 table determines a series of values used to define the measurement cycles. A description of the individual
parameters in the table is given below.

TMMG3X7 VIRCANQUOTA
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 0
Distance the virtual quill axis must travel during the first release. This is an incremental value; the sign defines the direction of
the movement. The value zero disables the release of the virtual quill.
This parameter is included only when the virtual quill is present.

TMMG3X7 ESCAPE_AXIS
Allowed values: [XM;YM;ZM]
Default value: ZM
Name of the axis performing the release from the work area. This release is executed at the start of the cycle, immediately after
any release of the virtual quill.
If the virtual quill is not present or is not released, there is just one release performed by the ESCAPE_AXIS axis.

TMMG3X7 ESCAPEQUOTA
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 10000.
Position value at which the ESCAPE_AXIS axis is released.

TMMG3X7 IS_ABSOLUTE
Default value: ON
Establishes whether the value entered in the ESCAPEQUOTA parameter is to be considered as an absolute value (referred to
the zero origin) or an incremental value (referred to the current value).
Allowed values:
ON ESCAPEQUOTA is an absolute value
OF ESCAPEQUOTA is an incremental value

TMMG3X7 ESCAPE_FEED
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 2000
Feed at which the virtual axis and the ESCAPE_AXIS execute the releases.

TMMG3X7 APP_OFFSET APProach OFFSET

Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 5.
Offset value applied to the PROBE_AXIS axis value.
The distance travelled during the search for the first contact and the length of the probe release after the second contact depend
on this value. For further details, see the description of the cycles and the relevant drawings.

TMMG3X7 MAXTOOLNGTH MAXimum TOOL leNGTH

Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 10000.
Maximum length of the tools to be measured.
This is used for the G357 cycle, when the length (LENGTH 00) entered in the Tool Table is zero (measurement of tool of
unknown length). In this instance, the CNC must be prepared for the worst possible conditions and assume that the longest of
the tools that can be used on the machine tool is mounted.
Setting MAXTOOLNGTH incorrectly can cause collisions between the tool and the probe.

TMMG3X7 PROBE_AXIS PROBE contact AXIS

Allowed values: [XM;YM;ZM]
Default value: ZM
Name of the axis that performs the contacts with the probe and the respective releases.

20-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

TMMG3X7 PROBE_DIR PROBE contact DIRection
Default value: -1
The direction in which the PROBE_AXIS axis moves in order to seek contact with the probe.
Allowed values:
+1 positive direction
-1 negative direction

TMMG3X7 ABS_LENGTH ABSolute LENGTH

Default value: ON
Used for the G327 cycle. Establishes the reference parameter with which the tool length measured will be compared in order to
detect any error. Allowed values:
OF error = length measured - LENGTH
ON error = length measured - PRESETL

LENGTH and PRESETL are the values entered in the Tool Table.
“error” is the value that will be compared with the tolerances (minimum and maximum).

TMMG3X7 MINTOOLTRNC MINimum TOOL length ToleRaNCe

Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 0
Minimum tool length tolerance. It may even be zero.

TMMG3X7 MAXTOOLTRNC MAXimum TOOL length ToleRaNCe

Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 0
Maximum tool length tolerance.

TMMG3X7 EMG_OUTTRNC EMerGency when tool OUT of ToleRaNCe

Default value: OF
Used for the G327 cycle. Determines behaviour at the end of the cycle when the tool length error exceeds the MAXTOOLTRNC
tolerance. Allowed values:
ON the CNC switches to emergency
OF the CNC does not switch to emergency

TMMG3X7 DEVICE_EN auxiliary DEVICE ENable

Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
Enables/disables the management of an auxiliary device, i.e. hardware equipment (protective cover, activation of air jet to clean
tool, etc.), that communicates with the FIDIA CNC by means of the following signals configured by the C_GEN program:
• 2 digital outputs: UDA1ON and UDA1OF
• 2 digital end of run inputs: ID1FCA and ID1FCB.

Typically, the auxiliary device is a protective cover for the measuring device. The output bits are used to open the cover at the
start of the cycle and close it at the end of the cycle; the input bits are used to check that each movement has been performed
correctly.

Allowed values:
ON management of auxiliary device enabled
OF management of auxiliary device disabled

TMMG3X7 DEVICETO_EN auxiliary DEVICE TimeOut ENable

Allowed values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
Enables/disables the timeout check for any auxiliary device.
Allowed values:
ON timout check enabled. After commanding the auxiliary device by means of the output bits, the CNC checks that the input
bits have assumed the correct state within the time entered in the DEVICE_TO parameter
OF timeout check disabled

TMMG3X7 DEVICE_TO auxiliary DEVICE TimeOut value

Measuring Unit: s
Default value: 10

FIDIA MDO1680 20-5

Maximum waiting time (timeout) for the completion of the operations performed by any auxiliary device.

20.3.1 G328 CYCLE

The G328 cycle is used during installation to automatically enter values in the TMMPOSITION table. The cycle detects the
absolute XYZ position values of the point of contact between the tool and the measurement probe, as well as the values at
which any additional axes are positioned, and then enters these values in the table.

Preliminary operations:
• Set at least the following parameters in the TMMG3X7 table: APP_OFFSET, PROBE_AXIS and PROBE_DIR.
• In the Tool Table (line 00 for the tool mounted), enter the data for the sample tool: TYPE 0, length value measured with
micrometric precision and, in the TMMSPDRPM column, the spindle speed and direction of rotation during the
measurement. For more detailed information, see the relevant section in the User’s Manual.
• Mount the sample tool on the spindle.
• Moving the axes manually (JOG mode), bring the sample tool above the centre of the measurement probe. The distance
between the tool and the probe must be less than APP_OFFSET+4mm, otherwise contact will not be made.
• Program the G328 function.

Detecting points with the spindle nose:

The G328 cycle can be executed without mounting the sample tool. In this case, you must:
• set a tool length of zero;
• briong the spindle nose into contact with the measurement probe.

Normally, it is not possible to touch the probe with the centre of the spindle because the hole for mounting the tool is in the
centre. In such cases, you should touch the probe with a significant point located to one side. Before programming the G328
function, move the axes manually (JOG mode) so that the point chosen is above the centre of the measurement probe.

N.B. – If contact was not made with the centre of the spindle, at the end of the cycle the X or Y value should be corrected by
hand in the TMMPOSITION table to compensate for misalignment between the spindle centre and the centre of the probe.

DESCRIPTION OF THE G328 CYCLE

The diagram shows an example of the cycle. A brief description of the cycle is given below.

• A message asks whether the head (with or without the sample tool) is positioned correctly on the measuring device. If it is,
press START CNC to start the cycle; if not, press STOP CNC, position the head correctly and then program a new G328
function.
• If management of the auxiliary device is enabled (DEVICE_EN parameter), the UDA1ON bit is set to 1 and the UDA1OF bit
to 0. If the timeout check (DEVICETO_EN) is enabled, a check is made to see whether the ID1FCA and ID1FCB input bits
assume the correct value within the time set (DEVICE_TO).

20-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

• The spindle is made to rotate according to the data (speed and direction of rotation) entered by the user in the
TMMSPDRPM column of the Tool Table. If the range change is present, the appropriate range for the rpm requested is
automatically selected (M40 mode); at the end of the cycle, the original situation is restored.
• First search for contact to obtain an approximate measurement: the PROBE_AXIS axis moves in the PROBE_DIR direction
at a feed of 100mm/min, travelling a maximum distance of APP_OFFSET+4mm.
• Once contact has been made, there is a short release of the PROBE_AXIS axis.
• Second search for contact: the PROBE_AXIS axis, which is now in the immediate vicinity of the probe, performs a second
contact at a very low feed (4mm/min) to allow for a precision measurement.
• The PROBE_AXIS releases from the probe, travelling the distance APP_OFFSET+4mm at the ESCAPE_FEED feed.
• Spindle stop.
• The measurement data are entered in the TMMPOSITION table.
• The auxiliary device, if present, performs the operations for the final phase of the cycle.
• The machine tool is returned to its original state before the cycle (parameter values, programmed functions etc. are
restored).

FIDIA MDO1680 20-7

20-8 MDO1680 FIDIA
21 TOOL COMPENSATION (TMH)

21.1 PARAMETERS FOR G160 CYCLES

Set the following parameters in the INIPAR.SET file:

TMHPAR AXISTIME
Measuring Unit: s
Typical values: [2;10]
Default value: 5
Corresponds toTMMPAR AXISTIME.

TMHPAR FILTERTIME
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [0;100]
Default value: 40
Corresponds toTMMPAR FILTERTIME.

TMHPAR OUTFILTERTM
Measuring Unit: ms
Typical values: [25;200]
Default value: 40
Corresponds toTMMPAR OUTFILTERTM.

TMHPAR FEEDFAST
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 2000
Corresponds toTMMPAR FEEDFAST. FEED value for fast approach.

TMHPAR FEEDSLOW
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 500
Corresponds toTMMPAR FEEDSLOW. FEED value for slow aproach.

TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 250
Corresponds to TMMPAR FEEDCONTACT. FEED value for search for contact.

TMHPAR PROBEDIAM
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 19.500
Corresponds toTMMPAR G157D. Length of the side of the cube at the stylus tip. At the end of the preset cycle, the value is
overwritten with the average value for the sides measured along the X and Y axes.

TMHPAR OVFDISABLED
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If ON, the “override feed” potentiometer is disabled during an axis positioning block.

Warning: with the parameter OF, the potentiometer is available during axis positioning blocks but not during search for contact
or release after contact has been made.

TMHPAR TS27DIST
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 5.000
Distance travelled during the release from the stylus cube, immediately following contact. Valid for release movements in X, Y
and Z.

FIDIA MDO1680 21-1

TMHPAR OFFSET
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 4.000
Search for contact along the X or Y axis starts after descent along the Z axis by this distance from the upper surface of the
stylus cube. A value equal to half the height of the cube is recommended.

TMHPAR DBGMSGENA
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
If ON, this enables display of the TMHnnn diagnostic messages in the log file. This can be useful during installation and for
maintenance; otherwise, it should be set to OF.

TMHCORR XDIR
Allowed values: [-1; 1]
Default value: -1
Sign for X error compensation. If equal to 1, the error calculated by the G160 cycle will be applied in the opposite direction.

TMHCORR YDIR
Allowed values: [-1; 1]
Default value: -1
Sign for Y error compensation. If equal to 1, the error calculated by the G160 cycle will be applied in the opposite direction.

TMHCORR ZDIR
Allowed values: [-1; 1]
Default value: -1
Sign for Z error compensation. If equal to 1, the error calculated by the G160 cycle will be applied in the opposite direction.

Generally, the following parameters should not be modified. Some may be used to view the co-ordinates, compensation and the
general cycle status.

TMHPAR ENABLE
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Corresponds toTMMPAR ENABLE. Enables the measuring device during search for contact (it is set automatically by the CNC).

TMHPAR PROBESTATUS
Measuring device status (filtered). ON = sensor deflected (if TMHPAR ENABLE=ON).

TMH.XA XM
YM
ZM
Contact point co-ordinates (calculated at the tool centre).

TMHPOSITION Z- XM
Z- YM
Z- ZM
X- XM
X- YM
X- ZM
X+ XM
X+ YM
X+ ZM
Y- XM
Y- YM
Y- ZM
Y+ XM
Y+ YM
Y+ ZM
Co-ordinates for the centre of the stylus cube faces (with RTCP active).

TMHCORR ACTIVE
ON= compensation active; OF= compensation not active.

21-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

TMHCORR XM
Compensation value on the X axis.

TMHCORR YM
Compensation value on the Y axis.

TMHCORR ZM
Compensation value on the Z axis.

21.2 INSTALLATION NOTES

During installation, ensure that:

• a suitable stylus is correctly inserted in the measuring device. The diagram shows a standard stylus suitable for this
purpose:

• Align the sides of the stylus cube along the X and Y axes so as to reduce measurement error.
• For safety reasons, you are advised to check overdeflection using the IDRALE emergency bit.
• Check that all the software installation parameters for the TMH and RTCP Options are set to a correct value.
• The cycle must be supplemented by a PLC program that manages the positioning of the axes and other preliminary
operations before the actual measurement cycle. The PLC can also manage a series of final operations that are useful for a
correct return to machining.

21.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE G160 CYCLES

21.3.1 G160H0 PRESET CYCLE FOR SENSOR

This cycle must be performed with the head axes at the zero position. In these conditions, the tool tip is oriented in the Z-
direction.
Before starting the preset cycle, position the tool tip near the upper face of the stylus cube (approximately at the centre of the
face).
The cycle is executed at origin 0; the previous origin will be restored at the end of the cycle.

FIDIA MDO1680 21-3

Cycle description:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Search for contact in Z- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed (point #1).
• Rise in Z+ to the TMHPAR TS27DIST distance from the upper face of the cube.
• Positioning in X+ away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in X- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed (point #2).
• Moving away from the sensor in X+.
• Rise in Z+.
• Positioning in X- away from the opposite side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in X+ at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed (point #3).
• Moving away from the sensor in X-.
• Rise in Z+.
• Positioning in X+ at the calculated centre of the cube (all the other positioning movements will be performed at this X
position to prevent sensor misalignment errors).
• Positioning in Y- away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in Y+ at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed (point #4).
• Moving away from the sensor in Y-.
• Rise in Z+.
• Positioning in Y+ away from the opposite side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in Y- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed (point #5).
• Moving away from the sensor in Y+.
• Rise in Z+.
• Positioning in Y at the calculated centre of the cube.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

21.3.2 G160H1 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE X AXIS

This cycle is used with the head axes in a position other than zero.
Before starting the cycle, the tool tip must be positioned near the upper face of the stylus cube. The X axis direction is
determined by the software according to the position of the head axes.
The cycle is executed at origin 0; the previous origin will be restored at the end of the cycle.

Cycle in X-:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Positioning in X+ away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in X- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed.
• Calculation of X error.
• Moving away from the sensor in X+.
• Rise in Z+.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

Cycle in X+:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Positioning in X- away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.

21-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in X+ at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed.
• Calculation of X error.
• Moving away from the sensor in X-.
• Rise in Z+.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

21.3.3 G160H2 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE Y AXIS

This cycle is used with the head axes in a position other than zero.
Before starting the cycle, the tool tip must be positioned near the upper face of the stylus cube. The Y axis direction is
determined by the software according to the position of the head axes.
The cycle is executed at origin 0; the previous origin will be restored at the end of the cycle.

Cycle in Y-:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Positioning in Y+ away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in Y- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed.
• Calculation of Y error.
• Moving away from the sensor in Y+.
• Rise in Z+.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

Cycle in Y+:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Positioning in Y- away from the side of the cube at a safety distance.
• Descent in Z- to the TMHPAR OFFSET distance from the upper face of the cube (the tool centre must be at this distance
along the Z axis).
• Search for contact in Y+ at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed.
• Calculation of Y error.
• Moving away from the sensor in Y-.
• Rise in Z+.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

21.3.4 G160H3 ERROR MEASUREMENT CYCLE ALONG THE Z AXIS

This cycle is used with the head axes in a position other than zero.
Before starting the cycle, the tool tip must be positioned near the upper face of the stylus cube (approximately at the centre of
the face).
The cycle is executed at origin 0; the previous origin will be restored at the end of the cycle.

Cycle description:
• RTCP is set to ON.
• Spindle stop.
• If a speed value is entered in TMMSPDRPM, start of spindle rotation in M04 at this speed.
• Search for contact in Z- at the TMHPAR FEEDCONTACT feed.
• Calculation of Z error.
• Rise in Z+ to the TMHPAR TS27DIST distance from the upper face of the cube.
• Spindle stop, if it was in rotation.
• Restore original RTCP status.

FIDIA MDO1680 21-5

22-6 MDO1680 FIDIA
22 TOOL MEASURING SYSTEM (TMS)

22.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PARAMETERS

This chapter describes the parameters used in the software installation phase. These are found in MAINT TMS. Suitable values
for the system on which the laser is to operate must be entered in MAINT and in the INIPAR.SET file during the installation
phase. The user will therefore not need to set the parameters each time since they will automatically assume the correct value.

TMSPAR ENABLE
Default value: OF
This must be set by the user to enable/disable the laser.
It can have the following states:
ON laser enabled
OF laser disabled
This parameter must be ON to execute any measuring cycle with the laser.

TMSFOCUS XTEO, YTEO, ZTEO

Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 0
This is a table of parameters in which the theoretic position of the focal point must be entered. The coordinates must make
reference to the absolute origin (0 origin). See description of 227 cycle to correctly use these coordinates.

TMSPAR LBEAM
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 0
Enter double the distance between the focus and the nearest element (transmitter or receiver).
If the focus is at an equidistant position from the transmitter and from the receiver, simply enter the length of the visible part of
the laser beam. This value must be accurately defined since it is used for properly executing the find focus point cycle (227).

TMSPAR DELTAS
Measuring Unit: rpm
Default value: 100
Increment of the rotation speed during the learning cycle of the real spindle speed (229).

TMSPAR FEEDFAST
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 2000
Feed at which fast movements are made during the cycles. Typical values are from 2000 to 4000 mm/min. This feed can be
regulated by the Feed potentiometer.

TMSPAR FEEDSLOW
Measuring Unit: mm/min
Default value: 500
Feed at which slow movements are made during the cycles, as well as the “fast” preliminary contacts during cycles 227 and 230
only (see the relevant descriptions). This feed can be regulated by the Feed potentiometer. Typical values are from 500-1000
mm/min. Do not use values that are too high; in this way, the laser device does not vibrate during the measurement phases, and
sufficient accuracy is obtained during the “fast” preliminary contacts without having to set TMSLEAVB values that are too high
(i.e. greater than 1 mm).

TMSPAR AXBEAM
Valid values: [XM;YM;ZM...]
Default value: YM
Machine axis along which the laser beam is oriented (axis parallel to the laser beam).

TMSPAR AXTOOL
Valid values: [XM;YM;ZM...]
Default value: ZM
Tool axis the retractions defined through the TMSCYST parameter refer to.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-7

TMSPAR SPDL
Measuring Unit: rpm
Default value: 1500
Speed at which the spindle is to rotate during execution of 227 and 228 cycles. The default value is 1500 rpm.

TMSPAR EMEDIAMETER
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 68
If the tool diameter is larger than the value entered in this parameter, there will be an emergency situation when one of the
following cycles is programmed: 227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233 and a message will be displayed.

TMSPAR MAXDIAMETER
Measuring Unit: mm
Default value: 53
If the tool diameter is larger than the value entered in this parameter, only the tool length will be measured during 230, 231, 232
cycles.

TMSPAR TOOLCHANGE
Default value: ON
Selects CNC behaviour at the end of the measurement cycle when the tool is out of tolerance.
If the parameter is OF, the CNC merely sets the MMISEM memory bit to 1 leaving the “tool out of tolerance” situation to be
managed entirely by the PLC. If the parameter is ON, the following operations are performed:
• the MMISEM memory bit is set to 1
• the CNC looks for another tool of the same type in the tool table
• the new tool number is entered in the T_FM1 area, making it available to the PLC
• the message IEX286 is displayed, informing the user that a tool change is required and specifying the number of the tool to
be inserted

TMSBEEPERR
Measuring unit: mm
Typical values: [0.005; 0.1]
Default value: 0.01
At each measurement point, after the preliminary “fast” contact, two further contacts are made one after the other at a very low
feed (contact feed). Between the two measurements, there is a brief release travelling a distance that is equal to the value of the
TMSLEAVB parameter.
• If the distance between the two points measured at the low feed exceeds the value of the TMSBEEPERR parameter, the
message ITM081 is displayed and the cycle is repeated up to a maximum of five times. If, after five repetitions, the error has
not returned within the tolerance, the message ETM082 is displayed and the cycle is cancelled.
• If the distance between the two points measured does not exceed TMSBEEPERR, the mean point is calculated and
recorded.

TMSONESIDE
Default value: 0
Selects the type of cycle executed in order to measure the diameter. This parameter is taken into consideration for
measurement cycles, but does not affect Preset cycles. Allowed values:
0 Contact is made on both sides of the tool.
1 Contact is made on one side of the tool only. The cycle brings the tool to the positive side of the laser beam.
-1 Contact is made on one side of the tool only. The cycle brings the tool to the negative side of the laser beam.

22-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

Measurement on one side only is necessary in certain cases, for example when the device is mounted very close to the limit
switch of an axis and measurement on both sides is not possible.
Note that measurement on one side only can reduce accuracy by 3 to 5 times.

TMSEMEAPPR TMS EMErgency during APPRoach

Default value: OF
Selects the behaviour of the system when the laser beam is interrupted during the approach phase of a TMS cycle.
Allowed values:
ON the machine tool switches to emergency
OF the axes stop, but the machine tool does not switch to emergency

FOCUSTMS XREAL, YREAL, ZREAL

This is a table of parameters in which the CNC enters the real coordinates of the focal point obtained after execution of the 227
cycle. These make reference to the absolute origin (0 origin).

TMS228VAL 00X, 00Z, ..... 36X, 36Z

This is a table of parameters that are set by the CNC with the 37x2 values that represent the laser beam geometry and which
are calculated during execution by cycle 228.

N.B. – The FOCUSTMS *REAL and TMS228VAL parameters must not be modified by the installer. The values can be saved in
the INIPAR.SET file by simply pressing the SAVE PAR soft key after execution of cycles 227 and 228.

In the case of 5-axis machine tools with a head changer, in addition to executing SAVE PAR the installer must also make a note
of the focus positions for each head (FOCUSTMS parameters). He should make these available to the PLC program, that will
set from time to time the values corresponding to the head mounted.

TMSFOCUS FOUND
Valid values: [ON;OF]
Default value: OF
The value ON indicates that the focus position is known. The value OF means that the focus co-ordinates are not known; in this
case, the CNC asks to execute cycle 227.
Normally, the parameter must be set to ON and kept at this value by PLC. In this case, there is no need to repeat the focus
search cycle after an INIT command or re-loading of the CNC software. This is because the values of the FOCUSTMS *REAL
parameters, although lost in such circumstances, are read again from the INIPAR.SET file (system with one head only), or else
supplied by PLC (system with more than one head).
If PLC does not keep the parameter to the value ON, the parameter is managed by the CNC which returns it to OF after an INIT
command or reloading of the CNC software. The user is obliged to repeat the focus search cycle in such circumstances. This
can be done when the focus position values are not saved during installation, but it is preferable to repeat the focus search each
time it is lost.
PLC can also force the parameter to OF each time a head change is executed, obliging the user to repeat the focus search
cycle when the position was not recorded during installation. This can be useful when there are several heads. In such cases, it
may be convenient to find the focus each time a head is mounted as it would take too much time to execute the search for all
the heads during installation.

Read-only parameters (do not modify)

INTTMS XM, YM, ZM

This is a read-only table of parameters in which the CNC enters the coordinates of the last contact point in a measuring cycle.

TMSPAR ERROR
This is a read-only parameter and is set by the CNC to indicate whether an error had been made during the cycle. It can have
the following states:
ON if there was an error
OF cycle concluded without errors

22.2 ON/OFF FUNCTIONS

The following functions are used for manually turning the laser on/off. On/off operations are automatic during cycle executions
and it would not be necessary to use these functions under such circumstances.
G212
Turn off laser command.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-9

G213
Turn on laser command.
When the laser is on, a beam is emitted (emitter and sensor enabled).

Both functions are non-modal.

22.3 TMS LASER FUNCTIONS

The following functions are available only when the TMS laser is present. They are used for manually opening/closing the
shutters of the device. Shutters opening/closing operations are automatic during cycle executions and it would not be necessary
to use these functions under such circumstances.
G214
Close shutters command.
When the shutters are closed, the laser is turned off automatically.
G215
Open shutters command.
When the shutters are opened, the laser is also turned on automatically.

Both functions are non-modal. Before programming one of the above functions, set the following parameter:
TMSARMTIM
Time in seconds within which the shutters open/close command must be executed. If set at zero, the default value will be 10
seconds.

22.4 NOTES ON CYCLES 227 AND 228

In order to fully understand the information given in this paragraph, it is necessary to have a thorough knowledge of basic
information on the use of the tool measurement system. Such information is provided in the User Manual.
Cycles 227 and 228 must be executed when the laser device is installed. Given the complexity of the operation, we recommend
that it be carried out by personnel who are qualified in the use and installation of the FIDIA CNC and of the laser too
measurement option. This paragraph gives examples of procedures and some notes for the execution of the 227 and 228
cycles. You are also advised to consult the descriptions of the FOCUSTMS and TMS228VAL parameters in the preceding
paragraph.

EXAMPLE 1
Calibrating a system for the management of several heads and spindles by means of PLC:
1. If working with the TMS laser device, open the shutters by programming the G215 function. In the case of the TM10/MDL
Option, simply switch on the laser by programming the G213 function.
2. Activate the absolute origin (origin 0) and deactivate RTCP (if present).
3. Mount a spherical tool of known dimensions on the spindle. Calibration accuracy depends on the accuracy with which the
tool was pre-measured. The tool diameter must not be greater than 10mm. Larger diameters compromise calibration
accuracy.
4. Manually searching for the focal point and positioning the tool tip at this point. The procedure is described for the usual
instance in which the laser beam is oriented along the X axis and the tool axis is Z. In other instances, a similar procedure is
followed in which the role of each axis simply has to be changed. Position the axis parallel to the laser (X axis) so that the
tool centre is approximately half way across the laser beam (equidistant between the emitter and receiver). Position the Y
axis so that the laser beam roughly strikes the centre of the sample tool sphere. The position value along the tool axis
should be measured with great care: using the handwheel, move the tool axis back until the LASERSTATUS parameter of
MAINT switches from the value ON (laser beam interrupted) to the value OF (laser not interrupted); set the minimum pitch
for handwheel movement (1 micron); via the handwheel, bring the tool axis back into contact and stop when
LASERSTATUS switches to ON.
5. Read the XM YM ZM axis position values from the video and enter them as positions of the theoretical focal point
(TMSFOCUS XTEO, YTEO, ZTEO parameters). Pay attention to the tool axis position value (normally Z): the tool length
must be added or subtracted from the value displayed, depending on the tool orientation.
6. Enter the following tool data: TYPE=99 or 100, preset length (PRESETL), preset diameter (PRESETD), radius, number of
cutting edges, maximum spindle rpm.
7. Set the following parameters: TMSCYST, TMSSLDST=5mm. If working with the TMS laser device, also set
TMSCLECY=OF.
8. Execute a 227 cycle.
9. Enter the calculated position values of the real focal point in the parameters defining the theoretical focus position
(TMSFOCUS XTEO, YTEO, ZTEO).
10. Repeat the 227 cycle.
11. Check that the real and theoretical positions of the focal point correspond. Note that an error in the position value of the
focal point in the radius direction is normal if it is less than 0.5mm. For the other axes, an error of 0.01 – 0.015 µm only is

22-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

 allowed. If the error is greater, repeat the procedure starting from point 8. In the event of problems, see the Paragraph
SOLVING ACCURACY PROBLEMS.
12. Note down the position values of the real focal point.
13. Set the TMSSLDST=1 mm parameter.
14. Execute a 228 cycle. At the end of the cycle, save the values measured by simply pressing the SAVE PAR soft key of
MAINT. The focus position is also saved, which in this example is not fixed and must be set from time to time by the PLC
program depending on the head mounted.
15. Repeat steps 3 to 12 (13 and 14 are excluded) for all possible head and spindle configurations.
16. If working with the TMS laser device, at the end of the procedure set the TMSCLECY=ON parameter.

All the values noted at point 12 should be made available to the PLC program which should change the position of the focal
point (real and theoretical) according to the head/spindle configuration executing the measurements (the theoretical position is
used for any re-calibration, the real position is used when utilizing the laser).

EXAMPLE 2
Calibration of a 3-axis system with one head only.
In this case, an PLC program is not used to set the focus position depending on the head mounted. The typical calibration
procedure is similar to that in the previous example, but it is simpler. The main differences are as follows:
• It is not necessary to note down any value at point 12, since all the values can be saved at the end of cycle 228 by simply
pressing the SAVE PAR soft key of MAINT.
• Point 15 need not be executed because there is only one head.

CYCLE 228 MESSAGES

During execution of cycle 228, the CNC displays a series of messages indicating the values measured and those set in the
TMS228VAL parameters.
If you do not wish to use the SAVE PAR soft key to save the parameters, the values displayed can be copied and then entered
by hand in the INIPAR.SET file, although this is generally not recommended for safety reasons.
The values displayed can also be used to check that during the 228 cycle points are not lost or incorrect points recorded. It is
sufficient to process the data so as to obtain a graph of the shape of the laser beam and check its integrity.
Given that messages with values are recorded in the Log file, the installer does not have to copy the TMS228VAL parameter
values displayed but just perform simple Copy/Paste operations from the Log file to the destination file (INIPAR.SET or other
file).

22.4.1 PRESET CYCLE 227 FOR TMS LASER

This cycle makes a search for the focus point, i.e. the point where the laser beam has the smallest diameter and is at the mid-
point of the visible part of the beam. The focus point must be found since all subsequent measuring cycles will be executed on it
to guarantee maximum measuring accuracy.
The 227 cycle looks for the laser focus point in a volume around a theoretic focus point, a point that must have been previously
entered in the TMSFOCUS*TEO parameter by the user. When the real focus point is obtained, its coordinates are stored in the
FOCUSTMS *REAL parameter.
The search volume around the theoretic focus point is defined by the following parameters:
• TMSSLDST: dimensions on the X and Z axes
• TMSSETDST: dimension on the laser beam axis, usually Y

Cycle movements on the XY plane are schematically illustrated in the drawing below; 1, 2, 3, 4 are the points where the tool
makes contact with the laser beam.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-11

 Find focus point cycle – movements on the XY plane

Before executing the cycle, the user must carefully set the values of the TMSFOCUS XTEO/YTEO/ZTEO parameters which
define the theoretic position of the focus point.
Before programming the cycle, verify that the following parameters have been set in the tool table:
TYPE, PRESETL, PRESETD, PRESETR, CUTTERS, LENCUT

Check the following parameters carefully:

TMSCYST, TMSSLDST, TMSSETDST, TMSLEAVB.

22.4.2 PRESET CYCLE 227 FOR OTHER LASER DEVICES (TM10/MDL)

Focal point search cycle. This is the point where the laser beam has the smallest diameter and is located at about the mid-point
of the visible part of the radius. The focal point must be found because all subsequent measuring cycles will be executed on it to
guarantee maximum accuracy in the measurements. The 227 seeks the laser focal point within a theoretic focal point, which the
user must set beforehand through the TMSFOCUS *TEO parameter. When the real focal point is detected, its coordinates are
saved in the FOCUSTMS *REAL parameter and the focal point «flag» will be set (TMSFOCUS FOUND parameter is ON).

Position of the focal point

22-12 MDO1680 FIDIA

The user must carefully enter the values of the TMSFOCUS XTEO/YTEO/ZTEO parameters, which define the theoretic position
of the focal point, before executing the cycle.
Verify that the following parameters have been entered in the tool table before programming the cycle: TYPE, PRESETL,
PRESETD, PRESETR, CUTTERS, LENCUT.

Check the following parameters carefully: TMSCYST, TMSSLDST, TMSLEAVB.

22.4.3 228 PRESET CYCLE

Laser beam shape preset cycle. This determines the shape of the laser beam by measuring it with a sample tool (TYPE 99)
having known dimensions. The measuring is done in the focal point, at 37 points (1 point every 5 degrees, 180 degrees total).
Errors with respect to the coordinates of the focal point (FOCUSTMS *REAL) are saved in a table and will then be used in the
tool shape verification cycle (233). This cycle is necessary because the laser beam section does not have a perfectly circular
shape and contact can take place at distances other than at the center of the beam depending on the direction of approach. The
spindle rotation speed is automatically set to the value of the TMSPAR SPDL parameter.
Verify that the following parameters have been entered in the tool table before programming the cycle:
TYPE, PRESETL, PRESETD, PRESETR, CUTTERS, LENCUT

Check the following parameters carefully:

TMSCYST, TMSSLDST.

22.5 TMS LASER DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS

The following programming functions are available for diagnostics (all are non-modal):

G216-G217-G218-G219 FUNCTIONS
These functions are used for selecting the thresholds for the anti-disturbance digital filter (UDFILS signal) and for input
comparator sensitivity (UDTHRR signal).

G216 selects the lower digital filter threshold (disables the hardware anti-disturbance filter)
G217 selects the upper digital filter threshold (enables the hardware anti-disturbance filter)
G218 selects low input comparator sensitivity (the laser only switches when it is half interrupted)
G219 selects high input comparator sensitivity (the laser switches when it is lightly touched)

The anti-disturbance filter and sensitivity are automatically set to the right values when a preset or measuring cycle is
programmed. These functions are only used in the installation phase or for diagnostics in verifying the proper functioning of the
above-mentioned logics.

G220 FUNCTION
This is the command to check the connections (check mode). It runs several operations to verify that the connection to the CNC
was made properly and that the laser is functioning correctly. The following are the operations:
• Verifies that the connector has been inserted
• Saves the digital filter and laser sensitivity status
• Selects low threshold for the digital filter
• Selects high laser sensitivity
• Turns on laser
• Commands the shutters opening
• Verifies that the shutters are open
• Waits 5 seconds
• Turns off laser
• Commands shutters closing
• Verifies that the shutters are closed
• Restores the digital filter and laser sensitivity to the status they were in prior to the cycle

Shutters opening and closing must take place within the interval of time defined in the TMSARMTIM parameter. At the end of
the operations, a message will be displayed to indicate whether the checks were successfully completed or not.

G221 FUNCTION
This function checks the cleanliness of the lenses: it verifies that the laser beam has not been interrupted, even partially, for any
reason. If the lenses are dirty, a message will be displayed.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-13

Set the following parameter before programming a G220 or G221 function:
TMSARMTIM
Time in seconds within which the shutters open/close command must be executed. If set at zero, the default value will be 10
seconds.

22.6 236 CYCLE– MANAGEMENT BY PLC

This cycle performs one measurement only to check whether a tool is mounted on the spindle or not. It does not measure the
tool dimensions.
The cycle is managed by the PLC programming language. If you intend to use the cycle, the relevant PLC must be written
during installation.
Below is a description of the automatic cycle that is executed when PLC programs the G236 function. For the sake of simplicity,
the description refers to the common situation in which the laser beam is oriented along the Y axis. In other cases, the concepts
remain the same but the axes involved in the movements differ.
• The axes move to the TMSCYST safety value.
• A check is made to see that the tool data has been entered correclty: the length and diameter values entered must be
greater than zero.
• The laser is switched on.
• The XY axes are positioned in such a way that the theoretical tool centre is to be found on the focus vertical.
• A positioning movement on the XZ plane is executed, at the end of which the tool is positioned to the side of the laser beam
(the distance along the X axis between the tool centre and the beam is equal to TMSSLDST); the tool tip is lower than the
laser beam (the distance along the Z axis between the laser beam and the tool tip is equal to TMSSLDST).
• The tool is moved to the opposite side of the laser beam by a movement along the X axis.
• If the laser beam has been interrupted, the CNC sets the PLC memory bit MTOOLF to the high level (tool present), or
otherwise to the low level (tool not present).
• The axes are released from the laser beam.
• The laser is switched off (if the TMSCLECY parameter is ON).

All the movements in the cycle are made at the feed set by means of the TMSPAR FEEDFAST parameter.
The cycle does not start and stop the spindle automatically. Normally, it is not necessary to execute the cycle with the spindle in
rotation. However, if you wish to start the spindle, this must be commanded by PLC.
The PLC program must perform at least the following operations, normally as part of an PLC M function:
• Position the axes in the proximity of the measuring device.
• If necessary, modify the TMSSLDST and TMSPAR FEEDFAST parameters by entering appropriate values.
Do not set excessive feeds, otherwise the CNC has no time to detect that the laser beam has been interrupted. This can
happen if the value of the SAMPLE parameter is too high or if the tool is too small.
• Execute the G236 function.
• Check whether the tool is present or not (by reading the state of the MTOOLF bit) and act accordingly.
• Move the axes away from the measuring device.
• Reset the initial values for the TMSSLDST and TMSPAR FEEDFAST parameters.

22.7 INSTALLATION OF THE ROTO_TMS OPTION

This option enables tool measurement cycles to be performed on machine tools on which the tool is constantly inclined, i.e. not
parallel to one of the XYZ axes.
Installation procedure:
• Install the measuring device as described in the preceding paragraphs.
• The measuring device can be mounted on the XY, XZ or YZ plane; the optimum position is selected according to the
inclination of the tools to be measured.
• The laser beam must be oriented along the X, Y or Z axis; a good degree of parallelism is necessary between the laser
beam and the machine tool axis entered in the TMSPAR AXBEAM parameter.
• Install the ROTO logic, setting the relevant parameters (see the example).
• Set the following parameter:

TMSMAXLEN
Distance between spindle nose and focal point measured along the rotated tool axis, when this axis is at the software limit
switch next to TMS.

22-14 MDO1680 FIDIA

Procedure:
• Position the axes X and Y so that the spindle nose will be in contact with the laser focal point.
• Position the axis Z at the software limit switch next to TMS; this can be done by programming the limit switch value at 0
origin.
• Measure the distance between spindle nose and focal point along the rotated Z axis.
• Set this distance into the TMSMAXLEN parameter

The MAINT parameters necessary for the functioning of this Option can be set from the PLC program.

Activating/deactivating the ROTO logic

It should be noted that all the preset and measurement cycles must be performed exclusively with the ROTO logic active.
To activate the ROTO logic, set the ROTO parameter to ON or program the G196 function; to deactivate the logic, set the
ROTO parameter to OF or program the G197 function.
It is recommended that the task of managing the ROTO logic should not be left to the user; it is much better for this logic to be
managed by the PLC M functions that perform the cycles.
The PLC programmer simply has to insert in the M functions the instructions that activate the ROTO logic prior to the cycle and
deactivate it at the end of the cycle.

EXAMPLE:
The parameters are given for installing the ROTO logic with the TMS and head oriented as in the diagram (AXBEAM XM,
AXTOOL ZM, etc.). For other orientations, simply modify the parameter values adapting them to the actual configuration. The
ROTO logic parameters are described in the relevant section of the Software Installation Manual.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-15

AUCBLK ROTOEME OF
AUCBLK ROTOAUTO OF
ROTOABS OF
ROTOACCE 0.100
ROTOALIGNE OF
ROTOALIGNEA OF
ROTOALIGNEB OF
ROTOALIGNEC OF
ROTOALIGNET OF
ROTOAXS ROTOX OF
ROTOAXS ROTOY OF
ROTOAXS ROTOZ XM
ROTOAXS ROTOA OF
ROTOAXS ROTOB OF
ROTOAXS ROTOC OF
ROTOAXS SIMROTOA OF
ROTOAXS SIMROTOB OF
ROTOAXS SIMROTOC ON
ROTOAXS POSROTOA 0
ROTOAXS POSROTOB 0
ROTOAXS POSROTOC 30.000 ;head inclination
ROTODIS CENAY 0
ROTODIS CENAZ 0
ROTODIS CENBZ 0
ROTODIS CENBX 0
ROTODIS CENCX 2179.233 ;Y co-ordinate of focus point
ROTODIS CENCY -1562.125 ;Z co-ordinate of focus point
;PLC must set the CENCX and CENCY parameters as follows:
;During the search for focus phase, insert the theoretical focus
;coordinates.Having completed the focus search, insert the actual
;focus co-ordinates.
ROTOINV ROTOA OF
ROTOINV ROTOB OF
ROTOINV ROTOC ON ;ON if rotation occurs in the wrong direction
ROTOPOSC 0
ROTOTETA 1.

22.8 INSTALLING THE TMSR100 LASER DEVICE

The TMSR performs cycles to compensate for tool centre position error and, if required, to measure tools. This paragraph gives
the necessary information for installing the device.

22.8.1 ON/OFF FUNCTIONS

The following functions are used during installation to manually switch on/off the TMSR device. During execution of the cycles,
ON/OFF operations are automatic: in these circumstances, it is not necessary to use the functions.

G238 switching on TMSR.

G237 switching off TMSR.
Neither function is modal.

22.8.2 MANUAL POSITIONING FUNCTIONS

The following functions are used during installation to position the TMSR rotating table manually. During execution of the cycles,
positioning operations are automatic: in these circumstances, it is not necessary to use the functions.

G239 0 position
G240 45 degrees position
G241 90 degrees position
G242 135 degrees position

22-16 MDO1680 FIDIA

22.8.3 MAINT PARAMETERS
The specific parameters for this option are found on the MAINT TMSR page.

TMSRFOCUST1
TMSRFOCUST2
TMSRFOCUST3
TMSRFOCUST4
These are the X, Y and Z co-ordinates of the four theoretical focus points, relating to the four TMSR positions.
These parameters must be set during installation, whereas the other parameters are read only.

TMSRFOCUSR1
TMSRFOCUSR2
TMSRFOCUSR3
TMSRFOCUSR4
These are the X, Y and Z co-ordinates of the four actual focus points, relating to the four TMSR positions.

TMSRBANG
Laser beam inclination angle.

TMSRTANG
Tool inclination angle.

TMSRCOMP
Active compensation values.

TMSRCORANG
Correction angle applied to the TMSR, for each of the positions provided.

TMSRPOSNR
TMSR position. The possible values are:
0 = 0 degrees
1 = 45 degrees
2 = 90 degrees
3 = 135 degrees

22.8.4 TMSR INSTALLATION

Installation of the TMSR basically consists of two phases:
• Setting parameters in MAINT TMS.
• Searching for focus points using the G243 function.

22.8.5 SETTING PARAMETERS

The following MAINT TMS parameters must be set, as described in the preceding paragraphs for the TMSC device:
TMSPAR ENABLE
TMSPAR LBEAM
TMSPAR FEEDFAST
TMSPAR FEEDSLOW
TMSPAR AXBEAM
TMSPAR AXTOOL
TMSPAR SPDL
TMSPAR EMEDIAMETER
TMSPAR MAXDIAMETER
TMSFOCUS FOUND

The Y axis must be set in the TMSPAR AXBEAM parameter.

During mounting, the following rule must be respected: when the TMSR is oriented in the 0 degree position (e.g. via the G239
function), the laser beam must be parallel to the X axis of the machine tool.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-17

22.8.6 SEARCH FOR FOCUS POINTS
Preliminary operations:
• Mount the sample tool.
• Bring the head axes to the zero position; normally, the zero position of the indexed axes corresponds to the vertical tool
position.
• Set RTCP to ON.
• Enter the sample tool data in the following Tool Table parameters:
TYPE, LENGTH, DIAMETER, RADIUS, CUTTERS, LENCUT, MAX.SP.

A spherical sample tool may be mounted and TYPE 99 entered, but in order to have greater accuracy we recommend that the
FIDIA sample tool be mounted and TYPE 100 entered.
The length, diameter and radius values must be known with micrometric accuracy.
N.B. All the operations below are executed with RTCP set to ON.

Detect the theoretical focus points and enter them in the relevant parameters:
• Switch on the TMSR using the G238 function.
• Position the TMSR at 0 degrees using the G239 function.
• Position the tool at the centre of the laser beam; move the Z axis until the tool tip just touches the beam.
• Activate the absolute origin (origin 0) or an origin that coincides with the absolute origin.
• Read the X, Y, Z values on the video and insert them in TMSRFOCUST1.
Repeat the above procedure for each of the other three positions. The difference is that the TMSR should now be positioned
using the G240, G241, G242 functions and the TMSRFOCUST2/3/4 parameters must be set.

Execute the focus search cycles:

• Set the TMSCYST and TMSSLDST parameters (for the latter parameter use a value of 4-5 mm).
• Switch on the TMSR using the G238 function.
• Position the TMSR at 0 degrees using the G239 function.
• Program the G243 function (focus search).
• Copy the X, Y, Z-radius values from TMSRFOCUSR1 to TMSRFOCUST1.
• Reduce the TMSSLDST parameter to 2 mm, in order to speed up the next cycle.
• Program the G243 function to repeat the focus search cycle; this time the CNC will take into account the TMSRCORANG
POS0 angle detected during the previous cycle.

Search for focus at 45 degrees:

• Set the TMSSLDST parameter to a value of 4-5 mm.
• Switch on the TMSR using the G238 function.
• Position the TMSR at 45 degrees using the G240 function.
• Program the G243 function.
• Copy the X, Y, Z-radius values from TMSRFOCUSR2 to TMSRFOCUST2.
• Reduce the TMSSLDST parameter to 2 mm, in order to speed up the next cycle.
• Program the G243 function to repeat the focus search cycle; this time the CNC will take into account the TMSRCORANG
POS45 angle detected during the previous cycle.

Search for focus at 90 degrees:

• Set the TMSSLDST parameter to a value of 4-5 mm.
• Switch on the TMSR using the G238 function.
• Position the TMSR at 90 degrees using the G241 function.
• Program the G243 function.
• Copy the X, Y, Z-radius values from TMSRFOCUSR3 to TMSRFOCUST3.
• Reduce the TMSSLDST parameter to 2 mm, in order to speed up the next cycle.
• Program the G243 function to repeat the focus search cycle; this time the CNC will take into account the TMSRCORANG
POS90 angle detected during the previous cycle.

22-18 MDO1680 FIDIA

Search for focus at135 degrees:
• Set the TMSSLDST parameter to a value of 4-5 mm.
• Switch on the TMSR using the G238 function.
• Position the TMSR at 135 degrees using the G242 function.
• Program the G243 function.
• Copy the X, Y, Z-radius values from TMSRFOCUSR4 to TMSRFOCUST4.
• Reduce the TMSSLDST parameter to 2 mm, in order to speed up the next cycle.
• Program the G243 function to repeat the focus search cycle; this time the CNC will take into account the TMSRCORANG
POS135 angle detected during the previous cycle.

It is recommended that all these focus search operations be grouped together in one PLC M function.

22.8.7 INSTALLATION FOR TOOL MEASUREMENT CYCLES

If the TMSR is to be used to execute tool measurement cycles (cycles 230, 231, 232, etc.), it should be installed as described in
the preceding paragraphs for the TMSC device.
For this purpose, the TMSR must be oriented in the 0 or 90 degrees position and the laser beam should have a good degree of
parallelism with respect to the machine tool axis set by the TMSPAR AXBEAM parameter (X or Y axis).
The preset phase requires execution of the 227, 228 and 229 cycles; cycles 243 and 244 are not used when the TMSR is
employed for tool measurement.

FIDIA MDO1680 22-19

22-20 MDO1680 FIDIA
23 TEST PROGRAMS

23.1 ERCI
This program is used for the following operations:
• have the machine tool automatically execute a circle on the XY, ZX or YZ plane
• digitize the path of the machine axes during execution of the G02
• graphically display the offset between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory
• provide certain significant values such as the maximum error, mean error, etc.

In order to access this utility, the MAINT area must first be entered (refer to the relevant section for how to access to the
SERVICE area), then the ERCI soft key must be selected.
A green circle representing the path of the theoretic circle will be displayed on the screen inside a graduated circular scale.

23.1.1 SOFT KEY: ERCI PARAM

When selected, the following parameters, which can be edited, will be displayed on the screen:

ERCI_ AXIS1
Default: X
Alternative selections: all axes
This parameter defines the first axis of the plane on which the circle is to be executed.

ERCI_ AXIS2
Default: Y
Alternative selections: all axes
This parameter defines the second axis of the plane on which the circle is to be executed.

If the System has Synchronous Axes, the following values must be assigned to the SYNREC parameter of the CNC: XT, YT, ZT
if the Test is being conducted on the copying side axes, or XM, YM, ZM if the Test is being conducted on the milling side axes.

ERCI_RADIUS
Default: 100
This parameter defines the radius of the circle in millimeters.

ERCI_CENTER_I
Default: 0
This parameter defines the coordinates of the ERCI_ AXIS1 axis in relation to the center of the circle in millimeters.

ERCI_CENTER_J
Default: 0
This parameter defines the coordinates of the ERCI_ AXIS2 axis in relation to the center of the circle in millimeters.

ERCI_ROTXY
Default: 0
This parameter defines the value of the orthogonality correction on the workplane in degrees. The plane is defined by the axes
assigned to the ERCI_ AXIS1 and ERCI_ AXIS2 parameters.
It is used in the tracer testing phase to correct only on a single display any disalignments of the tracer with respect to the
machine planes (it does not cause any variations in the ERCI recording phase).

ERCI_AUTOCALC
Default: ON
Alternative selection: OF
If left at ON, the program, during the calculation and graphic display phase, will obtain the value of the radius and the
coordinates of the center of the circle through automatic calculation based on digitized points in the input file.
If set to OF, the program will use the values entered in the ERCI_RADIUS and ERCI_CENTER parameters for its calculations.

FIDIA MDO1680 23-1

ERCI_FILEREC
Default: OF
Alternative selections: ON
If left at OF, the program will write the data in a scratch file (ERCIDFLT.TMP) during the digitizing phase. The scratch file will be
overwritten each time ERCI is executed, so all data relevant to the previous digitized movement will be lost.
If set to ON, the program will be saved in the C:\FIDIA\TEST directory during the digitizing phase with the name ERCI.TXT. The
previously digitized ERCI test will automatically be renamed in the same directory as ERCIxx.TXT (where "xx" is a progressive
number that is increased for each execution of the ERCI test with the ERCI_FILEREC parameter set to ON).
We recommend keeping this parameter on ON whenever it is useful to save all files containing the digitized points from the test.

ERCI_THRESHOLD
Default: 0.1
This is used for setting the maximum tolerable error value.
If the error exceeds the value of this parameter (expressed in millimetres) in one or more points, the situation will be indicated
by messages at the end of the test.

When the ERCI PARAM. 1 soft key is selected inside ERCI PARAM, the following parameters will be displayed:

ERCI_ERRCD
Default: 0.08
This parameter defines the value of the chordal error used for setting the tolerance and the frequency of the automatically
recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the FPDGT ERCD parameter described in the “Recording tolerances” chapter of
the Digitizing Manual).

ERCI_LMIN
Default: 0.5
This parameter defines the minimum distance between two consecutively recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the
FPDGT LMIN parameter).

ERCI_LMAX
Default: 5
This parameter defines the maximum distance between two consecutively recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the
FPDGT LMAX parameter).

ERCI_NROT
Default: 2
This parameter defines the number of circumferences to be made by the machine axes. The default of “2" was used so that the
program can examine the central segment of the circumference, thereby leaving out the initial and final segment of the circle.

ERCI_SOURCE
Default: DIRECT
Alternative selections: DEFL., DIGIT
DIRECT: The digitized file will only contain the value of the machine coordinates.
DEFL.: The digitized file will only contain tracer deflections (used for testing tracers).
DIGIT: The digitized file will contain the value of the machine coordinates compensated by the value of the tracer deflection
(used for testing tracers).

23.1.2 SOFT KEY: READ

This function is used for displaying a previously executed ERCI and for which there is a digitized file (previously executed ERCI
with the ERCI_FILEREC parameter at ON).
When selected, the “Open” dialog window will appear on the screen from which the name of the file to be read can be selected
(if an ERCI is already displayed on the screen, the graph of the new ERCI will replace the previous one).

23.1.3 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE

If an ERCI is already displayed on the screen, a new ERCI file can be opened and displayed by selecting this function. The new
file will overlap the previous one and will be white in color (in order for the two graphs to be overlapped, they must have the
same coordinates for the center). The table of data located on the right of the graph will remain the one for the first ERCI
displayed.

23-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

23.1.4 SOFT KEY: EXECUTE
When selected, this function automatically opens the DGT and the machine tool executes the circumferences at the speed set
by the override feed.
The values of the parameters previously set in ERCI PARAM will be activated.

If the ERCI_FILEREC parameter is set to ON, the program will open a window requesting the insertion of a comment to be
inserted at the beginning of the digitized file.
Lastly, there will be a request to push the CNC START button to start automatic execution of the ERCI.

N.B.: It must be remembered that execution of the test is sensitive to CQA, FSC, SWCNC, etc. type parameters.
It is advisable therefore to initialize all these parameters (for example, using a RESET EXE command) before carrying out the
operation.

When the machine tool has terminated execution of the circumferences, the DGT =>Device destination link will be closed
automatically.
The offset calculated between the theoretic circumference (green circle) and the digitized position of the machine axes (red
path) will be displayed on the screen, amplified in relation to the value by division marked in the table to the right under DIV | |.
mm.

The following data will also be displayed in green on the right side of the screen:

FILENAME
Path and name of the file currently displayed.

AUTOCALC or FIXED Radius and Center

This indicates the mode in which the dimensions of the radius and the coordinates of the center of the circle were considered.
In calculating the error values, the program can behave in two different ways, depending on how the ERCI_AUTOCALC
parameter was set (ON corresponds to AUTOCALC, while OF corresponds to FIXED).

SOURCE
This specifies how the file was recorded: DIRECT, DEFL. or DIGIT (see description of ERCI SOURCE parameter).

ERCI PLANE
Plane on which the ERCI was executed (XY, ZX, YZ).

OFFSET X mm
This indicates the offset on the X axis between the coordinate of the theoretic center of the circle and the one resulting from the
auto calculation of the digitized input file (if the ERCI_AUTOCALC parameter is set at OF, the value displayed here will as a
consequence be equal to zero).

OFFSET Y mm
Same as the previous parameter, but for the Y axis.

ROT XY
Displays the value previously set in the ERCI_ROTXY parameter.

RADIUS mm
This indicates the auto calculated value of the radius of the circle when the ERCI_AUTOCALC parameter is at ON, when at OF,
it displays the vale set in the ERCI_RADIUS parameter.

ERROR MAX mm
Maximum offset value with a positive sign between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory.

ERROR MIN mm
Maximum offset value with a negative sign between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory.

ERROR RMS mm
Value of the mean quadratic error between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory.

FIDIA MDO1680 23-3

DIV | | mm
This indicates the value by division of the circular scale (this value will obviously vary when the magnify and reduce functions
are used).

23.1.5 SOFT KEY: MAGNIFY

Each time this soft key is selected, the value indicating the division of the circular scale (DIV | | mm) is reduced with a
consequent increase in the graph of the distance between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory.

23.1.6 SOFT KEY: REDUCE

Each time this soft key is selected, the value indicating the division of the circular scale (DIV | | mm) is increased with a
consequent reduction in the graph of the distance between the theoretic and the digitized trajectory.

23.1.7 SOFT KEY: CUT

When the ARROW keys are used, symbols in the shape of + and X will appear. By repeatedly pressing one of the two vertical
arrow keys on the keyboard, a pointer in the shape of + will move along the digitized trajectory. By simultaneously pressing the
ALT key and repeatedly pressing the vertical arrow key, a second pointer in the shape of X inside an O will appear on the same
trajectory (the second pointer cannot overtake the first along the trajectory). Press the CUT soft key to cut the segment
between the first and the second pointer from the graph. The values of the errors and the radius shown on the right of the
screen will change since they are the result of the recalculation of the circumference without the segment that was just deleted.
The two pointers can still be moved and subsequent segments of the curve can be cut for a new recalculation of the errors and
the radius relevant to the circumference remaining on the screen.
This operation can be useful for cutting peaks caused by axis inversions and for calculating the errors without taking these
peaks into consideration.

23.1.8 SOFT KEY: CUT RESET

When this soft key is selected, all the segments of the circumference deleted using the CUT soft key will be restored.

23.2 ERDI
The ERDI test program is used to:
• automatically supply to the axis selected a voltage step (via a closed position loop) that is proportional to the feed set by the
potentiometre
• digitize the machine tool axis path during execution of the voltage step
• give a graphics display of the following curves: real and theoretical space travelled by the axis, real feed, theoretical feed
and acceleration of the axis
• provide certain significant values such as the sampling time, the frequency measured between two pre-selected points, etc.

Procedure for accessing the test programs:

• Enter the MAINT area (refer to the relevant paragraph for access to Maint)
• Press the ERDI soft key
• Press the PARAMETER soft key and set up the parameters
• Press the ERDI soft key (depending on the test required); the relevant page for the test program is entered. This page
contains the necessary soft keys for executing the test and will display the results.

Below is a description of the soft keys used for Erdi tests.

23.2.1 SOFT KEY: PARAMETER

When selected, the following parameters that can be edited are shown on the video:

ERDI_TEST_AXIS
Default: OF
Alternatives that can be selected: XM, YM, ZM, AM.....
Selects the axis on which the Erdi test is to be performed.
If the System has Synchronous Axes, the following values must be assigned to the SYNREC parameter of the CNC: XT, YT, ZT
if the Test is being conducted on the copying side axes, or XM, YM, ZM if the Test is being conducted on the milling side axes.

ERDI_MOVEMENT
Default: 2.000
Defines the distance in millimetres that the axis must travel during the test.
ERDI_FILEREC

23-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

Default: OF
Alternatives that can be selected: ON
If left OF, during digitizing the program will write the data in a scratch file (ERDIDFLT.TMP) that will then be overwritten each
time Erdi is re-executed (and so all data relevant to the previous test will be lost). If set to ON, during digitizing the program will
be saved under the directory C:\FIDIA\TEST with the name ERDI.TXT. The last Erdi test previously digitized will be
automatically renamed in the same directory with the name ERDIxx.TXT (where ‘xx’ is a progressive number that is
incremented each time the Erdi test is executed with the erdi_filerec parameter set to ON). It is recommended that this
parameter always be set to ON whenever it is useful to save all files containing points digitized by the test.

23.2.2 SOFT KEY: READ

This function is used to display an Erdi that has already been executed previously and for which the digitized file exists (Erdi
previously executed with the erdi_filerec parameter set to ON). When this function is selected, the «Open» dialogue window will
be shown on the video. Using this window, the name of the file to be displayed can be selected (if an Erdi is already displayed
on the video, this will be replaced by the new graphics being opened).

23.2.3 SOFT KEYS: CURS1 and CURS2 => and <=

By selecting these soft keys, the two cursors are moved along the X axis of the graph (time axis).
Each time the soft key is selected, cursor 1 or 2 (white and red, respectively) will move by a distance equal to the value in
seconds of the SAMPLE parameter.
If you wish to move the cursors using the keyboard instead of the soft keys, proceed as follows:
• To move cursor 1 (white): press the RIGHT/LEFT ARROW keys or the PAGE UP/DOWN keys (this results in rapid
movement);
• To move cursor 2 (red): press the Alt + RIGHT/LEFT ARROW keys or the Alt + PAGE UP/DOWN keys (this results in rapid
movement).

23.2.4 SOFT KEY: ZOOM CURS

Changes the scale of the graph in such a way that the area between the two cursors is displayed over the whole screen. Used
to enlarge a particular area of the graph.

23.2.5 SOFT KEY: ZOOM RESET

Resets the original scale of the graph, cancelling any ZOOM operations performed.

23.2.6 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE

If an Erdi is already displayed on the video, by selecting this function a new Erdi file can be opened and displayed that will be
superimposed on the preceding file (since the two graphs will be superimposed, they should have equivalent dimensions). The
table of data below the graph will still refer to the first Erdi displayed.

23.2.7 SOFT KEYS: EXECUTE ERDI

EXECUTE ERDI executes the Erdi test.
Execution of the test consists in opening DGT and in the automatic movement of the axis selected. For this purpose, the
parameter values previously entered under PARAMETER will be activated. If the ERDI_FILEREC parameter is set to ON, the
program will open a window requesting insertion of a comment that will be included at the beginning of the digitized file.
Lastly you will be asked to press the START pushbutton in the CNC section to start automatic execution of the test.

N.B.: Remember that execution of the test is sensitive to parameters such as CQA, FSC, SWCNC, etc.
It is therefore recommended that all these parameters be initialized (by a RESET EXE command, for example) before
carrying out the operation.

When the machine tool has terminated the operation, the DGT =>Destination device link will automatically be closed.
A graphics display of curves will be shown on the video using the same colour as the relevant parameters listed below the
graph. Each parameter is preceded by the name of the axis on which the test has been executed, and followed by the value of
the curve at the position of the cursor. The first line of parameters displays the values at the position of cursor 1 and the second
line the values corresponding to cursor 2, while the third line displays the difference between these two values (Delta).

The meaning of the displayed parameters is as follows:

S space travelled by the axis
ST theoretical space
V axis feed
VT theoretical feed
A acceleration
Below this section, the following parameters are also listed:
SAMPLE Sampling time expressed in seconds.

FIDIA MDO1680 23-5

FFWD Displays the Feed Forward delay value set at the time of the Erdi recording. The theoretical space curve is
offset by this value along the time axis on the graph.
TIME Difference in seconds between the position of cursor 1 and that of cursor 2.
FREQ The corresponding frequency is calculated according to the time that elapses between the two cursors (useful
when positioning the cursors on two consecutive peaks).
FILE Name of the first file displayed.

23.3 ERRE
This software is used to:
• In order that two selected axes execute a return straight path in interpolation, with settable length and direction
• to digitalize the machine axes’ path during the movement.
• to graphically visualize the error bend between theoric and effective distance during the straight path execution.

In order to access this utility, the MAINT area must first be entered (refer to the relevant section for how to access MAINT), then
the ERRE soft key must be selected.
The following soft keys will appear on the screen.

23.3.1 SOFT KEY: ERRE PARAM

When selected, the following parameters, which can be edited, will be displayed on the screen:

ERRE_AXIS1
Default: X
Alternative selections: all axes
This parameter selects the first of the axes on which the ERRE test is to be executed.

ERRE_AXIS2
Default: Y
Alternative selections: all axes
This parameter selects the second of the axes on which the ERRE test is to be executed.

If the System has Synchronous Axes, the following values must be assigned to the SYNREC parameter of the CNC: XT, YT, ZT
if the Test is being conducted on the copying side axes, or XM, YM, ZM if the Test is being conducted on the milling side axes.

ERRE_MOVEMENT1
Default: 2.000
This parameter defines the distance in millimeters that the first axis selected must travel during the test.

ERRE_MOVEMENT2
Default: 2.000
This parameter defines the distance in millimeters that the second axis selected must travel during the test.

ERRE_LMIN
Default: 0.01
This parameter defines the minimum distance between two consecutively recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the
FPDGT LMIN parameter).

ERRE_LMAX
Default: 1.000
This parameter defines the maximum distance between two consecutively recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the
FPDGT LMAX parameter).

ERRE_ERRCD
Default: 0.002
This parameter defines the value of the chordal error used for setting the tolerance and the frequency of the automatically
recorded points in millimeters (corresponds to the FPDGT ERCD parameter described in the “Recording tolerances” chapter of
the Digitizing Manual).

23-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

ERRE_FILEREC
Default: OF
Alternative selections: ON
If left at OF, the program will write the data in a scratch file (ERREDFLT.TMP) during the digitizing phase. The scratch file will
be overwritten each time ERRE is executed, so all data relevant to the previous digitized movement will be lost.
If set to ON, the program will be saved in the C:\FIDIA\TEST directory during the digitizing phase with the name ERRE.TXT.
The previously digitized ERRE test will automatically be renamed in the same directory as ERRExx.TXT (where "xx" is a
progressive number that is increased for each execution of the ERRE test with the ERRE_FILEREC parameter set to ON).
We recommend keeping this parameter on ON whenever it is useful to save all files containing the digitized points from the test.

ERRE_THRESHOLD
Default: 0.1
This is used for setting the maximum tolerable error value.
If the error exceeds the value of this parameter (expressed in millimetres) in one or more points, the situation will be indicated
by messages at the end of the test.

23.3.2 SOFT KEY: CURS => and <=

When this soft key is selected, the cursor can be moved along the X axis of the graph (time axis).
Each selection will cause the cursor to move a quantity equal to the value in seconds of the SAMPLE parameter. As an
alternative to the soft key, the cursor can be moved by using the two horizontal arrow keys on the keyboard.
If you wish to move the cursor using the keyboard instead of the soft keys, press the RIGHT/LEFT ARROW keys or the PAGE
UP/DOWN keys (this results in fast movement).

23.3.3 SOFT KEY: READ NOREPLACE

When an Erre is already displayed on the video, by selecting this function it is possible to open and display a new Erre file that
will be superimposed on the preceding file (since the two graphs will be superimposed, they must have equivalent dimensions).
The scale of the graph and the data shown below will still refer to the first Erre displayed.

23.3.4 SOFT KEY: EXECUTE ERRE

When selected, this function automatically executes the ERRE test, which consists of opening the DGT and in supplying closed
position loop voltage to the two axes involved at a proportional amplitude to the override feed value for the purpose of making
them travel (back and forth) the distance in millimeters set in the ERRE_MOVEMENT1 and MOVEMENT2 parameters.
The values of the parameters previously set in ERRE PARAM will be activated.
If the ERRE_FILEREC parameter is set to ON, the program will open a window requesting the insertion of a comment to be
inserted at the beginning of the digitized file.
Lastly, there will be a request to push the CNC START button to start automatic execution of the ERRE.

N.B.: It must be remembered that execution of the test is sensitive to CQA, FSC, SWCNC, etc. type parameters.
It is advisable therefore to initialize all these parameters (for example, using a RESET EXE command) before carrying out the
operation.

When the machine tool has terminated execution of the movements, the DGT =>Device destination link will be closed
automatically.

• The curve of the error is graphically displayed on the screen. It is calculated as the difference between the real distance and
the theoretic distance on the straight path obtained from the interpolation of the two axes (the white part of the graph
corresponds to the forward movement of the two axes toward the ERRE_MOVEMENT1 and MOVEMENT2 positions, while
the green part represents the return movement toward the original position of the two axes).
• The value of the error corresponding to the actual position of the cursor is displayed immediately below the graph (see
above description of SOFT-KEY: CURS => and <= for moving the cursor).
• The name of the file displayed and its path, as well as the physical position of the machine axes, are indicated below the
error value.

23.4 PART PROGRAM TEST

This test detects and displays the error between the programmed path (part-program) and the actual path executed by the
machine tool. The part-program must exclusively contain ISO instructions defining the points (only G01 functions, with N… X…
Y… Z… syntax). During execution of the part-program, the actual path is saved in a file so that a comparison can be made. The
file has the same name as the part-program, but with the .DGT extension. The test is displayed on a video page that is similar to
the Graphic Page. Its characteristics and functions (DISPLAY PLANE, ZOOM, ROTATE softkeys, etc.) are described in the
FIDIA CNC User Manual. The part-program is graphically represented by a white line (red during execution), while the saved file
is represented by a blue line. Press the PART PROGRAM TEST softkey to enter this context.

FIDIA MDO1680 23-7

23.4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS
Press the P.PROGRAM PARAMETERS softkey to display a dialog window containing the parameters for executing and
displaying the test.

Program Test Threshold

This is used for setting the maximum tolerable error value.
If the error exceeds the value of this parameter (expressed in millimetres) in one or more points, the situation will be indicated
by messages at the end of the test.

Program Test Display Max

This is the maximum error that can be graphically displayed at the end of the test. Errors greater than this value fall outside the
graph and will therefore not be displayed.

The user must verify the values of the parameters and modify them if necessary. After making the modifications, press OK to
activate or CANCEL to cancel the changes.
The RESET button can be used for automatically setting the values previously confirmed with OK.

23.4.2 EXECUTION TEST

• Press the P. PROGRAM EXECUTE softkey
• A dialog window will be opened to select the part-program to be executed (this is normally a file with the extension .ISO).
• A message will be displayed with instructions to press the START CNC button (on the pushbutton panel of the machine
tool) to position the machine on the first programmed point.
• Another message will be displayed to press the START CNC button to execute the part-program.
• During execution, the path will be displayed by a red line. Press the vertical ABORT P.P. TEST softkey to abort the
execution.

At the end of the test, if the error exceeded the tolerance threshold defined in the set parameters phase, messages will be
displayed. The graph of the error will be displayed in the lower part of the screen after the messages have been displayed.
The axis of the ordinates represents the error, measured on the displayed plane (selected using the XY PLANE, ZX PLANE, YZ
PLANE softkeys). The maximum value displayed is the one defined in the set parameters phase. The axis of the abscissas
represents the positions of the X, Y or Z axis, depending on the plane displayed. To see the error relevant to another plane,
select the corresponding plane. The following information is displayed next to the graph:
MAX maximum error detected
RMS average quadratic error, calculated taking all the errors that exceed the set tolerance threshold into consideration

23.4.3 DISPLAYING PREVIOUSLY EXECUTED TEST

Proceed as follows to display the error relevant to a previously executed test:
• Press the READ FILE softkey, select the part-program and then OK
• Press the SECOND FILE softkey, select the relevant digitized file (.DGT extension) and then OK
• Press the COMPARE FILES softkey

If the COMPARE FILES softkey is pressed when a part-program and the relevant digitized file are not displayed, dialog windows
will be opened automatically to select the files of a previously executed test.

23.5 PRINTOUT
The page on which the graph is displayed as well as the numerical results relating to the execution of an ERCI, ERDI, etc. test
can be printed. Procedure:
• Display the page to be printed.
• To select the printer and print options (for example, paper size and orientation), click on Print Setup from the File menu.
• To have a preview of the page when printed, click on Print Preview from the File menu.
• To print the page, click on Print from the File menu.

23-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

24 OSCILLOSCOPE

24.1 FEATURES
The oscilloscope lets you see the trends of the selected signals sampled by the CNC. The oscilloscope may be extremely
simple and limited, but also a bit more complex and much more powerful. In fact different kinds of people should take advantage
from the oscilloscope:
• the technician, who wants to see simple binary signals
• the expert technician, who wants to analyse analog signals while calibrating the CNC parameters
• the expert technician FIDIA

The oscilloscope can be used with three different levels of complexity: the Easy Mode, the Advanced Mode without Operations
and the Advanced Mode with Operations. To pass from the Advanced Mode without Operations to the Advanced Mode with
Operations you have to modify a parameter within the \WINNT\FIDIA.INI file (you should set to 0 the OscNoOp parameter).
Here is a brief description of the three different operating modes:
• In the Easy Mode you can display only binary data, such as CNC bit or PLC bit. This is the default condition when you start
the User Interface. The properties of the tracks are automatically set so that they have different colours and do not overlap
each other. You do not have to manage with the session name or track features definition like Name, Offset, Value/Division,
Colour... Just define one or more binary signal and you are ready to start recording your data. In the majority of cases, the
installing technician and/or maintenance technician need work in Easy Mode only.
• In the Advanced Mode without Operations you can display binary and analog data such as parameters or memory locations.
Moreover in this case you can have more than one session. In fact, the properties of the tracks should be properly set so
that they do not overlap each other. Track features like Name, Offset, Value/Division, Colour... can be defined and the
recording session can be saved with the desired name in order to be reused in future.
• In the Advanced Mode with Operations, you have the same features of the previous mode, but you can also define tracks
where mathematical expressions of the selected signals will be displayed.

After defining the work session, you can start recording under the Record page pressing Start.
After stopping recording, you can see again what you recorded entering the Play Back page. Here you can easily slide along the
samples using the slider (or the softkey or the keyboard). But you can also change the time base and if you want to analyse the
data you must enter the Zoom page to read the values of the tracks using the cursors (moved by the softkeys or the keyboard)
and zoom in the interval between the same cursors.
Additional technical features:
• You can decide when to start or/and stop your recording defining a trigger that evaluates the sampled values of the signals.
• After starting recording you may leave the oscilloscope section without any problems as the CNC continues recording.
• The chosen sample time of the oscilloscope is a multiple of the CNC sample time and the minimum value is equal to the
CNC sample time (RTC2)
• When you see a track which has some “pink” intervals it means that at that time there was a loss of data. Consequently it is
strongly recommended not to use the pink colour for the tracks to detect this kind of information.
• In the Advanced Mode, you may define the maximum recording time (the max value is 24 hours). In the Easy Mode the
maximum number of samples is 100000.
• In the Advanced Mode only, you may decide that when the maximum recording time is reached the recording stops or
continues overlapping the oldest values (default behaviour).
• You cannot select more then 8 signals, but you can have more than 8 tracks (this can be useful in the Advanced Mode with
Operations)
• You cannot create a work session in the Advanced Mode with Operations and then reopen it in the Advanced Mode without
Operations. If you try to do it, an error message informs you that in the Advanced Mode without Operation the operations on
signals are not allowed.
• You cannot do operations on tracks, but only on signals

Conventions used in the text:

SK = Soft key

FIDIA MDO1680 24-1

24.2 OSCILLOSCOPE BASIC CONCEPTS

24.2.1 DATA TYPES

Three kinds of data are used in our system:

BIT
can be a CNC or a PLC binary variable (e.g. Input/Output digital signals, PLC memory bits).

PARAMETER
any numerical variable known by name by the user interface (e.g. Input/Output analog signals or variables that can be shown on
one of the user interface screen).

MEMORY
any addressable location (e.g. PLC memory areas), defined by the base address and offset and the format (the CPU number is
supposed to be 0).

24.2.2 TRACKS AND SIGNALS

The lines you see on the scope screen are called “tracks”.
We call “signals” what is sampled by the CNC during a certain period of time while recording.
In the Easy Mode and Advanced Mode without Operations each track corresponds to a signal. In the Advanced Mode with
Operations a track may be the result of mathematical operation involving one or more signals.

24.2.3 DATA FILES (.dat)

These files contain the information and the values of the sampled signals during recording. They are written in binary format.

24.2.4 SESSION FILES (.ses)

A certain amount of information is needed to record and display data. In Advanced Mode this information is saved in files called
“session files”.
In this way you are able to repeat the same recording at a different time or on a different machine (you have only one session in
the Easy Mode).
Furthermore, you can use the same session to record many data files using different data file names each recording. When you
want to play back an old recording, first load the session and then change the associated data file.

24.2.5 OVERLAP
Available in the Advanced Mode only. In the “overlapped” condition, the oscilloscope continues to record even though the
maximum recording time has already been reached. In this case the old data are overlapped starting from the beginning of the
file, so that the data file acts as a circular buffer.
On the other hand, if you are not in the “overlapped” condition, the oscilloscope stops recording when the maximum recording
time is reached. The maximum recording time can be defined to the limit of 24 hours.

24.2.6 TRIGGER
The trigger lets the oscilloscope start and stop recording when one or two signals (start and stop signal) satisfy a particular
condition. The start and stop signal of the trigger may be the same signal. Furthermore, you can choose between two trigger
modes:
Normal there can be loss of data, but the Recording Time is not limited to a buffer dimension
Safe there is no loss of data, but the Recording Time is limited to a buffer dimension

Each enabled signal is characterised by its name, post-trigger time (positive or negative), threshold and type of event. The type
of event may be resumed as follows:

when the rising trigger signal crosses the threshold value

when the falling trigger signal crosses the threshold value

> when the trigger signal is greater than the threshold value
< when the trigger signal is lower than the threshold value
= when the trigger signal is equal to the threshold value
<> when the trigger signal is different from the threshold value

24-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

EXAMPLE

24.2.7 SAMPLE TIME

Ts on screen (in the Current Status window).
The sample time (ms) can be chosen according to the needs. It is an integer multiple of the CNC interrupt time (RTC2). The
minimum value is equal to the RTC2 to record very fast phenomenon. The maximum value is 1 minute. If you set a value that is
not multiple of RTC2, the nearest lower valid value is automatically setted.

24.2.8 TIME/DIVISION
Td on screen (in the Current Status window).
The time/division can be defined as number of ms per horizontal division.

24.2.9 VALUE/DIVISION
The sensibility of the representation can be set for each track using the Value/Division parameter. Used together with the Offset,
it allows the best representation of data.

24.2.10 OFFSET
The track offset on screen can be defined for each track. It is expressed as a numeric value that is ideally added to the track
value. If the offset is equal to 0, the track is zero in the middle of the display.

24.3 USER INTERFACE

If you press the OSCILLO SCOPE SK from the SERVICE page, you enter the Oscilloscope section where you find the
Oscilloscope display, the Current Status window and the various SKs at the bottom.

24.3.1 CURRENT STATUS WINDOW

It is shown at the bottom right of the screen. It lets you know the sample time (Ts), the time/division (Td), the last sample time
(Tp) and the status information. The status information is given through the symbols of a common recorder:

Green Green Yellow Red Colours when enabled

Meaning
x Stopped
X Displaying in Play Back
X x Paused while displaying in Play Back
X x Recording
X x x Paused while Recording.

You may print the tracks on the screen and all the main information only in paused Play Back.

24.4 MODE
If you press this SK, the Mode window lets you modify the present mode (Advanced or not) and the time per division (ms). Click
the OK button to enable your modifications.

FIDIA MDO1680 24-3

24.5 SESSION (EASY MODE = DEFAULT MODE)
If you press the SESSION softkey, a new page appears with the following SKs:
NEW If you press this SK, the current session is erased and a window lets you define the new one.
LOAD If you press this SK, a window lets you select a previous session.
MODIFY If you press this SK, a window lets you see/modify the current session.

Pressing the MODIFY SK, you’ll be prompted for modifying the set of signals. If you accept to modify the set of signals, the
selected data file will be reset.
With the NEW and MODIFY SK there pops up a window (Signals definition) which lets you:
• defining the set of signals.
To add a bit to the list of signals: click on Choose, load a symbols file (extension *.SYM) if not already loaded, select a bit
from the list (or write its name in the edit field), and then select OK.
To remove a signal from the list: select the signal and click on Remove.
• add a Comment
• if necessary, change the name of the Data File where the signal values coming from CNC will be recorded
• select the Sample Time (writing in the white edit box and then clicking the button)
• enable/disable the Trigger . If the Trigger is enabled, you can define its features by pressing the Define button. In that case,
there pops up the Trigger window where you can set the buffer type (Normal / Safe) and enable/disable the Start and the
Stop trigger signal. Then you can choose the enabled signal (Signal ), the post-trigger time (Delta Time [ms]), the threshold
value (Threshold) and the type of comparison (Type).

To enable the modifications, click the OK button. In this case you will be informed about the overwriting (resetting) of the DATA
file if you accepted to modify the set of signals at the beginning.

24.6 SESSION (ADVANCED MODE WITHOUT OPERATIONS)

This method is only available if the OscNoOp parameter (present in the FIDIA.INI file) is at value 1.
If you press the SESSION softkey, a new page appears with the following SKs:
NEW If you press this SK, the current session is erased and a window lets you define the new one.
LOAD If you press this SK, a window lets you select a previous session.
MODIFY If you press this SK, a window lets you see/modify the current session.

Pressing the NEW SK , a window lets you select the desired name for the new session.
Pressing the LOAD SK , a window lets you select the desired session.
Pressing the MODIFY SK, you’ll be prompted for modifying the set of signals. If you accept to modify the set of signals, the
selected data file will be reset.
Then, if you press the NEW or MODIFY SK there pops up a window (Signals advanced) which lets you:
• defining the set of signals.
To add a bit to the list of signals: select the type of Bit, click on Choose, load a symbols file (extension *.SYM) if not already
loaded, select the bit from the list (or write its name in the edit field), and then select OK.
To add a parameter to the list of signals: select the type of Parameter, click on Choose, sselect the parameter name from
the list (for tabular parameters, also select the variable in the secondary list), and then select OK.
To add a memory area to the list of signals: select the type of Memory, click on Choose, enter the name and characteristics
of the area. To enter the name, click on Search, load a symbols file (extension *.SYM) if not already loaded, select the area
from the list (or write its name in the edit field), then select OK and OK.
To remove a signal from the list: select the signal and click on Remove.
• To modify the properties of a signal in the list: select the signal and click on Modify; a window is opened that allows for
modification of the display status (enabled/disabled), the offset, the scale and the colour of the path.
• add a Comment
• if necessary, change the name of the Data File where the signal values coming from CNC are recorded
• select the Sample Time (writing in the white edit box and then clicking the button)
• enable/disable the Trigger . If the Trigger is enabled, you can define its features by pressing the Define button. In that case,
there pops up the Trigger window where you can set the buffer type (Normal / Safe) and enable/disable the Start and the
Stop trigger signal. Then you can choose the enabled signal (Signal ), the post-trigger time (Delta Time [ms]), the threshold
value (Threshold) and the type of comparison (Type).
• select the Maximum Time (hh mm ss) of recording
• enable/disable the Overlap condition

24-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

To enable the modifications, click the Save or Save as... button in the Signals advanced window. In this case you will be
informed about the overwriting (resetting) of the DATA file if you accepted to modify the set of signals at the beginning.

24.7 SESSION (ADVANCED MODE WITH OPERATIONS)

This method is available only if the OscNoOp parameter (presente in the FIDIA.INI file) has the value zero.
If you press the SESSION softkey, a new page appears with the following SKs:
NEW If you press this SK, the current session is erased and a window lets you define the new one.
LOAD If you press this SK, a window lets you select a previous session.
MODIFY If you press this SK, a window lets you see/modify the current session.

Pressing the NEW SK , a window lets you select the desired name for the new session.
Pressing the LOAD SK , a window lets you select the desired session.
Pressing the MODIFY SK, you’ll be prompted for modifying the set of signals. If you accept to modify the set of signals, the
selected data file will be reset.
Then, if you press the NEW or MODIFY SK there pops up a window (Tracks definition) which lets you:
• defining the set of signals. Bear in mind that the signals may also be defined at a later date when the set of path outlines is
defined. To add a bit to the list of signals: select the type of Bit, click on Choose, load a symbols file (extension *.SYM) if not
already loaded, select the bit from the list (or write its name in the edit field), and then select OK. To add a parameter to the
list of signals: select the type of Parameter, click on Choose, sselect the parameter name from the list (for tabular
parameters, also select the variable in the secondary list), and then select OK. To add a memory area to the list of signals:
select the type of Memory, click on Choose, enter the name and characteristics of the area. To enter the name, click on
Search, load a symbols file (extension *.SYM) if not already loaded, select the area from the list (or write its name in the edit
field), then select OK and OK. To remove a signal from the list: select the signal and click on Remove.
• add a Comment
• if necessary, change the name of the Data File where the signal values coming from CNC are recorded
• select the Sample Time (writing in the white edit box and then clicking the button)
• enable/disable the Trigger . If the Trigger is enabled, you can define its features by pressing the Define button. In that case,
there pops up the Trigger window where you can set the buffer type (Normal / Safe) and enable/disable the Start and the
Stop trigger signal. Then you can choose the enabled signal (Signal ), the post-trigger time (Delta Time [ms]), the threshold
value (Threshold) and the type of comparison (Type).
• select the Maximum Time (hh mm ss) of recording
• enable/disable the Overlap condition
• define the Tracks set (clicking Add or selecting the Track and clicking Remove/Modify). If you click Add or Modify there pops
up a window (Current track) where you can:
• define the name of the current track
• define Offset and Value/Division
• define the Colour
• enable/disable the display of the track
• define the operation. Clicking the Operation button pops up a window (Operation) where you can build algebraic
expression :
• entering signals belonging to the Signals set (double clicking it)
• entering new signals (after selecting the Type and clicking Insert New Signal)
• entering numerical operands
• entering parentheses and the following operators:
+ addition (low priority)
- subtraction (low priority)
* multiplication (high priority)
/ division (high priority)
^ exponentiation (high priority)
• removing until the last entered signal
• deciding if to derive it (the expression) or not through the Special check box Deriv.

To enable the modifications, click the OK button in the Operation and Current track windows, while in the Tracks definition you
have to click the Save or Save as... button. In this case you will be informed about the overwriting (resetting) of the DATA file if
you accepted to modify the set of signals at the beginning.

FIDIA MDO1680 24-5

24.8 RECORD
If you press this SK, a new page appears with the following SKs:
• START: If you press this SK, the oscilloscope starts recording when the Start enabled trigger signal satisfies the trigger
conditions. If the Start trigger signal is not enabled, the oscilloscope starts recording immediately. You can see the enabled
tracks on the display. On the right end side of the screen you can read the values of the tracks at the left (green) and right
(red) sides of the display, and you can modify the track features (clicking the button with the track name). By doing so, the
track features like Offset, Value/Division, Colour... are modified temporarely (they are not saved).
• STOP: If you press this SK, the oscilloscope stops recording. It also stops recording when the Stop enabled trigger signal
satisfies the trigger conditions.
• PAUSE: If you press this SK, the CNC pauses recording until you press this SK again to restart recording.
• MORE TRACKS: If you press this SK, on the right end side you can see more button tracks if more then four tracks were
defined.

You may exit/return to the oscilloscope section without stopping the recording execution. While the recording is on, you cannot:
• modify the current session (through the Session SK) while recording.
• access the Play Back section while recording.
• access the Write File section while recording.

24.9 PLAY BACK

You can play back if you have loaded a session.
If you press this SK, the User Interface starts displaying the previously recorded file of the current session and a new page with
the following SKs:
• RESTART: If you press this SK, the User Interface starts displaying the recorded file of the current session. On the right end
side of the screen you can read the values of the Value/Division (D:) and Offset (O:), and you can modify the track features
(clicking the button with the track name). In this way the track features like Offset, Value/Division, Colour... are modified
temporarely (they are not saved).
• PAUSE: If you press this SK, the User Interface pauses or continues displaying (depending on the present condition that
you can see on the Current Status window)
• SLIDE: If you press this SK, the User Interface pauses displaying, the Slider at the bottom is enabled and you enter a page
with the following SKs:
• <: If you press this SK, the tracks are pulled from right to left of one sample (if possible). You get the same effect by
pressing the key on the keyboard.
• <<: If you press this SK, the tracks are pulled from right to left of 2/3 of the display (if possible). You get the same effect
by pressing the ALT + keys on the keyboard.
• >>: If you press this SK, the tracks are pushed from left to right of 2/3 of the display (if possible). You get the same
effect by pressing the ALT + keys on the keyboard.
• >: If you press this SK, the tracks are pushed from left to right of one sample (if possible). You get the same effect by
pressing the key on the keyboard.
• MORE TRACKS: If you press this SK, on the right end side you can see more button tracks if more then four tracks
were defined.
You can also move the track data back and forth by acting on the Slider. If you press Home or End key on the keyboard,
you reach the end or the beginning of the recording.
• ZOOM: If you press this SK, the User Interface pauses displaying, two vertical cursors appear (the left one is green and the
right one is red) and you can read the time between the cursors in the Dt parameter of the Current Status window. You
enter a page with the following SKs:
• FIRST <- : If you press this SK, the left cursor is moved from right to left by one sample. You get the same effect by
pressing the key on the keyboard.
• FIRST -> : If you press this SK, the left cursor is moved from left to right by one sample. You get the same effect by
pressing the key on the keyboard.
• SECOND <- : If you press this SK, the right cursor is moved from right to left by one sample. You get the same effect by
pressing the ALT + keys on the keyboard.
• SECOND -> : If you press this SK, the right cursor is moved from left to right by one sample. You get the same effect by
pressing the ALT + keys on the keyboard.
• DO ZOOM : If you press this SK, the zoom is done over the interval between the cursors.
• UNDO : If you press this SK, the initial condition is brought back.
• MORE TRACKS: If you press this SK, on the right end side you can see more button tracks if more then four tracks
were defined.

You can also move your cursors of a greater step (1/10 of the width of the screen) using the keyboard:

24-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

 ALT +
↑ or Page-Up Left Cursor from Right to Left Right Cursor from Right to Left
↓ or Page-Down Left Cursor from Left to Right Right Cursor from Left to Right

• MORE TRACKS: If you press this SK, on the right end side you can see more button tracks if more then four tracks were
defined.
• TIME DIVISION: If you press this SK, there pops up a window (Oscilloscope Parameters) where you can change the value
of the time per division (ms).

24.10 WRITE FILE (ASCII OUTPUT)

It is possible to save the data files in an ASCII format to allow further processing with external tools.
If you press this SK, the User Interface writes the previously recorded file of the current session in the ASCII format into a file
which has the same name of the data file but .txt extension.

24.10.1 RECORDING AN ISO FILE IN XYZH FORMAT

When the oscilloscope records four quantities (typically, the real XYZ axis values and a fourth parameter that might be the real
axis feed, acceleration, etc.), an ISO format file is automatically generated containing a sequence of XYZH blocks. The file can
be loaded into the Graphics Page, where the XYZ values will be interpreted as axis values and the H value (i.e. the fourth
parameter) will determine the colour of the display.
Before generating the file, the CNC displays a dialogue window containing the scale factors that are applied to the sample
values in order to obtain the values to be inserted in the file. For axis values, the typical value is 0.0001 since it enables the
sample positions (expressed in ten thousandths of a millimetre) to be converted into part-program values (expressed in mm with
the decimal point). The user can modify the proposed values.

Displaying the generated file

The colour of the path depends on the value of the fourth quantity recorded (H):
• where the H value is smaller than the “lower threshold”, the path is shown in pale grey (it is not highlighted with colours);
• where the H value exceeds the “upper threshold”, the path is highlighted in red;
• for values between the lower threshold and the upper threshold, the path is highlighted using a scale of colours ranging from
dark green to orange;
• pressing the COLOR CODE soft key displays a table showing the various colours and the exact corresponding values of H.

Procedure:
• On the graphics page, press the ERROR LEVEL horizontal soft key; a dialogue window is opened.
• In the Error Source area, select the 4th Parameter algorithm.
• In the 4th Parameter area, enter the threshold values (upper and lower thresholds).

24.11 EXAMPLES

24.11.1 NOT ADVANCED MODE

1. Enter the Oscilloscope section from Service.
2. Press the MODE SK: in the Mode window check that the Mode is not Advanced. Set 100 in the Time/Division edit box. Click
OK.
3. Press SESSION and then NEW . Press Choose, select a .sym file if it is not open, write UDLST in the Symbols window and
click OK. Press Choose, select a .sym file if it is not open, write IDPSA in the Symbols window and click OK. Click OK
again. Exit the Session section.
4. Press RECORD and then START. Test the PAUSE SK. Press STOP. Exit the Record section.
5. Press PLAY BACK. Wait a few seconds.
6. Press SLIDE. Test < , >, >> <<. Exit sliding.
7. Press ZOOM. Move cursors. Test DO ZOOM and UNDO. Exit zooming.
8. Press PAUSE. The display starts again. Exit Playing Back.

24.11.2 ADVANCED MODE (WITHOUT OPERATIONS)

1. Enter the Oscilloscope section from Service.
2. Press the MODE SK: in the Mode window check that the Mode is Advanced. Set 100 in the Time/Division edit box. Click
OK.

FIDIA MDO1680 24-7

3. Press SESSION and then NEW. Call osc1.ses the new session.Select the Bit type, press Choose, select a .sym file if it is
not open, write IDPST in the Symbols window and click OK. Select the Bit type, press Choose, select a .sym file if it is not
open, write IDPSA in the Symbols window and click OK. Select the Parameter type, press Choose, select POSITION XM
(expressed in tenth of micron) in the Parameters window and click OK. Select POSITION XM click Modify and set Value/Div
to 50000. You can activate the trigger and click the Define button in order to select IDPSA as the start signal (on the positive
slope over the 0.5 threshold with a delay of –20ms) and IDPST as the stop signal (on the positive slope over the 0.5
threshold with a delay of 20ms). Click OK. You can select/deselect the Overlap option and set a Maximum Recording Time.
Save. Exit the Session section.
4. Press RECORD and then START. Then press the START CNC pushbutton and after a few seconds the STOP CNC
pushbutton. Exit the Record section.
5. Press PLAY BACK. Wait a few seconds. You should see the trigger events as two vertical lines moving horizzontally on the
screen.
6. Press SLIDE. Test < , >, >> <<. Exit sliding.
7. Press ZOOM. Move cursors. Test DO ZOOM and UNDO. Exit zooming.
8. Press PAUSE. The display starts again. Exit Playing Back.

24.11.3 ADVANCED MODE (WITH OPERATIONS)

1. Enter the Oscilloscope section from Service.
2. Press the MODE SK: in the Mode window check that the Mode is Advanced. Set 100 in the Time/Division edit box. Click
OK.
3. Press SESSION and then NEW. Call osc1.ses the new session. Press Add in the track group. Click operation. Select the Bit
type, press Insert New Signal, select a .sym file if it is not open, write IDPST in the Symbols window and click OK, OK, OK.
Press Add in the track group. Click operation. Select the Bit type, press Insert New Signal, select a .sym file if it is not open,
write IDPSA in the Symbols window and click OK, OK, OK.
Press Add in the track group. Set Value/Div to 50000. Click operation. Select the Parameter type, press Insert New Signal,
select POSITION XM (expressed in tenth of micron) in the Parameters window and click OK, OK, OK. Press Add in the
track group. Set Value/Div to 50000. Click operation. Select the Parameter type, press Insert New Signal, select POSITION
YM (expressed in tenth of micron) in the Parameters window and click OK, OK, OK.
Press Add in the track group. Set Value/Div to 200. Click operation. Insert an open parenthesis “(“, double click the
POSITION XM signal, click the “^” operator , insert the numerical operand 2 (typing it and clicking the Ins button), click the
“+” operator, double click the POSITION YM signal, click the “^” operator , insert the numerical operand 2 (typing it and
clicking the Ins button), insert a closed parenthesis “)”, click the “^” operator, insert the numerical operand 0.5, click the “-“
operator and insert the numerical operand 100000. You should obtain:
(POSITION XM^2+POSITION YM^2)^0.5-100000
Then click OK, OK.
You can activate the trigger and click the Define button in order to select IDPSA as the start signal (on the positive slope
over the 0.5 threshold) and IDPST as the stop signal (on the positive slope over the 0.5 threshold). Click OK. You can
select/deselect the Overlap option and set a Maximum Recording Time. Save. Exit the Session section.
4. Press RECORD and then START. Then leave the Oscilloscope environment, execute an ERCI test with a theoretical radius
equal to 10mm and press the STOP CNC pushbutton when the test ends. Enter again the Oscilloscope environment and
verify that the recording has already stopped (you do not need to press STOP in this case).
5. Press PLAY BACK. Wait a few seconds now you can see the error during the ERCI test (expressed in tenth of micron).
6. Press SLIDE. Test < , >, >> <<. Exit sliding.
7. Press ZOOM. Move cursors. Test DO ZOOM and UNDO. Exit zooming.
8. Press PAUSE. The display starts again. Exit Playing Back.

24-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

24.12 FLOW CHART

24.13 CUSTOMIZATION
1. If you want to change the refresh time you must modify the value of the OscFlashRefresh parameter (ms) in the FIDIA.INI
(WS section), but you are strongly recommended not to go under 100 not to reach the 100% of CPU Usage (from Task
Manager\Performance you can verify it) while displaying.
2. If you do not want to see the side values during recording you must set to 0 the OscCursorsOnLine parameter in the
FIDIA.INI (WS section).
3. If you want to enable the Operations Mode (for Advanced Mode only) you must set to 0 the OscNoOp parameter in the
FIDIA.INI (WS section)

FIDIA MDO1680 24-9

24-10 MDO1680 FIDIA
25 EXTENDED TOOL TABLE

25.1 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION – INTRODUCTION

The application handling the extended tool table is installed when installing the WS. When the NC is installed, an initial tool table
is automatically created based on the NC configuration.
Subsequently the installer can change the tool table by launching a configuration script as explained hereunder (Ex: row and
columns can be added or deleted etc.). It is also possible to delete the whole table and create a completely different one.

Example:
a script can be structured in the following way:
• $EXPORT command to export any possible table
• $INIT command to delete the previous table
• several commands of $ADDCOLUMN and $ADDROWS to create a new table
• $PATCHKEY commands to structure the table

Further tailor-made solutions can be created by changing by means of an editor the ExtToolTableConfig.xml and
ExtToolTableTZeroPage.xml files are executed each time the table is run. Such operations are described hereunder.

25.2 CNC PARAMETERS FOR THE EXTENDED TOOL TABLE

Parameters to be set in the INIPAR.SET file:

MAGTOOLS
Measuring Unit: whole number
Default value: 100
Number of tools that can be placed in the tool magazine (overall number of positions available). The search for the tool is not
made over the entire table but only in the number of lines defined by MAGTOOLS. Used when the tool change is managed by
the CNC (e.g. systems without a tool change PLC).

NEWTPRGMODE
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Default value: OF
Enables/disables a new Tool Life programming mode in which the tool family and name are programmed (without the use of
brackets) for the exclusive use of the PLC.

Debug parameters:

TTCNCBUSY
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
Monitors whether the CNC communication channel to the tool table is in use or not. This is a read-only parameter.
The communication channel can be reset by means of a RESET PLC operation.

Parameters used by the PLC:

These parameters are set by the CNC when the tool family and name are programmed so as to be used exclusively by the PLC.

MDTNAMEPRG
Allowed values: [ON; OF]
PLC flag: if ON, this indicates that a tool name has been programmed by the T function.

TNAMEPRG
Name of the tool programmed by the T function.
This is a string format parameter (max. length 20 characters).

MDTFAMILYPRG
Allowed values: [ON; OF]

FIDIA MDO1680 25-1

PLC flag: if ON, this indicates that a tool family name has been programmed by the T function.

TFAMILYPRG
Name of the tool family programmed by the T function.
This is a string format parameter (max. length 20 characters).

25.3 TOOL TABLE MAINTENANCE

The application related to the tool table can be installed in two different ways:
• User mode: to use the table on the NC
• Maint. mode: for installation and maintenance of the tool table.

The user mode is described in the section related to use, this section will describe the maint mode.

How to enter the maint. mode

Run the ExtToolTable.exe application by inserting one or more of the following parameters in the command line. Should the
tool table already be open in the user mode, it will be necessary to close it (by closing WS).

/c "command"
It executes a command among the ones hereunder described.

/s "filename.ext"
It executes a configuration script, i.e.: a text file containing a set of commands (one per row) to be executed in sequence.
Scripts enable to configure the tool table according to the NC configuration and the client’s requests. The extension of such files
is generally .TTS (Tool Table Script).

/nocnc
The tool table works in the same user mode way, but without being connected to the NC (stand-alone mode). To close the
application you can use the Alt-F4 buttons.

Instead of writing /c /s /nocnc you can write -c -s -nocnc (being equivalent).

Should there be no parameter on the command row, the table shall work in the classic user mode, i.e.: connected to the NC.

25.3.1 COMMANDS
Commands that can be specified with the /c o parameter inserted in the configuration script are:

$HELP
It displays the help window describing the foreseen commando.

$INIT
Start of the tool table.
Should there be a table created earlier this will be deleted (all data will be cancelled) and a new table with just the 3 main
columns (UID, TTYP and TPOS) with no rows will be created.

$ADDCOLUMN <string columnName> <string columnType>

It adds a column. It is necessary to specify the NC parameter corresponding to the column and data format; main available
formats are:
Integer number
Float decimal number
Varchar string

Should the column already be in use by the NC it is essential that name and format are the same of those requested by the
relevant NC parameter.
All cells of the new column will have default values: a 0 if the format is numerical, an empty string if the format is a string.

$REMOVECOLUMN <string columnName>

It deletes specified columns. All data contained in such columns will be deleted.

$ADDROWS <int rowsToAdd>

It adds n rows at the bottom of the table. Each cell of the new rows will have default values: 0 for numerical fields, an empty
string for string format fields.

$DELETEROWS <int rowsToDelete>

It deletes n rows starting from the bottom of the table. All data contained in such rows will be deleted.

25-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

$SQL <string sqlCommand>
It executes a query that has to be written in the SQL language.

$EXPORT <int startUID> <int endUID> <string fileName.ext>

It exports part of the tool table creating a file in the CSV format, i.e.: an electronic sheet as a text file, where all records are
separated by a new row, fields are separated by a comma and the first row contains the column heading. The table will not be
modified. The followings needs to be specified:
• The first and last row UID number. Export includes both the first and last row.
• File name + extension to be created; the CSV extension is generally used.

$IMPORT <int startUID> <string fileName.ext>

It imports a file in the CSV format. File values are copied on the tool table replacing previous values starting from the specified
row. Following have to be entered:
• UID number of table row where the insertion begins
• Name (and extension) of the file to be imported.

It is particularly useful to import tool table form an external database. Shouldn’t here be enough rows or columns on the tool
table to complete the operation, a message is displayed. If you don’t need to import a columns just edit the CSV file’s first row
(heading) by adding the “!” type before the column not to be included.
Ex. ! TYPE means ignore TYPE column.

$PATCHKEY <string keyword> set <string data>

The specified data will be written in the ExtToolTableConfig.xml configuration file, where the specified key word is. The previous
key word data will be deleted as it is replaced by new data.
If no data is specified, the keyword assumes a nil string and is eliminated from the configuration file.

$PATCHKEY <string keyword> add <string data>

The specified data will be written in the ExtToolTableConfig.xml configuration file where the specified key work is. The previous
key word data will be stored because new data is added to the existing string (should the added data be identical it will not be
added being superfluous). It is useful as it helps to add column definitions corresponding to the following key words:
ColumnsUserReadOnly, ColumnsShowedAsTime, ColumnsShowedAsBool, ColumnsLabelAlias.

$PATCHKEY <string keyword> remove <string data>

In the ExtToolTableConfig.xml configuration file, at the keyword specified the corresponding data is deleted. If the data to be
deleted is not found at the keyword, no action is taken.

$SHOWWINDOW show
Shows the batch executor window. This is a Log window that displays messages relating to tool table operations. By default the
window is displayed.

$SHOWWINDOW hide
Hides the batch executor window.

Command examples
exttooltable -c "$HELP"
exttooltable -c "$INIT"
exttooltable -c "$ADDCOLUMN TRADIUS float"
exttooltable -c "$REMOVECOLUMN TDIAM"
exttooltable -c "$ADDROWS 200"
exttooltable -c "$DELETEROWS 50"
exttooltable -c "$EXPORT 150 700 table01.csv"
exttooltable -c "$IMPORT 500 table02.csv"
exttooltable -c "$PATCHKEY Language set English"
exttooltable -c "$PATCHKEY DsnPassword set"
exttooltable -c "$PATCHKEY ColumnsLabelAlias add 'TTYP'='TOOL TYPE'"
exttooltable -c "$PATCHKEY ColumnsShowedAsBool remove 'BOOLEAN'"
exttooltable -c "$SHOWWINDOW show"
exttooltable -c "$SHOWWINDOW hide"

25.4 CONFIGURATION
Each time the tool table is run the ExtToolTableConfig.xml file is launched, generally in C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM: it contains a set of
data some of which may be changed to customize the tool table. Data may be changed in the following way:
• By means of $PATCHKEY command, generally inserted within a script.
• By modifying the file by means of an editor. Should the file be edited, the data is on the right of the equal sign and should be
inserted in double inverted commas.

Hereunder is an example of configuration file.

FIDIA MDO1680 25-3

<ExtToolTableConfig>
<KeyList_ConfigKeys
Language="Italiano"
DsnFile="FILEDSN=c:\\fidia\\custom\\FidiaToolTableDSN.dsn"
DsnLogin=""
DsnPassword=""
DsnTableName="fidiatooltable"
IdColumnLabel="UID"
SocketServerBindAddress="2050"
ColumnsUserReadOnly="'TQUOM1' 'TQUOM2'"
ColumnsShowedAsTime="'TLIFE'"
ColumnsShowedAsBool="'BOOLEAN'"
ColumnsLabelAlias="'TTYP'='TOOL TYPE' 'TPOS'='TOOL POSITION'
'TLIFE'='TOOL LIFE'
'BOOLEAN'='BOOL'"
/>
</ExtToolTableConfig>

Normally following data are not to be changed

DsnFile
Database description file.

DsnLogin
Database login access

DsnPassword
Database access password

DsnTableName
Table name

SocketServerBindAddress
TCP entry on tuned “command server”

Description of the files that can be configured:

Language
Language in which the writings are displayed (on soft-keys, windows, etc).
Set one of the languages defined with the marker <KeyList_ within the ExtToolTableLng.xml configuration file generally located
in C:\FIDIA\WS. The non-defined writings within the <KeyList area of the chosen language will be displayed in English.

IdColumnLabel
Name of the column containing the tool identifier, i.e. a numerical value identifying the tool. The column must be in integer
format. When a T function is programmed specifying the tool number (e.g. when a tool change is commanded by an M06Tnn
type block), the system looks for the number in the column defined by “IdColumnLabel” and selects the corresponding tool.
Note that the column used also depends on the value of the TCTYPE parameter:

TCTYPE value: Description:

Traditional tool management. The tool identifier is in the column defined by
2 “IdColumnLabel”.
Set TCTYPE=2 also with the Tool Life Option.
1 The tool identifier is in the TNUMBER column.
Automatic tool change with random magazine (management of TPOS, TSIZE,
0 etc. columns).
The tool identifier is in the column defined by “IdColumnLabel”.

ColumnsUserReadOnly
List of the “read only” columns and which can be modified only by the PLC and which the user can only read. In order to not to
enable the user to change values in the column, it is necessary to enable the read only option.

Note: ColumnsUserReadOnly, ColumnsShowedAsTime, ColumnsShowedAsBool definition syntax requires that each column
name is inserted in single inverted commas, between the two column definitions there must be a space (instead of pressing the
space bar the new line key may be entered).

25-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

ColumnsShowedAsTime
List of the columns with values displayed in “time” format, i.e: hh:mm:ss (hours, minutes, seconds).
Columns must in the integer or float format. They are normally in the integer format so that internally the value is expressed in
seconds. Should they be in the float format the decimal part is ignored. A typical column in time format expresses tool life time
(Tool life). The user may insert values in the following formats:
s one number expressing seconds
m:s two numbers separated by a “:” where “m” expresses minutes and “s” expresses seconds.
h:m:s three numbers expressing hours, minutes and seconds, each separated by a “:”

The numbers expressing minutes and seconds are displayed with two figures from 00 to 5; while, when inserting, any number is
accepted. Here are some examples:
• Should 100:100 be inserted, 01:41:40 will be displayed.
• Should 100 be inserted, 00:01:40 will be displayed.

ColumnsShowedAsBool
List of columns with values displayed in the boolean format, so that each cell can have two status: ON and OF. Should the user
insert a data different from ON and OF, OF will be considered. Columns must be in the integer format, so that the cells will
internally have 1 or 0 value and respectively displayed as ON and OF.
ColumnsLabelAlias
It defines any possibile column alias. On the displayed table heading, the defined alias replace names of related NC
parameters. For the columns with no alias the parameter name will be displayed. Within the window, that enables to customize
the active view, an alias will appear together with the parameter’s name (the latter in brackets) for each column. For all other
cases (Ex: when a query is programmed), the parameter and not the alias is used.
Syntax for each column:
'parameter name'='column alias'
names and alias will have to be in single inverted commas; the alias can have spaces.
Between two column definitions there must be a space (space may be replaced by pressing the new line key).

GUI_GridCellEditPyHandlers
PythonModules
These keywords are described in the Section EXECUTING SCRIPT IN PYTHON.

25.5 PAGE CONFIGURATION FOR TOOL IN USE

The page contains a set of objects (graphic and alphanumerical) arranged on automatic layouts (rows, columns and grids) A
layout may contain objects and/or other layouts. Therefore layouts may be integrated in order to create various compositions
(Ex: a row may contain only objects, or may contain objects, columns or other rows). Layout are defined as “ automatic”
because large part of data for the arrangement of objects on video (position, alignment, column width, row height, etc.) are
calculated automatically. Several kinds of layouts are available:

Row
It contains a set of elements (objects and/or layouts), arranged from left to right and placed on the base row. Its height can be
customized according the highest element.

Column
It contains a set of elements (objects and/or layouts), arranged from top to bottom and aligned to the column’s left margin. Its
width can be customized according the widest element.

Grid
It consists of rows and columns; number of columns is defined while the number of rows depends on the number of elements
(objects and/or layouts) contained in the grid. The elements of each row are arranged from left to right (one for each column);
when arriving on the last column a new row is started. Height of rows and width of columns depend on the elements’ sizes
contained in the grid.
Following kind of objects are available:

Parameter panel
It is a panel containing one or more NC parameters, arranged on one or more columns:
• Should the panel have only one column, parameters will be arranged from top to bottom.
• Should the panel have more than one column, parameters will be arranged on a row from left to right (one for each column);
arriving at the last column a new line is started.

Each parameter consists in:

• A writing, which is the NC parameter’s name or an alias.
• A field that can be edited containing the value
• An historical archive, i.e.: a list of values which have been assigned to the parameter arranged in chronological order

FIDIA MDO1680 25-5

Dynamic image
It is an image which changes according to the NC parameter.

The tool page being used is configured by the means of ExtToolTableTZeroPage.xml. The file is generally located in
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM and is executed each time the tool table is launched. The following markers are within the file:

<Layout Label="string">
...........
</Layout>

Markers to be inserted, respectively, at the beginning and the end of the configuration file. They define the general layout of the
page. Among these markers row, column and grid markers are inserted. The <Layout> marker has the following attributes:
• Label: page name (writing is displayed on the label bar).

<Row>
...........
</Row>
They define a row.
Note: as already mentioned in the introduction, the <Row>, <Column> and <Grid> sections can be defined as objects and/or
layouts (other row, column and grid markers), with several levels of integration.

<Column>
...........
</Column>
They define a column

<Grid Columns=n>
...........
</Grid>
They define a grid. The <Grid> marker has the following attributes:
• Columns: number of columns on the grid.

<ComboBlock ...attributes...>
...........
</ComboBlock>
They define a parameter panel. Among these markers the <Item> markers are inserted to define the panel parameters. The
<ComboBlock> marker has the following attributes:
• Label: panel name (the writing displayed on the heading of that panel).
• FieldLength: the width of each field (the number of figures it can contain).
• FontSize: Digit height expressed in Points).
• GroundColor: Panel background color, within RGB in hexadecimal notation. (RGB stands for red, green, blu).
Example: GroundColor="0xFFFF00" sets the yellow color, composed by: red=255 (FF hexadecimal), green=255 (FF
hexadecimal), blue=0.
• Columns: number of columns on the panel.

<Item ...attributes... />

It displays on video a NC parameter. The marker has the following attributes:
• Label: the writing displayed on the left of the field. Should this attribute be omitted, the NC parameter is displayed.
• Parameter: name of the NC parameter value of which is inserted in the field.
• SubParameter: should the NC parameter be tabular the desired variable must be specified.
• ReadOnly: if this attribute is omitted, the CNC parameter value can be modified by the user; if ReadOnly=Yes is entered,
the CNC parameter is read-only (it cannot be modified).

<ImageBlock ...attributes... />

It displays a dynamic image which changes according to the value of an NC parameter. The marker has the following attributes:
• Label: name of image (writing is displayed on the image heading).
• Parameter: NC parameter name indexing the image.
• SubParameter: should the NC parameter be tabular, the desired variable must be specified.
• BmpNameFormat: criteria used to form the bitmap file name to be displayed. Write the file name inserting %s instead of
the variable digits: digits read by the NC parameters will automatically be inserted replacing %s digits.
Esempio: if Parameter="TTYP" SubParameter="00" BmpNameFormat="TOOL%s.bmp" the displayed image will change
according to which tool is being used; for tool Type 1 the image displayed will be TOOL1.bmp, for the Type 10 the image
will be TOOL10.bmp, etc.
• DefaultBmp: name of the bitmap file displayed when the required image is missing.

25-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

25.6 EXECUTING SCRIPT IN PYTHON
Executing script in the Python programming language is possible in the following circumstances:
• when the user changes a data item in a table, functions can be automatically executed that test the validity of the data
inserted and, if necessary, modifiy it;
• when the PLC commands the execution of a specific Python function.

The functions to be executed (methods) must be inserted in *.py files (modules) that are generally located in the
C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory.
More than one function may have the same name, provided they are in different files.
Each Python module is loaded and compiled at the start of the tool table. This means that if a script is modified, the CNC
command interface must be restarted in order to reload it.
Fidia has implemented a series of specific methods for managing the tool table. For example, these enable data in the tool
database to be read and modified, messages that will be displayed in the dedicated area to be sent, etc.
To implement or modify these scripts, you should possess the following pre-requisites:
• knowledge of the Python programming language;
• knowledge of the SQL language.

25.6.1 EXECUTING SCRIPT WHEN INSERTING A DATA ITEM

When the user changes a data item in the tool table grid and confirms the modification (e.g. by pressing ENTER), the functions
(methods) declared in the ExtToolTableConfig.xml file with the keyword GUI_GridCellEditPyHandlers are executed in
sequence. The functions are executed in the same order in which they are declared in the keyword. The execution sequence is
interrupted if a function returns "!". You are advised first to declare the functions testing the validity of the data inserted by the
user and then any functions that process this data. In this way, if the data is not valid, the execution sequence is interrupted at
the start and the purposeless execution of the other functions is avoided.

Keyword syntax:
GUI_GridCellEditPyHandlers="PythonFileName.FunctionName .........."

For each function:

• PythonFileName is the name of the file (Python module) containing the function; the file extension is .py and should not be
specified.
• FunctionName is the name of the function.

Example:
GUI_GridCellEditPyHandlers="PyFidiadef.OnCellDataChange PyFidia02.PositionCallback"
When a user changes a data item in the table, the OnCellDataChange function present in the PyFidiadef.py file is called first,
followed by the PositionCallback function in the PyFidia02.py file.

When the function has terminated, depending on the string returned, behaviour is as follows:

return "" (empty string)

the next function is executed.

return "!"
the data item inserted in the table by the user is not considered valid; it is cancelled and the previous data item is restored in the
tool database. Subsequent functions will not be executed.

return ">newvalue" (symbol > followed by a value)

the data item inserted in the table by the user is cancelled and replaced by newvalue in the tool database, then the next function
is executed that can test and process the new value.

25.6.2 PLC COMMAND FOR EXECUTING SCRIPT

To call a Python function from the PLC, give the following command using the Function Block TOOL_TABLE_SQL:
PYEXEC:PythonFileName:FunctionName:Arguments

where:
• PythonFileName is the name of the file (Python module) containing the function; the file extension is .py and should not be
specified.
• FunctionName is the name of the function.
• Arguments are the parameters passed to the function, separated by a comma; they can be values or strings, strings must
be enclosed between double inverted commas.

FIDIA MDO1680 25-7

The response to the above command is:
PYEXEC:<string>

where <string> is the string returned by the function.

The PLC can read the response in the RETSTRING variable of the above Function Block.

Example:
PYEXEC:MyTest00:DummyFunction:1, 2, 3, "Hi!"
executes the DummyFunction function present in the MyTest00.py file, passing as arguments the values 1, 2, 3 and the string
"Hi!"
Presuming the function returns "OK", the response to the command will be PYEXEC:OK

Each Python module used must be declared in the ExtToolTableConfig.xml file with the keyword PythonModules, so that it is
loaded and compiled at the start of the tool table.

Example:
PythonModules="MyTest00 MyTest01"
The MyTest00.py and MyTest01.py files are compiled at the start; the PLC may only call the functions present in these files.

25.7 A CONCISE LIST OF FEATURES

Here is a concise list of features related to installation, maintenance and configuration of the extended tool table:
• The number of rows and number, format and meaning of columns, can be set.
• A language of commands is available (enabling to add/dolete rows/columns, etc).
• Configuration scripts may be used, i.e.: text file containing commands to be executed in sequence.
• Part of the tool table may be exported by creating a file in CSV format and a file may be imported in the CSV format.
• A ExtToolTableConfig.xml file is available for the tool table configuration.
• Choice of language in which writings are displayed.
• Choice of column containing tool identifier.
• Read only columns are available.
• Columns with values displayed in hh:mm:ss (hours, minutes, seconds) are available.
• Columns with boolean values displayed are available, i.e. ON and OF..
• Alias can be assigned to columns.

Page for the tool in use:

• It can be completely configured by means of the ExtToolTableTZeroPage.xml file.
• It contains a set of objects arranged on automatic layouts (rows, columns and grids); layouts can be integrated.
• NC parameter panels can be displayed together with “dynamic” images which change according to the NC parameter
values.

25-8 MDO1680 FIDIA

26 UPS and FIDIASHUTDOWN

26.1 INSTALLING THE UPS SOFTWARE

The UPS is managed in the Windows environment by a service called Fidia UPS.
The following command lines are provided for the installation and diagnostics of the service:

Installing the service:

fidia_ups.exe -install

Removing the service:

fidia_ups.exe -remove

Manual start-up of the service:

sc start fidia_ups

Manual stopping of the service:

sc stop fidia_ups

Service status query:

sc query fidia_ups

Notes:
Once it has been installed, the service is started automatically at system start-up. The manual start, stop and status query
commands are provided solely for diagnostic purposes. The same operations can be performed using a window that is
accessed as follows: open the Windows Control Panel, then Administrative Tools and Services.

Recording events:
The service records events concerning the UPS (malfunctioning, power failures, communication problems, etc.) and displays
them in a window that is accessed as follows: open the Windows Control Panel, then Administrative Tools and Event Viewer.

Configuration of the service:

Add the following section to the FIDIA.INI file (the values can be customized):

[UPS]
COMM_DEVICE=COM1
ACTION_TIME=2
ACTION=c:\fidia\ws\FidiaShutDown -t 30 -m "UPS SHUTDOWN"
UPS_POWEROFF_TIME=20

Description of the parameters:

• COMM_DEVICE: name of the device for serial communication between the PC and the UPS (COM1, COM2, etc.).
• ACTION_TIME: if there is no power for an amount of time greater than this value (expressed in seconds), the service starts
the shut-down procedure.
• ACTION: application to be performed when ACTION_TIME terminates; generally, the FidiaShutDown application (described
below) is executed.
• UPS_POWEROFF_TIME: once this time (expressed in tenths of minutes) has elapsed, the UPS is powered off; if the value
0 is set (not recommended), the UPS is never powered off.

Description of the service:

The service monitors the UPS status every second; if there is no power for an amount of time greater than ACTION_TIME, the
service takes the following action:
• it performs the application defined by ACTION (typically FidiaShutDown);
• at the same time, it starts the timer that will power off the UPS after the UPS_POWEROFF_TIME time.

When the service is started, any previously programmed UPS power-off is cancelled.

FIDIA MDO1680 26-9

26.2 FidiaShutDown APPLICATION
This performs the PC shut-down procedure.

Command line syntax:

FidiaShutDown -t countdown -m "message"

Description of the parameters:

• countdown: initial value of the counter, expressed in seconds
• "message": string displayed in the window; it must be placed between double inverted commas.

Generally, FidiaShutDown is started automatically in the following circumstances:

• The UPS device is present and there has been a power failure for a pre-determined time. The installing technician must
insert the above command line in ACTION, in the [UPS] section of the FIDIA.INI file.
• Shut-down of the machine tool in NIGHT mode has been requested. The installing technician need not insert any command
line; the initial value of the counter (expressed in seconds) is defined by the NIGHT_SHUTDOWN_TIME parameter in the
[WS] section of the FIDIA.INI file.

Description of its operation:

When FidiaShutDown is started, an ‘always on top’ window with a counter is shown on the video. The counter starts from a
preset initial value and decreases by one unit each second. When the counter reaches zero, FidiaShutDown performs the
following sequence of operations:
• it closes the WS user interface;
• it requests the closure of any other programs being executed;
• if the programs are not closed, they are closed compulsorily after a few seconds;
• it closes Windows;
• it powers off the PC.

The user can return the counter to its initial value by pressing the ESC key or the "Reset Counter" pushbutton. This feature is
useful when the user needs more time to save documents before power off.

26-10 MDO1680 FIDIA

27 ACCELEROMETER – FidiaVM

27.1 CONFIGURING THE ACCELEROMETER

The FidiaVM application, combined with an accelerometer, monitors spindle vibration. It is configured by means of the
FidiaVM.xml file. This is a file in xml format, located in the installation directory and it is executed at each start-up of the relevant
program. The following markers should be inserted in the file:

<FidiaVM_Configuration>
...........
</FidiaVM_Configuration>
These markers should be inserted at the beginning and end, respectively, of the configuration file.

<WatchDog ...attributes... />

The marker has the following attributes:
• Parameter: name of the full CNC parameter used to set the watchdog.
• SubParameter: if the CNC parameter is tabular, you must specify the variable desired.

When the FidiaVM application is active, this parameter is incremented once per second; when the application is not active, the
parameter is not incremented. In this latter case, the PLC may intervene for safety reasons, for example it can prevent the
machine tool switching to “Automatic” mode.

<Visualization>
...........
</Visualization>
Opening and closing markers for the section defining the thresholds for graphic display by means of gauges and histograms.
The markers <SpindleVelocity> <VibrationVelocity> <VibrationAcceleration> should be inserted in this section.

<SpindleVelocity ...attributes... >

...........
</SpindleVelocity>
These define the thresholds for the spindle rotation speed. The <SpindleVelocity> marker has the following attributes:
• Label: name and unit of measurement for the quantity represented (the wording displayed on the gauge).
• NotchDecimals: number of decimal figures for the threshold values shown on the video.

<VibrationVelocity ...attributes...>
...........
</VibrationVelocity>
These define the thresholds for the spindle vibration speed. The <VibrationVelocity> marker has the following attributes:
• Label: name and unit of measurement for the quantity represented (the wording displayed on the gauge).
• NotchDecimals: number of decimal figures for the threshold values shown on the video.

<VibrationAcceleration ...attributes...>
...........
</VibrationAcceleration>
These define the thresholds for the acceleration of spindle vibration. The <VibrationAcceleration> marker has the following
attributes:
• Label: name and unit of measurement for the quantity represented (the wording displayed on the gauge).
• NotchDecimals: number of decimal figures for the threshold values shown on the video.

<Threshold ...attributes... />

Various <Threshold> markers are inserted in the <SpindleVelocity> <VibrationVelocity> <VibrationAcceleration> sections. Each
marker defines a threshold and has the following attributes:
• Value: threshold value.
• Color: colour of the gauge and histogram bars when the threshold is exceeded. The colour is expressed in the RGB system
in hexadecimal notation (RGB stands for red, green, blue).
Example: Color=FFFF00 sets the colour yellow, which is made up of: red=255 (FF hexadecimal), green=255 (FF
hexadecimal), blue=0.

<Report>
........
</Report>

FIDIA MDO1680 27-1

Opening and closing markers for the section defining the thresholds for the part of the report that can be configured. The
following markers should be inserted in this section <UserSpindleVelocity> <UserVibrationVelocity>
<UserVibrationAcceleration>.

<UserSpindleVelocity>
...........
</UserSpindleVelocity>
These define the thresholds for the spindle rotation speed.

<UserVibrationVelocity>
...........
</UserVibrationVelocity>
These define the thresholds for the spindle vibration speed.

<UserVibrationAcceleration>
...........
</UserVibrationAcceleration>
These define the thresholds for the acceleration of spindle vibration.

<Threshold Value=n />

Various <Threshold> markers are inserted in the <UserSpindleVelocity> <UserVibrationVelocity> <UserVibrationAcceleration>
sections. Each marker defines a threshold and the attribute Value specifies the threshold value.

27.1.1 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

<FidiaVM_Configuration>
<WatchDog Parameter="AUCREG" SubParameter="03" />

<Visualization>
<SpindleVelocity Label="SPINDLE [RPM*1000]" NotchDecimals=0>
<Threshold Value=0.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=5.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=10.0 Color=00F0F0 />
<Threshold Value=15.0 Color=F00000 />
<Threshold Value=20.0 Color=0000F0 />
<Threshold Value=25.0 Color=0000F0 />
<Threshold Value=30.0 Color=0000F0 />
</SpindleVelocity>

<VibrationVelocity Label="VIBR. VEL. [mm/s]" NotchDecimals=1>

<Threshold Value=0.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=5.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=10.0 Color=00F0F0 />
<Threshold Value=15.0 Color=00F0F0 />
<Threshold Value=20.0 Color=0000F0 />
<Threshold Value=35.0 Color=0000F0 />
</VibrationVelocity>

<VibrationAcceleration Label="VIBR. ACCEL. [mm/s^2]" NotchDecimals=1>

<Threshold Value=0.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=5.0 Color=F0F000 />
<Threshold Value=10.0 Color=00F0F0 />
<Threshold Value=15.0 Color=F0F0F0 />
<Threshold Value=20.0 Color=0000F0 />
<Threshold Value=35.0 Color=0000F0 />
</VibrationAcceleration>
</Visualization>

<Report>
<UserSpindleVelocity>
<Threshold Value=10.0 />
<Threshold Value=20.0 />
<Threshold Value=30.0 />
</UserSpindleVelocity>

27-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

 <UserVibrationVelocity>
<Threshold Value=10.0 />
<Threshold Value=15.0 />
<Threshold Value=21.0 />
<Threshold Value=35.0 />
</UserVibrationVelocity>

<UserVibrationAcceleration>
<Threshold Value=1.0 />
<Threshold Value=10.0 />
<Threshold Value=15.0 />
<Threshold Value=20.0 />
<Threshold Value=30.0 />
</UserVibrationAcceleration>
</Report>
</FidiaVM_Configuration>

27.2 SNAPSHOT FILE

Data for the FidiaVM application (reports, messages) are stored in a file called FidiaVMSnapshot, located in the installation
directory. The report is re-loaded at each program start-up, while messages are not re-loaded. The file is encrypted to prevent
the data being modified. If the file is changed or deleted by mistake, a new empty file is created with the same name and the
previous data are lost. The current file is called FidiaVMSnapshot; when the file reaches a certain size, a new empty file is
created with the same name and the previous file is renamed FidiaVMSnapshot.0. Next time, the file .0 is assigned the
extension .1 and so on, up to .7 (the FidiaVMSnapshot.7 file is the oldest, files preceding this file are not retained).

Data can be extracted from a "Snapshot" file. Go to the installation directory and give the command:
fidiavm –e filename
where "filename" is the name with any extension of the "Snapshot" file desired.
Two files are generated that can be consulted by the user:
• filename.log (text format), containing messages (log file)
• filename.html (html format), containing the report.

FIDIA MDO1680 27-3

27-4 MDO1680 FIDIA
28 USER INTERFACE

28.1 CUSTOMIZED SOFT KEYS

Customized soft keys can be created. Their operation must be managed by the PLC programming language supplied by FIDIA.
The following memory bits are provided for PLC management:

MDSKnn
Communicates to PLC the state of the physical pushbutton corresponding to the soft key. It is set to the high level when the
user presses the pushbutton, and to the low level when the pushbutton is not pressed.

MDLKnn
Determines the pressed/released aspect of the soft key on the video. When PLC sets the bit to the high level the soft key
appears as if selected, when the bit is at the low level the soft key appears not to be selected.

Each soft key must correspond to a pair of MDSKnn - MDLKnn bits (where nn is a sequence number between 00 and 99).
Typically the task of PLC is to:
• Read the MDSKnn bit to detect the pressed/released pushbutton state.
• Command operations according to the soft key state.
• Write the MDLKnn bit in order to have a correct display of the soft key state.

The configuration of customized soft keys is saved in the WS32Cust.ini file.

Customization procedure:
• Open access to the SERVICE area.
• Display the page where customized soft keys are to be added.
• Select Custom Keys from the Options menu. A dialogue window appears.

In the dialogue window, proceed as follows:

To add a soft key:

• Define the soft key in the following fields:
• Name: name of soft key.
• Text Line 1 - 2: define the text to be shown on the soft key on the video. This text may be different from "Name". Since the
wording on soft keys can occupy two lines, Text Line 1 defines the string on the first line, and Text Line 2 any string on the
second line.
• Aucol: sequence number of the pair of PLC memory bits corresponding to the soft key. Example: if 02 is selected, the soft
key corresponds to bits MDSK02 and MDLK02.
• Select Add. The soft key is added to the list.
• Select OK. The soft key is added to the video page.

To delete a soft key:

• Select a soft key from the list.
• Select Delete. The soft key is deleted from the list.
• Select OK. The soft key is deleted from the video page.

To modify a soft key:

• Select a soft key from the list.
• Edit the fields.
• Select Modify.
• Select OK.

FIDIA MDO1680 28-1

To change the position of a soft key:
If you wish to change the position of a customized soft key with respect to the other soft keys, proceed as follows:
• Select a soft key from the list.
• Select Up to move it up the list, to the left of the video page.
• Select Down to move it down the list, to the right of the video page.
• Select OK.

28.1.1 VERTICAL CUSTOMIZED SOFT KEY

If the definition "CustomVertKey = string" is inserted in the section [WS] in the file Fidia.ini, a customized vertical soft key will be
inserted upon the SERVICE soft key.
"String" is the text displayed on the soft key. By pressing this soft key a group of horizontal soft keys will be opened. In this
group the installer can insert his own customized soft keys through the menu item "Custom keys".

28.2 CREATING CUSTOMIZED PAGES

Customized video pages can be added to the user interface. The pages must be defined in the ASCII format file termed
CUSTOM.VID that should be present in the C:\FIDIA\CUSTOM directory.
If this file is not in the directory, customized pages are not available.
The language of the CUSTOM.VID file is similar to that of the CONF32.VID file. The basic difference is the availability of the
KAD instruction that has the following format:
KAD KAR_NAME KST_NAME

This instruction adds the soft key with the name KST_NAME to the bottom of the soft key bar named KAR_NAME.
Given that KST_NAME is a new soft key that opens a customized page, adding this soft key to an already existing bar makes it
possible to pass from a standard page to the customized page.
The language required for defining customized video pages is described in the VIDEO CONFIGURATION MANUAL supplied
by FIDIA on request.

28.3 VSKP FIDIA - KEYBOARD SOFTWARE

The new VSKP application allows for a software extension of the physical keyboard: where the system requires it, the operator
has at his disposal an additional software keyboard, achieved by the means of the iPC’s horizontal softkeys and connected to
the NC and PLC by the means of the NC’s whole parameters, for instance the AUCREG tabular parameters.
It is possible to set several software button groups; such groups in the manual are called panels; each panel is located in a
specific video page and it is composed of maximum 8 buttons corresponding to the 8 horizontal softkeys.
Each button has a position (pressed or released) and two attributes (on/off and activated/deactivated). The position depends on
the operation being carried out on the button by the operator and is read by the NC/PLC, while the attributes are set by the PLC
to define the video display of the button.

Note: Meaning, behaviour and aspect of the software buttons change according to each machine and are set by the builder who
is also in charge of preparing the necessary documentation for the user.

28-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

28.3.1 USE
The VSKP application starts off by pressing the appropriate vertical softkey located on the NC’s main page.
There are two ways to display the window, once the application is started:
• In the NC’s interface, press the appropriate vertical softkey.
• Use the ALT+TAB buttons.

The VSKP automatically closes when the NC’s user interface is shut down.

Horizontal Softkeys
Horizontal softkeys are the software buttons that the user can activate in the following ways:
• By pressing the real button located under the softkey.
• By clicking the softkey.

Vertical Softkeys:

CNC
Access to the FIDIA NC user interface, the operation does not terminate the VSKP application.

TABS
It enables to choose data displayed in the box located above the horizontal softkeys. The following modalities are foreseen (to
pass from one modality to the other just press the softkey TABS):
• NC message display, in chronological order (LOG FILE)
• Display of labels with software button panel names; to go to the page featuring the desired panel click on the related label
(or use the NEXT or PREV softkeys). A coloured stripe related to each panel is placed under the labels enabling the user to
promptly recognise the displayed panel.

NEXT, PREV
They allow to scroll panel software button pages. NEXT displays the following page, PREV the previous one.

28.3.2 INSTALLATION
The following files must be in the same directory:
• VSKP.EXE: executable file for the VSKP application
• VskpConfig.xml: configuration file in xml format
• Bitmap files containing any images displayed on the pushbuttons (softkeys) and on labels; it is the responsibility of the
installing technician to place the bitmap files in this directory

The complete path (pathname) of the installation directory, containing the above files, is assigned to the WORKDIR parameter
in the [VSKP] section of the FIDIA.INI configuration file (located in the WINDOWS directory).

Example:
[VSKP]
WORKDIR=C:\FIDIA\VSKP

28.3.3 CONFIGURATION
The following markers should be inserted in the VskpConfig.xml configuration file:

<VerySoftKeyPanelConfiguration>
.......
</VerySoftKeyPanelConfiguration>
These are the markers to be inserted, respectively, at the beginning and end of the configuration file.
The other lines must be included between these two markers.

<Keys>
......
</Keys>
Opening and closing markers for the section defining the general configuration data for the VSKP application. The following
markers should be inserted in the <Keys> section:

<BringupWs32 Value="n"></BringupWs32>
If the value 1 is entered, when the software pushbutton panel is brought up by pressing the ALT+TAB keys, the FIDIA CNC user
interface is also automatically brought up.

FIDIA MDO1680 28-3

<TimedPolling Value="n"></TimedPolling>
Use the default value: 0

<WatchDogParameter Value="parname"></WatchDogParameter>
Name of the full CNC parameter used to set the watchdog. When the VSKP application is active (visible in the foreground), this
parameter is incremented two times per second; when the application is not active (e.g. when hidden), the parameter is not
incremented. In this case, for safety reasons, the PLC must force the software pushbuttons to the released state, i.e. it must set
the “Out” bit of each pushbutton to zero (see the “Out” attribute for the <Button> marker).

<DebugMode Value="n"></DebugMode>
Use the default value: 0

<SK_Delay Value="n"></SK_Delay>
Use the default value: 260

<SK_TimeTolerance Value="n"></SK_TimeTolerance>
Use the default value: 20

<HSK_Center Value="n"></HSK_Center>
Position of the centre of the horizontal softkey bar. Measured from the left-hand margin of the video, this value is expressed as
a percentage with respect to the video width.

<HSK_Extension Value="n"></HSK_Extension>
Extension of the horizontal softkey bar, as a percentage of the video width.

<VSK_Center Value="n"></VSK_Center>
Position of the centre of the vertical softkey bar. Measured from the top margin of the video, this value is expressed as a
percentage with respect to the video height.

<VSK_Extension Value="n"></VSK_Extension>
Extension of the vertical softkey bar, as a percentage of the video height.
Note: In the configuration file there are various sections with the markers *SK_Center and *SK_Extension: the values must be
entered in the last section (Current SK layout setting) because this is the only section to be considered (see example). The
other sections are used simply to suggest typical values for the main configurations (14”, 15”, 18” video).

<Panels>
.......
</Panels>
Opening and closing markers for the section defining the software pushbutton panels. The markers <Panel> should be inserted
in the <Panels> section (one for each panel).

<Panel ...attributes...>
.......
</Panel>
Opening and closing markers for each section defining a specific software pushbutton panel. In each <Panel> section, the
pushbuttons for that panel should be defined using <Button> markers. The marker <Panel> has the following attributes which
define the elements displayed in the labels box:
• Label: name of the pushbutton panel (text displayed in the label for that panel).
• Color: colour according to the RGB system in hexadecimal notation (RGB stands for red, green, blue). When the panel in
question is displayed, there is a strip of this colour above the softkey bar. Assigning a specific colour to each panel makes it
immediately recognizable by the user.
Example: Color="0xFFFF00" sets yellow as the colour, which is made up of: red=255 (FF hexadecimal), green=255 (FF
hexadecimal), blue=0.
• Bitmap: name of the bitmap file containing the image displayed in the label (the image precedes the word Label). When
preparing the image, remember that the colour 0xFF00FF (red=255, green=0, blue=255) is considered as transparent, i.e.
this colour is replaced by the background colour of the field in which the image is located. Typical image dimensions are
24x24 pixels.

<Button ...attributes...></Button>
Definition of a specific software pushbutton. The marker <Button> has the following attributes:
• TopLabel: text displayed on the upper part of the pushbutton.
• BottomLabel: text displayed on the lower part of the pushbutton.
• LitBitmap: name of the bitmap file containing the image displayed when the pushbutton is illuminated.
• OffBitmap: name of the bitmap file containing the image displayed when the pushbutton is not illuminated.

28-4 MDO1680 FIDIA

• Out: name of the full CNC parameter followed by the number of the bit containing the pushbutton state. The first bit in the
register is indicated by the number 0. The bit can assume the following states: 1=pressed; 0=released.
• In: name of the full CNC parameter followed by the number of the first bit containing the pushbutton attributes. Two bits are
used: the bit specified by “In” is the attribute for an enabled pushbutton (1=enabled; 0=disabled), while the next bit, In+1, is
the attribute for an illuminated pushbutton (1=illuminated; 0=not illuminated).
Example: If In="AUCREG 01 8", this means that in the AUCREG 01 parameter the pushbutton enabled bit is 8, while the
pushbutton illuminated bit is 9.

In order to know the pushbutton state, the PLC must read the specified bit of the “Out” parameter. To define the aspect of the
pushbutton on the video, the PLC must write the “In” parameter with the two bits containing the attributes.
The pushbutton can contain both a text and a bitmap image: in this case, the text is shown above the image. The image can
also consist of a uniform colour that represents the attribute of an illuminated or not illuminated pushbutton. To take up the
whole pushbutton, the image dimensions must be 54x46 pixels.

28.3.4 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

<VerySoftKeyPanelConfiguration>
<Keys>
<BringupWs32 Value="1"></BringupWs32>
<TimedPolling Value="0"></TimedPolling>
<WatchDogParameter Value="AUCREG 10"></WatchDogParameter>
<DebugMode Value="0"></DebugMode>
<SK_Delay Value="260"></SK_Delay>
<SK_TimeTolerance Value="20"></SK_TimeTolerance>
<!--SK layout setting for 18 inch-->
<HSK_Center Value="41"></HSK_Center>
<HSK_Extension Value="65"></HSK_Extension>
<VSK_Center Value="50"></VSK_Center>
<VSK_Extension Value="54"></VSK_Extension>
<!--SK layout setting for 15 inch-->
<HSK_Center Value="46"></HSK_Center>
<HSK_Extension Value="76"></HSK_Extension>
<VSK_Center Value="50"></VSK_Center>
<VSK_Extension Value="71"></VSK_Extension>
<!--SK layout setting for 14 inch-->
<HSK_Center Value="47"></HSK_Center>
<HSK_Extension Value="92"></HSK_Extension>
<VSK_Center Value="52"></VSK_Center>
<VSK_Extension Value="82"></VSK_Extension>
<!--Current SK layout setting-->
<HSK_Center Value="41"></HSK_Center>
<HSK_Extension Value="65"></HSK_Extension>
<VSK_Center Value="50"></VSK_Center>
<VSK_Extension Value="54"></VSK_Extension>
</Keys>

<Panels>
<Panel Label="CNC" Color="0xFF0080" Bitmap="cncPanel.bmp">
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="startLit.bmp" OffBitmap="startOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 0" In="AUCREG 01 0"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="" OffBitmap="stopOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 1" In="AUCREG 01 2"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="" OffBitmap="holdOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 7" In="AUCREG 01 14"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="releaseLit.bmp" OffBitmap="releaseOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 8" In="AUCREG 01
16"></Button>
</Panel>

<Panel Label="AXIS JOG" Color="0x80FFFF" Bitmap="jogPanel.bmp">

<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="xLit.bmp" OffBitmap="xOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 4" In="AUCREG 01 8"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="yLit.bmp" OffBitmap="yOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 5" In="AUCREG 01 10"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="zLit.bmp" OffBitmap="zOff.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 6" In="AUCREG 01 12"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="" OffBitmap="minus.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 3" In="AUCREG 01 6"></Button>
<Button TopLabel="" BottomLabel="" LitBitmap="" OffBitmap="plus.bmp" Out="AUCREG 00 2" In="AUCREG 01 4"></Button>
</Panel>
</Panels>
</VerySoftKeyPanelConfiguration>

FIDIA MDO1680 28-5

28.4 CUSTOMIZED HELP MENU
The Custom Help submenu, containing items that open customized documentation files, can be added to the WS Help menu.
The items must be defined in the [WS32_CUSTOM_HELP] section of the FIDIA.INI file. Syntax for each item:

HELPn=menu_item; pathname\filename.ext

where:

HELPn
Key word HELP followed by a numerical indicator that establishes the order in which the items appear in the Custom Help
submenu: item HELP0 is shown first, then HELP1, then HELP2, etc.

menu_item
Item to be included in the Custom Help submenu. The item must be followed by the character ; (semicolon) to separate it from
the pathname.

pathname
Full path of the documentation file (disk drive, directory and subdirectory names).

filename.ext
Name and extension of the documentation file. When the user selects an item from the Custom Help submenu, the
corresponding file is opened with the application associated with its extension. Normally, documentation files have one of the
following extensions:
.HLP Windows Help
.TXT text file, usually opened with the Windows NotePad program
.HTM .HTML web page, opened with the pre-determined web browser
® ®
.PDF opened with an Adobe Reader type program

Example:
[WS32_CUSTOM_HELP]
HELP0=IrfanView Help; C:\Programs\IrfanView\i_view32.hlp
HELP1=Dev Studio; C:\Programs\DevStudio\MSDN\BIN\License.hlp
HELP2=EditPad Lite; C:\Programs\JGsoft\EditPadLite\EditPadPro.hlp

Note:
• The name of the Help file and the names of the directories and subdirectories containing the file must not include any
spaces.
• The Custom Help submenu is shown only if items are defined in the [WS32_CUSTOM_HELP] section.
• The sequence of HELPn key words must be continuous. For example, if HELP0, HELP1, HELP2, HELP4 are defined, the
sequence is incorrect: HELP4 is not read because HELP3 is missing.

28-6 MDO1680 FIDIA

29 VARIOUS

29.1 CNC PAR BROADCASTER

This is an optional application that transmits CNC parameters through a network of CNCs.

Some terms used in the text:

• Local parameters are the pararmeters transmitted; they are mapped onto CNC parameters (e.g. the variables in the
AUCREG table) so that their respective values are available to both the user and the PLC.
• Host: each CNC connected to the network can transmit and/or receive parameters.
• Owner/listeners: each local parameter has an owner host and potential listener hosts; only the owner host for the
parameter can modify its value. When a parameter is modified by the owner, the new value is automatically transmitted
(propagated) to all the listener hosts, i.e. to all the hosts connected to the network to receive the parameter. Transmission
of a parameter is in one direction only: from owner host to listener hosts.

One host can be: an owner of parameters only, a listener of parameters only or an owner of some parameters and a listener of
others. There are no limitations on the number of local parameters, hosts or connections between parameters and hosts.

Installation:
• Unzip the CncParBroadcaster.zip file
• Execute the vcredist_x86.exe file to update the system in order to allow for operation of the executable files developed in
the Visual Studio 8 environment.

Configuration:
Edit the CncParBroadcaster.xml file described below. It should be in the same directory as that in which the program is installed.

Execution:
• Run the CncParBroadcaster.exe file
• To manage the program, use the icon in the Windows toolbar.

Installation, configuration and execution should be performed on a PC connected to the network: typically, one of the CNCs is
used.

Window description:
The application window has three areas that can be sized up or down: the parameter area, the host area and the log area.

Parameter area:
For each parameter, this shows its name, the reference counter (RC) and the current value. The reference counter contains the
number of CNCs that are currently connected to the parameter (owner host and listener hosts).

Host area:
For each host, this shows its connection status to the network (connected / not connected).

Log area:
Contains the messages from all the hosts connected, as well as from the CncParBroadcaster application. It is similar to the log
areas for other CNC applications. The CNC messages also contain the local sequence number (the same number that appears
in the LOG FILE of the CNC in question). The "From" column shows the name of the host that generated the message. When
the vertical scroll bar cursor is positioned at the bottom, autoscroll is active; each new message is displayed at the bottom of the
list and causes the automatic scrolling of previous messages.

29.1.1 CONFIGURATION
The following markers should be inserted in the CncParBroadcaster.xml configuration file:

<CncParBroadcast>
.......
</CncParBroadcast>
These are the markers to be inserted at the beginning and end, respectively, of the configuration file. The other lines must be
enclosed between these two markers.

FIDIA MDO1680 29-1

<Parameters>
.......
</Parameters>
Opening and closing markers for the section defining all the local parameters managed by the CncParBroadcaster application.

<Parameter ...attributes...>
In the <Parameters> section, for each parameter a <Parameter> marker must be inserted with the following attributes:
• Name: name of the local parameter (this is the name that will be shown in the parameter area)
• Owner: name of the owner host for the parameter.

<Hosts>
.......
</Hosts>
Opening and closing markers for the section defining the hosts. The <Host> markers are inserted in this section.

<Host ...attributes...>
.......
</Host>
Definition of a host. The <Host> marker has the following attributes:
• Name: host name (this is the name that will be shown in the host area)
• Address: host IP address

<Parameter ...attributes...>
Each host can be connected to one or more local parameters. For each host, you must specify which parameters are connected
and where they are mapped in the CNC. In the <Host> sections, for each parameter connected you must insert a <Parameter>
marker with the following attributes:
• Name: name of the local parameter (the same name already defined in the <Parameters> section)
• Mapping: name of the CNC parameter containing the local parameter value. If the CNC parameter is tabular, you must
specify the name of the table, followed by the name of the variable, separated by a space.
Example: Mapping="AUCREG 02" means variable 02 of the AUCREG tabular parameter.

Notes:
• In the <Parameters> section, you must define all the local parameters; while in each <Host> section, you should specify
only the local parameters connected to the host in question.
• The main parameter formats are: whole number, number with the decimal point, string. Each local parameter should be
mapped on CNC parameters with a compatible format.

29.1.2 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE

<CncParBroadcast>
<Parameters>
<Parameter Name="EMERGENCY" Owner="Master" />
</Parameters>
<Hosts>
<Host Name="Master" Address="10.117.254.54">
<Parameter Name="EMERGENCY" Mapping="AUCREG 00" />
</Host>

<Host Name="Slave0" Address="10.117.254.189">

<Parameter Name="EMERGENCY" Mapping="AUCREG 01" />
</Host>

<Host Name="Slave1" Address="10.117.254.95">

<Parameter Name="EMERGENCY" Mapping="AUCREG 02" />
</Host>
</Hosts>
</CncParBroadcast>

• This configuration creates a local parameter called EMERGENCY, that has the Master host as its owner.
• Master is the only host that can modify the EMERGENCY parameter.
• Master has the IP address 10.117.254.54 and maps EMERGENCY on its AUCREG 00 parameter.
• Slave0 has the IP address 10.117.254.189 and maps EMERGENCY on its AUCREG 01 parameter.
• Slave1 has the IP address 10.117.254.95 and maps EMERGENCY on its AUCREG 02 parameter.
• If AUCREG 00 changes on the Master host, the Slave0 and Slave1 hosts receive the new value in AUCREG 01 and
AUCREG 02, respectively.

29-2 MDO1680 FIDIA

Index
"
"MAINT" AREA AND "MAINT" PARAMETERS............................................................................... 1-2

2
236 CYCLE– MANAGEMENT BY AUCOL ................................................................................. 22-14

A
ACTIVATING THE DRIVES ............................................................................................................ 7-6
ACTIVE DAMPING PARAMETERS.............................................................................................. 3-26
ACTIVE TUNING........................................................................................................................... 3-34
ADDITIONAL AXIS PARAMETERS.............................................................................................. 3-21
AUCOL PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................... 7-7
AUXILIARY AXES MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES ................................................................. 6-18
AXES MANAGED BY HSA DRIVES ............................................................................................. 6-20
AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS.................................................................................................. 3-16
AXIS DIRECTION AND COUNT VERIFICATION........................................................................... 6-6
AXIS PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................... 3-2
AXIS POSITION THERMAL COMPENSATION............................................................................ 16-1

B
BASIC CONCEPTS....................................................................................................................... 24-2
BCD FUNCTIONS PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 10-1

C
CALIBRATION PARAMETERS....................................................................................................... 6-6
CHECKING AND SETTING THE SPINDLE.................................................................................... 4-1
CM10/026 OPTION ....................................................................................................................... 18-1
CNC PARAMETER SETTINGS ...................................................................................................... 7-1
COMPENSATION FOR NONLINEARITY DURING AXIS INVERSION ....................................... 11-5
COMPENSATION IN RTCP OF MECHANICALLY OFFCENTERED AXES.................................. 8-7
COPYING PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 5-1
CREATING CUSTOMIZED PAGES.............................................................................................. 28-2
CUSTOMIZATION......................................................................................................................... 24-9
CUSTOMIZED SOFT KEYS......................................................................................................... 28-1

D
DEFINITION OF AXIS NAMES ....................................................................................................... 3-3
DIAGNOSIS - MESSAGES AND DISPLAY .................................................................................... 7-6
DIAGNOSIS THROUGH THE SERCANS PROGRAM................................................................... 7-6
DIGITAL TRANSDUCER SPINDLE INSTALLATION ..................................................................... 4-8
DISPLAY I/O BOARDS ................................................................................................................... 1-5
DISPLAY ONLY ADDITIONAL AXES (DA10)............................................................................... 3-24
DOUBLE COUNT ............................................................................................................................ 6-2
DRIVE MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................................................ 6-12

FIDIA MDO1680 INDEX - I

E
ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL PARAMETERS ............................................................................ 12-1
END OF RUN PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................ 3-3
ENDAT TRANSDUCERS ................................................................................................................ 6-3
ERCI .............................................................................................................................................. 23-1
ERDIP - ERDIF.............................................................................................................................. 23-4
ERRE............................................................................................................................................. 23-6
ES10/AV* OPTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 18-1
EXAMPLE OF CALIBRATING SIEMENS DRIVES FOR AXES ................................................... 6-15
EXAMPLES ................................................................................................................................... 24-7

F
FEATURES ................................................................................................................................... 24-1
FLOW CHART............................................................................................................................... 24-9

G
GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION (GA/*) - GENERAL INFORMATION.......................................... 13-1
GANTRY AXIS INSTALLATION PROCEDURE............................................................................ 13-1
GENERAL PURPOSE COUNTS .................................................................................................. 19-1

H
HIRTH AXES INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 3-23

I
INDRAMAT AXIS DOUBLE COUNT............................................................................................... 7-3
INDRAMAT DIGITAL DRIVES INSTALLATION.............................................................................. 7-1
INIPAR.SDD FILE GENERATION .................................................................................................. 6-1
INIPAR.SET FILE ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
INSTALLATION OF THE ROTO_TMS OPTION......................................................................... 22-14
INSTALLING THE TMSR100 LASER DEVICE........................................................................... 22-16

L
LOADING THE CNC SOFTWARE.................................................................................................. 1-1
LOCATION AND BACKUP OF CONFIGURATION FILES ............................................................. 1-5
LOCKING LOGIC PARAMETERS .................................................................................................. 3-9
LOOK AHEAD PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 3-28
LOOK-AHEAD VERSION 2 PARAMETERS................................................................................. 3-30

M
MAINT PARAMETER BACK-UP................................................................................................... 6-14
MEASUREMENTS ON THE DRIVES ............................................................................................. 7-6
MEASURING UNITS ....................................................................................................................... 1-4

N
NOTES ON CYCLES 227 AND 228............................................................................................ 22-10

O
ON/OFF FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................... 22-9

II - INDEX MDO1680 FIDIA

P
PLP PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS AND DEFINITIONS ............................................................ 5-1
POTENTIOMETRE PARAMETERS.............................................................................................. 12-2
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ....................................................................................................... 1-6
PRINTOUT .................................................................................................................................... 23-8
PROCEDURE FOR FIRST INSTALLATION................................................................................... 6-6

R
REEXECUTING THE INIPAR.SET FILE......................................................................................... 1-5
ROTATION AND/OR TRANSLATION PARAMETERS................................................................. 3-37
RTCP OPTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................... 8-1
RTCP OPTION PARAMETERS (ES/TR) ........................................................................................ 8-2
RTCP PIVOT THERMAL COMPENSATION ................................................................................ 16-2

S
SAMPLING PARAMETERS .......................................................................................................... 3-25
SAVE AND RESTORE OF THE MACHINE PARAMETERS .......................................................... 1-4
SCREW CORRECTION INSTALLATION - GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................... 11-1
SECOND LIMIT OF TORQUE/POWER MOMENT....................................................................... 6-20
SELECTING AUTOMATIC MODE .................................................................................................. 1-6
SET OF PARAMETERS.................................................................................................................. 6-9
SETTING THE AXIS PARAMETERS IN THE INIPAR.SET FILE ................................................... 6-1
SETTING THE DRIVE PARAMETERS........................................................................................... 7-4
SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL AXES - POSITION LOOP .......................................................... 3-1
SETTING THE MACHINE TOOL PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 1-1
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................... 1-1
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PARAMETERS.............................................................................. 22-7
SPEED PARAMETERS................................................................................................................... 3-5
SPINDLE DOUBLE COUNT.......................................................................................................... 6-19
SPINDLE MANAGED VIA DIGITAL DRIVES................................................................................ 6-18
SPINDLE PARAMETERS ............................................................................................................... 4-1

T
TANDEM MOTOR INSTALLATION (TA/*) - GENERAL INFORMATION ..................................... 14-1
TANDEM MOTOR PARAMETERS ............................................................................................... 14-1
THERMAL COMPENSATION INSTALLATION (IA/CT) - GENERAL INFORMATION................. 16-1
TMS LASER DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS........................................................................................ 22-13
TMS LASER FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................................... 22-10

U
USER INTERFACE ....................................................................................................................... 24-3

V
VIRTUAL AXIS INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 3-22

Z
ZERO CYCLE.................................................................................................................................. 7-7
ZERO CYCLE FOR SPINDLES WITHOUT INDEXES ................................................................. 4-11
ZERO CYCLE PARAMETERS...................................................................................................... 3-12

FIDIA MDO1680 INDEX - III

IV - INDEX MDO1680 FIDIA